Programming Manual

NECIC-AP-002
ISSUE 1.0
NEC Infrontia Corporation reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at any
time without notice.

NEC Infrontia Corporation has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The
information contained herein is the property of NEC Infrontia Corporation and shall not be reproduced
without prior written approval of NEC Infrontia Corporation

Dterm is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. UNIVERGE is a trademark of NEC Corporation.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Copyright 2008

NEC Infrontia Corporation Japan

Printed in Japan
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
___________________________________________________________________________________

Chapter 1 Introduction
Section 1 Before You Start Programming ......................................................... 1-1

Section 2 How to Use This Manual .................................................................... 1-1

Section 3 How to Enter Programming Mode ..................................................... 1-2

Section 4 How to Exit Programming Mode ....................................................... 1-3

Section 5 Using Keys to Move Around in the Programs ................................. 1-4

Section 6 Programming Names and Text Messages ....................................... 1-5

Section 7 Using Softkeys For Programming .................................................... 1-6

Section 8 What the Softkey Display Prompts Mean ......................................... 1-7

Section 9 System Number Plan/Capacities ....................................................... 1-8

Chapter 2 Programming the UNIVERGE SV8100

Section 1 Programming Your System ............................................................... 2-1

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-01 : Time and Date ........................................................................... 2-3
10-02 : Location Setup ........................................................................... 2-4
10-03 : ETU Setup ................................................................................. 2-5
10-04 : Music On Hold Setup ............................................................... 2-16
10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup ................................................. 2-18
10-07 : Conversation Recording Resource .......................................... 2-19
10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup ................................................................... 2-20
10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup .......................................... 2-21
10-12 : CD-CP00 Network Setup ......................................................... 2-22
10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup ............................................................ 2-25

___________________________________________________________________________________

Programming Manual i
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________

10-14 : Managed Network Setup ......................................................... 2-26

10-15 : Client Information Setup .......................................................... 2-27
10-16 : Option Information Setup ........................................................ 2-28
10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup ......................................................... 2-32
10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup ..................................................... 2-33
10-19 : VoIP DSP Resource Selection ................................................ 2-34
10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment ......................................... 2-35
10-21 : CD-CP00 Hardware Setup ...................................................... 2-37
10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup .......................................... 2-38
10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup ........................................................... 2-39
10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup ................................................... 2-41
10-26 : IP System Operation Setup ..................................................... 2-42
10-27 : H.323 System Interconnection with Application Setup ............ 2-43
10-28 : SIP System Information Setup ................................................ 2-44
10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup .................................................. 2-46
10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup ..................................... 2-49
10-31 : Networking Keep Alive Setup .................................................. 2-50
10-32 : Networking Maximum PRI Channel Setup .............................. 2-52
10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup .......................... 2-53
10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup ............................... 2-55
10-37 : UPnP Setup ............................................................................. 2-56
10-38 : BGM Resource Setup ............................................................. 2-57
10-39 : Fractional Setup ...................................................................... 2-58
10-40 : IP Trunk Availability ................................................................. 2-59
10-41 : General Purpose Contact Detector Setup ............................... 2-60
10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting ................................................ 2-61
10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup ........................................................... 2-62
10-46 : DT700 Server Information Setup ............................................. 2-63
10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup ............................ 2-65
10-48 : License Activation ................................................................... 2-66
10-49 : License File Activation ............................................................. 2-67
10-50 : License Information ................................................................. 2-68

___________________________________________________________________________________
ii Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0
___________________________________________________________________________________

10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of CD-PRTA ................................................. 2-69

10-52 : Free/Demo License Information .............................................. 2-70
10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package ................................ 2-71
10-55 : Package Network Setup .......................................................... 2-72
10-56 : XML Portal IP Phone ............................................................... 2-74

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-01 : System Numbering .................................................................. 2-75
11-02 : Extension Numbering .............................................................. 2-83
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering ................................................... 2-85
11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering ....................................................... 2-87
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers ........................................... 2-88
11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number .......................................................... 2-89
11-09 : Trunk Access Code ................................................................. 2-90
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) ...................... 2-92
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) .................... 2-95
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) ............................... 2-99
11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD) .............................................. 2-103
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) .............................................. 2-105
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) ..... 2-107
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup ........................................... 2-109
11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number ...................................................... 2-111
11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup .............................. 2-112
11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table ................................................ 2-113

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup ................................................... 2-115
12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns .......................................... 2-116
12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching ............................................ 2-118
12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching ............................................ 2-120
12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions ...................... 2-121
12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks ............................ 2-122
12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode ...................................................... 2-123

___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual iii
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________

12-08 : Night Mode Service Range ................................................... 2-124

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-01 : Speed Dialing Option Setup .................................................. 2-125
13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins ..................................................... 2-126
13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions ................. 2-127
13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name ......................................... 2-128
13-05 : Speed Dial Trunk Group ........................................................ 2-130
13-07 : Telephone Book Dial Number and Name .............................. 2-131
13-08 : Telephone Book System Name ............................................. 2-132
13-09 : Telephone Book Group Name ............................................... 2-133
13-10 : Telephone Book Routing ....................................................... 2-134

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup ........................................................ 2-135
14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup ...................................................... 2-142
14-04 : Behind PBX Setup ................................................................. 2-145
14-05 : Trunk Group .......................................................................... 2-146
14-06 : Trunk Group Routing ............................................................. 2-147
14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup ...................................................... 2-149
14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks .......................................... 2-151
14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks .................... 2-152
14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk ............................................................. 2-153
14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk ....................................... 2-154
14-13 : CCIS System Route ID .......................................................... 2-155
14-14 : CCIS Trunk CIC Assignment ................................................. 2-156
14-15 : ISDN Call Forward Method ................................................... 2-157
14-16 : ISDN Call Transfer Method ................................................... 2-158

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup .................................................. 2-159
15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup .................................. 2-161
15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup .............................. 2-169
15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup ............................. 2-172

___________________________________________________________________________________
iv Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0
___________________________________________________________________________________

15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions ......................................... 2-177

15-07 : Programmable Function Keys ............................................... 2-178
15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup ........................ 2-188
15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment ....................................... 2-190
15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup .............. 2-191
15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment ......................... 2-193
15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions ............. 2-194
15-13 : Loop Keys .............................................................................. 2-195
15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys ........................................... 2-196
15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension ..................................... 2-197
15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication ............................................ 2-198
15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options .............................. 2-199
15-19 : System Telephone Book Setup for Extension ....................... 2-200
15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment .......................................... 2-201
15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup ......................................................... 2-202

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup .................................... 2-203
16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions ..................... 2-206
16-03 : Secondary Department Group ............................................... 2-207
16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups ....................... 2-208

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-01 : System Options ..................................................................... 2-209
20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones .............................. 2-211
20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones ......................... 2-214
20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions .................................. 2-216
20-05 : Charging Cost Service ........................................................... 2-217
20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions ............................................. 2-218
20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) ..................... 2-219
20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) ................. 2-222
20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) ................. 2-225
20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) ........................... 2-227

___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual v
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________

20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) ................. 2-229

20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) ................ 2-232
20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) .............. 2-233
20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M ................................ 2-238
20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup ................................................................... 2-240
20-16 : Selectable Display Messages ............................................... 2-242
20-17 : Operator Extension ............................................................... 2-245
20-18 : Service Tone Timers ............................................................. 2-246
20-19 : System Options for Caller ID ................................................. 2-248
20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data ................................. 2-250
20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation ................................. 2-251
20-22 : System Options for Wireless – DECT Service ..................... 2-252
20-23 : System Options for CTI ......................................................... 2-253
20-25 : ISDN Options ........................................................................ 2-254
20-26 : Multiplier for Charging Cost ................................................... 2-256
20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation ................................................. 2-257
20-29 : Timer Class for Extension ..................................................... 2-258
20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks .......................................................... 2-259
20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment ............................................. 2-260
20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup ......................................... 2-264
20-35 : Extension’s Operator Setting ................................................. 2-266
20-36 : Trunk’s Operator Setting ....................................................... 2-267
20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup .......................................... 2-268
20-38 : Operator Group Setting ......................................................... 2-269

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls ....................................... 2-271
21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions ..................................... 2-275
21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks ............................................ 2-276
21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions ..................................... 2-277
21-05 : Toll Restriction Class ............................................................. 2-278
21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup .......................................... 2-281
21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup ............................. 2-283

___________________________________________________________________________________
vi Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0
___________________________________________________________________________________

21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup ................................................................. 2-284

21-09 : Dial Block Setup .................................................................... 2-285
21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension ........................... 2-286
21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment ........................... 2-287
21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks ....................... 2-288
21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions ................. 2-289
21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup .............................. 2-290
21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions ..................... 2-291
21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networks ........................................ 2-292
21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk ........... 2-293
21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension 2-294
21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension .... 2-295
21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting) ....... 2-296
21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication – Call Back Settings ........... 2-297
21-24 : Forced Access Dial Data ....................................................... 2-298

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls ....................................... 2-299
22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup .................................................... 2-301
22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range ........................................................ 2-303
22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment ........................ 2-305
22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment ............................... 2-306
22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode ................................................. 2-307
22-07 : DIL Assignment ..................................................................... 2-308
22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination ............................................ 2-309
22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup ............................................................ 2-310
22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup ................................................. 2-312
22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion ..................................... 2-314
22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group ...................................................... 2-318
22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment ............... 2-320
22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG ............................................. 2-321
22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group ..................... 2-323
22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup ................................. 2-325

___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual vii
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________

22-17 : Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern ......... 2-326
22-18 : Private Call Assignment Setup .............................................. 2-327
22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup ....................................... 2-328

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

23-02 : Call Pickup Groups ................................................................ 2-329
23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer ............................................. 2-330
23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions ..................... 2-332

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-01 : System Options for Hold ....................................................... 2-333
24-02 : System Options for Transfer ................................................. 2-335
24-03 : Park Group ............................................................................ 2-337
24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup ................. 2-338
24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup ............................ 2-339
24-06 : Fixed Call Forwarding ........................................................... 2-340
24-07 : Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise ............................................ 2-341
24-08 : Call Forward for Centrex ....................................................... 2-342
24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings .................................................... 2-343

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup ......................................... 2-345
25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message ....................................................... 2-346
25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing ......... 2-347
25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy ........ 2-348
25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment ................................. 2-349
25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup ......................... 2-350
25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA ............................................... 2-352
25-08 : DISA User ID Setup .............................................................. 2-354
25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users ........................................... 2-355
25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA .............................................. 2-356
25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class ................................................... 2-357
25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA ............................... 2-358
25-13 : System Option for DISA ........................................................ 2-359

___________________________________________________________________________________
viii Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0
___________________________________________________________________________________

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service ....................................... 2-361
26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR .......................................... 2-363
26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments ............................................................. 2-365
26-04 : ARS Class of Service ............................................................ 2-367
26-05 : LCR Carrier Table ................................................................. 2-368
26-06 : LCR Authorisation Code Table .............................................. 2-369
26-07 : LCR Cost Centre Code Table ................................................ 2-370
26-08 : LCR Manual Override Access Code Table ............................ 2-371
26-09 : LCR Manual Override Exemption Table ................................ 2-372
26-11 : Transit Network ID Table ....................................................... 2-373
26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS .......................... 2-374

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode .............................................. 2-375
30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment .................................... 2-376
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment .............................................. 2-377
30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer ............................................. 2-385
30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table ..................................................... 2-386
30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup ........................................... 2-388

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging ......................... 2-389
31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment ........................................ 2-391
31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings ............................................. 2-392
31-04 : External Paging Zone Group ................................................. 2-395
31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page ............................... 2-396
31-06 : External Speaker Control ...................................................... 2-397
31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments ............................................ 2-399
31-08 : BGM on External Paging ....................................................... 2-400

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup ......................................................... 2-401
32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment ................................................... 2-402

___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual ix
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________

32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup ........................................................... 2-403

32-04 : Door Box Name Setup .......................................................... 2-404

Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup

33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup ............................................................. 2-405
33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group .............................................. 2-406

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup ..................................................... 2-407
34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service .............................................. 2-409
34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines ............................... 2-410
34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class ...................................... 2-411
34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction ......................................... 2-412
34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line ......................................... 2-413
34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer ............................................................... 2-414
34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines ................................ 2-415
34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options .................................................... 2-416

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-01 : SMDR Options ...................................................................... 2-419
35-02 : SMDR Output Options ........................................................... 2-421
35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group .............................. 2-424
35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups ................... 2-425
35-05 : Account Code Setup ............................................................. 2-426
35-06 : Verified Account Code Table ................................................. 2-428

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup .......................................................... 2-429
40-04 : Live Recording Setup ............................................................ 2-430
40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS ...................... 2-431
40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option .................................... 2-432
40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment ............................................ 2-434
40-12 : 1 Digit Access Setup ............................................................. 2-435

___________________________________________________________________________________
x Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0
___________________________________________________________________________________

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-01 : System Options for ACD ....................................................... 2-437
41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments ..................................... 2-438
41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group ................ 2-439
41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor .......................................................... 2-441
41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules ................................................. 2-442
41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules .......................................................... 2-443
41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup ................................................ 2-444
41-08 : ACD Overflow Options .......................................................... 2-445
41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting .................................................. 2-447
41-10 : ACI Delay Announcement ..................................................... 2-448
41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement .................................................... 2-449
41-12 : Night Announcement Setup ................................................... 2-451
41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement .................. 2-452
41-14 : ACD Options Setup ............................................................... 2-453
41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information .............................................. 2-456
41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow ....................................................... 2-458
41-17 : ACD Login Mode Setup ......................................................... 2-459
41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup ............................................ 2-460
41-19 : ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement .................................. 2-462
41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings ................................................ 2-464

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel ............................................. 2-467
42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup ................................................ 2-468
42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) .................................. 2-469
42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes .................................... 2-471
42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer ..................................................... 2-472
42-06 : PMS Service Setting .............................................................. 2-473
42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table .............................. 2-474

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route .......................................... 2-475

___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual xi
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________

44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access ........................ 2-476

44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table ............................................... 2-478
44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule ........................... 2-480
44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table ............................................................... 2-481
44-06 : Additional Dial Table ............................................................. 2-483
44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access ..................................... 2-484
44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route ........................................... 2-486
44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route ....................................... 2-488
44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route ....................................... 2-489

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options .............................................. 2-491
45-02 : NSL Option Setup ................................................................. 2-493
45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment .......................................... 2-494
45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits ... 2-495

Program 47 : InMail
47-01 : VM8000 InMail System Options ............................................ 2-497
47-02 : VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox Options ............................... 2-505
47-03 : VM8000 InMail Group Mailbox Options ................................. 2-511
47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options ....................................... 2-513
47-07 : VM8000 InMail Routing Mailbox Options .............................. 2-518
47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options ................................................ 2-520
47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options ........................................... 2-522
47-10 : VM8000 InMail Trunk Options ............................................... 2-524
47-11 : VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options .................................. 2-526
47-12 : VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules ........................................ 2-530
47-13 : VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables ........................................ 2-539
47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options ........................................ 2-546
47-16 : InMail Language License ...................................................... 2-547
47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options .................................... 2-549
47-18 : VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup ................................................. 2-550
47-19 : VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup ................................................. 2-551

___________________________________________________________________________________
xii Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0
___________________________________________________________________________________

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

50-01 : CCIS System Setting ............................................................. 2-553
50-02 : Connecting System Settings ................................................. 2-554
50-03 : CCIS Destination System Settings ........................................ 2-556
50-04 : CCIS Office Code Assignment .............................................. 2-557
50-05 : CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Counter ...................... 2-558
50-06 : CCIS Feature Availability ....................................................... 2-559
50-07 : CCIS Centralized Billing Center Office .................................. 2-560
50-08 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Group Assignment .............. 2-561
50-09 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Extension Number
Assignment ........................................................................... 2-562
50-10 : CCIS Centralized BLF Interval Time Assignment .................. 2-564
50-11 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Switching Sending Group
Assignment ........................................................................... 2-565
50-12 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Mode to System Mode
Assignment ........................................................................... 2-566
50-13 : CCIS Centralized Response Timeout Assignment ................ 2-567
50-14 : CCIS Intercom Digits for Caller ID Call Return ...................... 2-568
50-15 : CCIS over IP Basic Information Setting ................................. 2-569

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-01 : NetLink System Property Setting ........................................... 2-571
51-02 : NetLink System Individual Setting ......................................... 2-573
51-03 : NetLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting ...................... 2-575
51-04 : IP Address Setting of Top Priority Primary System of
NetLink .................................................................................. 2-576
51-05 : NetLink Timer Settings .......................................................... 2-577
51-06 : NetLink Primary Automatic Integration Setting ...................... 2-579
51-07 : NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification Setting ............... 2-580
51-08 : Primary NetLink Setting ......................................................... 2-581
51-09 : NetLink Communication Port Settings ................................... 2-582
51-10 : Virtual Slot Setting ................................................................. 2-584
51-11 : NetLink System Information .................................................. 2-585
51-12 : Primary System Information .................................................. 2-586

___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual xiii
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________

51-13 : NetLink Options ..................................................................... 2-587

51-14 : NetLink System Control ......................................................... 2-588
51-15 : Demonstration Setting ........................................................... 2-589
51-16 : NetLink System Data Replication Mode Setting .................... 2-590

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-01 : Service Tone Setup ............................................................... 2-593
80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup .................................................. 2-599
80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ....................................... 2-601
80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System ...................................... 2-604
80-06 : Reference Impedance Setup ................................................. 2-605
80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup ..................... 2-606
80-09 : Short Ring Setup ................................................................... 2-607

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-01 : COT Initial Data Setup .......................................................... 2-611
81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup ....................................................... 2-614
81-03 : ODT Initial Data Setup .......................................................... 2-616
81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup .................... 2-618
81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port ........................... 2-621
81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup ........................................................... 2-622
81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting .................................... 2-627

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone .............................................................. 2-631
82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup .......................................... 2-633
82-04 : LCA Initial Data Setup ........................................................... 2-635
82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port ......................... 2-637
82-09 : LCA CODEC Filter Data Setup ............................................. 2-638
82-14 : Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line Telephone ........ 2-641

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup ................................... 2-643
84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup ............................ 2-647
84-03 : IP Phone Information Basic Setup ........................................ 2-649

___________________________________________________________________________________
xiv Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0
___________________________________________________________________________________

84-07 : Firmware Download Setup .................................................... 2-651

84-08 : Firmware Name Setup ........................................................... 2-652
84-09 : VLAN Setup ........................................................................... 2-653
84-10 : ToS Setup .............................................................................. 2-654
84-11 : Dterm ® IP CODEC Information Basic Setup .......................... 2-656
84-12 : Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup ....................... 2-662
84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup ......................... 2-667
84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup ....................................... 2-673
84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup ...................................... 2-675
84-16 : VoIP Limiter Control Gain Setup ........................................... 2-676
84-17 : IPL Echo Canceller Control Setup (IN Level) ........................ 2-677
84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup ................... 2-678
84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup ................................. 2-684
84-21 : CCIS over IP CODEC Information Basic Setup .................... 2-685
84-22 : DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup ............................. 2-689
84-23 : DT700 Multiline Basic Information Setup .............................. 2-690
84-24 : DT700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup ................ 2-692
84-25 : NetLink CODEC Information Basic Setup ............................. 2-697
84-26 : IPL Basic Setup ..................................................................... 2-701
84-27 : IPL Basic Setup ..................................................................... 2-703
84-28 : DT700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup ................................. 2-705
84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup ................. 2-706
90-01 : Installation Date ..................................................................... 2-707
90-02 : Programming Password Setup .............................................. 2-708
90-03 : Save Data .............................................................................. 2-710
90-04 : Load Data .............................................................................. 2-711
90-05 : Slot Control ............................................................................ 2-712
90-06 : Trunk Control ......................................................................... 2-713
90-07 : Station Control ....................................................................... 2-714
90-08 : System Reset ........................................................................ 2-715
90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup .................................... 2-716
90-10 : System Alarm Setup .............................................................. 2-717

___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual xv
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100
___________________________________________________________________________________

90-11 : System Alarm Report ............................................................ 2-726

90-12 : System Alarm Output ............................................................ 2-728
90-13 : System Information Output .................................................... 2-729
90-16 : Main Software Information .................................................... 2-730
90-17 : Firmware Information ............................................................ 2-731
90-19 : Dial Block Release ................................................................ 2-732
90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup ...................................................... 2-733
90-21 : Traffic Report Output ............................................................. 2-735
90-22 : Terminal Version information ................................................ 2-736
90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones ................................. 2-737
90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup ...................... 2-738
90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup .................................... 2-739
90-26 : Program Access Level Setup ................................................ 2-740
90-28 : User Programming Password Setup ..................................... 2-741
90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet ..................................................... 2-742
90-34 : Firmware Information ............................................................ 2-743
90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup ......................................... 2-744
90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting .............................................. 2-745
90-38 : UserPro Data Level Setup ..................................................... 2-747
90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset ................................................ 2-749
90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data ...................... 2-750
90-42 : DT700 Multiline Terminal Version Information ...................... 2-751
90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DT700 ..................................... 2-752
90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface .......................... 2-753
90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone ......... 2-754
90-48 : Button Kit Information of Multiline Telephone ........................ 2-755
90-49 : Protection Mode Setup for Multiline Telephone .................... 2-756
90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup ................................................. 2-757
90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange ............................... 2-758
90-52 : System Alarm Save ............................................................... 2-760
90-53 : System Alarm Clear .............................................................. 2-761
90-55 : Free License Select ............................................................... 2-762

___________________________________________________________________________________
xvi Table of Contents
UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0
___________________________________________________________________________________

90-56 : NTP Setup ............................................................................. 2-763

90-57 : Backup Recovery Data .......................................................... 2-764
90-58 : Restore Recovery Data ......................................................... 2-765
90-59 : Delete Recovery Data ........................................................... 2-766
90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information ......................................... 2-767
90-61 : Manual Slot Install ................................................................. 2-768
90-63 : DT700 Control ....................................................................... 2-769
92-01 : Copy Program ....................................................................... 2-771
92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers ............................................... 2-775
92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number ............................................. 2-776
92-04 : Extension Data Swap ............................................................ 2-777
92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password ........................................... 2-780
92-06 : Fill Command ........................................................................ 2-781
92-07 : Delete Command ................................................................... 2-783

___________________________________________________________________________________
Programming Manual xvii
 LIST OF TABLES
___________________________________________________________________________________

Table 1-1 Keys for Entering Data ...................................................................................... 1-4

Table 1-2 Keys for Entering Names .................................................................................. 1-5

Table 1-3 Softkey Display Prompts ................................................................................... 1-7

Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities ....................................................................... 1-8

Table 2-1 Programming Modes ......................................................................................... 2-1

Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings ............................................................... 2-77

Table 2-3 Lamp Cycle On/Off Timing Pattern ............................................................... 2-168

Table 2-4 Program 15-02 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns ................................ 2-168

Table 2-5 Program 15-08 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns ................................ 2-189

Table 2-6 Ringing Cycles .............................................................................................. 2-241

Table 2-7 Program 22-03 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns ................................ 2-303

Table 2-8 LED Patterns for DSS Console ..................................................................... 2-387

Table 2-9 47-02-16 Default Table .................................................................................. 2-509

Table 2-10 47-06-14 Default Table .................................................................................. 2-517

Table 2-11 47-07-03 Default Table .............................................................................. 2-519

Table 2-12 47-10-03 Default Table .................................................................................. 2-525

Table 2-13 47-16-01 Default Table .................................................................................. 2-548

Table 2-14 Basic Tones ................................................................................................... 2-594

Table 2-15 Frequency 1/2 Table ..................................................................................... 2-607

Table 2-16 Ring Cycle Table ........................................................................................... 2-608

Table 2-17 Default Table ................................................................................................. 2-609

Table 2-18 Description of Alarm ...................................................................................... 2-717

___________________________________________________________________________________

Programming Manual xviii

Introduction 1
SECTION 1 BEFORE YOU START PROGRAMMING

Before customizing your system be sure to read this chapter

Introduction
first.

This chapter provides you with detailed information about the system
programs. By changing a program, you change the way the feature
associated with that program works. In this chapter, you find out about
each program, the features that the program affects and how to enter the
program data into system memory.

SECTION 2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This section lists each program in numerical order. For example, Program
10-01 is at the beginning of the section and Program 92-01 is at the end.
The information on each program is subdivided into the following
headings:

Description describes what the program options control. The Default

Settings for each program are also included. When you first install the
system, it uses the Default Setting for all programs. Along with the
Description are the Conditions which describe any limits or special
considerations that may apply to the program.

The reverse type (white on black) just beneath the Description heading is
the program access level. You can only use the program if your access
level meets or exceeds the level the program requires. Refer to Section 3
How to Enter Programming Mode on page 1-2 for a list of the system
access levels and passwords.

Programming Manual 1-1

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Feature Cross Reference provides you with a table of all the features affected by the
program. You will want to keep the referenced features in mind when you change a
program. Customizing a feature may have an effect on another feature that you did
not intend.

Telephone Programming Instructions shows how to enter the program data into
system memory. For example:

1. Enter the programming mode.

2. 15-07-01

15-07-01 TEL
KY01 = *01
← →
tells you to enter the programming mode, dial 150701 from the telephone dial
pad. After you do, you will see the message “15-07-01 TEL” on the first line of
the telephone display. This indicates the program number (15-07), item number
(01), and that the options are being set for the extension . The second row of the
display “KY01 = 01” indicates that Key 01 is being programmed with the entry
of 01. The third row allows you to move the cursor to the left or right,
depending on which arrow is pressed. To learn how to enter the programming
mode, refer to Section 3 How to Enter Programming Mode below.

SECTION 3 HOW TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE

To enter programming mode:

1. Go to any working display telephone.
In a newly installed system, use extension (port 1).

2. Do not lift the handset.

3. Press Speaker.

4. # # .

Password

5. Dial the system password + Transfer.

Refer to the following table for the default system passwords. To change the
passwords, use 90-02 : Programming Password Setup.

1-2 Introduction
UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

User
Password Level Programs at this Level
Name

12345678 tech 2 (IN) Installation (IN):

All programs in this section not listed below for SA and
SB

0000 ADMIN1 3 (SA) System Administrator – Level 1 (SA):

10-01, 10-02, 10-12, 10-13, 10-14, 10-15, 10-16, 10-17,
10-18, 10-22, 12-02, 12-03, 12-04, 15-01, 15-07, 15-09,
15-10, 15-11, 20-16, 21-07, 21-14, 22-04, 22-11, 25-08,
30-03, 32-02, 40-02, 41-02, 41-03, 41-04, 41-05, 41-06,
41-07, 41-08, 41-09, 41-10, 41-11, 41-12, 41-13, 41-14,
41-15, 41-16, 41-17, 41-18, 90-03, 90-04, 90-06, 90-07,
90-18, 90-19

9999 ADMIN2 4 (SB) System Administrator – Level 2 (SB):

13-04, 13-05, 13-06

SECTION 4 HOW TO EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

To-exit the programming mode:

When you are done programming, you must be out of a program option to exit
(pressing the Answer key will exit the program option).

1. Press Answer key to exit the program options, if needed.

Program Mode
Base Service OP1 OP2

2. Press Speaker. If changes were to the system programming, "Saving System

Data" is displayed.

3. The display shows "Complete Data Save" when completed and exits the
telephone to an idle mode.
To save a customer’s database, a blank USB Drive is required. Insert the USB Drive into
the CD-CP00 and, using Program 90-03, save the software to the USB Drive. (Program
90-04 is used to reload the customer data if necessary.) Note that a USB Drive can only
hold one customer database. Each database to be saved requires a separate drive.

Programming Manual 1-3

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

SECTION 5 USING KEYS TO MOVE AROUND IN THE PROGRAMS

Once you enter the programming mode, use the keys in the following chart to enter
data, edit data and move around in the menus.

Table 1-1 Keys for Entering Data

Keys for Entering Data

Use this key... When you want to...

0~9 and Enter data into a program.

Transfer Complete the programming step you just made (e.g., pressing Enter
on a PC keyboard). When a program entry displays, press Transfer
to bypass the entry without changing it.
Recall Delete the entry to the left (e.g., pressing Backspace on a PC
keyboard).
Hold Delete or clear all characters to the right of the cursor.
Answer Exit one step at a time from the program window currently being
viewed.
For example, if programming item 5 in 15-03, pressing Answer
allows you to enter a new option in program 15-03. Pressing Answer
again allows you to select a new program in the 15-XX series.
Pressing Answer a third time allows you to enter a new program
beginning with 1. Pressing Answer one last time brings you to the
beginning program display, allowing you to enter any program
number.
MIC Switch between the different input data fields by pressing MIC. The
cursor moves up to the top row of the display. Pressing MIC again
moves the cursor back to the middle row.
LINE KEYS Use pre-programmed settings to help with the program entry. These
settings vary between programs from LINE 1 = 0 (off) and LINE 2 = 1
(on) to preset values for timers where LINE 1 = 5, LINE 2 = 10, LINE
3 = 15, etc.
For programs with this option, the line key, which currently matches
the programmed setting, lights steady.
The display can also indicate Softkey, which will allow you to select
the values as well (-1 and +1 will step through these pre-programmed
settings.)
LINE KEY 1 Program a pause into a Speed Dialing bin.
LINE KEY 2 Program a recall/flash into a Speed Dialing bin.
LINE KEY 3 Program an @ into a Speed Dialing bin.

1-4 Introduction
UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Table 1-1 Keys for Entering Data (Continued)

Keys for Entering Data

Use this key... When you want to...

VOL Scroll backward through a list of entry numbers (e.g., from extension
etc.) or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit Table).
If you enter data and then press this key, the system accepts the data
before scrolling forward.
VOL Scroll forward through a list of entry numbers (e.g., from extension
etc.) or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit Table).
If you enter data and then press this key, the system accepts the data
before scrolling backward.

SECTION 6 PROGRAMMING NAMES AND TEXT MESSAGES

Several programs (e.g., Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages) require you
to enter text. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the
keypad digits, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second
character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press the key 2 three times. Press the key
six times to display the lower case letter. The name can be up to 12 digits long.

Table 1-2 Keys for Entering Names

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .

1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } Æ ¨ Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó

2 Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.

3 Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4 Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5 Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6 Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7 Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
8 Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
9 Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü α ε θ

Programming Manual 1-5

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Table 1-2 Keys for Entering Names

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .

Enter characters:
+ , - . / : ; < = > ? B E σ S ∞ ¢ £
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same
key are needed – ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In
system programming mode, use the right arrow Softkey
instead to accept and/or add a space.)
Conf Clear the character entry one character at a time.
Hold Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to
the right.

SECTION 7 USING SOFTKEYS FOR PROGRAMMING

Each UNIVERGE SV8100 display telephone provides interactive Softkeys for intuitive
feature access. The options for these keys will automatically change depending on
where you are in the system programming. Simply press the Softkey located below
the option you wish and the display will change accordingly.

_
Program Mode
Base Service OP1 OP2

Pressing the VOLUME or VOLUME will scroll between the menus.

_
Program Mode
CCIS Hard Mtnance

1-6 Introduction
UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

SECTION 8 WHAT THE SOFTKEY DISPLAY PROMPTS MEAN

When using a display telephone in programming mode, various Softkey options are
displayed. These keys will allow you to easily select, scan, or move through the
programs.

Table 1-3 Softkey Display Prompts

Softkey Display Prompts

If you press this

The system will. . .
Softkey . . .

back Go back one step in the program display.

You can press VOLUME or VOLUME to scroll forward or
backward through a list of programs.

↑ Scroll down through the available programs.

↓ Scroll up through the available programs.

select Select the currently displayed program.

← Move the cursor to the left.

→ Move the cursor to the right.

-1 Move back through the available program options.

+1 Move forward through the available program options.

Programming Manual 1-7

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

SECTION 9 SYSTEM NUMBER PLAN/CAPACITIES

The following table provides the capacities for the UNIVERGE SV8100 system.

Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities

System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type Number Plan/Capacities

System

Analog Caller ID Detector (detected by DSP) 32/64 channels

Classes of Service 15

Day/Night Mode Numbers 8

Day/Night Service Patterns 32

Dial Tone Detector 64

DTMF Receiver

Toll Restriction Classes 15

Verifiable Account Code Table 2000

Trunk

Trunk Port Number 200

Trunk Ports (Total): 200

Analog Trunks 176
BRI Trunk Ports 176
T1/PRI Trunk Ports 200
E&M Analog Trunk Ports 44
DID Analog Trunk Ports 88
VoIP Trunk Ports 200

DID Translation Tables 20

DID Translation Table Entries 2000

DISA:
Classes of Service 15
Users 15

Ring Groups 100

Tie Line Classes of Service 15

Tie Line Toll Restriction Classes 15

Trunk Access Maps 200

Trunk Group Numbers 100

Trunk Routes 100

1-8 Introduction
UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued)

System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type Number Plan/Capacities

Extension

Telephone Extension Ports 512

Multiline Terminals 256
Single Line Phones/Analog Devices 256
VoIP Extensions 512
SIP DECT Wireless 504

DLCA:
Physical Ports 01~16

LCA:
Physical Ports 01~16

Telephone Extension Number Range 1~89999999*

(*Extension cannot start with 0 or 9)

Virtual Extension Ports 256

Virtual Extension Number Range 1~89999999*

(*Extension cannot start with 0 or 9)

PGD(2)-U10 ADP 56

ADA (Recording Jack) Adapters 240

UNIVERGE SV8100 Wireless – SIP DECT Access Points Unlimited

Door Boxes 8

Door Box Numbers 1~8

DSS Consoles Numbers:

60 Button DSS Console 32

Operator Access Number 0 (Default)

Operator Extension 15

Ringdown Assignments 512

SLT Adapters 16

HF-R Adapters 240

Programming Manual 1-9

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued)

System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type Number Plan/Capacities

Speed Dialing

Speed Dialing Groups 64

Speed Dialing Bins 0~1999

Speed Dialing Table-Common 1000

ACD

ACD Groups 64

ACD Agent Extensions 512

ACI

ACI Groups 16

ACI Ports 96

Automated Attendant

VRS Message Numbers 1~100

Conference

Conference Circuits 64 - maximum

(32 Parties Per Conference)

Data Communication Interfaces

APR Software Port Numbers 449~512

APA Adapters 240

APR Adapters 240

CTA or CTU Adapters 32

(Only works with DTH/DTR style
telephones)

Department and Pickup Groups

Department (Extension) Group Numbers 1~64

Call Pickup Group Numbers 1~64

Hotline

Internal Hotline 512

External Hotline 512

1 - 10 Introduction
UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued)

System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type Number Plan/Capacities

Paging and Park

Internal Page Group Numbers 0, 01~64

External Page Group Numbers 0, 1~8

External Speakers 9
CD-CP00( )-U10 (1)
PGD(2)-U10 ADP (1~8)

Park Group Numbers 1~64

Park Orbits 1~64

SMDR

SMDR Ports 1~8

VRS/VM8000 InMail

VRS/VM8000 InMail 1

VRS/VM8000 InMail Channels 16 (Note 1)

VRS Attendant Messages 3

VRS Recordable Messages 100

VM8000 InMail Ports 8 (Note 1)

VoIP

ADA2 (Recording Jack) Adapters 240

PSA (Power Failure) Adapters 256

RTP Ports 0~65535

RTCP Ports 0~65535

DSP Resources 128 (Note 2)

Note 1: The PZ-VM21 supports up to 16 ports and they are shared by the VM8000 InMaill and VRS.
Note 2: The maximum number of VOIP DSP Resources depend on which PZ-IPLA is installed.

Passwords

Programming Passwords:

Level 2 (IN) 12345678

PCPro/WebPro User Name: tech

Level 3 (SA) 0000

PCPro/WebPro User Name: ADMIN1

Programming Manual 1 - 11
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Table 1-4 System Number Plan/Capacities (Continued)

System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type Number Plan/Capacities

Level 4 (SB) 9999

PCPro/WebPro User Name: ADMIN2

Programming Password Users 8

Footnotes

Extension numbers can be one to eight digits long. Refer to the Flexible System Numbering
feature in the UNIVERGE SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual.

1 - 12 Introduction
Programming the UNIVERGE SV8100 2
SECTION 1 PROGRAMMING YOUR SYSTEM

The information contained in this chapter provides the information

necessary to properly program your UNIVERGE UNIVERGE SV8100
system.

Programming the UNIVERGE SV8100

The programming blocks are organized into the following programming
modes.

Table 2-1 Programming Modes

Program Number : Program Name

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

Program 11 : System Numbering
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
Program 20 : System Option Setup
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

Programming Manual 2-1

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Table 2-1 Programming Modes (Continued)

Program Number : Program Name

Program 31 : Paging Setup

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
Program 40 : Voice Recording System
Program 41 : ACD Setup
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
Program 47 : InMail
Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service (CCIS)
Program 51 : NetLink Service
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
Program 92 : Copy Program

2-2 Programming the UNIVERGE SV8100

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-01 : Time and Date
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-01 : Time and Date to change the system Time and Date
through system programming. Extension users can also dial Service Code 728
to change the time if allowed by an extension Class of Service. Program

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01

02
Year

Month
00~99

01~12
No Setting

No Setting
Enter 2 digits for year (00~99).

Enter 2 digits (01~12) for the

10
month.

03 Day 01~31 No Setting Enter 2 digits (01~31) for the day.

04 Week 1~7 No Setting Enter digit for the day of the week
(Sun~Sat) (1=Sunday, 7=Saturday).

05 Hour 00~23 No Setting Enter 2 digits for the hour (00~23).

06 Minute 00~59 No Setting Enter 2 digits for the minute

(00~59).

07 Second 00~59 No Setting Enter 2 digits for the second

(00~59).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Clock/Calendar Display

Programming Manual 2-3

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-02 : Location Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-02 : Location Setup to define the location of the installed system.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Country Dial (up to No setting Enter the country code.

Code four digits):
0~9, , #
02 International Dial (up to 0 Enter the international access
Access Code four digits): code.
0~9, , #
03 Other Area Dial (up to 0 Enter the other area access
Access Code two digits): code
0~9, , #
04 Area Code Dial (up to six No setting Enter the local area code.
digits):
0~9, , #
05 Trunk Dial (up to No setting Enter the trunk access code
Access Code eight digits): digits required to place an
0~9, , # outgoing call.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2-4 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-03 : ETU Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-03 : ETU Setup to setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data
for each blade. When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to 0 and then
plug the new device in to have the system automatically define it or you may have to
reseat the blade.

The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.
Input Data

For CNF PKG Setup

Physical Port Number 01~16

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Logical Port Number 0~256 0

For DLCA PKG Setup

Physical Port Number 01~16

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Terminal Type (B1) 0 = Not set 0

1 = Multiline Terminal
2 = SLT Adapter
3 = Bluetooth Cordless Handset
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Door Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (ACI)
10 = DSS Console
11 = --- Not Used ---

Programming Manual 2-5

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

02 Logical Port Number 0 = Not set 0

(B1) 1 = Multiline Terminal (1~256)
2 = SLT Adapter (1~256)
6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging) (1~8)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for Tone Ringer)
(1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for Door Box) (1~8)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for ACI) (1~96)
10 = DSS (1~32)
11 = --- Not Used ---

03 --- Not Used ---

04 Optional Installed Unit 1 0 = None 0

(Only applies to DTH/ 1 = APR Module
DTR–style telephones)
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module

05 Optional Installed Unit 2 0 = None 0

1 = APR Module
2 = APA Module
3 = ADA Module
4 = CTA/CTU Module

B-Channel 2

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

06 Terminal Type (B2) 0 = Not set 0

6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Tone Ringer)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Door Box)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (ACI)
12 = APR (B2 Mode)

07 Logical Port Number (B2) 0 = Not set 0

6 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Ext. Speaker)
7 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (Paging/Tone
Ringer) = (1~8)
8 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (for Door Box) =
(1~8)
9 = PGD(2)-U10 ADP (ACI) = (1~96)
12 = APR (for B2 mode) (193~512)

2-6 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

08 Multiline Telephone Type 0 = DT3** 0

1 = Dterm 8
2 = Dterm 7

09 Side Option Information 0 = No option 0

1 = 8LK Unit
2 = 16LK Unit
3 = 24ADM

10 Bottom Option 0 = No option 0

Information (Only applies 1 = APR
to DTL–style telephones)
2 = ADA
3 = BHA

11 Handset Option 0 = No option 0

Information 1 = PSA/PSD
2 = Bluetooth Cordless Handset

For LCA PKG Setup

Physical Port Number 01~16

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Logical Port Number 0~256 0

03 Transmit Gain Level (S-Level) 1~63 (-15.5 +15.5dB) 32 (0dB)

04 Receive Gain Level (R-Level) 1~63 (-15.5 +15.5dB) 32 (0dB)

For COTA Unit Setup

Physical Port Number 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Logical Port Number 0~200 0

Programming Manual 2-7

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

For ODTA PKG Setup

Physical Port Number 01~04

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Logical Port Number 0~200 0

02 2/4 Wire 0 = 2 Wire 1

1 = 4 Wire

03 E&M Line Control Method 0 = TYPE I 1

1 = TYPE V

For DIOP PKG Setup

Physical Port Number 01~04

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 LD/OPX Specification 0 = LD Trunk 0

1 = OPX

02 Logical Port Number 0 = 1~200 (LD Trunk) 0

1 = 1~256 (OPX)

2-8 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

For BRIA PKG Setup

ISDN Line Number 01~04

Item
Item Input Data Default
No

01 ISDN Line Mode 0 = No setting 1

1 = T-Point
2 = S-Point
3 = NW Mode (Leased Line)
4 = NW Mode (Interconnected
Line)
5 = NW Mode (Interconnected
Line, Fixed Layer1=NT)
6 = S-Point (Leased Line)

02 Logical Port Number [0:No setting] = 0 0

The starting port number of a BRI [1:T-Point] = 1-200
line is displayed. Two logic ports are [2:S-Point] = 1-512
automatically assigned to a BRI line. [3:NW Mode (Leased Line)] = 0
[4:NW Mode (Interconnected Line)]
=0
[5:NW Mode (Interconnected Line,
Fixed Layer1=NT)] = 0
[6:S-Point(Leased Line)] = 1-512

03 Connection Type 0 = Point-to-Multipoint 0

1 = Point-to-Point

04 Layer 3 Timer Type 1~5 1

Each timer value of Layer 3 is set up
for every type using Program 81-06
(T-Bus).

05 CLIP Information Announcement 0 = Disable 1

Based on this setting, the system 1 = Enable
includes a Presentation Allowed (1) or
Presentation Restricted (0) in the Setup
message to allow or deny the Calling
Party Number. Program 15-01-04 must
also be set to 1 if this option is enabled.

06 Connection Bus Mode 0 = Extended passive bus 0

1 = Short passive bus

07 S-point DDI digits 0-4 0

08 Dial Sending Mode 0 = Enblock Sending 1

ISDN Protocol definition 1 = Overlap Sending

09 Dial Information Element 0 = Keypad Facility 0

ISDN Protocol definition 1 = Called Party Number
[Only when Dialing Sending Mode
(10-03-08) is set for 1 (Overlap Sending]

Programming Manual 2-9

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No

10 Master/Slave System 0 = Slave System 0

If set to 0, system is synchronized to 1 = Master System
network clock. If set to 1, system is not
synchronized to the network clock.

11 Networking System No. 0 - 50 0

14 Service Protocol for S-point 0 = Keypad facility 0

1 = Specified Protocol for Aspire
system

15 Call Busy Mode for S-point 0 = Alerting 0

1 = Disconnect

17 ISDN Line Ringback Tone 0 = Disable 0

If Telco does not provide ringback tone, 1 = Enable
SV8100 can if set to 1:Enable.

18 Type of Number 0 = Unknown 0

ISDN Protocol definition 1 = International number
2 = National number
3 = Network specific number
4 = Subscriber number
5 = Abbreviated number

19 Numbering Plan Identification 0 = Unknown 0

ISDN Protocol definition 1 = ISDN numbering plan
2 = Data numbering plan
3 = Telex numbering plan
4 = National standard numbering
plan
5 = Private numbering plan

22 QSIG Operation Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

23 Straight/Cross Wiring 0 = Auto 0

1 = Manual (Cross)
2 = Manual (Straight)

24 Power feeding for S-point 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

2 - 10 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

For PRTA PKG Setup

ISDN Line Number 01~24

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 ISDN Line Mode 0 = No setting 1

1 = T-Point
2 = S-Point
3 = NW Mode (Leased Line)
4 = NW Mode (Interconnected
Line)
5 = NW Mode (Interconnected
Line, Fixed Layer1=NT)
6 = S-Point (Leased Line)

02 Logical Port Number 1 = for T-Bus 1~200 1

The start port number of a PRI line is
displayed.

03 CRC Multi-frame(CRC4) 0 = off 1

(Only for E1[30B+D] Mode) 1 = on

04 Layer 3 Timer Type 1~5 1

Each timer value of Layer 3 is set up
for each type in
Program 81-06 (T-Bus)

05 CLIP Information 0 = Disable 1

Based on this setting, the system 1 = Enable
includes a Presentation Allowed (1) or
Presentation Restricted (0) in the Setup
message to allow or deny the Calling
Party Number. Program 15-01-04 must
also be set to 1 if this option is enabled.

06 Length of Cable 0 = Level 1 2

1 = Level 2
2 = Level 3
3 = Level 4
4 = Level 5

07 S-point DDI digits 0-4 0

08 Dial Sending Mode 0 = Enbloc Sending 0

ISDN Protocol definition 1 = Overlap Sending

09 Dial Information Element 0 = Keypad Facility 0

ISDN Protocol definition 1 = Called Party Number
Only when Dial Sending Mode
(10-03-08) is set for 1 (Overlap
Sending).

10 Master/Slave System (Network 0 = Slave System 0

Mode only) 1 = Master System

Programming Manual 2 - 11
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

11 Networking System Number 0 - 50 0

(Network Mode only)

12 --- Not Used ---

13 Loss-Of-Signal Detection Limit 0 = Level 0 (lowest sensitivity) 2

If the transmit/receive voltage is less 1 = Level 1
than the setting in 10-03-13, the system 2 = Level 2
considers this as Loss-Of-Signal and
3 = Level 3
the PRTA does not come up. Note that
there are different values based on the
4 = Level 4
setting in 10-03-12 for the PRI. 5 = Level 5
6 = Level 6
7 = Level 7 (highest sensitivity)

14 Service Protocol for S-point 0 = Keypad facility 0

1 = Specified Protocol for Aspire
system

15 Call Busy Mode for S-point 0 = Alerting 0

1 = Disconnect

16 Two B-Channel Transfer for PRI 0 = off 0

Service 1 = on

17 ISDN Ringback Tone 0 = Disable 0

If Telco does not provide ringback tone, 1 = Enable
SV8100 can if 10-03-17 is set to
1:Enable.

18 Type of Number 0 = Unknown 0

ISDN Protocol definition. 1 = International number
Select the number type for the ISDN 2 = National number
circuit. 3 = Network Specific number
4 = Subscriber number
5 = Abbreviated number

19 Numbering Plan Identification 0 = Unknown 0

ISDN Protocol definition. 1 = ISDN numbering plan
Select the Numbering Plan used for the 2 = Data numbering plan
ISDN circuit. 3 = Telex numbering plan
4 = National standard numbering
plan
5 = Private numbering plan

20 Network Exchange Selection 0 = Standard (same as NI-2) 0

Select the ISDN protocol for the ISDN 1 = reserved
circuit. 2 = reserved
3 = DMS (A211)
4 = 5ESS
5 = DMS (A233)
6 = 4ESS
7 = NI-2

2 - 12 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

21 Number of Ports 0 = Auto 0

1 = 4 Ports
2 = 8 Ports
3 = 12 Ports
4 = 16 Ports
5 = 20 Ports
6 = 24 Ports
7 = 28 Ports

22 QSIG Operation Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

23 Straight/Cross Wiring 0 = Auto 0

1 = Manual (Cross)
2 = Manual (Straight)

For DTI (T1) PKG Setup

Physical Port Number 01~24

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Logical Port Number 0~200 0

The start port number of a T1 line is
displayed, and 24 logic ports are
automatically assigned to a DTI (T1)
line.

02 T1 Signal Format Selection 0 = D4 (12 Multi Frame) 0

1 = ESF (24 Multi Frame)

03 Zero Code Suppression 0 = B8ZS 0

1 = AMI/ZCS

04 Line Length Selection 0 = 0 feet ~ 133 feet 0

1 = 133 feet ~ 266 feet
2 = 266 feet ~ 399 feet
3 = 399 feet ~ 533 feet
4 = 533 feet ~ 655 feet

05 T1 Clock Source 0 = Internal 1

1 = External

06 Number of Ports 0 = Auto 0

1 = 4 Ports
2 = 8 Ports
3 = 12 Ports
4 = 16 Ports
5 = 20 Ports

Programming Manual 2 - 13
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

07 Straight/Cross Wiring 0 = Auto 0

1 = Manual (Cross)
2 = Manual (Straight)

For IPLA PKG Setup

Physical Port Number 001-200

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Trunk Logical Port Number 0~200 0

02 Trunk Type 0 = H.323 1

1 = SIP

03 CCIS Trunk 0 = Not CCIS 0

1 = CCIS

For VM00 PKG Setup

Physical Port Number 01~16

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Logical Port Number 0~256 0

For CCTA PKG Setup

Physical Port Number 01~24

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Logical Port Number 0~200 0

The start port number of a T1 line is
displayed, and 24 logic ports are
automatically assigned to a DTI (T1)
line.

02 T1 Signal Format Selection 0 = D4 (12 Multi Frame) 0

1 = ESF (24 Multi Frame)

03 Zero Code Suppression 0 = B8ZS 0

1 = AMI/ZCS

2 - 14 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

04 Line Length Selection 0 = 0 feet ~ 133 feet 0

1 = 133 feet ~ 266 feet
2 = 266 feet ~ 399 feet
3 = 399 feet ~ 533 feet
4 = 533 feet ~ 655 feet

05 T1 Clock Source 0 = Internal 1

1 = External

06 Number of Ports 0 = Auto 0

1 = 4 Ports
2 = 8 Ports
3 = 12 Ports
4 = 16 Ports
5 = 20 Ports

07 Straight/Cross Wiring 0 = Auto 0

1 = Manual (Cross)
2 = Manual (Straight)

Conditions

When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to 0 and then plug the
new device in to have the system automatically define it, or redefine the type
manually.

The system must have a blade installed to view/change the options for that type of
blade.

Feature Cross Reference

Universal Slots

Programming Manual 2 - 15
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-04 : Music On Hold Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-04 : Music on Hold Setup to set the Music on Hold (MOH) source.
For internal Music on Hold, the system can provide a service tone callers on hold or
one of eleven synthesized selections.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Music on Hold 0 = Internal MOH 0 The Music on Hold (MOH)

Source Selection 1 = External MOH source can be internal
2 = Service Tone (synthesized) or from a
customer-provided music
3 = VMDB
source.
The customer-provided source
can connect to a PGD(2)-U10
ADP or the connector on the
side of the Base Cabinet MOH/
IN connection.
Trunk MOH and Extension
MOH music source use the
same Music on Hold source.

02 Music on Hold [In case Item 1 is 0] 1

Tone Selection 1 = Download File1
2 = Download File2
3 = Download File3
[In case Item 1 is 1, 2,
or 3]
1~100 = VRS Message
Number

03 Audio Gain Setup 1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB) 32

(0dB)

2 - 16 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Background Music
Music on Hold

Programming Manual 2 - 17
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup to define which Relay circuits
(5~8) on PGD(2)-U10 ADP are used for General Purpose Relay.

Input Data

General Purpose Relay No. 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Slot No. Slot No: 0~24 0-0-0

Physical Port of DLCA Sensor Circuit No. DLCA Port: 0~16
Relay No: 0, 5~8
After each entry, press
the Transfer Key to
advance to the next
entry.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

2 - 18 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-07 : Conversation Recording Resource
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-07 : Conversation Record Circuits to select the number of
Conference circuits to be used for Conversation Recording.

Even if this program is set to '0', the telephone conversation recording function can be
used.
In this case, 64(32x2) circuits will be shared by conference recording and conversation
recording. The number of the conference circuits occupied by a conversation recording
is two.

Input Data

The number of Conversation Recording Default

0-16 0
(0: No setting, 2-32: Conference Resource)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Conference

Programming Manual 2 - 19
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup to enable or disable pre-ringing for trunk
calls. This sets how a trunk initially rings a telephone. With pre-ringing, a burst of
ringing occurs as soon as the trunk LED flashes. The call then continues ringing with
the normal ring cadence cycle. Without pre-ringing, the call starts ringing only when
the normal ring cadence cycle occurs. This may cause a ring delay, depending on
when call detection occurs in reference to the ring cycle.

Input Data

Item No. Description Input Data Default

01 Pre-Ringing 0 = No 0
1 = Yes

Conditions

Used with Analog Trunks only.

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Answering
Synchronous Ringing

2 - 20 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup to allocate the circuits on
the CD-CP00 for either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection. The CD-CP00 has 32
circuits initially, and an additional 64 circuits are added when a PZ-BS10 is installed.
These are used as follows:

Extension DTMF receiver for single line telephone

Trunk DTMF receiver for analog trunks, dial tone & busy tone detection
for analog trunks

Input Data

Circuit/Resource Number 01~160

Item
Input Data Default Setting
No.

01 0 = Common Use Circuit/Resource 01~08 = 1 (Extensions)

1 = Extension Only Circuit/Resource 09~32 = 2 (Trunks)
2 = Trunk Only (Circuit/Resource 33~96 are not used.)
Circuit/Resource 97~160 = 0 (Common)
When PZ-BS10 is installed, 97~160 are
available.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Caller ID
Central Office Calls, Placing
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Tie Lines

Programming Manual 2 - 21
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-12 : CD-CP00 Network Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-12 : CD-CP00 Network Setup to setup the IP Address,
Subnet-Mask, and Default Gateway addresses.

Caution! If any IP Address or NIC settings are changed, the system must be
reset for the changes to take affect.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 192.168.0.10 Set for CD-CP00.

128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

02 Subnet 128.0.0.0 192.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 The setting of Subnet

Mask 240.0.0.0 248.0.0.0 252.0.0.0 Mask is invalid when
all Host Addresses
254.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.128.0.0
are 0.
255.192.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.240.0.0
If the network section
255.248.0.0 255.252.0.0 255.254.0.0
is:
255.255.0.0 255.255.128.0 255.255.192.0
0,
255.255.224.0 255.255.240.0 255.255.248.0
127,
255.255.252.0 255.255.254.0 255.255.255.0
255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.224 128.0,
255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252 191.255,
255.255.255.254 255.255.255.255 192.0.0,
223.255.255
The setting of Subnet
Mask is invalid.

03 Default 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 IP Address for Router.

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

2 - 22 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

04 Time Zone 0~24 (0 = -12 Hours and 24 = +12 Hours) 12 Determine the offset
from Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT) time.
Then enter its
respective value. For
example, Eastern
Time (US and
Canada) has a GMT
offset of -5. The
program data would
then be 7 (0= -12, 1=
-11, 2= -10, 3= -9, 4= -
8, 5= -7, 6= -6, 7= -5,
……24= +12)

05 NIC 0 = Auto Detect 0 NIC Auto Negotiate

Interface 1 = 100Mbps, Full Duplex (CD-CP00)
2 = 100Mbps, Half Duplex
3 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex
4 = 10Mbps, Half Duplex

06 Network 0 = No (Disable) 0 If using an external

Address 1 = Yes (Enable) NAPT Router or not.
Port
Translation
(NAPT)
Router
Setup

07 NAPT 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 Sets the IP address

Router IP 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 on the WAN side of
Address router.
(Default 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
Gateway
[WAN])

08 ICMP 0= (Enable) 0 When receiving ICMP

Redirect 1= (Disable) redirect message, this
determines if the IP
Routing Table
updates automatically
or not.

09 IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 172.16.0.10 Set for IPLA.

128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

Programming Manual 2 - 23
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

10 Subnet 128.0.0.0 192.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 Set for IPLA.

Mask 240.0.0.0 248.0.0.0 252.0.0.0
254.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.128.0.0
255.192.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.240.0.0
255.248.0.0 255.252.0.0 255.254.0.0
255.255.0.0 255.255.128.0 255.255.192.0
255.255.224.0 255.255.240.0 255.255.248.0
255.255.252.0 255.255.254.0 255.255.255.0
255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.224
255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252
255.255.255.254 255.255.255.255

11 NIC Setup 0 = Auto Detect 0 Set for IPLA.

1 = 100Mbps, Full Duplex
2 = 100Mbps, Half Duplex
3 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex
4 = 10Mbps, Half Duplex
5 = 1 Gbps, Full Duplex
6 = 1 Gbps, Half Duplex

Conditions

The system must be reset for these changes to take affect.

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2 - 24 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup to setup the DHCP Server built into the
CD-CP00 blade.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 DHCP Server 0 = Disable 0 Enable or disable the use of the

Mode 1 = Enable built-in DHCP Server.

02 Lease Time Days 0~255 0 day Lease Time of the IP address to a

client.

Hour 0~23 0 hour Pressing the Transfer Key

increments to the next setting
data.

Minutes 1~59 30 minutes

05 Last DHCP Data 0 = Disable 1 If 10-13-01 is enabled, this setting

1 = Enable determines if DHCP resource is
enabled or disabled.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

Programming Manual 2 - 25
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-14 : Managed Network Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-14 : Managed Network Setup to set up the range of the IP address
which the DHCP Server leases to a client.

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 The Range of the IP address Minimum: 172.16.0.100

to Lease. 1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254
When Maximum has not been
128.1.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254
entered, the maximum value
equals the minimum value. 192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254
When Single is selected in Maximum: 172.16.5.254
10-13-04, only 1 scope range
can be entered. 1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254

When Divide Same Network is 128.1.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254

selected in 10-13-04, a 192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254
maximum of 10 scope ranges
can be entered.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2 - 26 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-15 : Client Information Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-15 : Client Information Setup to set up the client information when
the DHCP server needs to assign a fixed IP address to clients.

Input Data

Client Number 1~512

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

MAC: 00-00-00-00-00-00 ~ 00-00-00-00-00-00

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
The IP address should be
01 assigned out of the scope 1.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0
range set up in Program 10-14.
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

Programming Manual 2 - 27
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-16 : Option Information Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-16 : Option Information Setup to set up the option given from the
DHCP server to each client.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Router Code number 0~255 3 (Fixed)

Set the Router IP address.
IP address 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

02 DNS Server Code number 0~255 6 (Fixed)

Set IP address of DNS Server.
IP address 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

03 TFTP Server Code number 0~255 66 (Fixed)

Set the name for the TFTP
Server. Maximum 64 character strings No setting

05 MGC Code number 0~255 129 (Fixed)

IP address 172.16.0.10
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

06 Client Host Name Code number 0~255 12 (Fixed)

Set the Client Host Name.
Maximum 64 character strings No setting
07 DNS Domain Name Code number 0~255 15 (Fixed)
Set the DNS Domain Name.
Maximum 20 character strings No setting

2 - 28 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 Download Protocol Code number 0~255 43 (Fixed)

Set Download Protocol used
for AutoConfig (for DT700 Sub code number 163
Series).
1 = FTP 1
2 = HTTP

09 Encryption Information Code number 0~255 43 (Fixed)

Set an Encryption Information
used for AutoConfig (for DT700 Sub code number 164
series).
Maximum 128 character No setting
strings

10 FTP Server Address Code number 0~255 43 (Fixed)

Set a FTP Server Address
used for AutoConfig. Sub code number 141
IP address 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

11 Config File Name Code number 0~255 43 (Fixed)

Set a File Name used for
AutoConfig. Sub code number 151
Maximum 15 character strings No setting
12 Vender Class ID Code number 0~255 60 (Fixed)
Maximum 256 character NECDT700
strings

13 SNMP Server Code number 0~255 69 (Fixed)

IP address 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

14 POP3 Server Code number 0~255 70 (Fixed)

IP address 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

16 SIP Server (IP Address) Code number 0~255 120 (Fixed)

IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
172.16.0.10
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

Programming Manual 2 - 29
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

17 SIP Server (Domain Name) Code number 0~255 120 (Fixed)

Maximum 20 character strings No setting
18 FTP Server Code number 0~255 141 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

19 Config File Name Code number 0~255 151 (Fixed)

Maximum 15 character strings No setting
20 LDS Server 1 Code number 0~255 162 (Fixed)
IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

21 LDS Server 2 Code number 0~255 162 (Fixed)

IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

22 LDS Server 3 Code number 0~255 162 (Fixed)

IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

23 LDS Server 4 Code number 0~255 162 (Fixed)

IP address
0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

24 Next Server IP Address IP address

0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254
0.0.0.0
128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

27 SIP Server Receive Port Code number 0~255 168 (Fixed)

Port: 1~65535 5080

2 - 30 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

Programming Manual 2 - 31
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup to set the H.323 Gatekeeper
information.

Item Name Input Data Default

01 Gatekeeper Mode 0 = No Gatekeeper 0

Set IP Address either 1 = Automatic
automatically or manually if 2 = Manual
using an external
Gatekeeper.

02 Gatekeeper IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

04 Preferred Gatekeeper Maximum 124 characters No setting

When 10-17-01 is set to 1,
this is used and sets the
preferred ID of multiple
Gatekeepers.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

IP Trunk – H.323

2 - 32 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup to set the alias address registered
to the outside H.323 Gatekeeper.

Input Data

Number of Alias 1~6

Item Name Input Data Default

01 Alias Address Dial up to 12 digits No setting

Set the telephone number (0~9, , #)
(Alias Address) to external
gatekeeper.

02 Alias Address Type 0 = E164 0

Set the Alias Address Type
to external gatekeeper.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

IP Trunk – H.323

Programming Manual 2 - 33
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-19 : VoIP DSP Resource Selection
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-19 : VoIP DSP Resource Selection to define the criteria for each
DSP resource on the VoIP blade.

Input Data

Slot Number 1

Input Data

DSP Resource Number 01~128

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 VoIP DSP Resource Selection 0 = Common use for both IP Resource 1-128 = 0
extensions and trunks
1 = IP Extension
2 = SIP Trunk
3 = CCIS
4 = Use for NetLink
5 = Blocked

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 34 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment to define the TCP port/
address/etc. for communicating to external equipment.

Input Data
Type of External Equipment 1 = CTI Server
2 = ACD MIS
3 = Not Used
4 = Networking System
5 = SMDR Output
6 = DIM Output
7 = Reserved
8 = Reserved
9 = 1st Party CTI
10 = ACD Agent Control
11 = O&M Server
12 = Traffic Report Output
13 = Room Data Output for Hotel
Service

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.
01 TCP Port 0~65535 External Device 1 (CTI Server) = 0
External Device 2 (ACD MIS) = 0
External Device 4 (Networking System)
= 30000
External Device 5 (SMDR Output) = 0
External Device 6 (DIM Output) = 0
External Device 11 (O&M Server) = 8010
External Device 12 (Traffic Report Output) = 0
External Device 13 (Room Data Output for
Hotel Service) = 0
03 Keep Alive Time 1~255 (sec) 30

Programming Manual 2 - 35
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 36 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-21 : CD-CP00 Hardware Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-21 : CD-CP00 Hardware Setup to set up various hardware, such
as the baud rate of COM port and the switch for control on CD-CP00 blade.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

04 External 0 = External MOH (CN8)/ 0

Source I/O External Speaker(CN9)
Selection on
CD-CP00 1 = BGM source (CN8)/
Determines the External Speaker(CN9)
external music 2 = External MOH (CN8)/BGM
source input/ source (CN9)
output selection
Relationships between CN
for CD-CP00
number and Relay number are
CN8 and CN9.
as follows:
CN8 = Relay2
CN9 = Relay1

05 General 0 = Off 0
Purpose Relay 1 = Relay 1 on CD-CP00
Switch
Selection on 2 = Relay 2 on CD-CP00
CD-CP00

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 37
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-23 : SIP System Interconnection Setup to determine if the system
is interconnected and define the IP address of another system, call control port
number and alias address for SV8100 system interconnection.

Input Data

System Number 001~1000

Input Data

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 System 0 = No (Disable) 0
Interconnection 1 = Yes (Enable)

02 IP Address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

03 Call Procedure 1~65535 1720

Port

04 Dial Number Up to 12 digits (0~9) None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 38 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup to set the options for daylight
savings. As the telephone system is used globally, these settings define when the
system should automatically adjust for daylight savings as it applies to the region in
which the system is installed.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Daylight Savings Mode 0 = Disable 0

Enable (1) or disable (0) the system ability to 1 = Enable
adjust the time for daylight savings/standard
time.

02 Time for Daylight Savings 00:00~23:59 02:00

Enter the time of day when the system should
adjust for daylight savings time.

03 Start Month (Summer Time) 1~12 4

Enter the month when the system should (Jan = 1, 2 = Feb, etc.)
adjust the time for daylight savings time
(01~12).

04 Start of Week 0 = Last Week of Month 1

Enter the week of the month when the system 0~5
should adjust the time for daylight savings
time. The week will start on the day listed in
10-24-05.

05 Start of Week Day 1~7 1

Enter the day of the week when the system (Sun = 1, Mon = 2, etc.)
should adjust the time for daylight savings time
(01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.).

06 End of Month 1~12 10

Enter the month when the system should (Jan = 1, 2 = Feb, etc.)
adjust the time for standard time (01~12).

07 End of Week 0 = Last Week of Month 0

Enter the week of the month when the system 0~5
should adjust the time for standard time.
The week will start on the Day listed in
10-24-08.

Programming Manual 2 - 39
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 End of Week Day 1~7 1

Enter the day of the week when the system (Sun = 1, Mon = 2, etc.)
should adjust the time for daylight savings time
(01 = Sunday, 02 = Monday, etc.).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Clock/Calendar Display

2 - 40 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup to set the gateway prefix
registered to the outside gatekeeper.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Gateway Prefix Entry 0 = Off 0

1 = On

02 Gateway Prefix Value Up to 12 digits (0~9, , #) No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 41
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-26 : IP System Operation Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-26 : IP System Operation Setup to enable or disable the Peer to
Peer feature for SIP MLT and SIP IP stations.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Peer to Peer Mode 0 = Off 1

1 = On

02 RTP Forwarding Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

03 SIP Peer to Peer Mode 0 = Off 1

1 = On

05 SIP CTI Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Mode1
2 = Mode2

Conditions

Disabling 10-26-01 will result in SIP MLT Station-to-SIP MLT Station calls utilizing
a DSP resource.

SIP-to-SIP MLT Station does not support Peer to Peer function and will result in
utilizing a DSP resource.

Disabling 10-26-03 will result in SIP IP Station-to-SIP IP Station calls utilizing a

DSP resource.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 42 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-27 : H.323 System Interconnection with Application Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 10-27 : H.323 Interconnection with Application Setup to set the IP
address of the networked IP systems.

Input Data

System ID 01-50

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default Default
No.

01 IP Address 1.0.0.1_126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 11-01-01

System ID is related with the 128.1.0.1 _191.254.255.254 10-12-01
System ID in the Numbering Plan 192.0.1.1 _223.255.254.254
(Program 11-01-03). When the
digits are analyzed and the
system ID is determined from the
SV8100 data set in the
Numbering Plan, the networking
call will be sent to the IP Address
set in this program.
The IP Address should be the IP
Address of the peer CPU
(Program 10-12-01)

02 Call Procedure Port 1-65535 1730 84-02-33

The Port Number should be set
with the same value as the H.225
setup port in Program 84-02-33.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 43
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-28 : SIP System Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-28 : SIP System Information Setup to set up basic SIP trunking.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Domain Name Up to 64 Characters None

This sets the domain (ex.:[email protected])
name of the SIP-URL.

02 Host Name Up to 48 Characters None

This sets the host name (ex.:[email protected])
of the SIP-URL.

03 Transport Protocol 0 = UDP 0

This sets the protocol 1 = TCP
for the connection.

04 UserID Up to 32 Characters None

User ID in the SIP Invite When assigning the User ID, the ID may
Setup message. It is contain only alpha characters. (A space
also used for outbound and/or special characters are not allowed in
caller ID information if the User ID field).
no information is
(ex.:[email protected])
assigned in commands
21-17, 21-19, 15-16,
14-12, and 10-36. A
call can not be
completed across the
span if there is no
outbound CID info at
all. The reason for this
is: the “from” and
“display” portion of the
invite message would
be blank, and it would
not know where the call
originated from.

2 - 44 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

05 Domain Assignment 0 = IP Address 0

If the information from 1 = Domain Name
Telco was a domain
name
([email protected])
then set to domain. If
the information for
Telco was a IP address
then set to IP Address.

06 IP Trunk Port 0 = Disable 0

Binding 1 = Enable
Trunk port binding is
only used for SIP trunks
to the provider in “Non-
Registration Mode
only”. When this is
disabled, an inbound
call comes in and
follows your DID routing
but it comes in on the
first available trunk.
When enabled, the
inbound call comes in
and follows your normal
DID routing but maps to
that specified trunk. If
that trunk is busy, we
will send back a busy
unless you build a hunt
group. To build the
hunt group, it
references command
14-12-02 (pilot register
ID). This then points
you to command 10-36-
02. All the numbers
with the same pilot
would be in the same
hunt group.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 45
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-29 : SIP Server Information Setup to define the SIP Proxy setup
for outbound/inbound. The 10-29 commands are not used in non-registration mode.

If entries are made in Program 10-29-xx for a SIP Server and the SIP Server is then removed or
not used, the entries in Program 10-29-xx must be set back to their default settings. Even if
10-29-01 is set to 0 (off), the SV8100 still checks the settings in the remaining 10-29 programs.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Default Proxy 0 = Off 0

(Outbound) 1 = On
This sets whether
the SIP message is
always sent through
the Default Proxy.

02 Default Proxy 0 = Off 0

(Inbound) 1 = On
Need to be
registered in
registration mode.
This sets whether
the SIP message is
always received
through the Default
Proxy.

03 Default Proxy IP 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
This is optional and 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
used if the provider
gives you a proxy
address that is
different than the
registration address.
If the provider is
using domain names
instead of IP
addresses, leave
this at default.

2 - 46 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

04 Default Proxy Port 0 ~ 65535 5060

Number
The port number of
the Default Proxy is
set.

05 Registrar Mode 0 = None 0

The mode registered 1 = Manual
in the registration
server is set.

06 Registrar IP 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
IP address of the 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
SIP registration
server is set.

07 Registrar Port 0 ~ 65535 5060

Number
The port number of
the SIP registration
server is set.

08 DNS Server Mode 0 = Off 0

This setting 1 = On
determines if the
DNS server is used.

09 DNS Server IP 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Address 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
If 10-29-08 is 1, this 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
is effective. This sets
the IP address of the
DNS server.

10 DNS Port Number 0 ~ 65535 53

If 10-29-08 is 1, this
is effective. This sets
the port number of
the DNS server.

11 Registrar Domain Up to 128 Characters None

Name
This sets the domain
name of the
registration server.

12 Domain Name Up to 64 Characters None

This specifies the
domain name of the
SIP server.

13 Proxy Host Name Up to 48 Characters None

This specifies the
host name of the SIP
server.

Programming Manual 2 - 47
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

14 SIP Carrier Choice 0~7 0

This selects the 0 = Standard
carrier type of the 1 = Carrier A
SIP server.
2 = Carrier B
3 = Carrier C
4 = Carrier D
5 = Carrier E
6 = Carrier F
7 = Carrier G

15 Registration 120 ~ 65535 seconds 3600

Expiry (Expire)
Time
This sets the
expiration time when
the SIP trunk
registers to the Sip
server. When half
the time set here
passes, the
registration update is
automatically done.

17 DNS Source Port 0~65535 53

(10-29-08 must be
On)
This sets the DNS
source port number.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 48 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-30 : SIP Authentication Information Setup to set the
authentication options for SIP trunks.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

02 User Name Up to 64 Characters None

This sets the user
name of the SIP
trunk.

03 Password Up to 32 Characters None

This sets the SIP
trunk password.

04 Authentication 0~9 1
Trial
This is how many
times it will try an
authenticate before
timing out and not
registering.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 49
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-31 : Networking Keep Alive Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-31 : Networking Keep Alive Setup to set the interval and retry
count of the AspireNet networking keep alive message. The keep alive is used for
ISDN and IP networking.

The keep alive message is automatically responded to by the destination SV8100, if

the response is not received the retry count will start. If a response is not received
within the number of retries the networking link will be taken out of service. When the
link is taken out of service:

Any calls that are in progress will be released.

Park Hold orbits will be released.
No further Park Hold information will be sent until the link is active.
The link will automatically become active when the next keep alive response is
received.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Keep Alive Interval 0-65535 0

This program is used to set the interval of
Keep Alive. The SV8100 does not send
Keep alive when this item is set to "0".
If this entry is greater than "0", networked
PRI spans which are using Kentrox DSUs
will not re-sync when removed from
service then returned to service.

02 Keep Alive Retry Timer 1-255 5

Set how many times the SV8100 resends
Keep Alive.

2 - 50 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
The keep alive message must be sent and a response not received for the retry count, for
the link to be taken out of service and the calls in progress and Park Hold orbits to be
released.
For example: If an ISDN Net Link connection is disconnected at Layer 1 then the keep
alive message can not be sent, therefore the keep alive operation will not occur.

Feature Cross Reference

Networking - AspireNet

Programming Manual 2 - 51
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-32 : Networking Maximum PRI Channel Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-32 : PRI Networking Maximum PRI Channel Setup to assign the
number of B-channels to be used for each ISDN blade. This allows for fractional PRIs
when used with multiple site networking.

If this program is limited to less than "30" on one side of the network, then it also limits
both inbound and outbound network calls. For example, when you select 10 channels
then only channels 1 to 10 will be available. If a call is attempted on channels 11 to 30
the caller will receive busy tone. This also applies on the other side of the network as
well.

The setting is for each slot within the SV8100; ensure that you select the correct slot
before making any changes.

This program will not affect a PRI card set as Trunk or Station mode.

Input Data

Slot Number 1-24

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Maximum Channels 1 - 30 30
Set the maximum number of channels
which can be used with PRI NetLink.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Networking - AspireNet

2 - 52 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-33 : SIP Registrar/Proxy Information Basic Setup to set the
registrar/proxy options for SIP extensions.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Registration 60 ~ 65535 3600

Expire Time
After this timer
expires, the UA’s are
forced to reregister
with the CPU. This
allows the CPU to
keep a current
location of the entire
end UA’s.

02 Authentication 0 = Disable 0
Mode 1 = Enable
Check here if a
password is desired
for the IP SIP
phones to register.
When checked,
15-05-16 must have
a password entered
and also the SIP
phone must have the
same password.
When using
Authentication, the
station number is the
authorization name.

03 Registrar/Proxy Up to 64 Characters None

Domain Name
This sets the domain
name of the SIP
proxy.

Programming Manual 2 - 53
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

04 Registrar/Proxy Up to 48 Characters None

Host Name
This sets the domain
name of the SIP
proxy.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 54 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-36 : SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup to set the SIP
trunk registration information.

Input Data

Register ID 1~31

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Registration 0 = Disable 0
This setting 1 = Enable
determines if the SIP
trunk information is
registered.

02 User ID Up to 32 Characters None

This sets the SIP
trunk User ID.

03 Authentication Up to 64 Characters None

User ID
This sets the SIP
trunk Authentication
User ID.

04 Authentication Up to 32 Characters None

Password
This sets the SIP
trunk authentication
password.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 55
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-37 : UPnP Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-37 : UPnP Setup to set the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) options
for SIP trunks.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 UPnP Mode 0 = Disable 0

Router must support 1 = Enable
UPnP.

02 Retry Time 0,60 ~ 3600 60

(1~59 cannot be input)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 56 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-38 : BGM Resource Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-38 : BGM Resource Setup to configure the Background Music
Source input.

Input Data

Ite
Related
m Item Input Data Default
Program
No.

01 BGM Resource Type 0 = CD-CP00 0

(MOH/IN)
1 = ACI Port

02 ACI Port Number for BGM Source 0 ~ 96 0

(only used if 10-38-01 is set to 1)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Background Music

Programming Manual 2 - 57
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-39 : Fractional Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-39 : Fractional Setup to enable or disable the ability to use
fractional T1 or PRI.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Fractional 0 = Disable 0
1 = Enable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 58 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-40 : IP Trunk Availability
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-40 : IP Trunk Availability to enable or disable the ability to use SIP
trunks and assign the number of ports if IP Trunk is enabled.

Input Data

Slot Number 1

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 IP Trunk 0 = Disable 0
Availability 1 = Enable

02 Number of Ports 0-200 0

04 Number of IP 0-200 0
CCIS Ports

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 59
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-41 : General Purpose Contact Detector Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-41 : General Purpose Contact Detector Setup to specify the
circuit number used on a 2PGDAD as a contact detection circuit.

Input Data

General Purpose Contact Detector Number 1-8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Slot Number 0 = No Setting 0

Define the slot number of the DLC to 1-24 = Slots 1-24
which the 2PGDAD is connected

02 Physical Port Number 0 = No Setting 0

Select the port number on the DLC to 1-16 = Ports 1-16
which the 2PGDAD is connected.

03 Relay Circuit Number 0 = No Setting 0

Select the relay circuit on the 2PGDAD 1-2 = Circuit Number 1-2
module.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

2 - 60 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-42 : Virtual Loop Back Port Setting to set the data for the Virtual
Loop Back Port.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of Loop Back Ports 0~30 (0 = No setting) 0

02 Logical Trunk Port Number 0~168 0
03 Logical Station Port Number 0~480 0
04 Layer 3 Timer Type 1~5 1
05 Calling Party Number 0 = No 1
1 = Yes

06 S-point DDI digits 0-4 0

07 Call Busy Mode for S-point 0 = Alerting Message 0
1 = Disconnect Message

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 61
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-45 : IP Routing Table Setup to set up the IP Routing Table.

Input Data

Routing Table Number 001~100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Network 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254

Address 128.0.0.0 ~ 191.254.255.254 0.0.0.0
192.0.0.0 ~ 223.255.255.254

02 Subnet 128.0.0.0 192.0.0.0 224.0.0.0

Mask 240.0.0.0 248.0.0.0 252.0.0.0
254.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.128.0.0
255.192.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.240.0.0
255.248.0.0 255.252.0.0 255.254.0.0
255.255.0.0 255.255.128.0 255.255.192.0 0.0.0.0
255.255.224.0 255.255.240.0 255.255.248.0
255.255.252.0 255.255.254.0 255.255.255.0
255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.224
255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252
255.255.255.254 255.255.255.255

03 Default 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254

Gateway 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254 0.0.0.0
192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 62 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-46 : DT700 Server Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-46 : DT700 Server Information Setup to setup the information of
SIP Multiline (DT700 series) Server.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Register Mode 0 = Normal 0

0 = Normal mode: 1 = Auto
When the phone boots up it 2 = Manual
will report the ext. assigned
in the phone or choose the
next available extension in
the system. No password
is required.
1= Auto:
If set to Auto then the SIP
user name and password
must be entered into the
actual IP phone. These
settings must match 84-22/
15-05-27, or the phone will
not come on-line.
2 = Manual:
When the phone boots up it
will prompt user to enter a
user id and password
before logging in. It checks
this user id/password
against 84-22/15-05-27. If
there is no match, the
phone will not come on-
line.

04 Server Name Up to 32 characters sipphd

Assign the Server name to
be used in the SIP URL.

Programming Manual 2 - 63
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

06 Register Port 0~65535 5080

Assign the port number in
which the SIP messages
are sent to on the IPLA.
This same port number
must be assigned in the
SIP Multiline terminals.
If this command is
changed, it requires a CPU
reset.

07 Encryption Mode 0 = Off 0

1 = On

08 Encryption Type 0 = Mode1 0

09 One Time Password Up to 10 characters None 10-46-07
(0~9, , #)

10 Start Port 1~512 1 10-46-01

11 Multicast IP Address 224.0.0.0~ 224.0.0.10
This sets the Multicast IP 239.255.255.255
address so that two or
more main devices don’t
overlap on the same
network, or if Multicast is
used by other IP services.

12 Multicast Port 0~65535 30000

13 Subscribe Session Port 0-65535 5081

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 64 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-47 : Terminal License Server Information Setup to setup the
information of Terminal License Server.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Register Port of 0~65535 6080

TCP I/F

02 TCP Keep Alive 1~255 seconds 5

Time

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 65
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-48 : License Activation
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-48 : License Activation to turn on the license issued from the
license server.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Software Key 20-digit character None

Code

02 Activation Code 8-digit hexadecimal number None

03 Feature Code 7-digit number None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 66 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-49 : License File Activation
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-49 : License File Activation to enable the command to save the
license file via USB memory which is issued from the license server.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Save License File Dial 1 + TRF

on USB Drive (Press TRF to cancel)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 67
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-50 : License Information
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-50 : License Information to confirm license information that is
stored in a system.

Input Data

Item
Item Read Data
No.

01 License Name None

02 License Quantity 0~32767

03 License Quantity 0~32767

04 Free License Remaining 0~9999

Days

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 68 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of CD-PRTA
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-51 : PRI/T1 Selection of CD-PRTA to select whether the CD-PRTA
works as PRI or T1.

Input Data

System ID 0~50

Input Data

Slot Number 01~24

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 PRI/T1 Selection 0 = PRI 0 = PRI

Chose whether the CD-PRTA 1 = T1
works as PRI or T1.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 69
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-52 : Free/Demo License Information
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-52 : Free/Demo License Information to display information on free
of charge/Demo license.

Input Data

Item
Item Read Data
No.

01 Remaining days of Free/ 0~9999

Demo License

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 70 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-54 : License Configuration for Each Package to set the license
information for each unit.

Input Data

Slot Number 1~24

Input Data

License Index Number 1~32

Input Data

Item
Item Read Data
No.

01 License Code 0000~9999

02 License Quantity 0~255

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 71
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-55 : Package Network Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-55 : Package Network Setup to set the network information for
each unit. This program sets the SPOE of each package.

Input Data

Slot Number 1~24

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 IP Address 0.0.0.0~126.255.255.254 172.16.1.100

128.0.0.1~191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1~223.255.255.254

02 --- Not Used ---

03 Main/Add-on 0 = Main 1
1 = Add-on

04 Sub Net Mask 128.0.0.0 192.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 255.255.0.0

240.0.0.0 248.0.0.0 252.0.0.0
254.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.128.0.0
255.192.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.240.0.0
255.248.0.0 255.252.0.0 255.254.0.0
255.255.0.0 255.255.128.0 255.255.192.0

255.255.224.0 255.255.240.0
255.255.248.0 255.255.252.0
255.255.254.0 255.255.255.0
255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192
255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240
255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252
255.255.255.254 255.255.255.255

05 Default 0.0.0.0~126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Gateway 128.0.0.1~191.255.255.254
192.0.0.1~223.255.255.254

2 - 72 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 73
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

10-56 : XML Portal IP Phone
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 10-56 : XML Portal IP Phone to set the contents of XML portal page
provided to the IP Phone. The XML Portal Page is included in the XML application
name and URL Link information. XML URL Link Information can be set for up to five
system bases.

Input Data

XML URL Information Link 1~5

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Name Up to 40 characters. No Setting

02 URL Up to 256 characters. No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 74 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-01 : System Numbering to set the system numbering plan. The
numbering plan assigns the first and second digits dialed and affects the digits
an extension user must dial to access other extensions and features, such as Program
service codes and trunk codes. If the default numbering plan does not meet
the site requirements, use this program to tailor the system numbering to the

11
site.

CAUTION!
Improperly programming this option can adversely affect system
operation. Make sure you thoroughly understand the default numbering
plan before proceeding. If you must change the standard numbering, use
the chart for Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings on
page 2-77 to keep careful and accurate records of your changes.
Before changing your numbering plan, use PC Pro to make a backup
copy of your system data.

Changing the numbering plan consists of three steps:

Step 1: Enter the digit(s) you want to change

You can make either single or two digit entries. In the Dialed Number column in
the Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings on page 2-77 table, the nX
rows (e.g., 1X) are for single digit codes. The remaining rows (e.g., 11, 12,
etc.) are for two digit codes.

Entering a single digit affects all the Dialed Number entries beginning with
that digit. For example, entering 6 affects all number plan entries beginning
with 6. The entries you make in step 2 and step 3 below affect the entire
range of numbers beginning with 6. (For example, if you enter 3 in step 2
the entries affected are 600~699. If you enter 4 in step 2 below, the entries
affected are 6000~6999.)

Programming Manual 2 - 75
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Entering two digits lets you define codes based on the first two digits a user dials.
For example, entering 60 allows you to define the function of all codes beginning
with 60. In the default program, only and # use 2-digit codes. All the other codes
are single digit. If you enter a two digit code between 0 and 9, be sure to make
separate entries for all the other two digit codes within the range as well. This is
because in the default program all the two digit codes between 0 and 9 are
undefined.
Defining codes based on more than 2 digits require a secondary program (PRG 11-20)
to define the codes.

Step 2: Specify the length of the code you want to change

After you specify a single or two digit code, you must tell the system how many digits
comprise the code. This is the Number of Digits Required column in the Table 2-2
System Numbering Default Settings on page 2-77 table.

Step 3: Assign a function to the code selected

After entering a code and specifying its length, you must assign its function. This is
the Dial Type column in the Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings on page
2-77 table. The choices are:

Dial
Dial Type Description Related Program
Types

0 --- Not Used ---

1 Service Code 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)

11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD)
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special
Access)
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup
2 Extension Number 11-02 : Extension Numbering
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering
11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers
11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number
11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number
3 Trunk Access Code 11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code
4 Special Trunk Access 11-09-02 : Trunk Access Code
5 Operator Access 20-17 : Operator Extension
6 ARS/F-Route Access 44-xx

2 - 76 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Dial
Dial Type Description Related Program
Types

9 Dial Extension Analyze 11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table

Changing the Dial Type for a range of codes can have a dramatic affect on how your system operates.
Assume, for example, the site is a hotel that has room numbers from 100-399. To make extension
numbers correspond to room numbers, you should use Program 11-02 to reassign extension numbers on
each floor from 100 to 399. (Other applications might also require you to change entries in Program
11-10 ~ 11-16.)

Default
See the following tables for default settings.

Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special

Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking System
Access, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=Not Used

Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type Networking

ID
[if type 8] -
Default New Default New 0-50

1X 3 2
11 0 0
12 0 0
13 0 0
14 0 0
15 0 0
16 0 0
17 0 0
18 0 0
19 0 0
10 0 0
1 0 0
1# 0 0

2X 3 2
21 0 0
22 0 0
23 0 0
24 0 0
25 0 0
26 0 0

Programming Manual 2 - 77
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special

Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking System
Access, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=Not Used

Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type Networking

ID
[if type 8] -
Default New Default New 0-50

27 0 0
28 0 0
29 0 0
20 0 0
2 0 0
2# 0 0
3X 3 2
31 0 0
32 0 0
33 0 0
34 0 0
35 0 0
36 0 0
37 0 0
38 0 0
39 0 0
30 0 0
3 0 0
3# 0 0

4X 3 2
41 0 0
42 0 0
43 0 0
44 0 0
45 0 0
46 0 0
47 0 0
48 0 0
49 0 0

2 - 78 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special

Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking System
Access, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=Not Used

Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type Networking

ID
[if type 8] -
Default New Default New 0-50

40 0 0
4 0 0
4# 0 0
5X 4 2
51 0 0
52 0 0
53 0 0
54 0 0
55 0 0
56 0 0
57 0 0
58 0 0
59 0 0
50 0 0
5 0 0
5# 0 0

6X 3 2
61 0 0
62 0 0
63 0 0
64 0 0
65 0 0
66 0 0
67 0 0
68 0 0
69 0 0
60 0 0
6 0 0
6# 0 0

Programming Manual 2 - 79
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special

Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking System
Access, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=Not Used

Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type Networking

ID
[if type 8] -
Default New Default New 0-50

7X 3 1
71 0 0
72 0 0
73 0 0
74 0 0
75 0 0
76 0 0
77 0 0
78 0 0
79 0 0
70 0 0
7 0 0
7# 0 0

8X 3 1
81 0 0
82 0 0
83 0 0
84 0 0
85 0 0
86 0 0
87 0 0
88 0 0
89 0 0
80 0 0
8 0 0
8# 0 0
9X 1 3
91 0 0
92 0 0

2 - 80 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special

Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking System
Access, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=Not Used

Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type Networking

ID
[if type 8] -
Default New Default New 0-50

93 0 0
94 0 0
95 0 0
96 0 0
97 0 0
98 0 0
99 0 0
90 0 0
9 0 0
9# 0 0

0X 1 5
01 0 0
02 0 0
03 0 0
04 0 0
05 0 0
06 0 0
07 0 0
08 0 0
09 0 0
00 0 0
0 0 0
0# 0 0
X 4 1
1 0 0
2 0 0
3 0 0
4 0 0
5 0 0

Programming Manual 2 - 81
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Table 2-2 System Numbering Default Settings (Continued)

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special

Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing, 8 = Networking System
Access, 9 = Dial Extension Analyze, 0=Not Used

Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type Networking

ID
[if type 8] -
Default New Default New 0-50

6 0 0
7 0 0
8 0 0
9 0 0
0 0 0
0 0
# 0 0

#X 4 1
#1 2 1
#2 2 1
#3 2 1
#4 2 1
#5 2 1
#6 2 1
#7 2 1
#8 2 1
#9 2 1
#0 2 1
# 4 1
## 2 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Flexible System Numbering

2 - 82 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-02 : Extension Numbering
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-02 : Extension Numbering to set the extension number. The extension
number can have up to eight digits. The first/second digit(s) of the number should be
assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20. This allows an employee to move to a
new location (port) and retain the same extension number.

Input Data

Extension Port Number 001 ~ 512

Item Extension
Description
No. Number

01 Dial (Up to 8 digits) Set up extension numbers for multiline telephones, single line
telephones (including SLTII Adapter, APR), and IP telephones.
Extension number assignments cannot be duplicated in Programs
11-02, 11-06, 11-07, 11-08, and 11-17.

Default
Extension Port Extension
Number Number

1 200
2 201
3 202
~

300 499
301 5000
~

512 5211

Programming Manual 2 - 83
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Department Calling
Flexible System Numbering
Intercom

2 - 84 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension
numbers. The extension number can have up to eight digits. The first/second digit(s)
of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-20.

Input Data

Virtual Extension Numbers 001~256

Item Virtual Extension

Description
No. Number

01 Dial (up to 8 digits) Set up Virtual Extension numbers.

The extension number cannot be duplicated in Programs
11-02, 11-06, 11-07, 11-08, and 11-17.

Default
Virtual Port Extension
Number Number

1~256 No Setting

Programming Manual 2 - 85
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Flexible System Numbering
Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage

2 - 86 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension number
to be used for the ACI. The extension number can have up to eight digits. The first
and second digits of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-
20.

Input Data

ACI Port Number 01~96

Item ACI
Extension Description Related Program
No.
Number

01 Dial The extension number cannot be 10-03 : Basic Configuration

(Up to 8 digits) duplicated in Programs 11-02, 11-04, for each blade.
11-07, 11-08, and 11-17.

Default

ACI Port Numbers have no extension number set.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Flexible System Numbering

Programming Manual 2 - 87
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers to assign pilot numbers to each
Department Group set up in Program 16-02. The pilot number is the number users
dial for Department Calling and Department Step Calling. The pilot number can have
up to eight digits. The first and second digits of the number should be assigned in
Program 11-01 or Program 11-20 as type 2.

Input Data

Department (Extension) Group Number 01~64

Extension
Item
Group Pilot Description Related Program
No.
Number

01 Dial Use this program to assign 16-01 : Department (Extension)

(Up to 8 digits) department group pilot Group Basic Data Setup
numbers. 16-02 : Department Group
The number set up by Program Assignment for Extensions
11-02 (Extension Numbering) 16-03 : Secondary Department
cannot be used. Group
The extension number cannot
be duplicated in Programs
11-02, 11-04, 11-06, 11-08, and
11-17.

Default

No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Department Calling
Department Step Calling

2 - 88 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number to assign the pilot number to the ACI
Groups set in Program 33-02. The pilot number can have up to four digits. The first
and second digits of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 or Program 11-
20 as type 2.

Input Data

ACI Group Number 01~16

Item ACI Group Pilot Related

Description
No. Number Program

01 Dial The extension number cannot be duplicated in 33-02

(Up to 8 digits) Programs 11-02, 11-04, 11-06, 11-07, and 11-17.

Default

No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

Programming Manual 2 - 89
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-09 : Trunk Access Code
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-09 : Trunk Access Code to assign the trunk access code (normally 9).
The trunk access code can be set from 1~8 digits which is defined to type 3 and 4 in
Program 11-01. This is the code extension users dial to access Automatic Route
Selection. The Individual Trunk Access Code is used when Trunk Group Routing is
desired for an outgoing line.

Caution!

The digit 9 is defined in Program 11-01 as Dial Type 3 with the Number of Digits
Required set to 1. If you change the trunk access code in Program 11-09, you
must make the corresponding changes in Program 11-01.

Input Data

Item Trunk Access

Description Default Related Program
No. Code

01 Dial Use this program to 9 11-01 : System

(Up to four digits) assign the trunk access Numbering
code (normally 9). This is 14-01 : Basic Trunk
the code extension users Data Setup
dial to access Automatic
14-05 : Trunk Group
Route Selection.
14-06 : Trunk Group
Routing

21-02: Trunk Group

Routing for
Extensions

2 - 90 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Trunk Access

Description Default Related Program
No. Code

02 2nd Trunk Route Use this program to No 11-01 : System

Access Code define additional trunk Setting Numbering
access codes. 14-01 : Basic Trunk
When a user dials the Data Setup
Alternate Trunk Route 14-05 : Trunk Group
Access Code, the system
routes their call to the 14-06 : Trunk Group
Routing
Alternate Trunk Route.
21-02 : Trunk Group
Routing for
Extensions

21-15 : Individual
Trunk Group
Routing for
Extensions

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection
Central Office Calls, Placing
Trunk Group Routing

Programming Manual 2 - 91
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) to customize the
Service Codes for the System Administrator. You can customize additional Service
Codes in Programs 11-11~11-16. The following chart shows:

The number of each code (01~42).

The function of the Service Code.
The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
The default entry. For example, dialing (item 26) allows users to force a trunk line to
disconnect.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Terminals Default
No. Program

01 Night Mode Switching MLT, SLT 818 12-xx

20-07-01

02 Change of music on hold tone MLT 881 10-04

03 Setting the System Time MLT 828

04 Storing Common Speed Dialing MLT 853

Numbers

05 Storing Group Speed Dialing MLT 854

Numbers

06 Setting the Automatic Transfer for MLT 833 24-04-01

Each Trunk Line

07 Canceling the Automatic Transfer MLT 834 24-04-01

for Each Trunk Line

08 Setting the Destination for MLT 835 24-04-01

Automatic Trunk Transfer

09 Charging Cost Display by the MLT 771

Supervisor

10 --- Not Used ---

11 Entry Credit for Toll Restriction MLT 774

2 - 92 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item Related
Item Terminals Default
No. Program

12 Night Mode Switching for Other MLT 718 12-xx

Group 20-07-01

13 --- Not Used ---

14 --- Not Used ---

15 --- Not Used ---

16 Leaving Message Waiting MLT 726 11-11-09

(Requires CPU to be licensed for
Hotel/Motel)

17 Dial Block by Supervisor MLT 701 90-19

18 Off-Premise Call Forward by Door MLT 822 13-05

Box

19 --- Not Used ---

20 VRS - Record/Erase Message MLT, SLT 716 20-07-13

21 VRS - General Message Playback MLT, SLT 711 20-07-14

22 VRS - Record or Erase General MLT, SLT 712 20-07-15

Message

23 SMDR - Extension Accumulated MLT 721 20-07-18

Printout Code

24 SMDR - Group Accumulated MLT 722 20-07-19

Printout Code

25 Account Code Accumulated MLT 723 20-07-20

Printout Code

26 Forced Trunk Disconnect MLT, SLT 724 20-07-11

27 Trunk Port Disable for Outgoing MLT, SLT 745 20-07-12

Calls

28 --- Not Used ---

29 --- Not Used ---

30 --- Not Used ---

31 --- Not Used ---

32 Set Private Call Refuse MLT, SLT Not Set

33 Entry Caller ID Refuse MLT Not Set

34 Set Caller ID Refuse MLT, SLT Not Set

35 Dial-In Mode Switching MLT, SLT Not Set

Programming Manual 2 - 93
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item Related
Item Terminals Default
No. Program

36 Change the Guidance Message MLT, SLT Not Set

Number on Voice Mail Auto
Attendant

41 Date Setting MLT Not Set 20-07-30

42 Maintenance Service MLT Not Set

MLT = Multiline Terminal

SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Refer to Input Data chart on the previous pages.

2 - 94 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) to
customize the Service Codes which are used for registration and setup. You can
customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10, and 11-12 ~ 11-16.

The following chart shows:

The number of each code (01~65).

The function of the Service Code.
What type of telephones can use the Service Code.
The default entry. For example, dialing 725 (item 18) allows users to turn on or turn
off Background Music.

Input Data

Item Related
No. Item Terminals Default Program

01 Call Forward – All MLT, SLT 848

02 Call Forward – Busy MLT, SLT 843

03 Call Forward – No Answer MLT, SLT 845

04 Call Forward – Busy/No Answer MLT, SLT 844

05 Call Forward – Both Ring MLT, SLT 842

06 --- Not Used ---

07 Call Forwarding – Follow-Me MLT, SLT 846

08 Do Not Disturb MLT, SLT 847

09 Answer Message Waiting MLT, SLT 841 11-10-16

10 Cancel All Messages Waiting MLT, SLT 873

11 Cancel Message Waiting MLT, SLT 871

12 Alarm Clock MLT, SLT 827 20-01-06

13 Display Language Selection for Multiline MLT 778 15-02

Terminal

Programming Manual 2 - 95
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Terminals Default
No. Program

14 Text Message Setting MLT 836

15 Enable Handsfree Incoming Intercom Calls MLT 821 20-09-05

20-02-12

16 Force Ringing of Incoming Intercom Calls MLT 823 20-09-05

20-02-12

17 Programmable Function Key Programming MLT 851 15-07

(2-Digit Service Codes) 11-11-38

18 BGM On/Off MLT 825

19 Key Touch Tone On/Off MLT 824

20 Change Incoming CO and ICM Ring Tones MLT 820 15-02

21 Check Incoming Ring Tones MLT 811

22 Extension Name Programming MLT 800 15-01

23 Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL MLT 779

24 Change Station Class of Service MLT 777 20-13-28

Allows an extension user to change the COS of
another extension. Must be allowed in Program
20-13-28.

25 Automatic Transfer Setup for Each Extension MLT, SLT 702 20-11-17
Group 24-05

26 Automatic Transfer Cancellation for Each MLT, SLT 703

Extension Group

27 Destination of Automatic Transfer Each MLT 704 20-11-17

Extension Group 24-05

28 Delayed Transfer for Every Extension Group MLT, SLT 705 20-11-17
24-05
24-02-08

29 Delayed Transfer Cancellation for Each MLT, SLT 706 20-11-17

Extension Group

30 DND Setup for Each Extension Group MLT, SLT 707

31 DND Cancellation for Each Extension Group MLT, SLT 708

32 --- Not Used ---

33 Dial Block MLT, SLT 700

34 Temporary Toll Restriction Override MLT, SLT 875 21-07

35 Pilot Group Withdrawing MLT, SLT 750

36 Toll Restriction Override MLT, SLT 763 21-14

2 - 96 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Terminals Default
No. Program

37 Ring Volume Set MLT 829

38 Programmable Function Key Programming MLT 852 15-07

(3-Digit Service Codes) 11-11-17

39 Station Speed Dial Number Entry MLT, SLT 855

40 --- Not Used ---

41 Tandem Ringing MLT, SLT No 15-07

Setting 30-03

42 --- Not Used ---

43 Headset Mode Switching MLT, SLT 788

44 Auto Attendant MLT, SLT 790

45 Set/Cancel Call Forward All (Split) MLT, SLT 782

46 Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy (Split) MLT, SLT 783

47 Set/Cancel Call Forward No Answer (Split) MLT, SLT 784

48 Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy No Answer (Split) MLT, SLT 785

49 Set/Cancel Call Forward Both Ring (Split) MLT, SLT 786

50 Set Message Waiting Indication SLT No 15-03-03

Setting 45-01-01

51 Cancel Message Waiting Indication SLT No 15-03-03

Setting 45-01-01

52 Set/Cancel Call Forward All Destination (No MLT, SLT 791

Split)

53 Set/Cancel Call Forward Busy Destination (No MLT, SLT 792

Split)

54 Set/Cancel Call Forward No Answer Destination MLT, SLT 793

(No Split)

55 Call Forward Busy No Answer Destination (No MLT, SLT 794

Split)

56 Telephone Book Lock Service MLT No

Setting

57 Set Do Not Call Table MLT, SLT No

Setting

58 Call Forward with Personal Greeting MLT, SLT 795

59 Call Forward to Attendant except Busy MLT, SLT 796 15-01-08

60 Call Forward to Attendant/No Answer MLT, SLT 797 15-01-09

Programming Manual 2 - 97
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Terminals Default
No. Program

62 Headset Ring Volume Adjustment MLT 874 11-11-37

15-02-12
15-02-41
15-02-42

63 Double Height Character Indication MLT No 15-02-45

Setting

64 Reverse Display Indication MLT No 15-02-44

Setting

65 Headset Mode Switching MLT 798

MLT = Multiline Terminal

SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Refer to the Input Data chart above.

2 - 98 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) to customize the
Service Codes which are used for service access. You can customize additional
Service Codes in Programs 11-10, 11-11, and 11-13 through 11-16.

The following chart shows:

The number of each code (01~59).

The function of the Service Code.
The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
The default entry. For example, dialing 705 (code 05) cancels a previously set
Camp-On.
Programs that may be affected with the changing the code.

Input Data

Item Related
No. Item Terminals Default Program

01 Bypass Call MLT, SLT 807 11-16-09

Activating Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override.
This code is available only if you disable the voice
mail Single Digit dialing code in Program 11-16-09.

02 Conference MLT, SLT 826

03 Override (Off-Hook Signaling) MLT, SLT 809

04 Set Camp-On MLT, SLT 850

05 Cancel Camp-On MLT, SLT 870

06 Switching of Voice Call and Signal Call MLT, SLT 812

07 Step Call MLT, SLT 808

08 Barge-In MLT, SLT 810

09 Change to STG (Department Group) All Ring MLT, SLT 780 16-02

10 Station Speed Dialing MLT, SLT 813

Programming Manual 2 - 99
Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Terminals Default
No. Program

11 Group Speed Dialing MLT, SLT 814

12 Last Number Dial MLT, SLT 816

13 Saved Number Dial MLT, SLT 815

14 Trunk Group Access MLT, SLT 804

15 Specified Trunk Access MLT, SLT 805

16 Trunk Access Via Networking MLT, SLT 866

17 Clear Last Number Dialing Data MLT, SLT 876

18 Clear Saved Number Dialing Data MLT, SLT 885

19 Internal Group Paging MLT, SLT 801 31-01-01

20 External Paging MLT, SLT 803

21 Meet-Me Answer to Specified Internal Paging MLT, SLT 864 31-02-01

Group

22 Meet-Me Answer to External Paging MLT, SLT 865

23 Meet-Me Answer in Same Paging Group MLT, SLT 863 31-02-01

24 Combined Paging MLT, SLT 751 31-02-01

31-07

25 Direct Call Pickup - Own Group MLT, SLT 856

26 Call Pickup for Specified Group MLT, SLT 868 23-02

27 Call Pickup MLT, SLT 867 23-02

28 Call Pickup for Another Group MLT, SLT 869 23-02

29 Direct Extension Call Pickup MLT, SLT 715

30 Specified Trunk Answer MLT, SLT 772

31 Park Hold MLT, SLT 831 24-03

32 Answer for Park Hold MLT, SLT 861 24-03

33 Group Hold MLT, SLT 832

34 Answer for Group Hold MLT, SLT 862

35 Station Park Hold MLT, SLT 773

36 Door Box Access MLT, SLT 802

37 Common Canceling Service Code MLT, SLT 720

38 General Purpose Indication MLT 883 15-07-56

15-07-57

2 - 100 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Terminals Default
No. Program

39 --- Not Used ---

40 Station Speed Dialing MLT, SLT 761

41 Voice Over MLT 890 11-16-08

42 Flash on Trunk lines SLT 806

43 Answer No-Ring Line (Universal Answer) MLT, SLT 872 14-05

14-06

44 Callback Test for SLT SLT 899

45 Enabled On Hook When Holding (SLT) SLT 849 15-03-07

46 Answer On Hook When Holding (SLT) SLT 859 15-03-08

47 Call Waiting Answer/Split Answer SLT 894 11-12-03

Splitting (switching) between calls

48 Account Code SLT 891

49 --- Not Used ---

50 General Purpose Relay MLT, SLT 880

51 VM Access (IPK II In-Mail and VMS) MLT, SLT 717

52 Live Monitoring (IPK II In-Mail) MLT 725

53 Live Recording at SLT MLT, SLT 754

54 VRS Routing for ANI/DNIS MLT, SLT 882

Use when setting up ANI/DNIS Routing to the VRS
Automated Attendant. Using the Transfer feature,
this also allows a call to be transferred to the VRS.

55 --- Not Used ---

56 E911 Alarm Shut Off MLT No 21-01-13

Enter the Service Code that an extension user can
Setting 21-01-14
dial to shut off the E911 Alarm Ring.

57 Tandem Trunking MLT, SLT 753

58 Transfer Into Conference MLT, SLT No 20-13-10

Assign the Service Code users dial to Transfer a call
Setting 20-13-15
20-13-16
to a Conference call.

59 Trunk Drop Operation for SLT SLT No

Setting

MLT = Multiline Terminal

SLT = Single Line Telephone

Programming Manual 2 - 101

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Refer to the Input Data chart on the previous pages.

2 - 102 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD) to customize the Service
Codes which are used with the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature. You can
customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-12 and 11-14 ~ 11-16.
The following chart shows:

The number of each code (01~13).

The function of the Service Code.
The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
The default entry.

Input Data

Item Terminals
Item Default
No.

01 ACD Log In/Log Out (for KTS) MLT, SLT 839

02 ACD Log Out (for SLT) SLT 755

03 Set ACD Wrap-Up Time (for SLT) SLT 756

04 Cancel ACD Wrap-Up Time (for SLT) SLT 757

05 Set ACD Off Duty (for SLT) SLT 758

06 Cancel ACD Off Duty (for SLT) SLT 759

07 --- Not Used ---

08 Agent ID Code Login MLT No Setting

Allows an AIC Agent to log into a group.

09 Agent ID Code Logout MLT No Setting

Allows an AIC Agent to log out of a group.

10 ACD Agent Login by Supervisor MLT 767

Allows an ACD Supervisor to log into a group.

11 ACD Agent Logout by Supervisor MLT 768

Allows an ACD Supervisor to log out of a group.

Programming Manual 2 - 103

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item Terminals
Item Default
No.

12 Change Agent ACD Group by Supervisor MLT 769

When using service code 669 to change an agent ACD
group, the supervisor must enter a 2-digit number for
the group. For example, to change to ACD group 4, the
entry would be 669 04.

13 ACD Agent Changing Own ACD Group MLT 775

Using this service code, an ACD Agent can reassign
themselves to another ACD Group.

MLT = Multiline Terminal

SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

2 - 104 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) to customize the Service
Codes which are used with the Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional
Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-13, 11-15 and 11-16. The Service Codes can
only be used at telephones registered as hotel terminals in Program 42-02.

The following chart shows:

The number of each code (01~18).

The function of the Service Code.
The type of telephones that can use the Service Code.
The default entry.

Input Data

Item
Item Terminals Default
No.

01 Set DND for Own Extension MLT, SLT 727

02 Cancel DND for Own Extension MLT, SLT 728

03 Set DND for Other Extension MLT, SLT 729

04 Cancel DND for Other Extension MLT, SLT 730

05 Set Wake Up Call for Own Extension MLT, SLT 731

06 Cancel Wake Up Call for Own Extension MLT, SLT 732

07 Set Wake Up Call for Other Extension MLT, SLT 733

08 Cancel Wake Up Call for Other Extension MLT, SLT 734

09 Set Room to Room Call Restriction MLT, SLT 735

10 Cancel Room to Room Call Restriction (Hotel) MLT, SLT 736

11 Change Toll Restriction Class for Other Extension MLT, SLT 737

12 Check-In MLT, SLT 738

13 Check-Out MLT, SLT 739

Programming Manual 2 - 105

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Terminals Default
No.

14 Room Status Change for Own Extension MLT, SLT 740

15 Room Status Change for Other Extension MLT, SLT 741

16 Room Status Output MLT 742

17 Hotel Room Monitor MLT, SLT 770

18 Set Hotel PMS Code Restriction MLT 766

MLT = Multiline Terminal

SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel

2 - 106 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) to
customize the special access Service Codes which are used by the administrator in
the Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs
11-10 ~ 11-14 and 11-16.

The following chart shows:

The number of each code (01~14).

The function of the Service Code.
What type of telephones can use the Service Code.
The default entry.
Programs that may be affected when changing the code.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Terminals Default
No. Program

01 Remote Maintenance 830

02 ACD Access in Dial-In Conversion Table 860 22-04

22-11

03 Backup Data Save MLT # #9

This option saves the user’s soft key settings
(extension programmed Call Forwards, DND, etc.).
This feature should be used before upgrading the
system software.

04 --- Not Used ---

05 System Programming Mode, Log-On MLT # # 11-01

06 Wake on LAN to APSU Unit MLT No 10-22

Setting

07 --- Not Used ---

08 Network Message Lamp Control No

Setting

Programming Manual 2 - 107

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item Related
Item Terminals Default
No. Program

09 Transfer to Incoming Ring Group No

Setting

10 --- Not Used ---

11 Ethernet Port Reset No

Setting

12 Extension Data Swap MLT No 92-04

Setting

13 Remote Access from DISA No 22-02

Setting

14 Modem Access No
Setting

MLT = Multiline Terminal

SLT = Single Line Telephone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel

2 - 108 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup to customize the one-digit
Service Codes used when a busy or ring back signal is heard. You can customize
additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 ~ 11-15.

The following chart shows:

The number of each code (01~11).
The function of the Service Code.
The default entry. For example, dialing 1 (code 03) when calling an extension
switches the call from either a voice or signal call (depending on how it is currently
defined).
Programs that may be affected by changing these codes.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Default
No. Program

01 Step Call No Setting 11-12-07

02 Barge-In No Setting 11-12-08

03 Switching of Voice/Signal Call 1 11-12-06

04 Intercom Off-Hook Signaling No Setting 11-12-03

05 Camp-On No Setting 11-12-04

06 DND/Call Forward Override Bypass No Setting 11-12-01

07 Message Waiting No Setting 11-12-09

08 Voice Over No Setting 11-12-41

09 Access to Voice Mail No Setting 11-12-51

10 (Department) STG All Ring Mode No Setting 11-12-09

16-01-05

11 Station Park Hold No Setting 11-12-35

Programming Manual 2 - 109

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Refer to the Input Data chart on previous pages.

2 - 110 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number to assign the ACD Master Number for
each ACD Group. This is the number users dial to transfer calls to the ACD Group.
Normally, you should use unassigned extension numbers (e.g., 500) for the master
number. If you want to use an extension number which, by default, has a port number
assigned (for example: in the 101~199, 3101~3257), first remove the default
assignment. For example, to use extension number 125 as an ACD Master Number,
first give extension port 025 a different extension assignment.

Input Data

ACD Group Number 01~64

Item
ACD Group Pilot Number
No.

01 Dial (Up to eight digits)

Default

No ACD Group Pilot Numbers assigned to any ACD Group (1~64).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Multiple Directory Numbers/Call Coverage Keys

Programming Manual 2 - 111

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-19 : Remote Conference Pilot Number Setup to assign the pilot
number to be used for the Remote Conference. This is the number that outside
parties will call in order to connect to a conference.

Input Data

Conference Group Number 1-4

Item Remote Conference Related

Item Default
No. Group Pilot Number Program

01 Maximum Channels Dial (Up to 8 digits) Note) 20-13-46

Set the maximum number of
20-34
channels which can be used with
PRI NetLink.

Note) No Remote Conference Pilot Numbers assigned to any Conference Group (1-4).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Conference, Remote

2 - 112 Program 11 : System Numbering

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 11 : System Numbering

11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 11-20 : Dial Extension Analyze Table to define the dial type based on
three or more digits. This program is only relevant if digits in 11-01-01 are set to 9
(Dial Extension Analyze).

Input Data

Dial Extension Analyze Table 01~128

Item No. Dial Extension Analyze Table

01 Dial (Up to eight digits: 0, 1~9, #, , @)

02 Type of Dials:
0 = Not used
1 = Service Code
2 = Extension Number
5 = Operator Access
6 = F-Route Access

Default

Dial Extension Analyze Tables are not set at default.

Conditions

When the system uses the Dial Extension Analyze Table to determine the dial
type, the lower table has priority. For example, if Table 1 has 211 defined and
Table 2 has 2113 defined, Table 1 is used to determine the dial type.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 113

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2 - 114 Program 11 : System Numbering

 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup to set up the Night Mode
options. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range
and default setting. Program
Input Data

Item
No.
01
Item

Manual Night
Input Data

0 = Off
Default

1
Description

Allows or prevents activating

Related
Program
11-10-01
12
Mode Switching 1 = On Night Service by dialing a
service code.
02 Automatic Night 0 = Off 1 According to a preset 12-02
Mode Switching 1 = On schedule, enable or disable 12-03
Automatic Night Service for 12-04
the system.
03 Night mode 0 = Not used 0 Use this option to set the
switch operating 1 - 8 (Operation operation mode of the CPU
mode Night Service mode switch
Mode1 - 8)
sensors (external Night
Mode Selector Switch). The
Night Service mode affects
trunk inbound and outbound
routing.
04 General Purpose 0 = Not used 0 Set the detection circuit of
Contact Detector 1 - 1 = Detector the general purpose relay of
Number the 2PGDAD when
switching night mode
(Program 10-41).
Even if the operation mode is changed manually, the operation mode changes according to the
schedule set up.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service

Programming Manual 2 - 115

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns to define the daily pattern
of the Automatic Mode Switching. Each Mode Group has 10 patterns. These patterns
are used in Programs 12-03 and 12-04. The daily pattern consists of 20 timer settings.

Input Data

Night Mode Service Group Number 01~32

Time Pattern Number 01~10

Set Time Number 01~20

Item Description Input Data

01 Start Time 0000~2359

02 End Time 0000~2359

03 Operation Mode 1~8

Example:
Time Pattern 1
0:00 9:00 12:00 13:00 17:00 18:00 22:00 0:00
Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode 4 Mode 1 Mode 4 Mode 2 Mode 3
(midnight) (day) (rest) (day) (rest) (night) (midnight)

To make the above schedule, it is necessary to set the data as follows:

Time setting 01: 00:00 to 09:00 Mode 3 (midnight)
Time setting 02: 09:00 to 12:00 Mode 1 (day)
Time setting 03: 12:00 to 13:00 Mode 4 (rest)
Time setting 04: 13:00 to 17:00 Mode 1 (day)
Time setting 05: 17:00 to 18:00 Mode 4 (rest)
Time setting 06: 18:00 to 22:00 Mode 2 (night)
Time setting 07: 22:00 to 00:00 Mode 3 (midnight)

2 - 116 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Time Pattern 2
0:00 0:00
Mode 2
(night)

Time setting 01: 00:00 to 00:00 Mode 2 (night)

Default
All groups, all patterns : 00:00 to 00:00 = Mode 1
Time Pattern 1
Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode
01 0000 0800 2
02 0800 1700 1
03 1700 0000 2
04 0000 0000 1
: : : :
20 0000 0000 1

Time Pattern 2
Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode
01 0000 0000 2
02 0000 0000 1
: : : :
20 0000 0000 1

Time Pattern 3~10

Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode
01 0000 0000 1
: : : :
20 0000 0000 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service

Programming Manual 2 - 117

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching to define a weekly schedule
of night-switch settings.

Input Data

Night Mode Service Group Number 01~32

Time Schedule
Item No. Day of the Week
Pattern Number

01 = Sunday
02 = Monday
03 = Tuesday
01 04 = Wednesday 0~10
05 = Thursday
06 = Friday
07 = Saturday

Default

Time Schedule
Day of the Week
Pattern Number

01 = Sunday 2

02 = Monday 1

03 = Tuesday 1

04 = Wednesday 1

05 = Thursday 1

06 = Friday 1

07 = Saturday 2

2 - 118 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service

Programming Manual 2 - 119

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching to define a yearly schedule
of holiday night-switch settings. This schedule is used for the setting of special days
when the company is expected to be closed, such as a national holiday.

Input Data

Night Mode Service Group Number 01~32

Item
Days and Months Time Pattern Number
No.

01 0101~1231 0~10
(e.g. 0101 = Jan. 1; 1231 = Dec. 31) (0 = No Setting)

Default

No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service

2 - 120 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions to a assign
Day/Night Mode Group for each extension.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item Night Mode Service

Default
No. Group Number

01 01~32 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service

Programming Manual 2 - 121

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks to assign a Day/
Night Mode Group for each trunk port.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Night Mode Service

Default
No. Group Number

01 01~32 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service

2 - 122 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode to make an original text message
which is displayed on an LCD of Multiline telephone in each Mode.

Input Data

Night Mode Service Group Number 01~32

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Text Message

No.

01 Maximum 12 Characters
(alphabetic or numeric)

Default

Mode 1 = No setting

Mode 2 = <Night>

Mode 3 = <Midnight>

Mode 4 = <Rest>

Mode 5 = <Day2>

Mode 6 = <Night2>

Mode 7 = <Midnight2>

Mode 8 = <Rest2>

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service

Programming Manual 2 - 123

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

12-08 : Night Mode Service Range
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 12-08 : Night Mode Service Range to define the changing range of
toggle key for each Day/Night Mode.

Input Data

Night Mode Service Group Number 01~32

Item No. Range

01 2~8
(default = 2)

Example:

When Program 12-08 is set to 3 and the Mode Key is pressed (SC 851, 09 +0), the
following modes are switched:

Press once = Night

Press twice = Mid-night
Press third = Day
Default = 2

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service

2 - 124 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup

 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-01 : Speed Dialing Option Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 13-01 : Speed Dialing Function Setup to define the Speed Dialing
functions.
Program

Input Data

Item
No.
Item Input Data Default
Related
Program 13
01 Speed Dialing Auto Outgoing 0 = Trunk 0 13-05
Call Mode Outgoing
Set where the Speed Dial bins Mode
will use Trunk Routing (0) or 1 = Intercom
dial the bin as though it is an Outgoing
Intercom number (1). Mode

02 --- Not Used ---

03 Number of Common Speed 0~2000 1000 13-04

Dialing Bins
0 = No Common
Assign the number of Speed Speed
Dial bins that will be used for Dialing
System Speed Dials.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Speed Dial – System/Group/Station

Programming Manual 2 - 125

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 13-02 : Group Speed Dialing Bins to define the range of bin numbers to
be used by each Speed Dialing group. (Refer to 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group
Assignment for Extensions).

Input Data

Item Speed Dialing Start Address of End Address of

No. Group Number Speed Dialing Bin Speed Dialing Bin

01 01~64 0~1990 0, 9~1999

Default

No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Speed Dial – System/Group/Station

2 - 126 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 13-03 : Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions to assign
Speed Dialing Group for each extension. There are 64 available Speed Dialing
groups.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to 8 digits

Item No. Group Number Default Value

01 01~64 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Speed Dial – System/Group/Station

Programming Manual 2 - 127

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name
Level:
SB

Description
Use Program 13-04 : Speed Dialing Number and Name to store Speed Dialing data
in the Speed Dialing areas. This program is also used to define the names assigned
to the Speed Dialing numbers.

Input Data

Speed Dialing Bin Number 0~1999

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Speed Dialing Data 1~9, 0, , #, No

Pause (Press line key 1), Setting
Recall/Flash (Press line key
2),
@ = Code to wait for answer
supervision in ISDN (Press
line key 3)
(max. 24 digits)

02 Name Maximum 12 Characters No

(Use dial pad to enter name) Setting

03 Transfer Mode 0 = Not Used 0

1 = Internal Dial
2 = Incoming Ring Group
(IRG)

04 Transfer Destination Number If Transfer mode is (Refer to No 13-04-03

13-04-03): Setting

1 = Internal Dial Mode

1~9, 0, , #, P, R, @
(Maximum 24 Characters)

2 = Incoming Ring Group

0 ~ 100 (IRG Number)
P=Pause
R=Recall
@= Additional Digits when
using ISDN functionality

2 - 128 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

05 Incoming Ring Pattern Incoming Ring Pattern 0 13-04-03

0 = Normal Pattern
1 ~ 4 = Tone Pattern (1~4)
5 ~ 9 = Scale Pattern (1~5)

06 CR/PR feature 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Speed Dial – System/Group/Station

Programming Manual 2 - 129

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-05 : Speed Dial Trunk Group
Level:
SB

Description
Use Program 13-05 : Speed Dialing Trunk Group to define the trunk group to be
seized for each Speed Dialing number.

If this program has an entry of ‘0’ (no setting), then seizing a line follows the trunk
access group routing of the caller’s extension (refer to Program 14-06). This setting is
available only in External Speed Dialing Mode (Program 13-01-01).

Input Data

Speed Dialing Bin Number 0~1999

Item No. Trunk Group Number

01 0~100

Default

No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Speed Dial – System/Group/Station

2 - 130 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-07 : Telephone Book Dial Number and Name
Level:
SB

Description
Use Program 13-07 : Telephone Book Dial Number and Name to set up the dial
number and name of each Telephone Book Number.

Input Data

Telephone Book Number 0~100

Memory Number 0~299

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program

01 Speed Dialing Data 1~9, 0, , #, No

Pause (Press line key 1), Setting
Recall/Flash (Press line key
2),
@ = Code to wait for answer
supervision in ISDN (Press
line key 3)
(max. 24 digits)

02 Name Maximum 12 Characters No

(Use dial pad to enter name) Setting

04 Group Number 1~20 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 131

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-08 : Telephone Book System Name
Level:
SB

Description
Use Program 13-08 : Telephone Book System Name to set up the name of the
Telephone Book.

Input Data

Telephone Book Number 0~100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Telephone Book Name Up to six characters No

Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 132 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-09 : Telephone Book Group Name
Level:
SB

Description
Use Program 13-09 : Telephone Book Group Name to set up the group name of
the Telephone Book.

Input Data

Telephone Book Number 0~100

Item No. Group Number

01 0~20

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Group Name Up to 12 characters 1 = Group 01

2 = Group 02
3 = Group 03
:
:
:
20 = Group 20

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 133

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

13-10 : Telephone Book Routing
Level:
SB

Description
Use Program 13-10 : Telephone Book Routing to set up outgoing mode when using
the Telephone Book. Trunk outgoing mode follows Program 14-06 setting.

Input Data

Telephone Book Number 0~100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Outgoing Mode 0 = Trunk Outgoing 0

1 = Intercom Outgoing

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 134 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing

 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup
14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for
each trunk port. Refer to the chart below for a description of each option, its
range and default setting. Program

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

14
Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Trunk Name Up to 12 Characters Line 001

Set the names for
Line 002
Line 003
trunks. The trunk :
name displays on a Line 200
multiline terminal for
incoming and
outgoing calls.

02 Transmit Level 1~63 32 (0dB)

Use this option to (-15.5dB~
select the CODEC +15.5dB in 0.5dB
gain for the trunk. The intervals)
option sets the gain
(signal amplification)
for the trunk you are
programming.

03 Receive Level 1~63 32 (0dB)

Use this option to (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB
select the CODEC in 0.5dB intervals)
gain for the trunk. The
option sets the gain
(signal amplification)
for the trunk you are
programming.

Programming Manual 2 - 135

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

04 Transmit Gain Level 1~63 32 (0dB)

for Conference and
Transfer Calls
(-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB
in 0.5dB intervals)
Use this option to
select the CODEC
gain type used by the
trunk when it is part of
an Unsupervised
Conference.

05 Receive Gain Level 1~63 16 (-8dB)

for Conference and
Transfer Calls
(-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB
in 0.5dB intervals)
Use this option to
select the CODEC
gain type used by the
trunk when it is part of
an Unsupervised
Conference.

06 SMDR Printout 0 = No Print Out 0 35-01

Use this option to 1 = Prints Out 35-02
have the system
include/exclude the
trunk you are
programming from the
SMDR printout. Refer
to Program 35-01 and
35-02 for SMDR
printout options.

07 Outgoing Calls 0 = Deny (No) 1

Use this option to 1 = Allow (Yes)
allow/prevent
outgoing calls on the
trunk you are
programming.

08 Toll Restriction 0 = Restriction 1 21-04

Use this option to Disabled (No) 21-05
enable/disabled Toll 1 = Restriction 21-06
Restriction for the Enabled (Yes)
trunk. If enabled, the
trunk follows Toll
Restriction
programming
(example: Programs
21-05, 21-06). If
disabled, the trunk is
a toll free line.

2 - 136 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

09 Private Line 0 = Disable 0

Private Line
(Normal)
1 = Enable Private
Line (Private
Line)

10 DTMF Tones for 0 = Disable (No) 0

Outgoing Calls
1 = Enable (Yes)
Use this option to
enable (1) or disable
(0) DTMF tones for
outgoing trunk calls.

11 Account Code 0 = Disable (No) 1

Required
1 = Enable (Yes)

12 --- Not Used ---

13 Trunk-to-Trunk 0 = Disable (No) 0

Transfer
1 = Enable (Yes)
Use this option to
enable (1) or disable
(0) loop supervision
for the trunk. This
option is required for
Call Forwarding
Off-Premise and
Tandem Trunking
only.

14 Long Conversation 0 = Disable (No) 0 20-21-03

Cutoff
1 = Enable (Yes) 20-21-04
Use this option to
enable or disable the
Long Conversation
Cutoff feature for
each trunk.

15 Long Conversation 0 = Disable (No) 0 20-21-01

Alarm Before Cutoff
1 = Enable (Yes) 20-21-02
Use this option to
enable or disable the
Long Conversation
Alarm for each trunk.

Programming Manual 2 - 137

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

16 Forced Release of 0 = Disable (No) 0 24-01-01

Held Call
1 = Enable (Yes) 24-01-05
Use this option to
enable/disable forced
release for calls on
Hold. If enabled, the
system disconnects a
call if it is on Hold
longer than a
programmed interval
(Program 24-01-05).
If disabled, forced
disconnection does
not occur. Program
24-01-01 also affects
this option.

17 Trunk to Trunk 0 = Disable (No) 0

Warning Tone for
Long Conversation
1 = Enable (Yes)
Alarm
Use this option to
enable or disable the
Warning Tone for
Long Conversation
feature for DISA
callers.

18 Warning Beep Tone 0 = Disable (No) 0

Signaling
1 = Enable (Yes)

19 Privacy Mode 0 = Disable (No) 0

Toggle Option
1 = Enable (Yes)
Use this option to
enable or disable a
trunk ability to be
switched from private
to non-private mode
by pressing the line
key or Privacy
Release function key.

2 - 138 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

20 Block Outgoing 0 = Disable (No) 0 14-01-21

Caller ID
1 = Enable (Yes)
Allow (1) or prevent
(0) the system from
automatically blocking
outgoing Caller ID
information when a
user places a call. If
allowed (i.e. block,
enabled), the system
automatically inserts
the Caller ID block
code (defined in
14-01-21) before the
user dialed digits.

21 Caller ID Block Code Dial (up to eight No Setting 14-01-20

Enter the code, up to digits)
8 digits, that should
be used as the Caller
ID Block Code. This
code is automatically
inserted before dialed
digits if Program
14-01-20 is set to 1.

22 Caller ID to Voice 0 = Disable (No) 0

Mail
1 = Enable (Yes)
Enable or disable the
system ability to send
the Caller ID digits
(Remote Log-On
Protocol) to voice
mail.

23 Least Cost Routing 0 = LCR Off 0

1 = LCR On
2 = LCR On (Cost
Center Code
only)

24 Trunk-to-Trunk 0 = Disable (No) 0

Outgoing Caller ID
through Mode
1 = Enable (Yes)

Enable (1) or Disable

(0) the ability to send
the original Caller ID
through when the call
is Forward Off-
Premise.

Programming Manual 2 - 139

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

25 Continued/ 0 = Disable (No) 0 20-28-01

Discontinued
Trunk-to-Trunk
1 = Enable (Yes) 20-28-02
Conversation 20-28-03
Enable (1) or Disable 24-02-07
(0) the ability to dial a 24-02-10
service code code to
continue or 25-07-07
disconnect the 25-07-08
Trunk-to-Trunk
conversation after the
alert tone is heard.

26 Automatic 0 = Normal Transfer 0 24-02-11

Trunk-to-Trunk (Normal)
Transfer Mode 24-02-12
1 = Step Transfer
(Step)

27 Caller ID Refuse 0 = Disable (No) 0

Setup 1 = Enable (Yes)

28 Effectivity of 0 = No Effect (No) 1 15-12

“Conversation 1 = Available (Yes)
Recording
Destination for
Extension”

30 Flexible Ringing by 0 = Disable (No) 1 13-04

Caller ID 1 = Enable (Yes)

32 Anti-trombone 0 = No Effect (No) 0

Function 1 = Available (Yes)

Default

Trunk Port
Name
Number

1 Line 001

2 Line 002

: :

200 Line 200

2 - 140 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Refer to features in the Input Data table.

Programming Manual 2 - 141

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-02 : Analog Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each
analog trunk port. Refer to the table below for a description of each option, its range
and default setting.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Signaling Type (DP/DTMF) 0 = Dial Pulse (10 2

This option sets the signaling type for PPS)
the trunk. 1 = Dial Pulse (20
PPS)
2 = DTMF

02 Ring Detect Type 0 = Normal/delayed 0

This option sets Extended Ring Detect 1 = Immediate
or Immediate Ring Detect for the trunk. Ringing
For T1 loop/ground start trunks, this
option must be set to 1 for the trunks to
ring and light correctly.

03 Flash Type 0 = Open Loop Flash 0

This option selects the flash type (open 1 = Ground
loop flash or ground). Always set this
option for open loop flash.

04 Hooking Type 0 = Timed Flash 0 81-10-07

This option lets you use Flash for (Hooking) 81-10-08
Timed Flash (Program 81-01-14) or 1 = Disconnect (Cut)
Disconnect (Program 81-01-15). (A
user implements Flash by pressing the
FLASH key while on a trunk call.)

05 Dial Tone Detection for Manually 0 = Dial Tone 1 21-01-04

Accessed Trunks Detection Not
Use this option enable/disable dial tone Used
detection for directly accessed trunks. 1 = Dial Tone
If disabled, the system outdials on the Detection Used
trunks without monitoring for dial tone.

2 - 142 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

06 Pause at 1st Digit after Line Seize in 0 = No Pause (No) 1 21-01-06

Manual Dial Mode
1 = Pause (Yes)

07 DP to DTMF Conversion Options 0 = Automatic 2 21-01-03

Determine how a user can convert a 1 = Automatic and
Dial Pulse (DP) call to a DTMF call. For Manual
each trunk, set the type of DP to DTMF 2 = Manual
conversion required. There are three
conversion options: Automatic (0),
Automatic and Manual (1), or Manual
(2).
Automatic:
DP to DTMF conversion occurs
automatically if the extension user
waits more than 10 seconds before
dialing the next digit.
Automatic and Manual:
DP to DTMF conversion occurs
automatically if the extension user
waits more than 10 seconds before
dialing the next digit. In addition, the
user can dial # to switch a DP trunk to
DTMF dialing.
Manual:
Users can dial # to switch a DP trunk
to DTMF dialing.

08 Answering Condition 0 = Polarity 1 21-01-03

Reversing
(Polarity)
1 = Polarity
Reversing or
Timer (Int Digit)

09 Busy Tone Detection 0 = Disable (No) 0

1 = Enable (Yes)

10 Caller ID 0 = No 0
Enable or disable a trunk to receive 1 = Yes
Caller ID information.

11 Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone 0 = Disable (No) 0

Use this option to enable/disable the 1 = Enable (Yes)
system ability to skip over a trunk if dial
tone is not detected. This option
pertains to calls placed using Speed
Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial or
Save Number dialed. It does not
pertain to line key or Direct Trunk
Access calls.

12 Detect Network Disconnect Signal 0 = Disable (No) 0

1 = Enable (Yes)

Programming Manual 2 - 143

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

13 Trunk-to-Trunk Limitation 0 = Disable (No) 0

1 = Enable (Yes)

14 Loop Start/Ground Start 0 = Loop Start (Loop) 0

1 = Ground Start
(Ground)

16 Caller ID Type 0 = FSK 0

1 = DTMF

17 Sync. Ringing 0 = Disable 0

Use this to specify whether or not CO/ 1 = Enable
PBX calls follow Synchronous Ringing.
Synchronous Ringing does not
apply to incoming DID calls,
off-hook ringing calls, or CO/
PBX ring transfer calls.

18 Busy Tone Detection on Talking 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

19 Busy Tone Detection Frequency 1~255 1 14-02-18

20 Busy Tone Detection Interval 0 = No 0 14-10

1 = Yes

21 Fax Branch Connection 0 = No 0

1 = Yes

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 144 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-04 : Behind PBX Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-04 : Behind PBX Setup to indicate if the trunk is installed behind a
PBX. There is one item for each mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 1~200

Item Day/Night Related

Type of Connection Default
No. Mode Program

01 1~8 0 = Stand Alone (Trunk) 0 22-02

1 = Behind PBX (PBX)
2 = Not Used
3 = CTX assume 9

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Placing

Programming Manual 2 - 145

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-05 : Trunk Group
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-05 : Trunk Group to assign trunks to Trunk Groups. You can also
assign the outbound priority for trunks within the group. When users dial up the trunk
group, they seize the trunks in the order you specify in the outbound priority entry.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item No. Trunk Group Number Priority Number

01 0~100 1~200

Default

Trunk Port Group Priority

1 1 1

: : :

200 1 200

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Trunk Groups

2 - 146 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-06 : Trunk Group Routing
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing to set up an outbound routing table for
the trunk groups you assigned in Program 14-05. When users dial 9, the system
routes their calls in the order (priority) specified. For example, if a user dials 9 and all
calls in the first group are busy, the system may route the call to another group. Trunk
Access Map programming (Programs 14-07) may limit this option. The system
contains 100 routing tables for trunk access. Each table has four priority orders for
trunk access. There are 100 available Trunk Group Numbers.

Example for setting:

With less than four trunk groups,

Route Number 1 : Order 1 – Trunk Group 1
: Order 2 – Trunk Group 2
For the above setting, if all the lines in trunk group 1 are busy, the system searches
for an idle line in trunk group 2.

With more than four trunk groups,

Route Number 1 : Order 1 – Trunk Group 1
: Order 2 – Trunk Group 2
: Order 3 – Trunk Group 3
: Order 4 – 1002 (Jump To Route Number 2)
Route Number 2 : Order 1 – Trunk Group 4
: Order 2 – Trunk Group 5
For the above setting, if all the lines in the trunk groups 1, 2 and 3 are busy, the
system searches for an idle line in trunk groups 4 and 5.

Programming Manual 2 - 147

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Route Table Number 001~100

Item Priority Order Related

Input Data
No. Number Program

01 1~4 0 = Not set 14-01-07

001-100 = Trunk group No. 14-05
101-150 = 100+Networking System No. 15-01-02
1001-1100 = 1000+Route Table No. 21-02

Default

Route 1, Order Number 1 = 1 (Trunk Group 1).

Order Numbers 2, 3, 4 = 0 (Not Specified).

All Other Routes (2~100) and Order Numbers (1~4) = 0 (Not Specified).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 148 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup to set up the Trunk Access Maps.
This sets an extension access options for trunks. For example, an extension can only
place outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access. There are 200 Access
Maps with all 200 trunk ports programmed in Map 1 with full access.

An extension can use one of the maps you set up in this program. Use Program 15-06
to assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions. Each trunk can have one of eight access
options for each Access Map.

911 calls will override Program 14-07 settings.

Input Data

Access Map Number 001~200

Item Trunk Port

Input Data
No. Number

01 001~200 0 = No access
1 = Outgoing access only
2 = Incoming access only
3 = Access only when trunk on Hold
4 = Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold
5 = Incoming access and access when trunk on Hold
6 = Incoming and Outgoing access
7 = Incoming access, outgoing access and access when trunk
on Hold

Default

Access Map 1 = Trunk Ports 1-200 assigned with option ‘7’ access (incoming
and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold).

Access Maps 2-200 - Trunk Ports 1-200 assigned with option ‘0’ access (no
access).

Programming Manual 2 - 149

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing

2 - 150 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks to define a Music on Hold
source for a trunk as either the ACI or COI port.

If ACI is selected as the source in Item 1, the port number for the source must be
selected in Item 2.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 MOH Type 0 = Internal synthesized/external MOH 0

Select a Music on Hold source 1 = A customer-provided source connected to
for the trunk. BGM port
2 = A customer-provided source connected to
ACI port
02 Source Port Number If the MOH Type is 2, the source port number 0
is 0~96.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Music on Hold

Programming Manual 2 - 151

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks to set the
ACI Conversation Recording destination for each trunk.

If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program
15-12 is followed.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 ACI Recording Destination Extension Number Maximum eight digits No Setting

Enter the ACI extension number where the trunk
calls should be recorded.

02 ACI Automatic Recording for Incoming Calls 0 = Off 0

Determine if incoming trunk calls should be 1 = On
automatically recorded in the ACI.

04 Automatic Recording for Outgoing Call 0 = Off 0

1 = On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

2 - 152 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-11 : ID Setup for IP Trunk to set the ID of each IP Trunk. This
program refers to incoming and outgoing IP Trunk calls. The ID is sent on an outgoing
IP Trunk call. This program is used only for H.323.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 IP Trunk ID 0~65535 0
(0 = No setting)

Conditions

This Data is referred to at IP trunk outgoing call, or IP trunk incoming call.

This ID is notified at IP trunk outgoing call.

It is not notified when ID is 0.

Incoming Call arrives to the trunk port of the same ID as ID notified from the
partner system.

Feature Cross Reference

IP Trunk – H.323

Programming Manual 2 - 153

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-12 : SIP Register ID Setup for IP Trunk to define the SIP Register
ID for IP Trunks.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Register ID 0 ~ 31 0
02 Pilot Register ID 0 ~ 31 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 154 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-13 : CCIS System Route ID
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-13 : CCIS System Route ID to define the CCIS route ID to the trunk
group used for K-CCIS.

Input Data

Trunk Group Number 001~100

Trunk
Item Related
Group Input Data Default
No. Program
Number

01 001~100 0 = Not Assigned 0 14-05-01

1 ~ 8 =CCIS Route IDs 50-02-01
50-02-02
CCIS Route IDs 5~ 8 are for 50-02-03
future use and should not be 50-02-04
used. 50-02-05
50-02-06

Conditions

Not used for IP-CCIS

Feature Cross Reference

Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)

Programming Manual 2 - 155

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-14 : CCIS Trunk CIC Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-14 : CCIS Trunk CIC Assignment to define the CIC (Circuit
Identifier Code) to each voice channel (trunk port) used for K-CCIS.

Input Data

Trunk Group Number 001 ~ 200

Item Related
Trunk Group Number Input Data Default
No. Program

01 001~200 0 = Not Assigned 0 14-05-01

1~127 = CIC Numbers

Conditions

CIC Numbers must be assigned consecutively for K-CCIS to operate correctly.

The D-Channel trunk port should not have a CIC assignment.

This is not used for IP-CCIS.

Feature Cross Reference

Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS)

2 - 156 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-15 : ISDN Call Forward Method
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-15 : ISDN Call Forward Method to assign the activation of Call
Deflection/ Call Rerouting feature.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 200

Item Related
Trunk Group Number Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Set the activation of Call 0: Normal operation 0 13-04-06

Deflection/ Call 1: Call Rerouting
Rerouting feature. 2: Call Deflection

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 157

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

14-16 : ISDN Call Transfer Method
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 14-16 : ISDN Call Transfer Method to assign the method of ECT
supplementary service. This mode will control behavior of FLASH operation at the
station which is being grab ISDN trunk.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001 ~ 200

Item
Trunk Group Number Input Data Default
No.

01 Set the method of ECT 0: Original 0

supplementary service. 1: Implicit
2: ECT
3: Explicit ECT

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 158 Program 14 : Trunk, Basic Setup

 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup
15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup to define the basic
settings for each extension.
Program
Input Data

15
Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Item Input Data Default

Related
No. Program

01 Extension Name Up to 12 Characters Ext.200 =

Define the extension/virtual STA 200
extension name. Ext.201 =
STA 201,
etc

02 Outgoing Trunk Line 0 = Off 0 14-06

Preference 21-02
1 = On
Use this option to set the
extension outgoing Trunk Line
Preference. If enabled, the
extension user receives trunk
dial tone when they lift the
handset. The user hears trunk
dial tone only if allowed by
Trunk Access Map
programming (Programs 14-07
and 15-06). Refer to the Line
Preference feature for more
details.

03 SMDR Printout 0 = Do not print on 1

Use this option to include or SMDR report
exclude the extension in the 1 = Include on
SMDR report. SMDR report

Programming Manual 2 - 159

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

04 ISDN Caller ID 0 = Disable 1 10-03-05

If both Program 15-01-04 and 1 = Enable 20-08-13
10-03-05 are enabled, the
system includes Caller ID in
the Setup message as
Presentation Allowed. If these
options are disabled, it is
Presentation Restricted.

05 Restriction for Outgoing 0 = No 0 21-01-15

Disable on Incoming Line 21-01-16
1 = Yes
Enable or disable supervised 21-01-17
dial detection for an extension.
80-03-01

07 Do-Not-Call 0 = Off 0 21-01-19

1 = On

08 Call Attendant Busy 0~100 0 11-11-59

Message 40-10-08
(0 = No setting)

09 Call Attendant Answer 0~100 0 11-11-60

Message 40-10-09
(0 = No setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 160 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 15-02 : Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various
Multiline telephone options.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Display Language Selection 0 = Japanese 1 11-11-13

(To select options 8~10, press 1 = English
either 8 or Recall, then press line 2 = German
keys 1~3. Key 1 is option 8, Key 2 3 = French
is option 9, and Key 3 is option 10.) 4 = Italian
5 = Spanish
6 = Dutch
7 = Portuguese
8 = Norwegian
9 = Danish
10 = Swedish
11 = Turkish
12 = Latin American Spanish
13 = Romanian
14 = Polish

02 Trunk Ring Tone 1 = High 2 22-03

Use this option to set the tone 2 = Medium
(pitch) of the incoming trunk ring for 3 = Low
the extension port you are 4 = Ring Tone 1
programming. 5 = Ring Tone 2
DTU/DTP-style telephones only 6 = Ring Tone 3
follow high, medium and low 7 = Ring Tone 4
range ring tone settings. They do
8 = Ring Tone 5
not follow Melodies.

Programming Manual 2 - 161

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

03 Extension Ring Tone 1 = High 8

Use this option to set the tone 2 = Medium
(pitch) of the incoming extension 3 = Low
call ring for the extension port you 4 = Ring Tone 1
are programming. Also refer to 5 = Ring Tone 2
Program 15-08.
6 = Ring Tone 3
DTU/DTP style telephones only 7 = Ring Tone 4
follow high, medium and low
8 = Ring Tone 5
range ring tone settings. They do
not follow Melodies.

04 Redial (Speed Dial) Control 0 = Common and Individual 0

Use this option to control the Speed Dialing
function of the extension Redial 1 = Group Speed Dialing
key when used with Speed Dialing.
The Redial key can access either
the Common or Group Speed
Dialing numbers.

05 Transfer Key Operation Mode 0 = Transfer 0

Use this option to set the operating 1 = Call back
mode of the extension CONF key. 2 = Hook
The keys can be for Call Transfer,
Serial Calling or Flash. When
selecting the Flash option
(selection 2), refer also to Program
81-01-14.

06 Hold Key Operating Mode 0 = Normal (Common) 0

Use this option to set the function 1 = Exclusive Hold
of the Multiline Hold key. The Hold 2 = Park Hold
key can activate normal Hold or
Exclusive Hold.

07 Automatic Hold for CO Lines 0 = Hold 1

When talking on a CO call and 1 = Disconnect (Cut)
another CO line key is pressed, the
original trunk is placed on Hold (0)
or Disconnected (1).

08 Automatic Handsfree 0 = Preselect 1

Use this option to set whether 1 = One-Touch (Automatic
pressing a key accesses a Handsfree)
One-Touch Key or if it preselects
the key.

10 Ringing Line Preference for 0 = Idle (Off) 1

Trunk Calls
1 = Ringing (On)
Use this option to select between
Idle and Ringing Line Preference
for trunk calls.

2 - 162 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

11 Callback Automatic Answer 0 = Off 1

Use this option to enable or disable 1 = On
automatic answer of calls recalling
to a station. For example, if a
Transfer Recall or Hold Recall is
ringing back to a station, the
following happens:
If PRG 15-02-11 is enabled, the
station will automatically answer
the recall when it goes off-hook.
If PRG 15-02-11 is disabled, a
station will not automatically
answer the recall when it goes
off-hook. The user must first press
the line appearance of the recalling
call or press the answer key.

12 Off-Hook Ringing 0 = Muted Off-Hook 0

Use this option to set the telephone Ringing
Off-Hook signaling. Off-hook 1 = No Off-Hook Ringing
signaling occurs when a telephone 2 = Not Used
user receives a second call while 3 = Beep in Speaker (SP)
busy on a handset call. To enable/ 4 = Beep in Handset (HS)
disable Off-Hook Signaling for an
extension Class of Service, use
5 = Speaker & Handset
Program 20-13-06. Beep

13 Redial List Mode 0 = ICM/Trunk (Extension/ 1

Select whether the Redial List Trunk Mode)
feature should store internal and 1 = Trunk Mode
external numbers (0), or only
external numbers (1).

15 Storage of Caller-ID for 0 = Disable (Off) 1

answered call
1 = Enable (On)

16 Handsfree Operation 0 = Disable (Off) 1

Enable or disable an extension 1 = Enable (On)
ability to use the speakerphone on
outside calls. When disabled,
users can hear the conversation,
but cannot respond handsfree.

18 Power-Saving Mode 0 = Normal mode 1 20-02-10

1 = Power-Saving Mode
(Eco-Mode)

19 CTA Data Communication Mode 0 = CTI Mode 0 15-02-20

Select 0 if the dip switch settings 1 = Non Procedural Mode
on the CTA Adapter are set to PC (Non-SCS)
connection (1=on, 2~8=off) or
select 1 if the DIP switches are set
to printer connection (1~2=on,
3~8=off).

Programming Manual 2 - 163

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

20 Baud Rate for CTA Port 0 = 4800 2 15-02-19

Select the baud rate to be used by 1 = 9600
the CTA Adapter. 2 = 19200

21 Virtual Extension Access Mode 0 = DSS 2

(when idle Virtual Extension key 1 = Outgoing (OTG)
pressed)
2 = Ignore
Determine whether a Virtual
Extension/Call Arrival Key(CAR)
should function as a DSS key, a
Virtual Extension, or a CAR key.
When DSS (0) is selected, the key
functions as a DSS key to the
extension and for incoming calls to
that extension. When Outgoing (1)
is selected, the key functions as a
virtual extension and can be used
for incoming and outgoing calls.
When Ignore (2) is selected, the
key functions as a CAR key and
can receive incoming calls only.

22 Multiple Incoming From 0 = Disable 1 22-01-01

Intercom and Trunk
1 = Enable
If enabled, this affects how a
Hotline key lights, based on the
setting in Program 22-01-01. If
22-01-01 is set to 1 for trunk
priority, the Hotline key lights solid
when a trunk call rings in. If
22-01-01 is set to 0 for intercom
priority, the Hotline key does not
light for incoming trunk calls, but
lights solid for intercom calls.
If 15-02-22 is disabled, Hotline
keys light solid for any incoming
calls regardless of the setting in
Program 22-01-01.

23 Speed Dial Preview Mode 0 = Preview 0

This option defines how a speed 1 = Outgoing Immediately
dial key functions when pressed. If
set to Preview (0), the speed dial
number can be previewed before
dialing. If set to Outgoing
Immediate (1), the number is dialed
immediately.

2 - 164 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

24 Conference Key Mode 0 = Conference 0

This option allows an extension 1 = Transfer
Conf key to be programmed for
Conference or for Transfer. When
set for Transfer (1), the user places
a call on hold, dials the extension
to which it should be transferred,
then presses the Conf key. The call
is then transferred. When set for
Conference (0), with an active call,
the user presses the Conf key,
places a second call, then presses
the Conf key twice. All the calls are
then connected.

26 MSG Key Operation Mode 0 = Message Key 0

Determine whether an extension 1 = Voice Mail Key
MSG key should function as a
Message key or Voice Mail key. If
set as a Message key, users can
press the key to call the voice mail
only when they have new
messages.

27 Handset Volume 0 = Back to Default (Back) 1

Determine how an extension 1 = Stay at previous level
handset volume is set after it is (Stay)
adjusted during a call.
When 1 is assigned in this
program and a user sets the
volume to maximum, the volume
is reset to a level to meet FCC
standards when the user hangs
up.

28 Message Waiting Lamp Color 0 = Green 0 15-02-35

Determine whether an extension 1 = Red 15-02-36
15-02-37
Message Waiting Lamp lights 15-02-38
Green (0) or Red (1) when a
message is received.

29 PB Back Tone Level 1~63 (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB) 32

This program allows adjustment of
(0dB)
the PB Back Tone Level when you
are calling an ISDN Line.

30 Toll Restriction Class 0 = Vir. Ext. (Virtual 1

Select the Toll Restriction Class to Extension Class)
be used when placing a call from a 1 = Real Ext. (Real
virtual extension. Extension Class)

Programming Manual 2 - 165

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

34 Call Register Mode 0 = Trunk Mode 0

The Caller ID Scroll stores Trunk 1 = Extension/Trunk Mode
calls only (0), or both Internal and
Trunk calls (1).

35 Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for 1 = Cycle 1 7 15-02-28

Calling Extension 15-02-36
2 = Cycle 2
Select the cycle method that the 15-02-37
3 = Cycle 3 15-02-38
Large LED flashes when the 4 = Cycle 4
extension has set Message
5 = Cycle 5
Waiting.
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7

36 Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for 1 = Cycle 1 3 15-02-28

Called Extension 15-02-35
2 = Cycle 2
Select the cycle method that the 15-02-37
3 = Cycle 3 15-02-38
Large LED flashes when the 4 = Cycle 4
extension has Message Waiting set
5 = Cycle 5
to the extension.
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7

37 Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp 0 = Green 1 15-02-28

Color 15-02-35
1 = Red
Select the color of the Large LED 15-02-36
when a voice mail message is
15-02-38
waiting at the extension.

38 Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp 1 = Cycle 1 3 15-02-28

Cycle 15-02-35
2 = Cycle 2
Select the cycle method that the 15-02-36
3 = Cycle 3 15-02-37
Large LED flashes when the 4 = Cycle 4
extension has a VM Message
5 = Cycle 5
Waiting set to the extension.
6 = Cycle 6
7 = Cycle 7

40 Additional Dial for Caller ID Call Up to four digits (0, 1~9, #, ) No 10-02-04
Return setting
Enter the digits to be dialed in front
of the Caller ID when using the
Caller ID Return function.

41 Incoming Ring Setup 0 = Speaker Normal Ring 0

1 = Headset Ring

42 Incoming Off-Hook Ring Setup 0 = Speaker Off-Hook Ring 0

1 = Headset Off-Hook Ring

2 - 166 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

43 Headset Ring Duration 0 = No Switch to Speaker Ring 0

1 = 10 seconds
2 = 20 seconds
3 = 30 seconds
4 = 40 seconds
5 = 50 seconds
6 = 1 minute

44 Reversing Display Indication 0 = Normal Indication 0

The display on the DT300/DT700 1 = Reversing Indication
style telephones can be set to
Normal (0) or Reversed (1).

45 Double Height Character 0 = Normal Indication 0

Indication
1 = Double height character
On the DT300/DT700 style phones indication of calendar
Name and Number Line (2), display line
Calender Line (1) or No Line (0) set 2 = Double height character
to has double height characters.
indication of name and
number display line

46 Backlight LCD duration 0 = Continuous on 2

On the DT300/DT700 style phones 1 = 5 seconds
set how long the Backlight LCD 2 = 10 seconds
stays on. 3 = 15 seconds
4 = 30 seconds
5 = 60 seconds

47 Icon display of DESI-less 0 = OFF 0 11-11-17

On the DTL/ITL-8LD style phones 1 = ON 15-07-01
15-20-01
will icons be displayed (1), or not
displayed (0).

48 Short Ring Setup 0 = Disable 0 80-09-01

1 = Enable

49 Button Kit Information for 0 = No setting 0 90-48-01

Multiline Telephone
1 = Not Used
2 = Type-A with Cursor Key
3~9 = Not Used
10 = Type-A without Cursor
Key (Retrofit)

53 Aspire Model-C Phone Operation 0 = Original Operation 0

Mode Mode
1 = CTI Special Operation
Mode

54 Menu Operation Mode 0 = Automatic Close 0

1 = Manual Close

Programming Manual 2 - 167

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Table 2-3 Lamp Cycle On/Off Timing Pattern

Programs 15-02-35, 36, and 38

Input Cycle

1 Cycle 1 500ms – ON / 500ms – OFF

2 Cycle 2 250ms – ON / 250ms – OFF

3 Cycle 3 125ms – ON / 125ms – OFF

4 Cycle 4 125ms – ON / 125ms – OFF / 125ms – ON / 625ms – OFF

5 Cycle 5 875ms – ON / 125ms – OFF

6 Cycle 6 625ms – ON / 125ms – OFF / 125ms – ON / 125ms – OFF

7 Cycle 7 1000ms – ON

Table 2-4 Program 15-02 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns

Incoming Signal
Frequency Pattern Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation

External Incoming Signal High 1100 1400 16Hz

Frequency (Pattern 1) Middle 660 760 16Hz
Low 520 660 16Hz

External Incoming Signal High 1100Hz 1400Hz 8Hz

Frequency (Pattern 2) Middle 660Hz 760Hz 8Hz
Low 520Hz 660Hz 8Hz

External Incoming Signal High 2000Hz 760Hz 16Hz

Frequency (Pattern 3) Middle 1400Hz 660Hz 16Hz
Low 1100Hz 540Hz 16Hz

External Incoming Signal High 2000Hz 760Hz 8Hz

Frequency (Pattern 4) Middle 1400Hz 660Hz 8Hz
Low 1100Hz 540Hz 8Hz

Internal Incoming Signal High 1100Hz 1400Hz 8Hz

Frequency Middle 660Hz 760Hz 8Hz
Low 520Hz 660Hz 8Hz

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Refer to the Input Data chart.

2 - 168 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various
single line telephone options.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No Program

01 SLT Signaling Type 0 = DP 1 15-03-03

Use this option to tell the system the type of 1 = DTMF 45-01-01
dialing the connected telephone uses.
For the UNIVERGE SV8100 Wireless
telephones to function correctly, this must be set
to 0 (dial pulse). If this option is set for DTMF,
after an outside call is placed, the system cannot
dial any additional digits.
This program change is automatically performed
when the UNIVERGE SV8100 Wireless
telephone is registered. When upgrading
software from prior versions, the previous default
of 1 is saved from the prior database so this
option must be changed manually.

03 Terminal Type 0 = Normal 0 15-03-01

Enter 1 for this option to allow a single line port 1 = Special 45-01-01
to receive DTMF tones after the initial call setup.
Enter 0 to have the port ignore DTMF tones after
the initial call setup. For Voice Mail, always enter
1 (e.g., receive DTMF tones).

04 Flashing 0 = No 1
Enables/disables Flash for single line (500/2500 1 = Yes
type) telephones.

05 Trunk Polarity Reverse 0 = Off 0

Not Used in U.S. – Do Not Change Default Entry 1 = On
as DTMF issues may arise with voice mail.

Programming Manual 2 - 169

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No Program

06 Extension Polarity Reverse 0 = Disable 0

Not Used in U.S. -- (Off)
Do Not Change Default Entry as DTMF issues 1 = Enable
may arise with voice mail. (On)

07 Enabled On-Hook When Holding (SLT) 0 = No 1 11-12-45

1 = Yes

08 Answer On-Hook when Holding (SLT) 0 = Disable 1 11-12-46

(No)
1 = Yes
(Enable)

09 Caller ID Function - For External Module 0 = Disable 0

Enable (1) or disable (0) the Caller ID FSK signal (Off)
for an external Caller ID module or a 3rd party 1 = Enable
vendor telephone with Caller ID display. (On)
Important:
If voice mail is used, this setting must be
disabled for the system integration codes to be
correct.
With a 2500 set (no Caller ID) installed, this
must be set to 0 for incoming callers to have a
talk path.

10 Caller ID Name 0 = Disable 1 15-03-09

Determine if an extension user telephone should 1 = Enable
display the Caller ID name.

11 Caller ID Type 0 = FSK 0

Determine whether the Caller ID type is FSK or 1 = DTMF
DTMF.

14 Forwarded Caller ID Display Mode 0 = Calling 0

Determine what the display shows when a Extension
multiline terminal receives a forwarded outside Number
call. (Calling)
1 = External
Caller ID
(Forward)

15 Disconnect without dial after hooking hold 0 = Normal 0

Determine whether or not to disconnect a held 1 = Disc.
call when on-hook without any dialing after
hooking-hold.

16 Special DTMF Protocol Send 0 = No 0

Determine whether or not to send the extension 1 = Yes
number of the phone forwarded to the extension
when PRG 15-03-04 is set to Special (1) and not
in the VM group.

2 - 170 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No Program

17 Dial Tone Select 0 = Normal 0

When the function of MW has been set from 1 = New DT
another extension or VM, the dial tone upon off
hook is selected.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Normal

Outgoing Call Idle

Reverse

Normal

Incoming Call Idle

Reverse

Normal

Call Pickup Idle

Reverse

(1) = Off-Hook (2) = Calling/Ringing (3) = Answer (4) = Detect Hang Up (5) = On-Hook

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets

Programming Manual 2 - 171

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 15-05 : IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup to set up the basic
settings for an IP telephone.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

01 Terminal Type 0 = NGT 0 Viewing Only – No changes

1 = H.323 permitted
2 = SIP
3 = MEGACO
4 = SIP-MLT

02 IP Phone Fixed MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-00 MAC Address of registered 15-05-01

Port 00-00-00-00-00-00 to SIP MLT phone is stored
Assignment and/or can input the MAC
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
address of an SIP MLT
phone so when it comes
online it will be provided with
the extension in which the
MAC address matches.

03 Default URL URL address - 192 No setting The default URL address for 15-05-01
address Smart Phone
Characters Max.

04 Nickname Up to 48 characters No setting Nickname section on Invite 15-05-17

message. Example:
Extension 100 has a
Nickname set to PAUL.
Extension 101 has
command 15-05-17 set to
Nickname. The inbound call
to extension 101, from 100,
will show PAUL.

05 H.323 Terminal 1 = Standard H323 0 15-05-01

type terminal
2 = Net Meeting

2 - 172 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

06 NGT Terminal 1 = IP70 0 15-05-01

Type
2 = IP80
3 = Smart Phone

07 Using IP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 0 Informational Only 15-05-01

Address
registered IP Phones

08 H.323 RAS port 0-65535 0 15-05-01

09 Call procedure 0-65535 0 15-05-01

port

10 NGT voice path 0-65535 0 15-05-01

port

11 DtermIP Call 0-65535 0 15-05-01

Procedure port

15 CODEC Type 1-Type 1 1 Assign the CODEC Type of 84-24-XX

2-Type 2 the MLT SIP.
3-Type 3
4-Type 4
5-Type 5

16 Authentication Up to 24 characters None Assign the authentication 15-05-01

Password password for SIP single line
telephones.

17 Calling Party 0 = Nickname 0 The part of the Invite

Display Info message the calling party
1 = Display Name
2 = User Part information is taken from.
There are four choices:
3 = Extension
Nickname: Displays the
nickname programmed in
15-05-04.
Display Name: Some SIP
phones have a Field called
“Display Name”. If
configured, in the SIP
phone, this will display upon
a call from that station.
User Part: Some SIP
phones have a field called
“User Part”. If configured in
the SIP phone, this will
display upon a call from that
station.
Extension: Display shows
extension of the SIP phone.

Programming Manual 2 - 173

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

18 IP Duplication 0 = Not Used 0 If there is an adapter that 15-05-01

Allowed Group has one IP address coming
1 = Group 1
2 = Group 2 into it but has multiple
extensions off of it. Assign
3 = Group 3
all the extensions to a group
4 = Group 4 so that way the CPU knows
5 = Group 5 that the one IP address is
6 = Group 6 assigned to multiple
7 = Group 7 extensions.
8 = Group 8
9 = Group 9
10 = Group 10

19 Side Option 0 = No Option 0 This is a read only program 10-03-09

Information that shows what type of Line 15-05-22
1 = 8LK Unit
2 = 16LK Unit Key unit is installed on the
ITH-style telephone.
3 = 24ADM

20 Bottom Option 0 = No Option 0 This is a read only program 10-03-10

Information that shows what type of
1 = ADA
2 = BHA adapter is installed on the
ITH-style telephone.

21 Handset 0 = Normal Handset 0 This is a read only program 10-03-11

Option that shows what type of 15-05-23
Information 1 = Handset for power
failure (PSA/PSD) Handset is installed on the
ITH-style telephone.
2 = BCH

22 Side Option 0 = No Setting 0 This is a read only program 30-01

Additional Data that shows the DSS console 30-02
1~32 = DSS Console
number number when one is 30-03
installed on a ITH-style 30-04
telephone. 30-05
30-06

23 Handset 0 = No Setting 0
Option
Additional
1~16 = Terminal
Information equipment number
(TEN) of Bluetooth
Determine to
use TEN or not. Cordless Handset
(BCH)

24 Protection 0 = Not Used 0 When this is enabled it 90-40-01

Service allows the MLT SIP 90-40-02
1 = Used
telephones to use the
"security" key. If disabled,
and the key is pressed,
nothing happens.

2 - 174 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

26 DT700 0 = Not Set 0

Terminal Type
1 = ITL-**E-1D/IP-*E-1
2 = ITL-**D-1D/ITL-12BT-
1D/ITL-12PA-1D
(without 8LKI(LCD)-L)
3 = ITL-**D-1D/ITL-12BT-
1D/ITL-12PA-1D(with
8LKI(LCD)-L)
4 = ITL-320C-1
5 = Softphone
6 = CTI
7 = AGW
8 = IP3PH-8WV

27 Personal ID 0~512 0 Used when the SIP Multiline 84-22-XX

Index telephone is using manual/
auto registration. Assign
each phone a unique
personal index. Then go to
command 84-22 to assign
the user name and
password.

28 Addition 0 = Do not inform 0

Information
Setup
1 = Inform

Select whether
to inform of
additional
information or
not.

29 Terminal WAN- 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0

side IP
Address

30 DTMF Play 0 = Do Not Play 0

during
Conversation
1 = Play
at Receive
Extension

31 Alarm Tone 0 = Off 1

during
Conversation
1 = On
(RTP packet
loss alarm)

32 Ten Key Pad 0 = Off 0

Talkie
1 = On

33 LAN Side IP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0. Read-only

Address of
Terminal

Programming Manual 2 - 175

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

34 Terminal Touch 0 = Off 1 Whether the touch screen

Panel On/Off used on ITL-320C-1 (BK)
1 = On
TEL can be used (On) or
cannot be used (Off).

35 Encription 0 = Off 0.0.0.0. Read-only

Mode On/Off
1 = On

36 DT700 00.00.00.00 - ff.ff.ff.ff 00.00.00.00 Indicate a current

Firmware firmware Version.
Version
(Read-only)

Conditions

15-05-04 – Nickname must be unique in the system.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 176 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions to define the trunk access
map for each extension. An extension can only place outgoing calls on trunks to
which it has outgoing access. Use Program 14-07 to define the available access
maps.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Trunk Access Related

No. Map Number Default Program

01 1~200 1 14-07

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Placing

Programming Manual 2 - 177

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-07 : Programmable Function Keys
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys to assign functions to a
multiline terminal line keys.

For certain functions, you can append data to the key basic function. For example, the
function 26 appended by data 1 makes a Group Call Pickup key for Pickup Group 1.
You can also program Function Keys using Service Codes.

To clear any previously programmed key, press 000 to erase any displayed code.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Default Settings

Line Key Function Number Additional Data

LK01 01 (Trunk Line Key) 1

: : :

LK08 01 (Trunk Line Key) 8

LK09 0 (No Setting) 0

: : :

LK48 0 (No Setting) 0

2 - 178 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item Line Key

Function Number Additional Data
No. Number

01 1~48 0~99 Refer to Function

(Normal Function Code) (Service Code 851 by Number List.
default)
* 00 ~ *99
(Appearance Function Code) (Service Code 852 by
default)

Default
Programmable keys 1~8 are Trunk Line keys (key 1 = Trunk Line 1, key 2 = Trunk Line 2,
etc.). All other programmable keys are undefined.
Function Number List

[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 851)

Function Number List

[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 851)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

00 Not Defined

01 DSS/One-Touch Extension number or any Red On: Extension Busy

numbers (up to 24 digits) Off: Extension Idle
Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call
Forward

02 Microphone Key (ON/OFF) Red On: Mic Off

Off: Mic On
03 DND Key Red On: DND
04 BGM (ON/OFF) Red On: BGM On
Off: BGM Off
05 Headset Red On: Headset in use
06 Transfer Key None

07 Conference Key Red On: Conference call setup

occurring

08 Incoming Call Log Rapid Blink (Red): New call log

Red On: Call log
Off: No call log
09 Day/Night Mode Switch Mode number (1~8) Red On: Mode active
10 Call Forward – Immediate Red On: Forwarded

Programming Manual 2 - 179

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 851)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

11 Call Forward – Busy Red On: Forwarded

12 Call Forward – No Answer Red On: Forwarded
13 Call Forward – Busy/No Red On: Forwarded
Answer

14 Call Forward – Both Ring Red On: Forwarded

15 Follow Me Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded
16 Call Forward to Station Slow Blink (Red): Setup
Rapid Blink (Red): To be setup
18 Text Message Setup Message Numbers (01~20) Red On: Feature activated by Function
Key

19 External Group Paging External Paging Number Red On: Page Active
(1~8)

20 External All Call Paging Red On: Page Active

21 Internal Group Paging Internal Paging Number Red On: Page Active
(01~64)

22 Internal All Call Paging None

23 Privacy Release None

24 Call Pickup None

25 Call Pickup for Another None

Group

26 Call Pickup for Specified Call Pickup Group Number None

Group

27 Speed Dial – Common/ Speed Dial Number None

Private (Common / Private)

28 Speed Dial – Group Speed Dial Number (Group) None

29 Repeat Redial Rapid Blink: Waiting to redial

30 Saved Number Redial None

31 Memo Dial None

32 Meet – Me Conference None

33 Override (Off-Hook None

Signaling)

34 Break – In None

2 - 180 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 851)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

35 Camp On Red On: While camp-on activated

36 Step Call None

37 DND/FWD Override Call None

38 Message Waiting None

39 Room Monitoring Rapid Blink (Red): While being

monitored
Slow Blink (Red): While monitoring
40 Handset Transmission Red On: Transmission cut-off
Cutoff

41 Buzzer Extension Number Red On: Transmission Side

Rapid Blink (Red): Receiver Side
42 Boss – Secretary Call Extension Number Red On: Boss – Secretary mode
43 Series Call None

44 Common Hold None

45 Exclusive None

46 Department Group Log Out Red On: Logged Out

47 Reverse Voice Over Extension Number Red On: extension busy
Off: extension idle
Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call
Forward
Green: Reverse Voice Over to
extension in progress

48 Voice Over Slow Blink (Red): Voice Over – Active

49 Call Redirect Extension Number or Voice None
Mail Number

50 Account Code Red On: While account code being

entered

51 General Purpose Relay Relay No (0, 1~8) Red On: Relay On

52 Automatic Answer with Incoming Ring Group Red On: Under setting
Delay Message Setup (001~100)

53 Automatic Answer with Red On: Active

Delay Message Start

54 External Call Forward by Red On: Active

Door Box

Programming Manual 2 - 181

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 851)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

55 Extension Name Change None

56 General Purpose LED 001-100: (Red)On Off 001-100: (Red)On Off

Operation 101-200: (Green)On Off 101-200: (Green)On Off
201-300: (Red)On 201-300: (Red)On (Green)On Off
(Green)On Off

57 General Purpose LED 001-100: (Red)On Off 001-100: (Red)On Off101-200:

Indication 101-200: (Green)On Off (Green)On Off201-300:
201-300: (Red)On (Red)On (Green)On Off
(Green)On Off

58 Automatic Transfer at Extension Group Number Blink (Red): Active

Department Group Call ( 01~64)

59 Delayed Transfer at Extension Group Number Blink (Red): Active

Department Group Call (01~64)

60 DND at Department Group Extension Group Number Blink (Red): Active

Call (01~64)

61 --- Not Used ---

63 Outgoing Call Without Red On: Active

Caller ID (ISDN)

64 --- Not Used ---

66 CTI Red On: CTI active

67 --- Not Used ---

68 --- Not Used ---

70 --- Not Used ---

71 --- Not Used ---

72 Keypad Facility Key

73 Keypad HOLD Key

74 Keypad RETRIEVE Key

75 Keypad Conference Key

76 --- Not Used ---

77 Voice Mail (In-Skin) Extension Number or Pilot Red On: Access to Voice Mail
Number Rapid Blink (Green): New Message
78 Conversation Recording – Rapid Blink (Red): Recording
Voice Mail

2 - 182 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 851)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

79 Automated Attendant Extension Number or Pilot Red On: Set Up for All Calls
(In-Skin) Number Fast Blink (Red): Set Up for No
Answer Calls
Stutter Blink (Red): Set Up for Busy
Calls
Slow Blink (Red): Set Up for Busy/No
Answer Calls

80 Tandem Ringing 1 = Set Red On: Active

0 = Cancel
Extension Number to Tandem
Ring

81 Automatic Transfer to Trunk Line No. (001~200) Blink (Red): Active

Transfer Key

82 Dterm IP Call Log

83 Conversation Recording 0 = Pause

Function (VMSU) 1 = Re-recording
2 = Address
3 = Erase
4 = Urgent Page

84 Drop Key None

85 Directory Dialing

86 Private Call Refuse None Blink (Red): Active

87 Caller ID Refuse None Blink (Red): Active
88 Dial-In Mode Switching PRG 22-17 Table No. Off: Pattern 1, Pattern 5~8
(1~100) On: Pattern 2
Slow flash: Pattern 3
Fast flash: Pattern 4

89 --- Not Used ---

90 --- Not Used ---

91 Live Recording Key IPK II

In-Mail

94 Call Attendant Fast flash: Setup – No Answer Calls

Slow flash: 125ms:on 125ms:off
125ms:on 625ms:off
On: Setup – Busy/No Answer Calls

Programming Manual 2 - 183

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] Normal Function Code (00 ~ 99) (Service Code 851)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

97 Door Box Access Key Door Box Number (1~8) On: Door Box Busy
Off: Door Box Idle
Fast flash: Door Box Incoming

98~99 --- Not Used ---

Function Number List

[2] Appearance Function Level (*00 ~*99) (Service Code 852)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

00 ICM Key None Red On: Off Hook on Intercom Call

Red Blink: Intercom Call on Hold
01 Trunk Key Trunk Number (001~200) Red On: Trunk Busy by Another User
Green On: Trunk Busy by Extension
02 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number Red On: Trunk Busy by Another User
(001~100) Green On: Trunk Busy by Extension
03 Virtual Extension Key Extension Number or Red On: Trunk busy by another user
Department Group Number Slow Blink (Red): Incoming Call
04 Park Key Park Number (01~64) Slow Blink (Red): Call Placed in
Park by Another User
Fast Blink (Green): Extension
Placed Call in Park

05 Loop Keys 0 = Incoming Green On: Extension on an active call

Use Programs 15-13-01 or 1 = Outgoing
15-13-02 to assign the loop 2 = Both
key to a trunk group.

06 Trunk Access Via Network System Number

Networking (01~50)

07 Station Park Hold None

08 --- Not Used ---

10 ACD Log-In/Log-Out Red On: Under log-on

Off: Under log-off

2 - 184 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Function Number List (Continued)

[2] Appearance Function Level (*00 ~*99) (Service Code 852)

12 ACD Emergency Call Red On: Under monitor, Override,

Standby
Fast Blink (Red): Supervisor
Telephone Receiving Emergency Call

13 ACD Off Duty Mode Red On: Under Off Duty

Slow Blink (Red): Under Reservation
14 ACD Start/End Red On: ACD Operation End
15 ACD Terminal Speech Red On: Under Monitor
Monitor

16 ACD Waiting Red On: Standby

17 ACD Work Wrap Up Time Red On: Under Work Time
Slow Blink (Red): Under Reservation
18 ACD Overflow Control ACD Group Number Red On: Enable
Slow Blink (Red): Disable
19 ACD Queue Status Display
Check

Programming Manual 2 - 185

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

LED Indication Reference:

ON = LED pattern 7 (On).

OFF = LED pattern 0 (Off).
Rapid Blink = LED pattern 3 (RW).
Slow Blink (General Function Level) = LED pattern 5 (IL).
Slow Blink (Appearance Function Level) = LED pattern 1 (FL).
Fast Blink = LED pattern 3 (RW).
Stutter Blink = LED pattern 4 (IR).

2 - 186 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions

When a key is programmed using service code 852, that key cannot be
programmed with a function using the 851 code until the key is undefined (000).
For example with a Park Key programmed by dialing 852 + 04 must be
undefined by dialing 852 + 000 before it can be programmed as a Voice Over key
by dialing 851 + 48.

When assigning a CAP key, 08, an orbit number must be used. If orbit 000 is
used, it automatically assigns the next available orbit.

Feature Cross Reference

Refer to Function Number List.

Programming Manual 2 - 187

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup to assign a ring
tone range (0~4) to incoming virtual extensions assigned to a Virtual Extension key
(Program 15-07). If you enable ringing for the key in Program 15-09, the key rings
with the tone you set in this program. Also see Program 22-03. The chart below
shows the available tones. There are 256 available extension ports.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item
Incoming Ring Pattern Default Description
No.

01 0 = Tone Pattern 1 0 = Tone Pattern 1 When an extension or a virtual

1 = Tone Pattern 2 extension is assigned to the function
2 = Tone Pattern 3 key on the key telephone, select the
3 = Tone Pattern 4 ring tone when receiving a call on that
4 = Incoming Ring key.
Tone Extension For ACD CAR keys, only tone pattern
1 (entry 0) can be used. The
remaining patterns are not checked
with this feature.

2 - 188 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Table 2-5 Program 15-08 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns

Incoming Signal
Frequency Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation
Pattern

Pattern 1 High 1100 1400 16Hz

Middle 660 760 16Hz
Low 520 660 16Hz

Pattern 2 High 1100 1400 8Hz

Middle 660 760 8Hz
Low 520 660 8Hz

Pattern 3 High 2000 760 16Hz

Middle 1400 660 16Hz
Low 1100 540 16Hz

Pattern 4 High 2000 760 8Hz

Middle 1400 660 8Hz
Low 1100 540 8Hz

Internal Incoming Signal High 1100 1400 8Hz

Frequency Middle 660 760 8Hz
Low 520 660 8Hz

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 189

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment to assign the ringing
options for an extension Virtual Extension Key or Virtual Extension Group Answer Key
which is defined in Program 15-07. You make an assignment for each Night Service
Mode.

Assign extension numbers and names to virtual extension ports in Program 15-01.
Program Virtual Extension keys in Program 15-07 (code 03). There are 256 Virtual
Extension Ports.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Key Number 01~48

Item Day/Night Mode Ringing Default

No.

01 1~8 0 = No Ringing 0
1 = Ring

Conditions

Program the Multiple Directory Number function keys NOT to ring before
removing the key from telephone programming.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 190 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup to set
the priority (1~4) for the Virtual Extension Ring Tones set in Program 15-08. When
Virtual Extension calls ring an extension simultaneously, the tone with the highest
order number (e.g., 1) rings. The other keys only flash. There are 256 Virtual
Extension ports.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item Priority Related

Data Description
No. Order Program

01 1~4 0 = Tone Pattern 1 When two or more virtual 15-08

1 = Tone Pattern 2 extensions are set on a
2 = Tone Pattern 3 function key on the telephone,
3 = Tone Pattern 4 and the tone pattern by which
4 = Incoming Extension the sound of each extension
Ring Tone differs, the priority of ring
sound is set up.

Default

By default, Virtual Extension ring tones have the following order:

Priority Ring Tone

Order (Set in Program 15-08)

1 0 (Tone Pattern 1)
2 1 (Tone Pattern 2)
3 2 (Tone Pattern 3)
4 3 (Tone Pattern 4)

Programming Manual 2 - 191

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 192 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment to assign the
delayed ringing options for an extension Virtual Extension or Virtual Extension Group
Answer keys (defined in Program 15-09). You make an assignment for each Night
Service Mode. There are 256 Virtual Extension Ports.

Assign extension numbers (Program 11-04) and names (Program 15-01) to virtual
extension ports. Program Multiple Directory Number (virtual extension) keys in
Program 15-07 (code 03).

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Key Number 01~48

Item Day/Night Mode Ringing Default Related

No. Program

01 1~8 0 = Immediate 0 20-04-03

Ring 15-09-01
1 = Delayed Ring

Conditions

Program the Virtual Extension keys NOT to ring before removing the key from
telephone programming.

PRG 15-09-01 has to be assigned to Ring Immediately before assigning the

CAR/VE key to Delay Ring.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 193

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions to set
the ACI Conversation Recording destination for each extension.

If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program
15-12 is followed.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item
Item Input Data Default
Number

01 ACI Recording Destination Extension Number Maximum eight No Setting

Enter the ACI extension number to which the trunk digits
calls should be recorded.

02 ACI Automatic Recording for Incoming Calls 0 = Off 0

Determine if an extension incoming calls should be 1 = On
automatically recorded to the ACI.

04 ACI Automatic Recording for Outgoing Calls 0 = Off 0

Determine if an extensionÅfs outgoing calls should 1 = On
be automatically recorded to the ACI.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

2 - 194 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-13 : Loop Keys
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 15-13 : Loop Keys to assign the Loop Key data for each keyset
terminal. Loop Keys can be incoming, outgoing or both ways. Outgoing Loop Keys
use the entry in item 1. Incoming Loop Keys use the entry in item 2. Both Way Loop
Keys follow the entries in both item 1 and 2.

Input Data

Extension Number Max.8 digits

Key Number 01-48

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Outgoing Option 0-8 or 0-100 0

(0 = Assigns the Loop Key for ARS, (Programming
Function Key
1-100 = Assigns the Loop Key to the No.- 01-32)
trunk group specified)

02 Incoming Option 0-8 or 0-100 0

(0 = Assigns the Loop Key to all trunk (Programming
groups, Function Key
No.- 01-32)
1-100 = Assigns the Loop key to the
trunk group specified)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

Programming Manual 2 - 195

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys to define the One-Touch key
data for each multiline terminal.

For each UNIVERGE SV8100 Wireless telephone to use the Transfer When Out of
Range feature, enter the destination number (up to 24 digits) and name (up to 12
characters) into One-Touch bin 10. Make sure to add any required trunk access codes
for outside numbers. If this bin information is changed either through 15-14-01 or
through user programming, the destination for the transferred calls is also changed.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Key Number 01~10

Item
Dial Data Name Default
No.

01 1~0, , #, Pause, Hook- Up to 24 Digits No Setting

flash,
@ (Code for Answer-Wait)
Up to 24 digits

02 Name Up to 12 Digits No Setting

Default

No entries for any extension.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

One-Touch Keys

2 - 196 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-16 : SIP Register ID Setup for Extension
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 15-16 : SIP Register Setup for Extension to define the SIP Register
ID for Extensions.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Register ID None, 0~31 None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 197

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 15-17 : CO Message Waiting Indication to set the message waiting
LED Flash assignment on each CO line.

Input Data

Extension Number including Virtual Extensions Up to eight digits

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 LED Flash Assignment 0 = LED Off 0

1 = LED On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 198 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 15-18 : Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options to define the
operation when a Virtual Extension Key is pressed.

Input Data

Extension Number including Virtual Extensions Up to eight digits

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode 0 = Release 0 20-04-01

Define if calls to a Virtual Extension Key 1 = Land on the
land on the Virtual or on the extension/ key
CAP/CO appearance.
This is assigned for the Virtual
Extension Key, not the extension it
resides on.

02 Display mode when placing a call on 0 = Secondary 0

Virtual Extension Key Extension
Defines if calls to or from a Virtual Name
Extension Key display the Virtual 1 = Actual Station
Extension Key name or the name of the Name
extension it resides on.

Default Settings

If a DIL rings a Virtual Extension, the Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode must
be set to 1, or the multiline terminal must have a CAP Key.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 199

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-19 : System Telephone Book Setup for Extension
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 15-19 : System Telephone Book Setup for Extension to set the
operations of the Telephone Book for each extension.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Telephone Book 1 0~100 Port 1 : 1

Port 2 : 2
:
:
Port 100 : 100

02 Telephone Book 2 0~100 0

06 Locking of Telephone Book 0 = On 0

1 = Off

07 Password 0000~9999 (Fixed 0000

four digits)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 200 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 15-20 : LCD Line Key Name Assignment to assigns a name to each
LCD Line Key of the SV8100 telephones and ADM option. Up to 13 characters can be
assigned.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Key Number 01~48

Name Assignment Up to 13 characters

Default Settings

Line Key Name

LK01 LINE 1

: :

LK08 LINE 8

LK09 All Blank

: :

LK48 All Blank

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 201

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 15-22 : Mobile Extension Setup to set the system information for the
Mobile Extension feature.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Mobile Extension Target 0~1999 (0 = No setting/1~1999 = target of mobile 0

Setup extension)
Set which Speed Dial bin
is used to call when the
Mobile extension is
called.

02 Connect Confirmation 0 = Always 0

Select when a 1 = On Analog Line
confirmation (dial ) is 2 = Never
required to allow the call
to cut over to the called
mobile number.

03 Trunk Access Code 0 = Use normal trunk access code (11-09-01) 0

Select if the Normal (0) or 1 = Use individual trunk access code (11-09-02)
Individual (1) Trunk
access is used when
making the call to the
mobile number.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 202 Program 15 : Extension, Basic Setup

 Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup to set the
function mode for each department group. There are 64 available Department Program
Groups.

16
Input Data

Department Group Number 1~64

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Department Name Maximum 12 characters No 11-07

setting

02 Department Calling Cycle 0 = Normal Routing 0 16-02

Use this option to set the call (Priority)
routing for Department Calling. 1 = Easy – UCD
Routing can be either circular Routing (Circular)
(cycles to all phones in group)
or priority (cycles to highest
priority extensions first).

03 Department Routing when 0 = Normal (Intercom 0 16-02

Busy (Auto Step Call) caller to busy
Use this option to set how the department
system routes an Intercom call member hears
to a busy Department Group busy)
member. Intercom callers to the 1 = Circular (Intercom
extension can either hear busy callers to busy
or route to the first available
department
department number. This only
member routes to
occurs for calls to the extension
directly, not the department
idle member)
number assigned in Program
11-07.

Programming Manual 2 - 203

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

04 Hunting Mode 0 = Last extension is 0

Use this option to set the action called and hunting
taken when a call reaches the is stopped
last extension in the Department 1 = Circular
Group (0=hunting stopped,
1 =hunting repeats with circular
routing through the Department
Group).

05 Extension Group All Ring 0 = Manual 0 11-16-10

Mode Operation
1 = Automatic
Determine whether calls ringing
a Department Group should ring
all extensions in the group
simultaneously automatically or
manually when using the
service code defined in Program
11-12-09.
When set to (1)
Automatic, only ICM
Calls and DID Calls will
ring all the stations in the
Department Group.

06 STG Withdraw Mode 0 = Disable (Camp 0

On)
1 = Enable (Overflow
Mode)

07 Call Recall Restriction for 0 = Disable (Recall) 0

STG
1 = Enable (No
Determine whether or not an Recall)
unanswered call transferred to a
Department Group should recall
the extension from which it was
transferred.

08 Maximum Queuing number 0 = No Queuing 0

for Department Group Call
1 = Queuing
To have Department Group calls
queue when busy, set this entry
to maximum queuing number.

09 Department Hunting No 0~64800 seconds 15

Answer Time
Set how long a call rings a
Department group extension
before hunting occurs.

2 - 204 Program 16 : Department Group Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

10 Enhanced Hunt Type 0 = No queuing 0

Set the type of hunting for each 1 = Hunting When
Extension (Department) Group. Busy
2 = Hunting When
Not Answered
3 = Hunting When
Busy or No
Answer

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Department Calling

Programming Manual 2 - 205

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions to set the
Department Groups. The system uses these groups (64 Department Groups) for
Department Calling. Assign pilot numbers to Department Groups you set up in
Program 11-07. This lets system users place calls to the departments. Use Program
16-01 to set the priority of each extension in each Department Group. When a call
comes to the group, the extensions ring in order of their priority.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Group Related

Priority Default Description
No. Number Program

01 1~64 1~999 1 – xxx Set up the Department Group called 11-07

(See by the pilot number and the extension 16-01
Note) priority when a group is called.
Call Pickup Groups are set up in
23-02.

The initial value of a priority becomes the ports numerical order assigned in Program 11-02 and 11-04.
(Extension ports are 1~ 256. Virtual extension ports are 1~256.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Department Calling

2 - 206 Program 16 : Department Group Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

16-03 : Secondary Department Group
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 16-03 : Secondary Department Group to set a second Department
Group for extensions. Up to 16 extensions can be assigned per a Department Group.
There are 64 available Department Groups.

Input Data

Department (Extension) Group Number 01~64

Secondary
Item Extension Priority
Extension Description
No. Number Order
Number

01 1~16 Maximum 8 0~999 This program is set up when placing

digits telephones in two or more groups.

Default

All extension groups : No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Department Calling

Programming Manual 2 - 207

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 16 : Department Group Setup

16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 16-04 : Call Restriction Between Department Groups to set internal
calls between members of different Department (Station) groups that can be restricted
on a per group basis. Each department group can restrict calls to up to eight
department groups in Department Group - Departmental Call Restriction.

Input Data

Extension (Department) Group Number 1~64

Restricted Group Index 1~8

Restrict
Department Description Default
Group Number

0~64 Calls between members of different Department 0

(Station) groups can be restricted on a per group
basis.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 208 Program 16 : Department Group Setup

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-01 : System Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-01 : System Options to set various system options.

Input Data Program

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description

20
No. Program
01 Operator Access 0 = Step Call 0 Use this program to set up priority of 20-17
Mode a call when calling an operator
1 = Circular
telephone.
02 Text Message Mode 0 = Call mode 0 Use this program to select the mode 11-11-14
1 = No Answer/ when calling the telephone which set 15-07-08
Busy mode up the text message.

04 Network BLF 0-64800 in 100ms 0 Used to determine how often the 30-05
Indication increments SV8100 updates the DSS key BLF
indications.
For NetLink, the entry should be “30”
in all SV8100s.
05 DTMF Receive 0~64800 seconds 10 For OPXs, analog telephones and 25-07-01
Active Time certain analog trunks (like DISA), the
system attaches a DTMF receiver to
the port for this interval. The system
releases the receiver after the
interval expires.
06 Alarm Duration 0~64800 seconds 30 This time sets the duration of the 11-12-05
alarm signal.
07 Callback Ring 0~64800 seconds 15 Callback rings an extension for this 11-12-05
Duration Time time. 15-07-35
08 Trunk Queuing 0~64800 seconds 15 Trunk Queuing callback rings an 11-12-05
Callback Time extension for this time. 15-07-35
09 Callback/Trunk 0~64800 seconds 64800 The system cancels an extension 11-12-05
Queuing Cancel Callback or Trunk Queueing request 15-07-35
Time after this time.
10 Trunk Guard Timer 0~64800 seconds 1 The amount of time the system waits
to seize the next outside line after
the system releases an outside line.

Programming Manual 2 - 209

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program
12 Telephone/Web Pro 1~84600 seconds 900 The system automatically logs out of
Logout Time (84600sec = a Telephone/Web Pro session after
1 day) inactivity lasting this time.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Refer to the Input Data table at the beginning of this section.

2 - 210 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-02 : System Options for Multiline Telephones to set various
system options for multiline telephones.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

01 Trunk Loop Key Operation Mode 0 = Indicate Using Loop Trunk 0

1 = Not indicated

Mode 0 = Keep 1 = LED Off

Lamp

Incoming: 300 IPM Red blink

Talking: GreenLight- LED Off

ing (on Talk-
ing TEL)

Holding: 60 IPM Green LED Off

blink (on
holding TEL)
02 Trunk Group Access Key 0 = Outgoing / Incoming 0
Operating Mode
1 = Outgoing
Use this option to set the operating 2 = Incoming
mode of the extension trunk group
keys. The keys are for incoming
access, outgoing access, or both.

03 BLF Control 0 = Idle / Busy (ON/OFF) 1

Set the conditions under which a 1 = Busy / Idle (ON/OFF)
Hotline, Reverse Voice Over or DSS
Console key indicates that an
extension is busy. Refer to the
Reverse Voice Over feature for more
information.

04 Retrieve the Line After Transfer 0 = Not Holding (No Keep) 0

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension 1 = Holding (Keep)
ability to answer a call after it has
been transferred, but before it is
answered.

Programming Manual 2 - 211

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

05 Headset Busy Mode 0 = No (Disable) 0 20-09-07

Set the conditions under which a 1 = Yes (Enable)
headset extension is busy to
incoming callers.

06 Preselection Time 0~64800 (sec) 5

When a multiline terminal user
preselects a line key, the system
remembers the preselection for this
time.

07 Time and Date Display Mode 1~8 3

Set how the Time and Date appear on Type 1 = (12 hour) 10 MAR TUE 3:15PM
display telephones. There are eight Type 2 = (12 hour) 3:15PM MAR 10 TUE
display modes. Type 3 = (12 hour) 3-10 TUE 3:15 PM
Type 4 = (12 hour) 3:15PM TUE 10 MAR
Type 5 = (24 hour) 10 MAR TUE 15:15
Type 6 = (24 hour) 15:15 MAR 10 TUE
Type 7 = (24 hour) 3-10 TUE 15:15
Type 8 = (24 hour) 15:15 TUE 10 MAR

08 LCD Display Holding Time 0~64800 (sec) 5

09 Disconnect Supervision 0 = Disable (Off) 0

Use this option to enable or disable 1 = Enable (On)
disconnect supervision for the system
trunks.

10 Time Before Shifting to 0 = No shift 0 15-02-18

Power-Saving Mode
1 = 1 minute
2 = 2 minutes
3 = 4 minutes
4 = 8 minutes
5 = 16 minutes
6 = 32 minutes
7 = 64 minutes

11 Handsfree Microphone Control 0 = Off 1

Use this option to control the setting 1 = On
for Multiline Terminal Handsfree
microphone after being disconnected
and reconnected. If set to 0, the
microphone is always off when the
terminal is reconnected. If set to 1,
the microphone remains in the same
state it was in when the terminal is
reconnected.

2 - 212 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

12 Forced Intercom Ring (ICM Call 0 = Disable (Voice) 0

Type)
1 = Enable (Signal)
Use this option to enable or disable
Forced Intercom Ringing. If enabled,
incoming Intercom calls normally ring.
If disabled, Intercom calls
voice-announce.

13 --- Not Used ---

15 Caller ID Display Mode 0 = Name and Number (Both) 0

1 = Name
2 = Number

18 Dialing Record Display Time 0~64800 seconds 30

19 Virtual Extension Mode 0 = No 0

Sets the mode of a virtual extension 1 = Yes
key that appears on a DSS console.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 213

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones to set up
various options for single line telephones.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 SLT Call Waiting Answer Mode 0 = Hookflash 0 11-12-47

For a busy single line (500/2500 type) (Hooking)
telephone, set the mode used to answer a 1 = Hookflash +
camped-on trunk call. Service
Code 654

02 Ignore Received DP Dial on DTMF SLT Port 0 = Do Not 0 15-03-01

Use this option to define whether the system Ignore (No)
should receive dial pulse and DTMF signals 1 = Ignore (Yes)
(0) or ignore dial pulse and only accept DTMF
signals (1).

03 SLT DTMF Dial to Trunk Lines 0 = Receive all 0 20-03-04

Type 0: The system keeps the digits dialed data,
dialed by the single line telephone on a before
trunk in a buffer. After all the digits are sending (All)
received, the system sends all the digits 1 = Direct
to the trunk. If the time space between
digits is longer than the time in Item 4, the
through out
system considers all digits received. (Direct)
Type 1: The system passes the received
digits from the single line telephone to the
trunk immediately. If the single line
telephone has a Last Number Dial key
without a pause, this key may not be able
to use the Last Number Dial key with the
Type 1 setting.
When using a third-party external paging
device, set this option to 1. In addition, set
Program 20-03-04 to 1. These programs must
be set for Wireless – DECT users to be able
to break dial tone on an analog trunk that is
used for paging.

2 - 214 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

04 Dial Sending Start Time for SLT or ARS 0~64800 seconds 3 20-03-03
When ARS or an analog extension user
accesses a trunk and dials an outside call, the
system waits this interval before outdialing the
first digit.
When using a third-party external paging
device, set this option to 1. In addition, set
Program 20-03-03 to 1.

05 SLT Operation Mode 0 = Normal 0

Mode
1 = Extended
Mode 1
2 = Extended
Mode 2

06 Headset Ringing Start Time (for SLT) 0~64800 seconds 5 20-13-38

Define the headset ringing start time. After this
time expires from the time when a single line
telephone is off-hook, the system sets the
single line telephone to headset ringing mode.

07 Trunk Call Dial Forced Sending Start Time 0~64800 seconds 0 20-03-03
(Forced Dial) 20-03-04

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Single Line Telephones, Analog 500/2500 Sets

Programming Manual 2 - 215

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions to set up various
system options for Virtual Extensions. There are 256 available virtual extension ports.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode 0 = Release Virtual Extension Key 0

With an entry of “0”, after answering a call 1 = Hold Virtual Extension Key
on a virtual extension key, once the call is
picked up, the call comes off the virtual
extension key and appears on the line or
loop key.
With an entry of Åg1Åh, after answering a
call on a virtual extension key, once the
call is picked up, the call will remain on the
virtual extension key.

03 CAR/SIE/Virtual Extension Delay 0~64800 seconds 10

Interval
CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual Extensions set
for Delayed Ringing (see Program 15-11)
ring the extension after this interval.

04 Virtual Extension Key Seize Mode 0 = Normal 1

Changes the BLF status of a SIE key. 1 = Enhanced Option
When set to Enhanced, the BLF will not
show as being busy when the station is on
a trunk call. When set to Normal, the BLF
will show as being busy when on a trunk
call.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Call Arrival (CAR) Keys (CAR/Secondary Incoming Extensions/Virtual Extensions)

2 - 216 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-05 : Charging Cost Service
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-05 : Charging Cost Service to assign the system options for
Charging Cost Service.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

04 Setting of Charge Cost per Unit 0-65535 0

06 Advice of Charge for Telephone 0...No decimal point 1

Display
1...Decimal point's character is period
2...Decimal point's character is comma

07 Advice of Charge for SMDR 0...No decimal point 1

1...Decimal point's character is period
2...Decimal point's character is comma

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 217

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions to assign a Class of Service
(COS) to an extension. There are 15 Classes of Service that can be assigned. To
specify the options in each Class of Service, refer to Programs 20-07 through 20-13.
You make eight entries for Program 20-06, one for each Night Service Mode.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Day/Night Class of Service

No. Mode for Extensions

01 1~8 1~15

Default

All extension numbers are set as Class 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service

2 - 218 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) to define the
administrator service availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

Input Data

Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item Related
Item Input Data
No. Program
COS 1~15

01 Manual Night Service Enabled 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension for manual Night 1 = On 0 11-10-01
Service Switching.

02 Changing the Music on Hold Tone 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension to change the 1 = On 0 11-10-02
Music on Hold tone.

03 Time Setting 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension to set the Time 1 = On 1 11-10-03
via Service Code 728.

04 Storing Speed Dialing Entries 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension to store System 1 = On 1 11-10-04
or Group Speed Dialing numbers.

05 Set/Cancel Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk 0 = Off

Transfer 11-10-06
1 = On 1 11-10-07
Turns off or on an extension ability to use the 11-10-08
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding service codes.

06 Charging Cost Display 0 = Off

0 11-10-09
1 = On

07 --- Not Used ---

08 --- Not Used ---

09 --- Not Used ---

Programming Manual 2 - 219

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Default
Item Related
Item Input Data
No. Program
COS 1~15

10 Programmable Function Key 0 = Off

Programming (Appearance Level)
1 = On 11-11-38
Turns off or on the ability for an extension to 1
20-13-18
program the Appearance function keys using
Service Code 852.

11 Forced Trunk Disconnect (analog trunk 0 = Off

only)
1 = On 0 11-10-26
Turns off or on an extension to use Forced
Trunk Disconnect.

12 Trunk Port Disable 0 = Off

0 11-10-27
1 = On

13 VRS Record (VRS Msg Operation) 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to record, 1 = On 1 11-10-19
erase and listen to VRS messages.

14 VRS General Message Play 0 = Off

Turns an extension off or on to dial 4 or 1 = On
1 11-10-21
Service Code 611 to listen to the General
Message.

15 VRS General Message Record/Delete 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension for dialing 1 = On
1 11-10-22
Service Code 612 and record, listen to, or
erase the General Message.

18 SMDR Printout Accumulated Extension 0 = Off

Data 0 11-10-23
1 = On

19 SMDR Printout Department Group (STG) 0 = Off

Data 0 11-10-24
1 = On

20 SMDR Printout Accumulated Account 0 = Off

Code Data 0 11-10-25
1 = On

21 --- Not Used ---

22 --- Not Used ---

23 CO MSG Waiting Indication Callback 0 = Off

Number Programming
1 = On 0
Enable or Disable an extension ability to
receive CO Message Waiting Indication.

24 Set/Cancel Private Call Refuse 0 = Off

Enable or Disable an extension ability to set 1 = On 0 11-10-32
or cancel Private Call Refuse.

25 Set/Cancel Caller ID Refuse 0 = Off

11-10-33
Enable or Disable an extension ability to set 1 = On 0 11-10-34
or cancel Caller ID Refuse.

2 - 220 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Default
Item Item Input Data Related
No. Program
COS 1~15

26 Dial-In Mode Switch 0 = Off

0 11-10-35
1 = On

27 Do-Not-Call Administrator 0 = Off 25-01-07

1 = On 0 15-07-89
20-01-19

28 --- Not Used ---

30 Date Setting 0 = Off

1 11-10-41
1 = On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service

Programming Manual 2 - 221

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) to define
the outgoing call feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

Input Data

Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item Related
Item Input Data
No. Program
COS 01-15

01 Intercom Calls 0 = Off

1
Turns off or on Intercom calling for the extension. 1 = On

02 Trunk Outgoing Calls 0 = Off

Turns off or on outgoing trunk calling for the 1 = On 1
extension.

03 System Speed Dialing 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to make 1 = On 1
outbound calls using system speed dial numbers.

04 Group Speed Dialing 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to make 1 = On 1
outbound calls using group speed dial numbers.

05 Dial Number Preview (Preset Dial) 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension for using Dial 1 = On 1
Number Preview.

06 Toll Restriction Override 0 = Off 11-11-36

Turns off or on Toll Restricting Override (Service 1 = On 1 21-01-07
Code 663). 21-07

07 Repeat Redial 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension to use Repeat 1 = On 1
Redial.

08 Toll Restriction Dial Block 0 = Off

0
Turns off or on an extension to use Dial Block. 1 = On

2 - 222 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Default
Item Related
Item Input Data
No. Program
COS 01-15

09 Hotline/Extension Ringdown 0 = Off

Turns off or on Ringdown Extension for 1 = On 0
extensions with this COS.

10 Signal/Voice Call 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension allowing it to force 1 = On
1
Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls.

11 Protect for the Call Mode Switching from 0 = Off

Caller 0
1 = On
(Internal Call)

12 Department Group Step Calling 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension to use Department 1 = On 1
Group Step Calling.

13 ISDN CLIP 0 = Off

Determines if the ISDN calling line identity 1 = On 10-03-05
1
presentation and screening indicators are 15-01-04
allowed.

14 Call Address Information 0 = Off

0
1 = On

15 Block Outgoing Caller ID 0 = Off

Turns off or on the system ability to automatically 1 = On
block outgoing Caller ID information when a user
14-01-20
places a call. 0
14-01-21
If this option is on, the system automatically
inserts the Caller ID block code (defined in
Program 14-01-21) before the user-dialed digits.

16 Display E911 Dialed Extension Name and 0 = Off

Number
1 = On 0
Turns off or on an extension to display the name
and number of the extension that dialed 911.

17 ARS Override of Trunk Access Map 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to override the 1 = On
0
trunk access map programming for outgoing
calls.

19 Hotline for SPK 0 = Off

The ability of an extension to have Hotline 1 = On
0 20-08-09
activated or deactivated when going off hook via
the speaker key.

20 Hot Key Pad 0 = Off

The ability of an extension to make a call by just 1 = On 0
dialing the number without first going off hook.

Programming Manual 2 - 223

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Default
Item Item Input Data Related
No. Program
COS 01-15

21 Automatic Trunk Seizing by Pressing SPK 0 = Off

Key
1 = On
The ability of an extension to automatically 0
access Trunk Route when going off hook via the
speaker key.

22 Voice Over to Busy Virtual Extension 0 = Off

The ability of an extension to make Voice Over to 1 = On 0
Busy Virtual Extension.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service

2 - 224 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) to define
the incoming call feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

Input Data

Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item Related
Item Input Data
No. Program
COS 01~15

01 Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL/E&M Override 0 = Off

Turns off or on the extension ability to receive a 1 = On
second call from a DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line
caller.
With this option set to 1, the destination
extension must be busy for a second DNIS
caller to ring through. If the destination 0
extension does not have a trunk or CAP
key available for the second call and a
previous call is ringing the extension but
has not yet been answered, the second
caller hears busy regardless of this
program setting.

02 Caller ID Display 0 = Off

Turns off or on the Caller ID display at an 1 = On 1 15-02-08
extension.

03 Sub Address Identification 0 = Off

Defines whether or not an extension displays 1 = On 0
the Caller Sub-Address.

04 Notification for Incoming Call List Existence 0 = Off

Determines whether or not an extension display 1 = On
1 20-09-02
shows Check List when an incoming call is
missed by a user.

05 Signal/Voice Call 0 = Off

Turn off or on an extension ability to enable 1 = On 11-11-15,
1
Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom 11-11-16
Ringing for their incoming Intercom calls.

Programming Manual 2 - 225

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Default
Item Related
Item Input Data
No. Program
COS 01~15

06 Incoming Time Display 0 = Off

0
1 = On

07 Call Queuing 0 = Off

Turn off or on an extension ability to have calls 1 = On
0 20-13-06
queued if a call rings the extension when it is
busy.

08 Calling Party Information 0 = Off

Turn off or on an extension ability to display 1 = On 1 50-02-05
calling party information on CCIS calls.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service

2 - 226 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) to define the
answer feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item
Item Input Data
No.
COS 01~15

01 Group Call Pickup (Within Group) 0 = Off

Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an 1 = On
1
extension Pickup Group and ringing group calls (Service
Code 756).

02 Group Call Pickup (Another Group) 0 = Off

Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a 1 = On 1
group (Service Code 769).

03 Group Call Pickup for Specific Group 0 = Off

Turns off or on Group Call Pickup for a specific group 1 = On 1
(Service Code 768).

04 Telephone Call Pickup 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension to pick up a call ringing into a 1 = On 1
Pickup Group (Service Code #).

05 Directed Call Pickup for Own Group 0 = Off

Turns off or on Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing an 1 = On 1
extension Pickup Group (Service Code 756).

06 Meet-Me Conference and Paging 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension to use Meet-Me Conference 1 = On 1
and Paging.

07 Automatic Off-Hook Answer 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension to use Universal Auto Answer 1 = On 1
(no service code required).

Programming Manual 2 - 227

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Default
Item
Item Input Data
No.
COS 01~15

08 Virtual Extension Off-Hook Answer 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension to answer an incoming call on a 1 = On
0
Call Arrival (CAR)/Secondary Incoming Extension (SIE)/
Virtual Extension simply by lifting the handset.

09 Call Pickup Callback 0 = Off

Turn off or on an extension ability to use Call Pickup to pick 1 = On 0
up Callback calls.

10 Answer Preset 0 = Off

0
1 = On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 228 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) to define
the Hold and Transfer feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

Input Data

Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item
Item Input Data
No.
COS 01~15

01 Call Forward All 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to initiate Call 1 = On 1
Forwarding All.

02 Call Forward When Busy 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to use Call 1 = On 1
Forward when Busy.

03 Call Forwarding When Unanswered 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to use Call 1 = On 1
Forward when Unanswered.

04 Call Forwarding (Both Ringing) 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to activate Call 1 = On 1
Forwarding with Both Ringing.

05 Call Forwarding with Follow Me 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to initiate Call 1 = On 1
Forwarding with Follow Me.

06 Unscreened Transfer (Ring Inward Transfer) 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to use Unscreened 1 = On 1
Transfer.

07 Transfer Without Holding 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to use Transfer 1 = On 0
Without Holding.

08 Transfer Information Display 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability for incoming 1 = On 1
Transfer preanswer display.

Programming Manual 2 - 229

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Default
Item Item Input Data
No.
COS 01~15

09 Group Hold Initiate 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to initiate a Group 1 = On 1
Hold.

10 Group Hold Answer 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to pick up a call on 1 = On 1
Group Hold.

11 Automatic On-Hook Transfer 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to use Automatic 1 = On 1
On Hook Transfer.

12 Call Forwarding Off Premise (External Call 0 = Off

Forwarding)
1 = On 0
Turns off or on an extension ability to set up Call
Forwarding Off-Premise for their telephone.

13 Operator Transfer After Hold Callback 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to have a call 1 = On 0
which recalls from hold transfer to the operator.

14 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction 0 = Off

Turns off or on the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer 1 = On
0
Restriction. If enabled, Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer is not
possible.

15 VRS Personal Greeting (Message Greeting) 0 = Off

Turns off or on a Service Code to record, listen to, or 1 = On 1
erase the Personal Greeting Message.

16 Call Redirect 0 = Off

Turns off or on a multiline terminal user ability to 1 = On
transfer a call to a predefined destination (such as an 0
operator, voice mail, or another extension) without
answering the call.

17 Department Group Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Each 0 = Off

Telephone Group Transfer)
1 = On 1
Turns off or on an extension user ability to set
Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding for a Department Group.

18 No Recall 0 = Off
No Recall set to "Allow" (1) will not stop transferred 1 = On 0
calls from recalling from a virtual extension.

19 Hold/Extended Park 0 = Off

Determine if an extension Class of Service should 1 = On 0
allow either a normal or extended Park.

20 No Callback 0 = Off
0
Turns off or on an extension to receive callbacks. 1 = On

2 - 230 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Default
Item
Item Input Data
No.
COS 01~15

21 Restriction for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up 0 = Allow

Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension user ability to set 1 = Deny
0
up a tandem/conference call automatically when they
hang up.

22 Restricted Unsupervised Conference 0 = Allow

Allow (0) or Deny (1) an extension ability to initiate an 1 = Deny 0
unsupervised conference.

23 CAR/VE Call Forward Set/Cancel 0 = Off

Turn on or off an extension ability to set or cancel call 1 = On 0
forwarding for a virtual extension.

24 Trunk Park Hold Mode 0 = Non

Set the hold type when a trunk call is put on hold by Exclusive
an extension. Hold (Off) 0
1 = Exclusive
Hold (On)

25 Transfer Park Call 0 = Off

Turn off or on an extension ability to transfer a parked 1 = On 0
call.

26 Station Park Hold mode 0 = Off

0
1 = On

27 Call Park Automatically Search 0 = Off

1
1 = On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service

Programming Manual 2 - 231

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) to define
the Charging Cost service availability for each extension service class.

Input Data

Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item
Item Input Data
No.
COS 01~15

02 Advice of Charge 0 = Off

1
ISDN-AOC 1 = On

03 Cost Display (TTU) 0 = Off

0
1 = On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service

2 - 232 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) to define
the supplementary feature availability for each extension Class of Service (COS).

Input Data

Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item Related
No. Item Input Data Programming
COS 01~15

01 Long Conversation Alarm 0 = Off

Turns off or on the Warning Tone for Long Conversation 1 = On 1
(not for single line telephones).

02 Long Conversation Cutoff (Incoming) 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to use Long 1 = On 0
Conversation Cutoff for incoming calls.

03 Long Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing) 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to use Long 1 = On 0
Conversation Cutoff for outgoing calls.

04 Call Forward/DND Override (Bypass Call) 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to use Call 1 = On 1
Forwarding/DND Override.

05 Intercom Off-Hook Signaling 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to receive off-hook 1 = On 1
signals.

06 Automatic Off-Hook Signaling (Automatic Override) 0 = Off

Allows a busy extension ability to manually (0) or 1 = On 0
automatically (1) receive off-hook signals.

07 Message Waiting 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to leave Message 1 = On 1
Waiting.

08 Conference 0 = Off
Turns off or on an extension user ability to initiate a 1 = On 1
conference or Meet-Me Conference.

Programming Manual 2 - 233

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Default
Item Related
Item Input Data
No. Programming
COS 01~15

09 Privacy Release 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension user ability to initiate a Voice 1 = On 1
Call Conference.

10 Barge-In Monitor 0 = Speech

Enables the extension Barge-In Mode to be Speech 1 = Monitor 0 20-13-45
mode (0) or Monitor mode (1).

11 Room Monitor, Initiating Extension 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension user ability to Room Monitor 1 = On 0
other extensions.

12 Room Monitor, Extension Being Monitored 0 = Off

Turn off or on an extension ability to be monitored by 1 = On 0
other extensions.

13 Continued Dialing (DTMF) Signal on ICM Call 0 = Off

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Continued 1 = On
1
Dialing, which allows DTMF signal sending while talking
on extension.

14 Department Calling (PLT No Called Extension) 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension user ability to call a 1 = On 1
Department Group Pilot.

15 Barge-In, Initiate 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension user ability to barge-in on 1 = On 1
other's calls.

16 Barge-In, Receive 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension ability to have other 1 = On 1
extensions barge-in on calls.

17 Barge-in Tone/Display (Intrusion Tone) 0 = Off

Turns off or on the Barge-In tone. If on, callers hear an 1 = On
alert tone and their display indicates the Barge-In when 1
another extension barges into their conversation. If off,
there is no alert tone or display indication.

18 Programmable Function Key Programming (General 0 = Off

Level)
1 = On
Turns off or on an extension user ability to program
1
General function keys using Service Code 851 (by
default). (Refer to Program 20-07-10 for Service Code
852.)

19 Selectable Display Messaging (Text Messaging) 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension user ability to use Selectable 1 = On 1
Display Messaging.

2 - 234 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Default
Item Related
Item Input Data
No. Programming
COS 01~15

20 Account Code/Toll Restriction Operator Alert 0 = Off

(Restricted Operation Transfer)
1 = On
Turns off or on operator alert when an extension user 1
improperly enters an Account Code or violates Toll
Restriction.

21 Extension Name 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension user ability to program its 1 = On 1
name.

22 Busy Status Display (Called Party Status) 0 = Off

Turns off or on the ability to display the detailed state of 1 = On 0 20-13-06
the called party.

23 Display the Reason for Transfer 0 = Off

Select whether an extension should display the reason a 1 = On
0
call is being transferred to their extension (Call Forward
Busy, Call Forward No Answer, DND).

24 Privacy Release by Pressing Line Key 0 = Off

Turns off or on a user ability to press a line key to barge 1 = On
0
into an outside call. The Barge-In feature must be
enabled if this option is to be used.

25 --- Not Used ---

26 Group Listen 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension user ability to use Group 1 = On 0
Listen.

27 Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension 0 = Off

If set to 1, you can call a busy extension which is talking 1 = On
1
on a virtual extension key. Program 20-13-06 (Call
Waiting) must be set to off for this option to work.

28 Allow Class of Service to be Changed 0 = Off

Turns off or on the ability of an extension Class of 1 = On 0
Service to be changed via Service Code 677.

29 Paging Display 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension user ability to display paging 1 = On 1
information.

30 Background Music 0 = Deny

Allow or Deny an extension user to turn Background 1 = Allow 1
Music on and off.

31 Connected Line Identification (COLP) 0 = Off

0
1 = On

32 Deny Multiple Barge-Ins 0 = Off

Allows or Denies an extension from having multiple 1 = On 0
users Barge into their conversation.

Programming Manual 2 - 235

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Default
Item Related
Item Input Data
No. Programming
COS 01~15

33 ACD Supervisor’s Position Enhancement 0 = Off 11-13-10

1 = On 11-13-11
This option must be on for the operator to use service 0
11-13-12
codes in Program 11-13-10 ~ 11-13-13. 11-13-13

34 Block Manual Off-Hook Signaling 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension user ability to block off-hook 1 = On 0
signals manually sent from a co-worker.

35 Block Camp On 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension user ability to block callers 1 = On 0
from dialing to Camp On.

36 Call Duration Timer Display 0 = Off

Turns off or on an extension display of the Call Duration 1 = On
1
Time. The system waits until the interdigit time (Program
21-01-01) expires before beginning this timer.

37 --- Not Used ---

38 Headset Ringing for SLT 0 = Off

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use the 1 = On 0
Headset ringing.

39 ACD Queue Status Display 0 = Off

Turns off or on the ACD Queue Status Display for an 1 = On
0
extension Class of Service. Any extension which has this
option enabled also hears the queue alarm.

40 Do Not Disturb 0 = Off

11-11-08
Turn off or on an extension user ability to set or cancel 1 = On 1
15-07-03
Do Not Disturb.

41 Voice Mail Message Indication on DSS 0 = Off

Turn off or on the Voice Mail Message Indication for an 1 = On 0
extension on a DSS console.

42 Extension Data Swap Enabling 0 = Off

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Extension 1 = On 1 11-15-12
Data Swap.

43 --- Not Used ---

44 Live Monitor Enabling 0 = Off

Turn off or on an extension user ability to use Live 1 = On 1
Monitor.

45 MIC Key Mode while Call Monitoring 0 = Enable

Set per class of service, when in Call Monitoring Mode 1 = Disable
0 20-13-10
determines if the monitored parties receives the barge in
alert tone when Coaching Mode is enabled.

2 - 236 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Default
Item Related
Item Input Data
No. Programming
COS 01~15

46 Remote Conference 0 = Off 11-19

1
1 = On 20-34

47 Station Number Display 0 = Off

Determine if a station Number will be displayed (On) or 1 = On
1
not displayed (Off) in the LCD when the phone is in an
idle state.

48 Station Name Display 0 = Off

Determine if a station Number will be displayed (On) or 1 = On
1
not displayed (Off) in the LCD when the phone is in an
idle state.

49 BLF Indication on CO Incoming State 0 = Off

Determine if a BLF of the station will light when a Normal 1 = On 0
CO call is ringing the phone.

50 AIC Agent display which call is from 0 = Off

Determine if the station logged in via AIC codes will show 1 = On 0
which queue the call is coming from.

51 Number and Name appear in the Directory 0 = Off

Determine if an extension name and number will be 1 = On 1
listed (On) or unlisted (Off) in the directory.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service

Programming Manual 2 - 237

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M to enable/disable
DISA and tie line Class of Service options. You assign a DISA Class of Service to
DISA users in Program 25-09. Assign tie line Classes of Service in 34-02. Up to 15
DISA/E&M Classes of Service can be defined.

Analog trunk-to-analog trunk and ISDN trunk-to-ISDN trunk calls are supported by
this program. However, analog trunk-to-ISDN trunk and ISDN trunk-to-analog
trunk calls are NOT supported by this program.

Input Data

Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item Input
Item
No. Data
COS 1~15

01 First Digit Absorbtion (Delete First Digit Dialed) 0 = Off 0

For tie lines, enable or disable the ability to absorb (ignore) the 1 = On
first incoming digit. Use this to make the tie trunk compatible with
3- and 4-digit tie line service. This option does not apply to DISA.

02 Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access 0 = Off 0

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to 1 = On
dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection
(ARS).

03 Trunk Group Access 0 = Off 0

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to 1 = On
access trunk groups for outside calls (Service Code 704).

04 Outgoing System Speed Dial 0 = Off 0

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to 1 = On
use the System Speed Dialing.

05 Operator Calling 0 = Off 0

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to 1 = On
dial 0 for the telephone system operator.

06 Internal Paging 0 = Off 0

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to 1 = On
use the telephone system Internal Paging.

2 - 238 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Default
Item Input
Item
No. Data
COS 1~15

07 External Paging 0 = Off 0

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to 1 = On
use the telephone system External Paging.

08 Direct Trunk Access 0 = Off 0

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to 1 = On
use Direct Trunk Access (Service Code #9).

09 Forced Trunk Disconnect <Not for ISDN T-point> 0 = Off 0

This option enables or disables a tie trunk caller ability to use 1 = On
Forced Trunk Disconnect (Service Code 3). This option is not
available to DISA callers.

10 Call Forward Setting by Remote via DISA 0 = Off 0

Enable or disable a DISA caller ability to use the Call Forward 1 = On
service codes (Programs 11-11-01 ~ 11-11-05).

11 DISA/Tie Trunk Barge-In 0 = Off 0

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to 1 = On
use the Barge-In feature.

12 Retrieve Park Hold 0 = Off 0

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to 1 = On
retrieve a Park Hold call.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Tie Lines

Programming Manual 2 - 239

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup to define the ringing cycles for each ring
type.

Input Data

Item Ringing
Incoming Signal Type Default
No. Cycle

01 Normal Incoming Call on Trunk 3

02 PBX, CES Incoming Call 8

03 Incoming Internal Call 8

04 DID/DISA/VRS 8

05 DID/DDI 8

06 Dial-In in the E&M Tie Line 8

1~13
07 Door Box Ringing for SLT 2

08 Virtual Extension Ring 8

09 Callback 4

10 Alarm for SLT 5

11 VRS Waiting Message Incoming 6

Call

2 - 240 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Table 2-6 Ringing Cycles

Number Ringing Cycle

1 On

2 On:2.0 / Off:4.0

3 On:1.0 / Off:2.0

4 On:0.5 / Off:0.5

5 On:0.25 / Off:0.25

6 On:0.5 / Off:0.5 / On:0.5 / Off:1.5

7 On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:5.25

8 On:0.375 / Off:0.25 / On:0.375 / Off:2.0

9 On:0.25 / Off:0.125 / On:0.25 / Off:0.125 / On:0.25 / Off:2.0

10 On:1.0 / Off:4.0

11 On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:4.25

12 On:1.0 / Off:3.0

13 On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:2.25

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 241

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-16 : Selectable Display Messages
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages to enter the Selectable Display
Messages. There are 20 alphanumeric messages, with up to 24 characters. Use the
following chart when programming messages.

Use this keypad

When you want to. . .
digit . . .

1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } → ← Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó

2 Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.

3 Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.

4 Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.

5 Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.

6 Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.

7 Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.

8 Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.

9 Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.

0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü α ε θ
Enter characters:
+ , - . / : ; < = > ? B E σ S ∞ ¢ £

# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are
needed – ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming
mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.)

CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.

HOLD Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

2 - 242 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

When using DTP or DTU style telephones on the UNIVERGE SV8100 system, not all
the same characters are available.

Input Data

Selectable Display Message Number 01~20

Item
Input Data
No.

01 24 characters

Default

Number Message

1 IN MEETING UNTIL ##:##

2 MEETING ROOM – ########

3 COME BACK ##:##

4 PLEASE CALL ###########

5 BUSY CALL AFTER ##:##

6 OUT FOR LUNCH BACK ##:##

7 BUSINESS TRIP BACK ##/##

8 BUSINESS TRIP ##########

9 GONE FOR THE DAY

10 ON VACATION UNTIL ##/##

11 MESSAGE 11

12 MESSAGE 12

13 MESSAGE 13

14 MESSAGE 14

15 MESSAGE 15

16 MESSAGE 16

17 MESSAGE 17

18 MESSAGE 18

19 MESSAGE 19

20 MESSAGE 20

Programming Manual 2 - 243

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions

Time value ## : ## must be followed by two spaces.

Feature Cross Reference

Selectable Display Messages

2 - 244 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-17 : Operator Extension
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-17 : Operator Extension to designate an operator. When an
extension user dials 0 or 9 (defined by Program 11-01 Type 5), calls go to the operator
selected in this program.

If you do not assign an extension in Program 90-11-01, system alarms appear on the
extension assigned in this option.

Input Data

Operator Number 1~8

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Operator’s Extension Number Up to eight digits No 11-01

Define the extension numbers which are
Setting 20-01-01
to be used by operators.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Intercom

Programming Manual 2 - 245

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-18 : Service Tone Timers
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-18 : Service Tone Timers to set the values for the system service
tone timers. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and
default setting.

Input Data

Item Input Related

No. Item Data Default Description Program

01 Extension Dial Tone 0~64800 30 After getting Intercom dial tone,

Time seconds a telephone user has this time
to dial the first digit of the
Intercom call.

02 Busy Tone Timer 0~64800 15

seconds

03 Congestion Tone 0~64800 10 A Busy Tone when system

seconds resources run short. (such as
DTMF receiver resources).

04 Call Waiting Tone 0~64800 10 This option sets the time

Timer seconds between Call Waiting tones.
This timer also sets the time
between Off-Hook Signaling
alerts.

05 Multiline Confirmation 0~64800 10

Tone seconds

06 Interval of Call 0~64800 10

Waiting Tone seconds

07 Intrusion Tone Repeat 0~64800 0 After a call is interrupted (such

Time seconds as Barge-In, Voice Mail
Conversation Recording, or
Voice Over), the system
repeats the Intrusion Tone after
this time. Normally, you should
enter 0 to disable this time.

08 Conference Tone 0~64800 0

Interval seconds

09 Warning Beep Tone 0~64800 60 14-01-18

Signaling Interval seconds

2 - 246 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Distinctive Ringing, Tones, and Flash Patterns

Programming Manual 2 - 247

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-19 : System Options for Caller ID
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-19 : System Options for Caller ID to define the system options for
the Caller ID feature.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Caller ID Displaying Format 0 = First 10 0

(if displaying digits are more than 12 digits) digits
(Upper)
1 = Last 10
digits
(Lower)

02 Caller ID Wait Timer 0-30 seconds 5

When an incoming CO call is received, the SV8100 starts
the timer. It will wait the programmed time for Caller ID
information from telco before connecting the CO call.

03 Caller ID Edit Mode 0 = off 0

If Caller ID Edit Mode is disabled (0), no trunk access code 1 = on
will be added to the Caller ID. If this option is enabled (1),
the trunk access code entered in Program 10-02-05 will be
added to the beginning of the Caller ID.

04 Wait Facility IE Timer 0~64800 seconds 10

This timer is used with ISDN trunks to determine how long
the system waits for the Caller ID name from the Telco.

05 Caller ID Sender Queing Time (Sender Wait) 0~64800 seconds 0

07 Long Distance Code Up to two digits No

setting

08 Area Code Up to six digits No

setting

2 - 248 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Caller ID

Programming Manual 2 - 249

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data to define the
messages which are displayed when no Caller ID information is received.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Private Call 24 Alphanumeric UNAVAILABLE INFO

Characters

02 Call from Out of Service Area 24 Alphanumeric OUT-OF-STATE

Characters

03 Call Information with Error 24 Alphanumeric NO CALLER INFO

Characters

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Caller ID

2 - 250 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation to define the system
options for the Long Conversation feature.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Long Conversation Alarm 1 0~64800 (sec) 170 14-01-15

The warning tone for long toll calls sounds after
this time.

02 Long Conversation Alarm 2 0~64800 (sec) 180 14-01-15

After the initial long toll call warning tone,
additional warning tones sound after this time.

03 Long Conversation Cutoff for Incoming Call 0~64800 (sec) 0 14-01-14

This timer determines how long the system
waits before disconnecting an incoming call.

04 Long Conversation Cutoff for Outgoing Call 0~64800 (sec) 0 14-01-14

This timer determines how long the system
waits before disconnecting an outgoing call.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Long Conversation Cutoff

Programming Manual 2 - 251

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-22 : System Options for Wireless – DECT Service
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-22 : System Options for Wireless – DECT Service to define the
time the system waits before determining the Wireless – DECT phone is out of range.
For incoming calls, the timer begins when the call is received. If the time defined here
expires before the Wireless – DECT phone starts to ring, the system determines the
phone is out of range and provides the out-of-range services (indicates out-of range,
transfers the call to voice mail or to another extension).

Input Data

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

05 --- Not Used ---

06 Out of Area Talkie Number 0~100 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Wireless – DECT

2 - 252 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-23 : System Options for CTI
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-23 : System Options for CTI to define the system options for the
CTI feature.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Delayed ring timer for CTI 0~64800 (sec) 30

02 ALERT replay time (CTI) 0~64800 (sec) 8

03 Trunk Virtual Bridge – TSP Driver 0 = Disable (No) 0

Enable or disable the system to send trunk or virtual 1 = Enable (Yes)
extension information to the TSP driver.

04 The Timer that waits for an off-hook for Single Line 0~64800 (sec) 30
Telephone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications

Programming Manual 2 - 253

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-25 : ISDN Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-25 : ISDN Options to define the ISDN system options.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Send the Release Message After Subscriber Hangs 0 = Service Off 1

Up 1 = Service On

02 Progress Indicate Information Element Detect 0 = Service Off 1

1 = Service On

03 Bearer Capability Select from SLT Outgoing 0 = 3.1KHz Audio 0

1 = Speech

04 Send DT until user dials first digit (Local Dial Tone) 0 = Service Off 0
With Overlap Sending Mode, if the network side stops 1 = Service On
dial tone when CLI is included in the SETUP message,
the system sends dial tone until the user dials the first
digit instead of the network.

05 T305 Timer Start After Sending Disconnect 0 = Service Off 1

Message
1 = Service On

06 Call Proceeding Send Mode 0 = Service Off 1

1 = Service On

07 Local Busy Tone Mode Set When Disconnect 0 = Local Busy Tone 0
Message Received Off
1 = Busy Tone from
NT (network side)

08 Use of Lower Layer Compatibility (LLC) 0 = Disable (Off) 1

This Program must be set to (0 = Disable) for 1 = Enable (On)
International Dialing when using Calling Number
Presentation (CPN) from station.

09 High Layer Compatibility (HLC) Sending 0 = Disable (Off) 1

1 = Enable (On)

10 S-Point Terminal Seizes Analog Trunk 0 = Disable (Off) 0

1 = Enable (On)

2 - 254 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

11 Automatic Changing System Clock When Date/ 0 = Disable (Off) 1

Time Information Element Received
1 = Enable (On)

12 Call Forward Options (Auto Connect Send) 0 = Normal – No 0

Incoming Calls Forwarded Out Automatically Return Message (Off)
Connect Message When Outgoing Call Receives 1 = Normal – No
Alerting Message. Message (On)

13 Local Busy Tone (Release) 0 = Off 0

Busy tone send when T-point receiving a RELEASE 1 = On
message from Network.

14 No Response Release Send 0 = Off 0

Operation mode setting for when second T303 timer 1 = On
expires.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

ISDN Compatibility

Programming Manual 2 - 255

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-26 : Multiplier for Charging Cost
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-26 : Multiplier for Charging Cost to define the Multiplier for
charging cost to each extension service class.

Input Data

Service Class 1~15

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Value % 100~500 100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 256 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-28 : Trunk to Trunk Conversation to define system options for
Trunk to Trunk Conversation.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

01 Conversation Continue Code 0~9, #, No Setting 14-01-25

Input the code that can be dialed (Set for one digit 20-28-03
only) 24-02-07
to continue the conversation after 24-02-10
the Trunk-to-Trunk Release 25-07-07
Warning Tone is heard. 25-07-08

02 Conversation Disconnect Code 0~9, #, No Setting 14-01-25

Input the code that can be dialed (Set for one digit 24-02-07
only) 24-02-10
to disconnect the conversation 25-07-07
after the Trunk-to-Trunk Release 25-07-08
Warning Tone is heard.

03 Conversation Continue Time 0~64800 seconds 0 14-01-25

Input how long the conversation
20-28-01
24-02-07
will extend when the Conversation 24-02-10
Continue Code is dialed. 25-07-07
25-07-08

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 257

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-29 : Timer Class for Extension
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-29 : Timer Class for Extension to assign the timer class to each
extension. There are 16 Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for
this Program, one for each Night Service Mode. This entry includes virtual extension
numbers.

The details of classes are assigned by Program 20-31.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Day/Night Mode 1~8, Class Number 0~15 0

0 = Not assigned

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 258 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-30 : Timer Class for Trunks to assign the timer class to each trunk.
There are 16 Classes that can be assigned. You make eight entries for this Program,
one for each Night Service Mode. The details of classes are assigned by
Program 20-31.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Day/Night Mode 1~8, Class Number 0~15, #, 0

0 = Not assigned

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 259

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-31 : Timer Class Timer Assignment to assign values to the timers
on a class of service basis.

Input Data

Timer Class Number 0~15

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

01 Trunk Queuing Callback Duration Time 0~64800 seconds 15 seconds 20-01-08

Trunk Queuing Callback rings an extension for
this amount of time

02 Callback / Trunk Queuing Cancel Time 0~64800 seconds 64800 seconds 20-01-09
The system cancels an extension Callback or
Trunk Queueing request after this amount of
time.

03 CAR/SIE/Virtual Extension Delay Interval 0~64800 seconds 10 seconds 20-04-03

CAR Keys/SIE Keys/Virtual Extensions set for
Delayed Ringing (refer to 15-11 : Virtual
Extension Delayed Ring Assignment) ring the
extension after this interval.

04 Intercom Interdigits Time (Intercom I/D 0~64800 seconds 10 seconds 21-01-02

Timer)
When placing Intercom calls, extension users
must dial each digit in this time.

05 Trunk Interdigits Time (Trunk I/D Timer) 0~64800 seconds 10 seconds 21-01-03
The system waits for this time to expire before
placing the call in a talk state (Call Timer starts
after time expires, Voice Over and Barge-In are
not allowed until after time expires).

06 Hotline Time Start Time (Hotline Start) 0~64800 seconds 5 seconds 21-01-09
A Ringdown extension automatically calls the
programmed destination after this time.

2 - 260 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

07 Ring No Answer Alarm Time 0~64800 seconds 60 seconds 22-01-03

If a trunk rings a multiline telephone longer than
this interval, the system changes the ring
cadence. This indicates to the user that the call
has been ringing too long.

08 DIL/Incoming Ring Group No Answer Time 0~64800 seconds 0 seconds 22-01-04

A DIL that rings its programmed destination
longer than this interval diverts to the DIL No
Answer Ring Group (set in Program 22-08).

09 DID Ring-No-Answer Time 0~64800 seconds 20 seconds 22-01-06

In systems with DID Ring-No-Answer Intercept,
this interval sets the Ring-No-Answer time. This
interval is how long a DID call rings the
destination extension before rerouting to the
intercept ring group.

10 Hold Recall Time (Non Exclusive Hold) 0~64800 seconds 90 seconds 24-01-01
A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed
it on Hold after this time. This time works with
the Hold Recall Callback Time (Program
24-01-02 ).

11 Hold Recall CallBack Time (Non Exclusive 0~64800 seconds 30 seconds 24-01-02
Hold)
A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings an
extension for this time. This time works with
Hold Recall Time or Park Hold Time. After this
time, the system invokes the Hold Recall Time
again. Cycling between time Program 24-01-01
and 24-01-02 and Program 24-01-06 and
24-01-07 continues until a user answers the
call.

12 Exclusive Hold Recall Time 0~64800 seconds 90 seconds 24-01-03

A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the
extension that placed it on Hold after this time.

13 Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time 0~64800 seconds 30 seconds 24-01-04

An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension for
this time. If not picked up, the call goes back on
System Hold.

14 Park Hold Time – Normal 0~64800 seconds 90 seconds 24-01-06

A call left parked longer than this time interval
recalls the extension that initially parked it.

Programming Manual 2 - 261

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

15 Delayed Call Forwarding Time (Call Forward 0~64800 seconds 10 seconds 24-02-03
No Answer)
If activated at an extension, Delayed Call
Forwarding occurs after this time. This also sets
how long a Transferred call waits at an
extension forwarded to Voice Mail before
routing to the called extension mailbox.

16 Transfer Recall Time 0~64800 seconds 30 seconds 24-02-04

An unanswered transferred call recalls after this
time to the extension that initially transferred it.

17 DID/DISA No Answer Time (Disconnect or 0~64800 seconds 10 seconds 25-07-02

IRG or VM)
A VRS/DISA caller can ring an extension for
this time before the system sets the call as a
Ring No Answer. After this time expires, the call
follows the programmed Ring No Answer
routing (set in Program 25-03 and 25-04).

18 Disconnect after Re-transfer to IRG 0~64800 seconds 60 seconds 25-07-03

19 Long Conversation Warning Tone Time 0~64800 seconds 30 seconds 25-07-07

(Trunk to Trunk)
Determine the time a DISA caller or any
trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking)
conversation can last before the Long
Conversation tone is heard

20 Long Conversation Disconnect (Trunk to 0~64800 seconds 15 seconds 25-07-08

Trunk)
This time determines how long the system waits
before disconnecting a DISA caller or any
trunk-to-trunk (such as Tandem Trunking)
conversation call after the Long Conversation
tone is heard.

21 DISA Internal Paging Time 0~64800 seconds 30 seconds 25-07-09

This is the maximum length of an Internal Page
placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues
longer than this time, the system terminates the
DISA call.

22 DISA External Paging Time 0~64800 seconds 30 seconds 25-07-10

This is the maximum length of an External Page
placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues
longer than this time, the system terminates the
DISA call.

23 Page Announcement Duration 0~64800 seconds 1200 seconds 31-01-02

This timer sets the maximum length of Page
announcements. (Affects External Paging only)

2 - 262 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions

These timers are used when an extension or trunk is assigned to a class from 1 to
16 in 20-29-01 or 20-30-01. When the timer class is set to 0, the system-wide
timer is used.

All defaults are the same as the system-wide timers.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 263

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 20-34 : Remote Conference Group Setup to define the Remote
Conference options.

Input Data

Remote Conference Group Number 1-4

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Conference Name Up to 12 characters Group1 = Conf1

Enter the name displayed at the time of a
Group2 = Conf2
Group3 = Conf3
Remote Conference. This entry will display Group4 = Conf4
on the keyset LCD.

02 Password 4 digits Fixed Group1 = 1111

Define the password of a Remote (0-9, @ = wild character) Group2 = 2222
Group3 = 3333
Conference. Group4 = 4444

03 Define the maximum number of participants 0-32 8

of a Remote Conference.

04 Max Conference Duration 0-64800 seconds 7200

Define the maximum duration of a Remote
Conference.
When this time passes, the conference is
disconnected by the SV8100.

05 End Tone Alert Time 0-64800 seconds 300

Determine how long prior disconnecting a
Remote Conference call (based on the
maximum conference duration above) the
SV8100 should send out a beep. This is
used to warn the conference participants of
the pending disconnect.

2 - 264 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Conference, Remote

Programming Manual 2 - 265

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-35 : Extension’s Operator Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-35 : Extension’s Operator Setting to assign an extension to an
operator group.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Extension’s Operator Setting 0~15 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 266 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-36 : Trunk’s Operator Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-36 : Trunk’s Operator Setting to assign a trunk to an operator
group.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Trunk’s Operator Setting 0~15 0

Allows the user to select Operator Group per trunk. (0 = Not assigned)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 267

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-37 : Operator Extension Group Setup to define the operator(s) in
the operator group.

Input Data

Operator Group 1~15

Input Data

Operator Number 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Operator Extension Group Setup Up to eight digits None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 268 Program 20 : System Option Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 20 : System Option Setup

20-38 : Operator Group Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 20-38 : Operator Group Setting to set up priority of a call when calling
an operator telephone.

Input Data

Operator Group 1~15

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Operator Access Mode 0 = Step 0

Assign if the operator is called, starting with the first 1 = Circular
operator, every time (0) or a different operator is tried
first (1)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 269

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2 - 270 Program 20 : System Option Setup

 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls to set the system
options for Outgoing Call Service.
Program
Input Data

21
Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Seizure Trunk Line Mode 0 = Priority 0 14-05

Select the trunk based off the Trunk Route 14-06
Route Priority (0) or based off the 1 = Circular
trunk that has not been used in the Route
longest time (1).

02 Intercom Interdigit Time 0~64800 (sec) 10

When placing Intercom calls,
extension users must dial each digit in
this time.

03 Trunk Interdigit Time (External) 0~64800 (sec) 10 14-02-08

The system waits for this time to
expire before placing the call in a talk
state (Call Timer starts after time
expires, Voice Over and Barge-In are
not allowed until after time expires).

04 Dial Tone Detection Time 0~64800 (sec) 5 14-02-05

If dial tone detection is enabled, the
system waits this time for the Telco to
return dial tone. When the time
expires, the system assumes dial tone
is not present. To disable this time
(and have the system wait
continuously), enter 0.

Programming Manual 2 - 271

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

05 Disconnect Time when Dial Tone 0~64800 (sec) 0

not Detected
If 14-02-11 is enabled, the system
skips over a trunk if dial tone is not
detected. This option pertains to calls
placed using Speed Dial, ARS, Last
Number Redial or Save Number
dialed. It does not pertain to line key
or Direct Trunk Access calls.

06 Dial Pause at First Digit 0~64800 (sec) 3

07 Toll Restriction Override Time 0~64800 (sec) 10 20-08-06

After dialing the Toll Restriction
21-07
Override codes, the system removes
Toll Restriction from the extension for
this time.

08 Preset Dial Display Hold Time 0~64800 (sec) 5

09 Ringdown Extension Timer (Hotline 0~64800 (sec) 5 20-08-09

Start) 21-11
A Ringdown extension automatically
calls its programmed destination after
this time.

10 Dial Digits for Toll Restriction Path 0~24 0

If this option is programmed with an
entry other than 0, a call does not
have a talk path unless the user dials
at least the number of digits entered in
this option when placing an outgoing
call.
This means that an entry of 4 or
higher in this program causes a
problem when dialing 911(USA only).
Since it is only a 3-digit number, the
call does not have a talk path,
preventing the emergency dispatcher
from hearing the caller. This option
should be kept at its default setting of
0 to prevent any problems with dialing
911 (USA only).

11 Inter-Digit Time for Toll Restriction 0~60 10

Path Control

2 - 272 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

12 Dial E911 Routing Without Trunk 0 = Trunk 1

Access Access
If enabled (1), an extension user can Code
dial 911 (USA only) without first Required
dialing a trunk access code or 1 = Trunk
pressing a line key. If disabled (0), an Access
extension user must dial a trunk Code Not
access code (e.g., 9) or press a line
Required
key before dialing 911 (USA only).

13 Alarm Ring Timer (E911) 0, 1~64800 (sec) 0 11-12-56

Use this option to set the duration of (0 = Off) 20-08-16
the E911 Alarm Ring Time. If set for 0,
the E911 Alarm does not ring.

14 Forced Account Code Inter-digit 0~64800 (sec) 3

Timer
The system waits this time for a user
to enter a Forced Account code.

15 Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line 0 = Disable 0 15-01-05

(Toll Restriction) (Off) 21-01-16
Enable or disable the Outgoing 1 = Enable (On) 21-01-17
Disable on Incoming Line feature.

16 Supervise Dial Detection Timer 0~64800 (sec) 20 15-01-05

With the Outgoing Disable on
21-01-16
21-01-17
Incoming Line feature, if dial tone is
not detected after the extension
answers an incoming line, the system
determines the call is unable to
complete and releases the DTMF
receiver.

17 Restriction Digit in Outgoing Digits 0~9 4 15-01-05

Disable on Incoming Line 21-01-15
With the Outgoing Disable on 21-01-16
Incoming Line feature, determine the
number of digits to be dialed before
the call should be disconnected.

18 Reset Dial After Failure of Trunk 0 = Disable 0 99-01-01

Access (Off)
Enable (1) or Disable (0) the ability to 1 = Enable (On)
continue to dial codes or extensions
after receiving Trunk Busy. This
needs to be set to Enabled (1) for the
Forced Trunk Disconnect feature to
work.

19 Do-Not-Call-Setup 0 = No service 0 15-01-07

1 = Extented
common
restriction

Programming Manual 2 - 273

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Placing

2 - 274 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to assign Program
14-06 routes to extensions.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Day/Night Route Table Related

Default
No. Mode Number Program

01 1~8 0~100 1 14-06

(0 = No Setting) 14-01-07

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 275

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks to set the Trunk Route Table
for Automatic External Call Forward. The Route Table is set in Program 14-06.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Day/Night Route Table Related

Default
No. Mode Number Program

01 1~8 0~100 0 14-06

(0 = No setting) 14-07-01

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Trunk Group Routing

2 - 276 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions to assign a Toll
Restriction class to an extension. The details of Toll Restriction are defined in
Program 21-05 and 21-06.

A telephone and a trunk will have a Restriction Class. The higher class will apply
for outgoing calls.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Restriction Related

Day/Night Mode Default
No. Class Program

01 1~9 1~15 2 14-01-08

9 = (Power Failure Mode) 21-05

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 277

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-05 : Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class to set the system Toll Restriction
classes (1~15).

Input Data

Toll Restriction Class Number 1~15

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

01 International Call 0 = Unassigned 1, 6~15 = 0 This option assigns/unassigns the 21-06-01

Restriction Table (No) International Call Restrict Table
1 = Assigned 2~5 = 1 for the Toll Restriction Class you
(Yes) are programming. Enter
International Call Restrict Table
data in Program 21-06-01.

02 International Call 0 = Unassigned 1, 3~15 = 0 This option assigns/unassigns the 21-06-02

Permit Code Table (No) International Call Permit Table for
1 = Assigned 2=1 the Toll Restriction Class you are
(Yes) programming. Enter International
Call Permit Table data in Program
21-06-02.

03 --- Not Used ---

04 Maximum Number of 1~4 = Table 1, 2, 6~15 = 0 Select the table (defined in 21-06-03
Digits Table 21-06-03) to be used to determine
Assignment 0 = Disable
(None) 3=1 the maximum number of digits
4=2 allowed for outgoing calls.
5=3

05 Common Permit 0 = Unassigned 1, 8~15 = 0 It chooses whether the table set 21-06-04
Code Table (No) up by 21-06-04 is referred to, or
1 = Assigned 2~7 = 1 not referred to.
(Yes)

06 Common Restriction 0 = Unassigned 1, 6~15 = 0 It chooses whether the table set 21-06-05
Table (No) up by 21-06-05 is referred to, or
1 = Assigned 2~5 = 1 not referred to.
(Yes)

07 Permit Code Table 1~4 = Table 1-6, 8-15 = 0 Set the tables 1~4 when referring 21-06-06
0 = Disable to the table set up by 21-06-06.
(None) 7=1

2 - 278 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

08 Restriction Table 1~4 = Table 1, 2, 6~15 = 0 Set the tables 1~4 when referring 21-06-07
0 = Disable to the table set up by 21-06-07.
(None) 3=1
4=2
5=3

09 Restriction for 0 = Does Not 0 Use this option to enable/disable

Common Speed Dials Restrict Toll Restriction for Common
1 = Following Speed Dialing numbers. If
Restriction enabled, System Speed Dialing
numbers have the same
Check
restrictions as manually dialed
numbers.

10 Restriction for Group 0 = Does Not 0 Use this option to enable/disable

Speed Dials Restrict Toll Restriction for Group Speed
1 = Following Dialing numbers. If enabled,
Restriction Group Speed Dialing numbers
have the same restrictions as
Check
manually dialed numbers.

11 Intercom Call 0 = Disable 0 Determines if incoming and

Restriction (No) outgoing intercom calls are
1 = Enable allowed.
(Yes)

12 PBX Call Restriction 0 = Disable 1~6, 8~15 = 0 Use this option to set how the
(No) system Toll Restricts calls over
1 = Enable 7=1 PBX trunks. If you enable PBX
(Yes) Toll Restriction, the system begins
Toll Restriction after the PBX
access code. The user cannot dial
a PBX extension. If you disable
PBX Toll Restriction, the system
only restricts calls that contain the
PBX access code. The system
does not restrict calls to PBX
extensions. Refer to the PBX
compatibility feature. Make sure
Program 21-05-04 (Maximum
Number of Digits Table
Assignment) allows for PBX Toll
Call Dialing (normally 12 digits).

13 Restriction of Tie 0 = Disable 0 It chooses whether the toll 34-08

Line Calls (No) restriction of the dial set up by
1 = Enable 34-08 is enabled or disabled.
(Yes)

14 Trunk Transfer 0 = Not allow 0 (Not allow) If this program is set to 1, you can
Restriction on transfer the outgoing trunk which
Incomplete Dial
1 = Allow
you dialed incompletely.

15 Common Hold 0 = Not allow 0 (Not allow) If this program is set to 1, you can
Restriction on hold the outgoing trunk which you
Incomplete Dial
1 = Allow
dialed in restriction check.

Programming Manual 2 - 279

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Default

Toll Restriction Class

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

01: International Call Restrict Table 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

02: International Call Permit Table 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
03: --- Not Used --- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
04: Max. No. Digits Table Assign. 0 0 1 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
05: Common Permit Table 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
06: Common Restrict Table 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
07: Permit Code Table 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
08: Restrict Code Table 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
09: Restriction for Common Abbr. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Dials

10: Restriction for Group Abbr. Dials 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

11: Intercom Call Restriction 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
12: Restriction of PBX Calls 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
13: Restriction of Tie Line Calls 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
14: Restriction for Incomplete Dialed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Trunk Transfer

15: Allow the Outgoing Trunk to 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Common Hold

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 280 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup to set the system Toll
Restriction data. Dial 1-9, 0, , # can be entered in each table.

Input Data

Item
Item Table Input Data Default Description
No.

01 International Call 1~10 Dial Tables 1~10 = No This option lets you program the
Restriction Table Setting Restrict Table for international
(Up to four
digits) calls. The system has 10
International Call Restrict Tables.
Each entry can have up to four
digits.

02 International Call 1~20 Dial Tables 1~20 = No This option lets you program the
Permit Code Setting Permit Table for international calls.
Table (Up to six
digits) The system has 20 International
Call Permit Tables. Each entry can
have up to six digits.

03 Maximum 1~4 4~30 Tables 1~ 4 = 30 This option selects the maximum

Number Digits number of digits allowed in
Table outgoing calls for each table.
Assignment

04 Common Permit 1~10 Dial No Setting This option lets you program the
Code Table Common Permit Code Table. This
(Up to four
digits) table contains up to 10 codes you
commonly allow users to dial.

05 Common 1~10 Dial No Setting This option lets you program the
Restriction Table Common Restrict Code Table. This
(Up to 12
digits) table contains up to 10 codes you
commonly prevent users from
dialing.

06 Permit Code 1~4 Dial Table 1~4 = No Setting This option lets you program the
Table Permit Code Tables. If the system
(table) (Up to 12
digits) has Toll Restriction enabled, users
001~200 can dial numbers only if permitted
(Entry) by these tables and the Common
Permit Table (21-06-04). There are
four Permit Code Tables, with up to
200 entries in each table. The
system permits calls exactly as you
enter the code.

Programming Manual 2 - 281

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Table Input Data Default Description
No.

07 Deny Restriction 1~4 Dial Table 1~4 = No Setting This option lets you program the
Table Restrict Code Tables. If the system
(table) (Up to 12
digits) has Toll Restriction enabled, users
1~60 cannot dial numbers listed in these
(Entry) tables. There are four Restrict
Code Tables, with up to 200 entries
in each table. The system restricts
calls exactly as you enter the code.

08 PBX Access 1~4 Dial Table 1~4 = No Setting Use this option to enter the PBX
Code (Up to two Access Code. When the system is
digits) behind a PBX, this is the code
users dial to access a PBX trunk.
Toll Restriction begins after the
PBX access code. For PBX trunks
(Program 14-04) the system only
Toll Restricts calls that contain the
access code. Always program this
option when the system is behind a
PBX, even if you don’t want to use
Toll Restriction. PBX Access
Codes can have up to two digits,
using 0-9, #, and LINE KEY 1
(don’t care). When using Account
Codes, do not use an asterisk in a
PBX access code. Otherwise, after
the , the trunk stops sending
digits to the central office. Entries
1~4 correspond to the 4 PBX
Access Codes. Each code can
have up to two digits.

09 Specific Dial 1~20 Dial No Setting

Outgoing Code
(Up to eight
digits)

10 Outgoing Call 1~20 Dial No Setting

Code Setup (Up to four
digits)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 282 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup to assign Toll
Restriction Override codes to extension ports. Each code must have four digits, using
any combination of 0~9, # and . Each extension can have a separate code, or many
extensions can share the same override code.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Related
Password Default
No. Program

01 Four Digits No Setting 21-01-07

(Fixed) 20-08-06

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 283

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup to define the automatic Repeat Dial data.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Repeat Redial Count 0~255 3

Sets how many times a Repeat Redial
automatically repeats if the call does not go
through.

02 Repeat Redial Interval Time 0~64800 (sec) 60

This time sets the interval between Repeat
Redial attempts.

03 Repeat Dial Calling Timer 0~64800 (sec) 30

After dialing the trunk call, Repeat Redial
maintains the call after this time. After this time,
the system terminates the call, waits the Repeat
Redial Time (Timer 02) and tries again.

04 Time for Send Busy Tone for ISDN Trunk 0~64800 (sec) 0
Sets the time (sec) to send out Busy Tone with
an ISDN line, when called party is busy.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 284 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-09 : Dial Block Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-09 : Dial Block Setup to define the Dial Blocking Toll Restriction
Class and Dial Block Password to be used by the Supervisor extension.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Toll Restriction Class With Dial Block 1~15 1

Assign a Toll Restriction Class of Service when the Dial Block
feature is used.

02 Supervisor Password 0~9, , # No

Assign a 4-digit password to be used by the supervisor to enable (4-digit fixed) Setting
or disable Dial Block for other extensions.

Conditions

This function works by password and Class of Service control (the supervisor is
not an assigned extension). If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service,
everyone may become a supervisor if they know the Dial Block password.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 285

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension to define the Toll
Restriction Class to each extension when the extension is set for Dial Block
Restriction. If this data is 0, Toll Restriction Class follows Program 21-09-01.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item
Toll Restriction Class Default
No.

01 0, 1~15 0 (No Setting)

(0 = No Setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 286 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment to define the
Hotline destination number for each extension number.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Related
Hotline Destination Number Default
No. Program

01 0, , #, Pause, Hook Flash, No Setting 20-08-09

@ (Code to wait for answer 21-01-09
supervision)
(maximum 24 digits)

Conditions

The @ code is used to make an outbound call automatically to a DISA Trunk or to

VM Auto Attendant. This code can only be used on ISDN outbound calls. Internal
calls and analog outbound calls are not supported.

Feature Cross Reference

Ringdown Extension, Internal/External

Programming Manual 2 - 287

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks to assign
Calling Party Numbers for each trunk (maximum 16 digits per entry). When a call is
made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned
(Program 21-13), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in
21-12.

If the Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the
system sends the data in Program 21-13.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item
Calling Party Number Data Default
No.

01 1~0, , # (maximum 16 digits) No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

ISDN Compatibility

2 - 288 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions to assign
each extension a Calling Party Number (maximum 16 digits per entry). The calling
number is the subscriber number of the dial-in number. When a call is made by an
extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned (Program
21-13), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in Program
21-12.

If a Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the
system sends the data in Program 21-13.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Calling Party

Default
No. Number Data

01 0~9, , # No setting
(Max. 16 digits)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

ISDN Compatibility

Programming Manual 2 - 289

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup to assign the
password and Toll Restriction Class for Walking Toll Restriction. Each code is six
digits long, using any combination of 0~9, # and .

Input Data

ID Table Number 1~500

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 User ID Dial (Six digits) No Setting

02 Walking Toll Restriction 1~15 15

Class Number

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Toll Restriction

2 - 290 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to designate
the alternate trunk access route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk
Route Access Code. Refer to Program 11-09 : Trunk Access Code when setting up
alternate trunk codes. Refer to 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing to set up the trunk
routes. When entering data for this option, enter the route number or 0 to prevent
routing.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Day/Night Route Table

Default
No. Mode Number

01 1~8 0~100 0
(0 = No Setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Placing

Programming Manual 2 - 291

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networks
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networks to assign Program 14-06
routes for a networked system. This is required to seize the trunk in a networked
system (Extension in System A tries to make an external call using a trunk in System
B).
The route number is specified for each system ID (01-50).

Input Data

System ID 01-50

Item Day/Night Route Table Related

Default
No. Mode Number Program

01 1~8 0-100 1 14-06

(0=No setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Placing

Networking - NetLink

Networking - AspireNet

2 - 292 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-17 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk set the
SIP calling party number for individual trunks.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item
Description Input Data Default
No.

01 IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup Up to 16 digits None

for Trunk
(1~0, , #)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 293

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-18 : IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
to assign the Calling Party Number for each extension. The assigned number is sent
to the exchange when the caller places an outgoing call.

When the Calling Party Number is assigned by PRG 21-17, 21-18 and 21-19, the
system uses the data in PRG 21-18 and PRG 21-19.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item
Description Input Data Default
No.

01 IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup Up to 16 digits None

for Extension
(1~0, , #)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 294 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-19 : IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension to
set the SIP calling party number for an individual extension.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Related
Description Input Data Default
No. Program

01 IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Up to 16 Digits None 15-01-04

Number Setup for Extension 20-08-13
(1~0, , #)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 295

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-21 : Toll Restriction for Trunks (Seized Trunk Basis Setting) to
define the toll restriction class to each trunk. The details of toll restriction are defined
by PRG 21-05 and 21-06.

This program is compared to Station Restriction Class. The higher class is applied.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Related
Description Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Restriction Class 1~15 1 14-01-08

Enter the Toll Restriction Class for the selected
21-05
trunk.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 296 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication – Call Back Settings
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-22 : CO Message Waiting Indication – Call Back Settings to
define the settings of CO Message Waiting Indication.

Input Data

Trunk 001~200

Item
Description Input Data Default
No.

01 CO MWI Call Back Enabling 0 = No VMWI Service 0

Enable or Disable CO MWI Call Back. 1 = Enable VMWI
Service

02 CO MWI Call Back Number Area Setting 0000~1999 1999

Define the Speed Dial Bin number for MWI Call
Back.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 297

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

21-24 : Forced Access Dial Data
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 21-24 : Forced Access Dial Data to set for Emergency number data.
First digit of dialing data should be same as trunk access code.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Define the Emergency Number 1-0, , # No Setting

Data (Maximum16digits)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 298 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup

 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls to define the
system options for incoming calls.
Program
Input Data

22
Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

01 Incoming Call 0 = Intercom 1 Use this option to determine if Intercom 15-02-22

Priority Call calls or trunk calls have answer priority
Priority when both are ringing simultaneously.
1 = Trunk Call
Priority

02 Incoming Call 0 = Disable 0 If enabled, an incoming call that rings 22-01-03

Ring No Answer (Off) longer than the Ring No Answer Alarm 22-01-04
Alarm interval (22-01-03), changes to a
1 = Enable
(On) unique ring cadence to indicate that the
call has been ringing too long. If
disabled, this does not occur.

03 Ring No Answer 0~64800 (sec) 60 If a trunk rings a multiline telephone 22-01-02

Alarm Time longer than this interval, the system
changes the ring cadence. This
indicates to the user that the call has
been ringing too long.

04 DIL No Answer 0~64800 (sec) 0 A DIL that rings its programmed

Recall Time destination longer than this interval
diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring
Group (set in Program 22-08).

05 --- Not Used ---

06 DID Ring- 0~64800 (sec) 20 In systems with DID Ring-No-Answer 22-12

No-Answer Time Intercept, this interval sets the
Ring-No-Answer time. This interval is
how long a DID call rings the
destination extension before rerouting
to the intercept ring group.

07 DID Incoming 0~64800 (sec) 20

Ring Group No
Answer Time

Programming Manual 2 - 299

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

08 DID Pilot Call No 0~64800 (sec) 60

Answer Time

09 DID to Trunk to 0~64800 (sec) 20

Trunk no answer
timer

10 VRS Waiting 0 = Enable 0 This program sets up the operation 22-14

Message Always mode for Auto Attendant and Queuing 22-15
Operation Message. 22-08
1 = Change by
22-04
Manual 22-01-04
Operation 20-15-11
15-07

11 VRS Waiting 0~64800 (sec) 20 Setup the sending duration time of the 22-14-06
Message Interval Auto – Attendant & Queuing. 22-15-06
Time 41-11-06
The message is repeatedly sent out
within the specified time.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Answering

2 - 300 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup to assign the incoming trunk type
for each trunk. There is one item for each Night Service Mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Day/Night Related

Incoming Type Default Description
No. Mode Program

01 1~8 0 = Normal 0 Use this option to set the 14-04

1 = VRS (second feature type for the trunk
dial tone if no you are programming.
VRS installed)
2 = DISA
3 = DID
4 = DIL
5 = E&M Tie line
6 = Delayed VRS
7 = ANI/DNIS
8 = DID(DDI) Mode
Switching

Conditions

When connecting to T1 trunks, after changing Program 22-02-01 to match the

Telco connected T1 service type, the T1 cable or the T1 blade must be unplugged
and then reconnected in order for the T1 blade to sync.

When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID), the DID Transfer to Destination in 22-11-04
for each DID feature is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID
trunks when assigned as VRS.

When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID), the DID Intercept Destination feature for
each DID is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks assigned
as VRS.

Programming Manual 2 - 301

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Answering

2 - 302 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range to select the ring tone range for the
trunk. The trunk uses a ring tone in the range selected when it rings an extension.
Eight ring tones are available. Customize the Trunk Ring Tones in Program 82-01.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Related
Ring Tone Pattern Default Description
No. Program

01 0~8 0 Use this program to select the ring tone 15-02

(Ring Tone Pattern 1~4) range for the trunk. The trunk uses a
ring tone in the range selected when it
(Melody 1~ Melody 5) rings an extension. Eight ring tones are
available.

Table 2-7 Program 22-03 – Incoming Signal Frequency Patterns

Incoming Signal
Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation
Frequency Pattern

Pattern 1 High 1100Hz 1400Hz 16Hz

Middle 660Hz 760Hz 16Hz
Low 520Hz 660Hz 16Hz

Pattern 2 High 1100Hz 1400Hz 8Hz

Middle 660Hz 760Hz 8Hz
Low 520Hz 660Hz 8Hz

Pattern 3 High 2000 760 16Hz

Middle 1400 660 16Hz
Low 1100 540 16Hz

Pattern 4 High 2000 760 8Hz

Middle 1400 660 8Hz
Low 1100 540 8Hz

Programming Manual 2 - 303

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Selectable Ring Tones

2 - 304 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment to assign
extensions to Ring Groups. Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group
programming. Use Program 22-05 to assign trunks to Ring Groups and use Program
22-06 to set the ringing for the phones. An Incoming Ring Group (IRG) can have up to
32 extension numbers assigned.

There are 100 available Ring Groups.

Input Data

Incoming Ring Group Number 1~100

Item Extension Related

Description
No. Number Program

01 Maximum Use this program to assign extensions (up to 22-02

eight Digits 32) to Ring Groups. Calls ring extensions 22-05
according to Ring Group programming. 22-06

Default

Only Group01 has 200.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Ring Groups

Programming Manual 2 - 305

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment to assign trunks to
incoming Ring Groups. There are 100 available Ring Groups.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Day/Night Incoming Group Related

Default Description
No. Mode Number Program

01 1~8 0 (No Setting) 1 Use this program to assign 22-04

001~100 Normal Ring Trunks (22-02) to 22-06
Incoming Ring Groups
(Incoming Group) (22-04).
102 (In-Skin/
External Voice Mail
or InMail)
103 Centralized VM

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Ring Groups

2 - 306 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode to define whether or not an
extension should ring for the Normal Incoming Ring Mode.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Incoming
Item Day/Night Related
Group Default
No. Mode Program
Number

01 1~8 0 = No Ring 1 22-04

1 = Ring 22-05

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Central Office Calls, Answering

Programming Manual 2 - 307

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-07 : DIL Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-07 : DIL Assignment to assign the destination extension or
Department Calling Group for each DIL Incoming trunk. A DIL rings an extension
directly, without any other Access Map or Ring Group programming. If an extension
has a line key, the DIL rings the line key. If the extension does not have a line key, the
DIL rings CAP keys. Use Program 22-02 to designate a trunk as a DIL. You can
make eight DIL assignments, one for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Day/Night Number of Transferring

Default
No. Mode Destination

01 1~8 Extension Number (maximum No Setting

eight digits)
Pilot Number

Conditions

Program 22-02 must be set to four for the trunk.

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Line (DIL)

2 - 308 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
Level:
IN

Description
For DIL Delayed Ringing, use Program 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination to
assign the DIL No Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL rings this group after the
DIL No Answer Time expires (Program 22-01-04). DIL Delayed Ringing can also
reroute outside calls ringing a Ring Group.

Make eight assignments, one for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Day/Night
Incoming Group Number Default
No. Mode

01 1~8 0 (No Setting) 0

001~100 (Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail
or InMail)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Ring Group

Programming Manual 2 - 309

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of Dial-In
incoming calls for each trunk group.

Input Data

Trunk Group Number 001~100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Expected Number of Digits 1~8 4

Enter the number of digits the table
expects to receive from the telco. Use this
program to make the system compatible
with 3- and 4-digit DID service.
If ISDN trunks, we analyze the last digits
that are set here. If it is T-1 or analog DID,
it analyzes the first digits that are assigned
here.

02 Received Vacant Number Operation 0 = Disconnect (Cut) 0

Use this option to enable or disable 1 = Transfer (Refer to
Vacant Number Intercept. Program 22-12 : DID
Intercept Ring Group on
page 2-318.)

03 Sub-Addressing Mode 0 = Extension # Specify 0

(Intercom)
1 = DID Conversion Table

04 DID Receiving Mode for ISDN 0 = Enbloc Receiving 0

1 = Overlap Receiving

05 Local Code Digits 0~15 (0 = No Local Code) 0

(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)

06 Local Code Dial (maximum 16 digits) No Setting

(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)

07 Pilot Code Dial (1 digit: 0~9) No Setting

(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)

2 - 310 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 T302 Time-out Operation 0 = Disconnect (Cut) 0

(Only Overlap Receiving Mode) 1 = Transfer (Refer to
Program 22-12 : DID
Intercept Ring Group on
page 2-318.)
2 = Search

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Programming Manual 2 - 311

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup to specify the size of the DID
Translation Tables. There are 2000 Translation Table entries that you can allocate
among 20 Translation Tables.

Input Data

Conversion Table Area Number 01~20

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 1st Area Setup (Start Address) 0~2000

(0 = No Setting)

1st Area Setup (End Address) Default Table

2nd Area Setup (Start Address) Default Table

2nd Area Setup (End Address) Default Table

2 - 312 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Default Table
1st 2nd
Conversion
Table Area
Start Table End Table Start Table End Table

1 1 200 0 0
2 201 400 0 0
3 401 600 0 0
4 601 800 0 0
5 801 1000 0 0
6 1001 1200 0 0
7 1201 1400 0 0
8 1401 1600 0 0
9 1601 1800 0 0
10 1801 2000 0 0
: : : : :
20 0 0 0 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Programming Manual 2 - 313

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 22-11 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion to specify for
each Translation Table entry (2000).

The digits received by the system (eight maximum)

The extension the system dials after translation (24 digits maximum)
The name that should show on the dialed extension display when it rings (12
characters maximum)
The Transfer Target – 1 and 2
If the Transfer Targets are busy or receive no answer, those calls are transferred to the
final transfer destination (Program 22-10).

Operation Mode

Use the following chart when entering and editing text for names. Press the key once
for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C,
press 2 three times.

Key for Entering Names

When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits.

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .

1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } → ← Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó

2 Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.

3 Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.

4 Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.

5 Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.

6 Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.

7 Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.

8 Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.

9 Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.

2 - 314 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Key for Entering Names

When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to 12 digits.

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .

0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü α ε θ
Enter characters:
+ , - . / : ; < = > ? B E σ S ∞ ¢ £
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key
are needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space.
(In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key
instead to accept and/or add a space.)
CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.

HOLD Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the
right.

Input Data

Conversion Table Number 1~2000

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Received Number Maximum eight digits See

This is the received DID digits.
Default
Value

02 Target Number Maximum 24 digits See

Enter the destination number to which the
Default
Value
DID number is sent.

03 DID Name Maximum 12 characters No Setting

This is the name that is assigned to the
DID digits when it rings the extension.

04 Transfer Operation Mode 0 = No Transfer 0

1 = Busy
2 = No Answer
3 = Busy/No Answer

Programming Manual 2 - 315

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

05 Transfer Destination Number 1 0 = No Setting 0

1~100 = Incoming Group
06 Transfer Destination Number 2 0
102 = In-Skin/External Voice Mail
400 = Allows the outside party to dial a or InMail
different extension number in the 103 = Centralized VM
translation table (for example, ring no
201~264 = Extension Group
answer to a dialed number, the caller then
hears a dial tone, allowing them to enter 400 = Valid Extension Number
another Valid Extension Number). 401 = DISA
401 = Provides the caller with DISA 501~599 = DISA/VRS Message
dialing options (requires using the DISA 1000~1999 = Speed Dial Number
password). (000~999)
This applies to 22-11-05 and
22-11-06.

07 Call Waiting 0 = Disable (No) 0

PRG 20-09-07 overrides this setting. 1 = Enable (Yes)

08 Maximum Number of DID Calls 0~200 (0 = No Limit) 0

09 Music on Hold Source 0 = IC/MOH Port 0

1 = BGM Port
2 = ACI Port

10 ACI Music Source Port When a sound source type is 2 in 0

above : (0~96)

11 Ring Group Transfer 0 = Disable (Caller will hear 1

Enable (1) or disable (0) each Ringback)
conversation tables ability to follow the 1 = Enabled (Go to normal ring)
Ring Group programming defined in
Program 22-12-01 : DID Intercept Ring
Group.
If Program 22-11-05 : DID Translation
Number Conversion, Transfer Destination
Number 1 and Program 22-11-06 : DID
Translation Number Conversion, Transfer
Destination Number 2 are set, the priority
of transferring is in this order: Program
22-11-05 then Program 22-11-06 then if
Program 22-11-11 is enabled, Program
22-12-01.

2 - 316 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Default
The default value of PRG22-11-01/PRG22-11-02 is shown as below.

Conversion Table Received number Target number

1 00 200
2 01 201
: : :
100 99 299
: : :
2000 No Setting No Setting

Conditions

When the trunk type is set to 3 (DID) in 22-02-01, the DID Transfer Destination for
each DID feature is not supported. This feature is supported only for DID trunks
when assigned as VRS.

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Programming Manual 2 - 317

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group
Level:
IN

Description
For each DID Translation Table, use Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group to
define the first destination group for DID calls.

Depending on the entry in Program 22-09-02 and 22-11-04, the incoming calls route
to the first destination group by the following:

Vacant number intercept (vacant number means that no phone is connected, no

station blade is installed, or the extension number is not defined in Program 11-02)
Busy intercept
Ring-no-answer intercept
If the destination is 0, the calls are forwarded to the trunk ring group defined in
Program 22-11 based on the table assigned to the DID trunk.

If Programs 22-11-05 and 22-11-06 are set, the priority of transferring is in this
order:
Program 22-11-05 + Program 22-11-06 + Program 22-12.

For busy and no-answer calls, if the first and third destinations are programmed,
but the second destination is not, the incoming call goes to the third destination
after the first destination. If the first and second destinations are not defined, but
the third destination is, the call goes directly to the third destination.

Input Data

Conversion Table Area Number 01~20

Item
Day/Night Mode Incoming Group Number Default
No.

01 1~8 0 (No Setting) 0

1~100 (Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail
or InMail)
103 = Centralized VM

2 - 318 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Programming Manual 2 - 319

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment to assign the
DID Trunk Groups to DID Translation Tables. DID trunks should be in their own group.
If you have more than one type of DID trunk, put each type in a separate Trunk Group.
For each Trunk Group, you make a Translation Table entry for each Night Service
mode.

Input Data

Trunk Group Number 1~100

Item Conversion Table

Day/Night Mode Default
No. Area Number

01 1~8 0~20 1
(0 = No Setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

2 - 320 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-14 : VRS Delayed Message for IRG (Incoming Group Ring) to
define for each incoming ring group the timers, VRS message number and type of
tone for VRS Waiting Message.

Input Data

Incoming Ring Group Number 1~100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 1st Delayed Message Start Time 0~64800 (sec) 0

Time before the VRS Delay Message is
played for IRG.

02 1st Delayed Message Number 0~101 0

VRS message that is used for the 1st 0 = No Message
Delayed Message. 101 = Fixed
Message

03 1st Delayed Message Sending Count 0~255 (time) 0

This is the number of times the 1st Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 1st
Delay Message is not played.

04 2nd Delayed Message Number 0~101 0

VRS message that is used for the 2nd 0 = No Message
Delayed Message. 101 = Fixed
Message

05 2nd Delayed Message Sending Count 0~255 (time) 0

This is the number of times the 2nd Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 2nd
Delay Message is not played.

06 Tone Kind at Message Interval 0 = Ring Back Tone 0

What is heard between the Delay 1 = MOH Tone
Message. 2 = BGM Source

07 Disconnect Time After the End of VRS 0 = No Disconnect 60

Delayed Message
1~64800 Seconds
Time, after all 2nd Delay Messages are
played, before the caller is disconnected.

Programming Manual 2 - 321

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 322 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-15 : VRS Delayed Message for Department Group to define for
each Department (Extension) Group the timers, VRS message number and tone kind
for VRS Delayed Message. There are 64 available Department Groups.

Input Data

Extension Group Number 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 1st Delayed Message Start Time 0~64800 (sec) 0

Time before the VRS Delay Message is
played for Department Group.

02 1st Delayed Message Number 0~101 101

VRS message that is used for the 1st 0 = No Message
Delayed Message. 101 = Fixed Message

03 1st Delayed Message Sending Count 0~255 (time) 0

This is the number of times the 1st Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 1st
Delay Message is not played.

04 2nd Delayed Message Number 0~101 101

VRS message that is used for the 2nd 0 = No Message
Delayed Message. 101 = Fixed Message

05 2nd Delayed Message Sending Count 0~255 (time) 0

This is the number of times the 2nd Delay
Message is played. If set to 0, the 2nd
Delay Message is not played.

06 Tone Kind at Message Interval 0 = Ring Back Tone 0

What is heard between the Delay 1 = MOH Tone
Message. 2 = BGM Source

07 Disconnect Time After the End of VRS 0 = No Disconnect 60

Delayed Message
1~64800 (sec)
Time, after all 2nd Delay Messages are
played, before the caller is disconnected.

Programming Manual 2 - 323

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Department Group

2 - 324 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-16 : Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-16: Private Call Refuse Target Area Setup to define Speed Dial
group number for Private Call Refuse.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Speed Dial Group Number 0~64 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Department Group

Programming Manual 2 - 325

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-17 : Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-17: Dial-In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern to
define Time Zone and Dial-In Conversion Table (Program 22-11) for Time Pattern.

Input Data

Conversion Table Number 01~100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Received Dial Up to eight digits No Setting

02 Start of Time 0000~2359 (Time) 0000

03 End of Time 0000~2359 (Time) 0000

04 Dial-In Conversion Table 0~2000 0

Number

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 326 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-18 : Private Call Assignment Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-18: Private Call Assignment Setup to define assignment and
incoming ring pattern for Private Calls.

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Transfer Mode 0 = Not defined 0

1 = Internal dial
2 = Incoming Ring Group

02 Destination Number 1 = Internal Dial (up to 24 digits) 0~9, , #, No Setting

P, R, @
2 = Incoming Ring Group (0~100)

03 Incoming Ring Pattern 0~9 0

0 = Normal pattern
1~4 = Tone pattern
5~9 = Scale pattern

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 327

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

22-20 : Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 22-20: Flexible Ringing by Caller ID Setup to set flexible ringing by
Caller ID per timer pattern mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 01~200

Day/Night Mode 01~08

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Flexible Ringing 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 328 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup

 Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-02 : Call Pickup Groups
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 23-02 : Call Pickup Groups to assign extensions to Call Pickup
Groups. This program also lets you assign an extension Call Pickup Group
priority. If two extensions in a group are ringing at the same time, Group Call Program
Pickup intercepts the highest priority extension first.

Input Data
There are 64 available Call Pickup Groups.
23
Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Group Related

Priority Default Description
No. Number Program

01 1~64 1~999 1 – xxx Use this program to assign extensions to 11-12-26

Call Pickup Groups other than the 11-12-27
extension group set up by a Program 11-12-28
16-02. 15-07-24
15-07-25
15-07-26

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Group Call Pickup

Programming Manual 2 - 329

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer to assign trunk routes (set in
Program 14-06) to extensions for Universal Answer. If the call ringing the paging
system is in an extension assigned route, the user can dial the Universal Answer
code (#0) to pick up the call.

You can also use this program to let an extension user automatically answer trunk
calls that ring other extensions (not their own). When the user lifts the handset, they
automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group Routing programming
(defined in Program 14-06). The extension user ringing calls, however, always have
priority over calls ringing other co-worker extensions. Refer to the Line Preference
feature in the UNIVERGE SV8100 Features and Specifications Manual for more
information.

Make one entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Day/Night Route Table Related

Default Description
No. Mode Number Program

01 1~8 0~100 0 Use this program to let an extension 14-06

user automatically answer trunk calls
that ring other extensions. When the
user lifts the handset, they automatically
answer the ringing calls based on Trunk
Group Routing programming (defined in
Program 14-06).

2 - 330 Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Line Preference
Night Service

Programming Manual 2 - 331

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions to set the
off-hook automatic response priority for calls ringing virtual extension keys on a
telephone.

There are 256 available Virtual Extension Ports.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Extension
Item Related
Order Group Default Description
No. Program
Number

01 1~4 00~64 00 When an extension has a virtual 16-02

(0 or extension assigned to a Programmable 20-10-08
00=Don’t Function Key, this program determines
Care)
the priority for automatically answering
the ringing calls when the handset is
lifted. If 0 or 00 is selected, when the user
lifts the handset, the user answers a
ringing call from any group.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Call Arrival Keys (CAR)/Secondary Incoming Extensions (SIE)/ Virtual Extensions
(VE)

2 - 332 Program 23 : Answer Features Setup

 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-01 : System Options for Hold
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 24-01 : System Options for Hold to define the system options
for the Hold feature.
Program
Input Data

24
Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Hold Recall Time 0~64800 (sec) 90

A call on Hold recalls the extension that
placed it on Hold after this time. This time
works with the Hold Recall Callback Time
(Item 2).

02 Hold Recall Callback Time 0~64800 (sec) 30

A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings
an extension for this time. This time works
with Hold Recall Time or Park Hold Time.
After this time, the system invokes the
Hold recall time again. Cycling between
time 01 and 02 and 06 and 07 continues
until a user answers the call.

03 Exclusive Hold Recall Time 0~64800 (sec) 90

A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the
extension that placed it on Hold after this
time.

04 Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time 0~64800 (sec) 30

An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an
extension for this time. If not picked up,
the call goes back on System Hold.

05 Forced Release of Held Call 0~64800 (sec) 64800 14-01-16

Depending on the setting of Program
14-01-16, the system disconnects calls on
Hold longer than this time.

Programming Manual 2 - 333

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

06 Park Hold Time – Normal 0~64800 (sec) 90 20-11-19

A call left parked longer than this time
recalls the extension that initially parked
it.

07 Park Hold Time – Extended (Recall) 0~64800 (sec) 300 20-11-19

A call left parked longer than this time
recalls the extension that initially parked
it.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Hold
Park

2 - 334 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-02 : System Options for Transfer
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 24-02 : System Options for Transfer to define the system options for
the Transfer feature.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

01 Busy Transfer 0 = Disable 0

Use this option to prevent or allow extensions to (No)
Transfer calls to busy extensions. If disabled, 1 = Enable
calls transferred to busy extensions recall (Yes)
immediately.

02 MOH or Ringback on Transferred Calls 0 = Hold Tone 0 20-03-02

Use this option to enable or disable MOH on 1 = Ring Back
Transfer. If enabled (0), a transferred caller Tone
hears MOH while their call rings the destination
extension. If disabled (1), a transferred caller
hears ringback while their call rings the
destination extension.

03 Delayed Call Forwarding Time 0~64800 (sec) 10

If activated at an extension, Delayed Call
Forwarding occurs after this time. This also sets
how long a Transferred call waits at an
extension forwarded to Voice Mail before routing
to the called extension mailbox.

04 Transfer Recall Time 0~64800 (sec) 30

An unanswered transferred call recalls to the
extension that initially transferred it after this
time.

05 Message Wait Ring Interval Time 0~64800 (sec) 30

For Single Line Telephones (SLTs) without
message waiting lamps, this is the time between
intermittent ringing. If this value is set to 0, the
system rings once.

Programming Manual 2 - 335

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data (Continued)

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Program

07 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Release Warning 0~64800 (sec) 1800 14-01-25

Tone 20-28-01
Time starts when a trunk begins talking with 20-28-02
another trunk (for example: trunk-to-trunk
20-28-03
24-02-10
transfer, outgoing from trunk, Tandem Trunking).
When this time expires, a warning tone is heard.
If Program 24-02-10 is set, the conversation
disconnects after time expires. This time is set
again when the external digit timer expires. One
of the trunks used must be an analog trunk (or
leased line).

08 Delayed Transfer Time for all Department 0~64800 (sec) 10 11-11-28

Groups 11-11-29
15-07-59

09 Two B-Channel Transfer Retry Timer 0~64800 (sec) 10 10-03-16

(PRI)

10 Disconnect Trunk-to-Trunk 0~64800 (sec) 0 14-01-25

20-28-01
20-28-02
20-28-03
24-02-07

11 No Answer Step Transfer 0~64800 (sec) 10 14-01-26

12 No Answer Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer 0~64800 (sec) 0 14-01-26

13 Hook Flash Sending Timer When the System 0~64800 (sec) 2

Answers Automatically
Time before sending the hook flash for Call
Forward Centrex.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Transfer

2 - 336 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-03 : Park Group
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 24-03 : Park Group to assign an extension to a Park Group. The
system allows a total of 64 Park Groups. An extension can only pick up a call parked
in orbit by an extension in its own group.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item Park Group Related

Default Description
No. Number Program

01 1~64 1 Assign an extension to a Park Group. The 15-07-01

system allows a total of 64 Park Groups.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Park

Programming Manual 2 - 337

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup to assign
the Speed Dialing number bin which should be used as the destination of the
Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Day/ Speed Dial

Item Related
Night Area Default Description
No. Program
Mode Number

01 1~8 0~1999 1999 The destination telephone number of the 11-10-08

Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer uses the number 13-04
registered into the Speed Dial. Use this 24-05
program to setup the Speed Dial Bin
Number.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

2 - 338 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup to assign the
Speed Dialing bin which is used as the destination of the extension for the Extension
Group.

There are 64 available Department Groups.

Input Data

Extension Group Number 01~64

Speed Dial
Item Day/Night Related
Area Default Description
No. Mode Program
Number

01 1~8 0~1999 1999 The Speed Dialing area is used to 11-11-27

program the destination number of the 13-04
transferred telephone number when a 24-04
Department Group call is transferred
using the Trunk-to-Trunk Forwarding
feature.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Transfer

Programming Manual 2 - 339

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-06 : Fixed Call Forwarding
Level:
IN

Description
For each extension/virtual extension port, use Program 24-06 : Fixed Call
Forwarding to assign the Fixed Call Forwarding Type (0~4) and the destination
extension/virtual extension. For extension ports, the Fixed Call Forwarding
destination can be an on- or off-premise extension or a Voice Mail extension. For
virtual extensions, the Fixed Call Forwarding destination can be an on-premise
extension or Voice Mail extension.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Fixed Call Forwarding Type Default Description

0 = Fixed Call Forwarding disabled 0 Set the type of substitute call receipt and
1 = Fixed Call Forwarding with both specify the extension number transferred
extensions ringing on originated telephone.
2 = Fixed Call Forwarding when
unanswered
3 = Fixed Call Forwarding Immediate
4 = Fixed Call Forwarding when busy or
unanswered

Conditions

Do not use Fixed Call Forwarding Type 1 (Both Ringing) with Voice Mail ports.

Feature Cross Reference

Call Forwarding

2 - 340 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-07 : Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 24-07 : Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise to assign the Fixed Call
Forwarding Off-Premise telephone number for each extension/virtual extension. The
Off-Premise destination can be up to 24-digits long. A trunk access code (e.g., 9)
must be included in the number.

Fixed Call Forwarding Types:

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Off-Premise Destination Number Default

1~9, 0, #, , P, R, @ (up to 24 digits) No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 341

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-08 : Call Forward for Centrex
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 24-08 : Call Forward for Centrex to assign the Call Forwarding type
and Call Forwarding for Centrex telephone number for each extension/virtual
extension. The Off-Premise destination can be up to 24-digits long.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Call Forwarding Type 0~4 0

Set the Call Forwarding type:
0 = Call Forwarding disabled
1 = Call Forwarding No Answer
2 = Call Forwarding Immediate Call
3 = Call Forwarding Busy or No Answer
4 = Call Forwarding when Busy

02 Call Forwarding Destination for Immediate and 1~9, 0, #, , P, R, No Setting

No Answer Call @ (up to 24 digits)
Set Call Forwarding destination for Centrex for
Immediate and No Answer Calls.

03 Call Forwarding Busy Destination 1~9, 0, #, , P, R, No Setting

Set Call Forwarding destination for Centrex for @ (up to 24 digits)
Busy Call.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 342 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 24-09 : Call Forward Split Settings to assign Call Forwarding Type
and the destination numbers for each extension/virtual extension. The destination
can be up to 24 digits long, using 0~9, , #, and @. Be sure to include the trunk
access code (e.g., 9) in the number if the destination is off-premise.

Only ISDN uses the @ symbol.

Pause can be set by LK 1.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum eight digits

Item
Input Data Default
No.

01 Call Forwarding Type: 0

0 = Call Forwarding Off
1 = Call Forwarding with both ring
2 = Call Forwarding when no answer
3 = Call Forwarding all calls
4 = Call Forwarding busy or no answer
5 = Call Forwarding when busy

02 CO Call Forwarding Destination for Both Ring, All Call, No Answer: No

1~9, 0, #, , R, @ Setting
(Up to 24 digits)
Only ISDN uses the @ symbol

03 Intercom Call Forwarding Destination for Both ring, All Call, No No

Answer: Setting
1~9, 0, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)

04 CO Call Forwarding Busy Destination: No

1~9, 0, #, , R, @ Setting
(Up to 24 digits)

05 Intercom Call Forwarding Busy Destination: No

1~9, 0, #, , R, @ Setting
(Up to 24 digits)

Programming Manual 2 - 343

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item
Input Data Default
No.

06 Call Forwarding Destination for CTX/PBX for All Call, No Answer: None
0~9, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)

07 Call Forwarding Destination for CTX/PBX for Busy: None

0~9, #, , R, @
(Up to 24 digits)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

2 - 344 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup

 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup
25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 25-01 : VRS/DISA Line Basic Data Setup to define the basic
setting of each VRS/DISA line.
Program
Input Data

25
Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Item Input Data Default

Related
No. Program

01 VRS/DISA Dial-In Mode 0 = Extension Number 0 22-11

Service Code
Specify (Intercom)
1 = Use Dial
Conversion Table

02 DISA User ID 0 = Off 1 25-08

1 = On

03 VRS/DISA Transfer Alarm 0 = Normal (Off) 0

1 = Alarm (On)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programming Manual 2 - 345

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Message to assign the VRS message number
to be used as the Automated Attendant Message for each trunk which is assigned as
a VRS/DISA.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Day/Night Message (Talkie)

Additional Data Default
No. Mode Source

01 1~8 0 = No Message 1 = 01~100 (VRS Message Number) 0

1 = VRS 2 = 01~04 (ACI Group Number)
2 = ACI 3 = 01~64 (Extension Group Number)
3 = Department
Group

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2 - 346 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing to set
what happens to a call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller dials incorrectly
or waits too long to dial. The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate
destination (a ring group or voice mail). When setting the DISA and DID Operating
Mode, make an entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Day/Night Related

Incoming Group Number Default
No. Mode Program

01 1~8 0 (Disconnect) 0 22-04

1~100 (Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail
or InMail)
103 = Centralized VM

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programming Manual 2 - 347

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy to set
the operating mode of each DISA trunk. This sets what happens to the call when the
DISA or Automated Attendant caller calls a busy or unanswered extension. The call
can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (a ring group or voice
mail). When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode, make an entry for each Night
Service mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Day/Night Related

Incoming Group Number Default
No. Mode Program

01 1~8 0 (Disconnect) 0 22-04

1~100 (Incoming Ring Group)
102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail or
InMail)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2 - 348 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 25-05 : VRS/DISA Error Message Assignment to assign the VRS
message number to be used as the Automated Attendant error message. For each
VRS/DISA trunk that the VRS answers, enter the VRS message (1~100) the outside
caller hears if they dial incorrectly. If you enter 0 (i.e., no error message), the call
reroutes according to Program 25-03 and 25-04.

For each trunk, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Day/Night
VRS Message Number Default
No. Mode

01 1~8 0~100 (0 = No Setting) 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programming Manual 2 - 349

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 25-06 : VRS/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup to set up single
digit dialing through the VRS. This gives VRS callers single key access to extensions,
the company operator, Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail. For each VRS
message set to answer outside calls (refer to Program 25-04 and 25-05), you specify:

The digit the VRS caller dials (0~9, , #). Keep in mind that if you assign
destinations to digits, outside callers cannot dial system extensions.
The destination reached (eight digits max.) when the caller dials the specified digit.
The destination can be an extension, a Department Calling pilot number or the Voice
Mail master number. A one-digit code can be assigned for each Automated Attendant
message.

Example:

Message Number=01, Destination=2, Next Message Number=0, Dial=399

In this example, when 2 is dialed by an outside caller, the system transfers the call to
399. This means that extension 200~299 cannot receive calls from VRS/DISA users
during/after VRS Message 01.

Input Data

Attendant Message Number 01~100

Received Dial 1~9, 0, , #

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Next Attendant Message 0~100 (0 = No Setting) 0

Number
101 = Voice Mail answers
104 = Refer to 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer
Ring Group With No Answer/Busy
105 = Dial the other extension

02 Destination Number Up to eight digits No Setting

2 - 350 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions

Outside caller may not be able to dial individual extensions or lines if the same
first digit is defined here.

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Voice Response System (VRS)

Programming Manual 2 - 351

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 25-07 : System Timers for VRS/DISA to set the value for the system
timers which affect DID and DISA. Refer to the following chart for a description of
each option, its range and default setting.

Input Data

Item Input Related

No. Item Data Default Program

01 VRS/DISA Dial Tone Time 0~64800 10 25-04

After answering a DISA trunk, the system waits this time (sec)
for the caller to dial the first digit of the DISA password. If
the caller fails to dial during this time, the system drops
the call.

02 VRS/DISA No Answer Time 0~64800 10 25-04

A VRS/DISA caller can ring an extension for this time (sec)
before the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer.
After this time expires, the call follows the programmed
Ring No Answer routing (set in Program 25-03 and
25-04).

03 Disconnect after VRS/DISA retransfer to IRG 0~64800 60

From DISA trunk, when the call may go to Incoming Ring (sec)
Group of PRG25-03/25-04. This setting determines how
long the call is ringing in the IRG.

04 Calling Time to Automatic Answering Telephone Set 0~64800 10

Set the answering waiting time of the automatic (sec)
answering extension when an incoming DID trunk call is
received.

05 Duration Time for Guidance Message by Automatic 0~64800 10

Answering Telephone Set
(sec)
Set the announcement time of the automatic answering
extension after which an incoming DID trunk caller is
disconnected.

06 Duration Time for Guidance Message by ACI 0~64800 10

Set the announcement time by the ACI after which an (sec)
incoming DID trunk caller is disconnected.

2 - 352 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item Input Related

Item Default
No. Data Program

07 Long Conversation Warning Tone Time 0~64800 30 14-01-25

Determine the time a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk (sec) 20-28-01
20-28-02
(such as Tandem Trunking) conversation can talk before 20-28-03
the Long Conversation tone is heard.

08 Long Conversation Disconnect Time 0~64800 15 14-01-25

This time determines how long the system waits before (sec) 20-28-01
20-28-02
disconnecting a DISA caller or any trunk-to-trunk (such 20-28-03
as Tandem Trunking) conversation call after the Long
Conversation tone is heard.

09 DISA Internal Paging Time 0~64800 30

This is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed (sec)
by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this
time, the system terminates the DISA call.

10 DISA External Paging Time 0~64800 30

This is the maximum length of an External Page placed (sec)
by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this
time, the system terminates the DISA call.

11 VRS/DISA Answer Delay Time 0~64800 0

Sets up the time the system waits after receiving an (sec)
incoming VRS/DISA call before the system
automatically answers the call.

13 VRS/DISA Busy Tone Interval 0~64800 5

If a DISA caller dials a busy extension (and Program (sec)
25-04 = 0), the system plays busy tone for this interval
before disconnecting.

14 Delayed VRS Answer Time 0~64800 10

Assign the delay time from switching from a normal (sec)
incoming status to DID mode. If this time is set to 0, the
call switches to DID mode immediately.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programming Manual 2 - 353

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-08 : DISA User ID Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 25-08 : DISA User ID Setup to set the 6-digit DISA password for each
user. There are 15 users each with one 6-digit password.

Input Data

DISA User Number 1~15

Item
Password Default Related PRG
No.

01 Dial No Setting 49-10-11

(Fixed – six digits)
0~9, , #

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2 - 354 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users to set the DISA Class of
Service for each user. When a DISA caller enters a password (defined in Program
25-08), the system identifies the user and associates the appropriate DISA Class of
Service with the call. Assign the DISA Class of Service options in Program 20-14.
When programming DISA Class of Service, make one entry for each Night Service
mode.

Input Data

DISA User Number 1~15

Item Day/Night Function

Default
No. Mode Class

01 1~8 1~15 1

Conditions

DISA Class of Service cannot be 0.

Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks.

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programming Manual 2 - 355

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA to assign the Trunk Group
route chosen when a user places a DISA call to the system and dials 9. Set Trunk
Group Routing in Program 14-06. Enable or disable the DISA caller ability to dial 9 in
Program 20-14-02. Assign a route to each DISA Class of Service (1~15). The system
assigns a DISA Class of Service to a call based on the password the DISA caller
dials.

When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode.

Input Data

DISA User Number 1~15

Item Day/Night Route Table

Default
No. Mode Number

01 1~8 0~100 1
(0 = No Setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

2 - 356 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN

Description
For systems that use Toll Restriction, use Program 25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction
Class to assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to each DISA user (1~15). The system
uses the Toll Restriction Class you enter in Program 21-05 and 21-06. The Toll
Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is based on the DISA Class of Service and
user, which is determined by the password the caller dials.

When programming, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

DISA User Number 1~15

Item Day/Night Toll Restriction

Default
No. Mode Class

01 1~8 1~15 2

Conditions

Program 21-05 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks.

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programming Manual 2 - 357

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA to define the trunk
route selected when a DISA caller dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code. The route
selected is based on the DISA caller Class of Service, which in turn is determined by
the password the caller dials. When programming, make a separate entry for each
Night Service Mode.

Use Program 11-09-02 to set the Alternate Trunk Access Code. Use Program 14-06
to set trunk routes.

Input Data

DISA User Number 1~15

Item Day/Night Route Table

Default
No. Mode Number

01 1~8 0~100 0
(0 = No Setting)

Conditions

You cannot use Program 21-15 to assign alternate trunk routing to DISA trunks.

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Trunk Group Routing

2 - 358 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

25-13 : System Option for DISA
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 25-13 : System Option for DISA to enter the password DISA callers
must dial before the system allows them to record, listen to and or erase the VRS
messages. This program also is used to define additional DISA call options.

Input Data

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 VRS Message Access Password 1~ 9, 0, , # 000000

Enter the password DISA callers must dial before the (Fixed six digits)
system allows them to record, listen to and/or erase the
VRS messages.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Voice Response System (VRS)

Programming Manual 2 - 359

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2 - 360 Program 25 : VRS/DISA Setup

 Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing
26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service to define the
system options for Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
Program
Input Data

26
Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

01 ARS Service 0 = Disable (Off) 0 26-02

Enable or disable ARS. 1 = Enable (On) 26-03
26-04

02 Network Outgoing InterDigit ARS Time 0~64800 (sec) 30 20-03-04

With Networking, this time replaces 20-03-04
when determining if all network protocol digits
have been received. If ARS is enabled at Site
B, this time can be programmed for 5 (500ms)
at Site A. If ARS is disabled and Site B is using
F-Route for outbound dialing, this time should
be programmed for 30 (three seconds) at Site
A.

03 ARS Misdialed Number Handling 0 = Route to Trunk 0 21-02

If a user dials a number not programmed in Group 1
ARS, this option determines if the system 1 = Play Warning
should route over Trunk Group 1 or play error Tone to Dialer
tone.

04 LCR Mode Option 0 = UK style 0 26-02

1 = Not UK style 26-05
26-06
26-07
06-08
26-09

06 Class of Service Match Access 0 = Disable (Off) 0 26-02

1 = Enable (On)

07 F-Route Access COS Reference 0 = F-Route 0 26-02

1 = ARS 44-05

Programming Manual 2 - 361

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection

2 - 362 Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR to set pre-transaction tables
for selecting Automatic Route Selection (ARS).

Service Type 1 (Route to Trunk Group Number) – The number routes to a trunk
group.
Service Type 2 (F-Route Selected) – The number is controlled by the F-Route table.

Input Data

Dial Analysis Table Number 1~400

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

01 Dial Dial Digits (16 digits maximum) No

1~9, 0, , #, or for wild character (Press line key 1) Setting

02 ARS Service 0 = No Service (None) 0

Type
1 = Route to Trunk Group
2 = Select F-Route Access

03 Additional Data / If Service Type 1 (in 26-02): Select Trunk Group Number 0 44-04
Service Number (0~100, 0= No Route) 44-05

If Service Type 2 (in 26-02):

F-Route Time Schedule Not Used = 0~500
(F-Route Table Number).
Refer to Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table on page 2-481.

F-Route Time Schedule Used = 0~500

(F-Route Selection Number).
Refer to Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time
Schedule on page 2-480.

04 ARS Class of 0~16 0

Service

05 Dial Treatment 0~15 0

for ARS

06 --- Not Used ---

Programming Manual 2 - 363

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Related
Item Input Data Default
No. Programming

07 Network 0~16 0 26-12

Specified
Parameter Table

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection

2 - 364 Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments to assign the 15 Dial Treatments for
automatic ARS dialing translation. Assign Dial Treatments to Service Numbers
(Trunk Groups) in Program 26-02. The ARS Dial Treatment options are:

3 – Delete the NPA if dialed as part of the initial call.

Requires at least 11 digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).

2 – Delete the leading digit if dialed as part of the initial call.

Requires at least eight digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).

1 – Add a leading 1 if not dialed as part of the initial call.

Requires at least eight digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).

INPA – Insert the NPA specified by NPA.

An – For Alternate Carrier Access (n = 1~4). The numeric digit instructs the system
to insert a Transit Network Selection information element in the SETUP message
and also identifies which code in Program 26-11 will be included in the information
element. This function is valid only for outbound calls by ISDN trunks.
DNN – Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows. For
example, D041234 outdials 1234. Valid entries are 0~9, #, , Wnn (wait nn
seconds) and P (pause). Each digits code counts as a digit. So, for example, if a P
was added for a pause, the entry would look like: D05P1234.
Wnn – Wait nn seconds.
P – Pause in analog trunk.
R – Redial the initially dialed number, including any modifications.
E – End of Dial Treatment. All Dial Treatments must end with the E code.
X – When ARS is enabled, X must be entered in the Dial Treatment for the system
to output the extension number of the call originator to the black box for the E911
feature.

Programming Manual 2 - 365

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Dial Treatment Table Number 1~15

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Treatment Code 24 characters maximum No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection

2 - 366 Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-04 : ARS Class of Service
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 26-04 : ARS Class of Service to set the ARS Class of Service for an
extension. Automatic Route Selection uses ARS Class of Service when determining
how to route extension calls.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item Day/Night
Class Default
No. Mode

01 1~8 0~16 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection

Programming Manual 2 - 367

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-05 : LCR Carrier Table
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 26-05 : LCR Carrier Table to define the LCR Access Codes and
routing options.
These options include Authorisation codes and Cost Centre

Input Data

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Delete Digits 0-16 0

Enter the quantity of leading digits
that need to be deleted

02 Access Code Max 16 digits No

Enter the Access Code and Option to (0-9, , #, P, @) setting
route to the Indirect Carrier P = Pause
@ = Change to DTMF or
wait for Connect

03 Authorisation Code Table 0-10 0

Enter the table number that contains (0= No Authorisation code)
the correct Authorisation code.

04 Cost Centre Code 0- Not Used 0

Optionally enter a cost centre code. 1- Used

Conditions
The settings must comply with the requirements of the Indirect Carrier.
The operation of the @ symbol within the Access Code depend on the type of trunk. For
analogue trunk set as Dial Pulse the @ symbol defines change to DTMF dialling. For
ISDN trunks the @ symbol defines that a Connect Message is received and then DTMF
digits are sent in the B-Channel.

Feature Cross Reference

Least Cost Routing

2 - 368 Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-06 : LCR Authorisation Code Table
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 26-06 : LCR Authorisation Code Table to define the optional
Authorisation code (or PIN code) required by the Indirect Carrier. The Authorisation
code is inserted if set in Program 26-05-03.

Input Data

Authorization Table Number 1-10

Item Input Data Default

Authorisation Code Authorisation Code No

Up to 10 digits setting

Conditions
The settings must comply with the requirements of the Indirect Carrier.
The Authorisation Code is used by the Indirect Carrier to identify the customer for billing
purposes.

Feature Cross Reference

Least Cost Routing

Programming Manual 2 - 369

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-07 : LCR Cost Centre Code Table
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 26-07 : LCR Cost Centre Code Table to define the optional cost
centre code required by the Indirect Carrier. The cost centre code is set for each
extension. The cost centre code is inserted if set in Program 26-05-04.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to 8 digits

Input Data Default

Cost Centre Code Extension Number

Up to 8 digits

Conditions
The settings must comply with the requirements of the Indirect Carrier.
The cost Centre code is used by the Indirect Carrier to identify the individual user for
billing purposes.

Feature Cross Reference

Least Cost Routing

2 - 370 Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-08 : LCR Manual Override Access Code Table
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 26-08 : LCR Manual Override Access Code Table to define the
access codes that the users can dial to select an indirect carrier i.e. bypass the
automatic selection of Program 26-02.

Input Data

Manual Override Access Code Table Number 1-10

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Manual Override Code Max 4 digits No

This code is dialled by the user to (0-9, , #) setting
bypass the automatic selection.

02 Carrier Table Carrier Table number 1-25 0

The carrier table number of Program
26-05.

Conditions
The override code must begin with a digit 1 or it will not be checked against this table.
There can are also exemptions to this table in Program 26-09.

Feature Cross Reference

Least Cost Routing

Programming Manual 2 - 371

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-09 : LCR Manual Override Exemption Table
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 26-09 : LCR Manual Override Exemption Table to define the
numbers that must not be sent via an indirect carrier when the user dials a Manual
Override Access Code. The exemptions are normally Emergency Services that may
not be supported by the indirect carrier.

Input Data

Manual Override Exemption Table Number 1-25

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Exemption Number Max 4 digits Table1:999

(0-9, , #) Table2:112
Table3-25:
Do not include the Access No setting
Code.

Conditions
If the number dialled by the user corresponds to an entry in Program 26-09 the Aspire will
delete the Manual Access code (Program 26-08) and route the call to the direct carrier. If
the number specifies an Emergency Service you must ensure that the direct carrier will
accept the call

Feature Cross Reference

Least Cost Routing

2 - 372 Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-11 : Transit Network ID Table
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 26-11 : Transit Network ID Table to define Transit Network ID for
Alternate carrier access, which is referred from Program 26-03.

Input Data

Transit Network ID Table 1~4

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Transit Network ID (Carrier ID) 0000~9999 (Fixed four digits) No

setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 373

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 26-12 : Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS to define the
Network Specific Parameter Table.

Input Data

Network Specific Parameter Table 1~16

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Type of Number Selection 0 = System Default 0

This setting is used by Program 26-02-07 and 1 = Unknown
Program 44-05-11 to determine ISDN element. 2 = International No.
3 = National No.
4 = Network Specific No.
5 = Subscriber No.
6 = Abbreviated No.

02 Numbering Plan Identification Selection 0 = System Default 0

This setting is used by Program 26-02-07 and 1 = Unknown
Program 44-05-11 to determine ISDN element. 2 = ISDN Plan
3 = Data Plan
4 = Telex Plan
5 = National Standard Plan
6 = Private Plan

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 374 Program 26 : ARS Service & Least Cost Routing

 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode to set the mode of the
system DSS Consoles. The entry for this option applies to all the system DSS
Consoles. The available options are: Program

Regular (Business) Mode (0)

Hotel Mode (1)
ACD Monitor Mode (2)
30
Business/ACD Mode (3)

Input Data

DSS Console Number 01~32

Item DSS Operation Mode Default

No.

01 0 = Business Mode 0
1 = Hotel Mode
2 = ACD Monitor
Mode
3 = Business/ACD
Mode

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Hotel/Motel

Programming Manual 2 - 375

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment to identify which
extensions have DSS Consoles connected.

Up to 32 different extensions with DSS Consoles can be set up. A single extension
can have up to four 60-button DSS Consoles (32 is the maximum allowed per
system).
When programming, each extension/DSS Console(s) combination is called a Console
Number. There are 32 Console Numbers (1~32). Console Numbers can be assigned
to extensions. When entering data, the assignment for Console Number 1 is normally
made first.

Input Data

60-button DSS Console Number 01~32

Item
Item Default
No.

01 Extension Number No Setting

The extension number for the multiline terminal connected with the
DSS console (up to eight digits).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

2 - 376 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignments to customize the key
assignments for 60-button DSS Consoles. A DSS Console key can have any function
with up to four digits (e.g., extension number or Service Code).

To prevent lamp problems when reassigning DSS Console keys, clearing an

extension programmed key before reassigning it is recommended [Enter key to be
cleared + 00 or 00 (If using WebPro or PC Programming, delete the key
assignments and upload the change to the system before proceeding.)] Without
clearing an extension key first, the DSS Console may not show the correct lamp
display, although the DSS function works correctly.

If you are programming the system from the extension to which the DSS Console is
connected, either by phone or using the WebPro or PC Program, you may need to
unplug the DSS and plug it back in to reset the console lamping.

Input Data

Index 1

DSS Console Number 01~32

Index 2

Item
Key Number Function Number Additional Data
No.

01 001~114 0~99 (General Functional Level) Refer to Function Number

97 = Door Box Access key List on the following pages.
(additional data: 1~8 Door Box No.)
00 ~ 99 (Appearance Functional
Level)

Programming Manual 2 - 377

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Function Number List

[1] General functional level (00~99)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

00 --- Not Used ---

01 DSS/One-Touch Extension Number or any Red On: Extension Busy

Numbers (up to 24 digits) Off: Extension Idle
Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call
Forward

02 Microphone Key (ON/OFF) Red On: Mic On

Off: Mic Off
03 DND Key Red On: DND
04 BGM (ON/OFF) Red On: BGM On
Off: BGM Off
05 Headset Red On: Under Headset Operation
06 Transfer Key None

07 Conference Key Red On: Under Conference Operation

08 Incoming Call Log Rapid Blink (Red): New Call Log
Red On: Call Log
Off: No Call Log
09 Day/Night Mode Switch Mode Number (1~8) Red On: On mode
10 Call Forward – Immediate Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
11 Call Forward – Busy Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
12 Call Forward – No Answer Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
13 Call Forward – Busy/No Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Answer Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
14 Call Forward – Both Ring Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
15 Follow Me Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding State
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded State
18 Text Message Setup Message Numbers (01~20) Red On: Feature active by Function Key
19 External Group Paging External Paging Number Red On: Active
(1~8)

2 - 378 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] General functional level (00~99)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

20 External All Call Paging Red On: Active

21 Internal Group Paging Internal Paging Number Red On: Active
(01~64)

22 Internal All Call Paging None

23 Meet-Me Answer to Internal None

Paging

24 Call Pickup None

25 Call Pickup for Another None

Group

26 Call Pickup for Specified Call Pickup Group Number None

Group

27 Speed Dial – System/ Speed Dial Number None

Private (Speed/Private)

28 Speed Dial – Group Speed Dial Number (Group) None

29 Repeat Redial Rapid Blink (Red): Under a Repeat

Dial

30 Saved Number Redial None

31 Memo Dial None

32 Meet – Me Conference None

33 Override (Off-Hook None

Signaling)

34 Barge-In None

35 Camp On Red On: Under Camp-On or

Reservation

36 Department Step Call None

37 DND/FWD Override Call None

38 Message Waiting None

Programming Manual 2 - 379

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] General functional level (00~99)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

39 Room Monitoring Rapid Blink (Red): Under Monitored

Slow Blink (Red): Under Monitoring
With Room Monitor there are two parties
in the monitor, one being monitored and
one who is monitoring. The same key is
used on both phones, but the COS says
if the key is set to be either a monitored
or monitoring party.

40 Handset Transmission Red On: Transmission cut-off

Cutoff

41 Secretary Buzzer Extension Number Red On: Transmission Side

Rapid Blink (Red): Receiver Side
42 Boss – Secretary Call Extension Number Red On: Boss – Secretary Mode
Pickup

43 Series Call None

44 Common Hold None

45 Exclusive Hold None

46 Department Group Log Out Red On: Logged Out

47 --- Not Used ---

48 --- Not Used ---

49 Call Redirect Extension Number or Voice None

Mail Number

50 Account Code None

51 General Purpose Relay Relay No (0, 1~8) Red On: Relay On

52 Automatic Answer with Incoming Group Number Red On: Under Setting
Delay Message Setup

53 Automatic Answer with Red On: Active

Delay Message Starting

54 External Call Forward by Red On: Active

Door Box

55 Extension Name Edit None

56 General Purpose LED 001~100: (Red) 001~100: Rapid Blink (Red)

Operation 101~200: Rapid Blink (Green)
201~300: Red On,Green Rapid Blink

2 - 380 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] General functional level (00~99)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

57 General Purpose LED 001~100: Rapid Blink (Red)

Indication 101~200: Rapid Blink (Green)
201~300: Red On,Green Rapid Blink

58 Department Incoming Call – Extension Group Number

Immediate (01~64)

59 Department Incoming Call – Extension Group Number

Delay ( 01~64)

60 Department Incoming Call – Extension Group Number

DND ( 01~64)

61 --- Not Used ---

63 Outgoing Call Without Red On: Active

Caller ID (ISDN)

64 --- Not Used ---

65 --- Not Used ---

66 CTI Red On: CTI active

67 --- Not Used ---

68 --- Not Used ---

69 --- Not Used ---

70 --- Not Used ---

71 --- Not Used ---

72 Keypad Facility Key

73 Keypad Hold Key

74 Keypad Retrieve Key

75 Keypad Conference Key

77 Voice Mail (In-Skin) Extension Number or Pilot Red On: Access to Voice Mail
Number Rapid Blink (Green): New Message
78 Conversation Recording 0 = Conversation recording Rapid Blink (Red): Recording
1 = Delete, Re-recording
2 = Delete

79 Automated Attendant Extension Number or Pilot Red On: Set Up for All Calls
(In-Skin) Number Slow Blink (Red): Set Up for Busy/No
Answer Calls

Programming Manual 2 - 381

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Function Number List (Continued)

[1] General functional level (00~99)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

80 Tandem Ringing 0 = Cancel Red On: Active

1 = Set
Extension Number to
Tandem Ring

81 Automatic Transfer to Trunk Line Number

Transfer Key 001~200

82 Dterm IP Call Log

83 Conversation Recording 0 = Pause

Function 1 = Re-record
2 = Address
3 = Erase
4 = Urgent Page

84 Line Drop Key

85 Directory Dialing

86 Private Call Refuse Off: Cancel

On: Set
87 Caller ID Refuse Off: Cancel
On: Set
88 Dial-In Mode Switching PRG22-17 Table No (1-100) Off: pattern1,pattern5-8
On: pattern2
Slow Blink: pattern3
Rapid Blink: pattern4
91 Live Monitoring Key

92 Wake Up Call Indication Green On: Wake Up Call Indication

Mode On
Off: Wake Up Call Indication Mode Off
93 Room Status Indication Green On: Active Room Status
Off: Room Status Indication Mode Off
94 Call Attendant

95 Page Switching Red On: DSS Page 1

Green On: DSS Page 2
97 Door Box Access Key Door Box number (1~8)

99 Alternate Answer Key

2 - 382 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Function Number List

[2] Appearance Function Level ( 00 - 99) (Service Code 852)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

00 --- Not Used ---

01 Trunk Key Trunk Number (001~200)

02 --- Not Used ---

03 --- Not Used ---

04 Park Key Park Number (01~64)

05 Loop Keys 0 = Incoming + Trunk Green On: Extension on an active

Use Programs 15-13-01 or Group Number (001-100) call
15-13-02 to assign the loop 1 = Outgoing + Trunk
key to a trunk group. Group Number (001-100)
2 = Both + Trunk
Group Number (001-100)

06 Trunk Access Via Networking Network System Number

(01~50)

07 Station Park Hold

08 --- Not Used ---

10 --- Not Used ---

11 --- Not Used ---

12 --- Not Used ---

13 --- Not Used ---

14 --- Not Used ---

15 --- Not Used ---

16 --- Not Used ---

17 --- Not Used ---

18 --- Not Used ---

19 --- Not Used ---

Default

The DSS keys 01~60 of all DSS consoles = DSS/One-Touch key 200~259.

The DSS keys 61~114 of all DSS consoles = None

Programming Manual 2 - 383

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

2 - 384 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 30-04 : DSS Console Alternate Answer to assign the alternate DSS
console station in case off-duty mode is set (by pressing the ALT key on the DSS
console).

Index 1

DSS Console Number 01~32

Index 2

Item
Item Name Input Data Default
No.

01 DSS Console Alternate DSS No. 01~32 0 = No Setting

Alternate Answer

Conditions

Related extension is assigned in PRG30-02. Alternate answer key (ALT key) is

assigned at PRG30-03.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 385

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 32-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table to define the LED patterns for
functions on the DSS consoles.

Input Data

Lamp
Item
Item Pattern Default
No.
Data

02 Busy Extension 0~7 7 (On)

03 DND Extension 0~7 3 (RW)

04 ACD Agent Busy 0~7 7 (On)

05 Out of Schedule (ACD DSS) 0~7 0 (Off)

06 ACD Agent Log Out (ACD DSS) 0~7 5 (IL)

07 ACD Agent Log In (ACD DSS) 0~7 4 (IR)

08 ACD Agent Emergency (ACD DSS) 0~7 6 (IW)

09 Hotel Status Code 1 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 7 (On)

10 Hotel Status Code 2 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 1 (FL)

11 Hotel Status Code 3 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 2 (WK)

12 Hotel Status Code 4 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 3 (RW)

13 Hotel Status Code 5 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 5 (IL)

14 Hotel Status Code 6 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 3 (RW)

15 Hotel Status Code 7 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 6 (IW)

16 Hotel Status Code 8 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 4 (IR)

17 Hotel Status Code 9 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 3 (RW)

18 Hotel Status Code 0 (Hotel DSS) 0~7 0 (Off)

19 Hotel Status Code (Hotel DSS) 0~7 4 (IR)

20 Hotel Status Code # (Hotel DSS) 0~7 5 (IL)

21 VM Message Indication 0~7 3 (RW)

2 - 386 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Table 2-8 LED Patterns for DSS Console

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

Programming Manual 2 - 387

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 30-10 : DSS Console IP Terminal Setup to set the MAC address for a
particular IP DSS Console. This must be done before the console can be associated
to the attendant phone. The system supports up to 32 IP DSS Consoles.

Index 1

DSS Console Number 01~32

Input Data

Item
Function Name Input Data Default
No.

01 MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-00~FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF 00-00-00-00-00-00

Conditions

This is a Read-Only command.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 388 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup

 Program 31 : Paging Setup
31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging to
define the system options for Internal/External Paging.
Program
The system shows the name you program on the telephone display. Use the
following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits,
press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc.
For example, to enter C, press 2 three times. Press 2 six times to display the
lower case letter.
31
Key for Entering Names

When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can
have up to 12 digits.

Use this keypad

When you want to. . .
digit . . .

1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } → ← Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó

2 Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.

3 Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.

4 Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.

5 Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.

6 Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.

7 Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.

8 Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.

9 Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.

0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü α ε θ

Programming Manual 2 - 389

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Key for Entering Names (Continued)

When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can
have up to 12 digits.

Use this keypad

When you want to. . .
digit . . .

Enter characters:
+ , - . / : ; < = > ? B E σ S ∞ ¢
£
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key
are needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system
programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept
and/or add a space.)

Conf Clear the character entry one character at a time.

Hold Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the
right.

Input Data

Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Program

01 All Call Paging Zone Name Up to 12 Group 11-12-19

Assign a name to each All Call Internal Paging zone. Characters All 31-02-02
The name shows on the display of the telephone
making the announcement.

02 Page Announcement Duration 0~64800 1200

This timer sets the maximum length of Page
(sec)
announcements.
(Affects External Paging only)

04 Privacy Release Time 0~64800 90

Once the user initiates a Meet-Me Conference or
(sec)
Voice Call Conference, the system waits this time for
the Paged party to join the call.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Paging, External
Paging, Internal

2 - 390 Program 31 : Paging Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment to assign extensions to
Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The setting in this program also
determines if the Internal Page Group can receive Internal All Call Paging. The
system can have up to 64 paging groups. An extension can be in only one Internal
Paging Group.

Input Data

Extension Number Maximum 8 digits

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Internal Paging Group Number 0~64 All stations: 0

Assign extensions to Internal Paging (0 = No Setting)
Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The system
allows up to 64 Internal Paging Groups. An
extension can be in only one Internal
Paging Group.

02 Internal All Call Paging Receiving 0 = Off 0

Allow or prevent All Call Internal Paging for 1 = On
each extension. If allowed, extension can
place and receive All Call Internal Paging
announcements. If prevented, extensions
can only make (not receive) All Call
Internal Paging announcements. If
combined, Paging zones should be
restricted as well, change the internal page
zone group in Program 31-07-01 to 0.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Paging, Internal

Programming Manual 2 - 391

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings to assign names to Internal
Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones) and to define the splash tone for Internal Paging.

The system shows the names you program on the telephone display. Use the
following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press
the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example,
to enter a C, press 2 three times. Press 2 six times to display the lower case letter.

Key for Entering Names

When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to
12 digits.

Use this keypad When you want to. . .

digit . . .

1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } → ← Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó

2 Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.

3 Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.

4 Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.

5 Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.

6 Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.

7 Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.

8 Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.

9 Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.

0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü α ε θ
Enter characters:
+ , - . / : ; < = > ? B E σ S ∞
¢ £

2 - 392 Program 31 : Paging Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Key for Entering Names

When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can have up to
12 digits.

Use this keypad

When you want to. . .
digit . . .

# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key

are needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system
programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept
and/or add a space.)

Conf Clear the character entry one character at a time.

Hold Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the
right.

Input Data

Internal Paging Group Number 01~64

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Internal Paging Group Name Up to 12 Characters Refer to

Assign name to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page
default
table.
Zones). The system shows the name you program on the
telephone display.

02 Internal Paging Splash tone type 0 = Ordinary volume 0

Allow an extension to have normal (0), muted (1) or no (2) 1 = Mute
Internal Paging alert beeps before a Paging 2 = No tone
announcement.

Default
Item 01 : Internal Paging Group Name

Extension
Name
Paging Group

01 Group 1

02 Group 2

: :

64 Group 64

Programming Manual 2 - 393

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Paging, Internal

2 - 394 Program 31 : Paging Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-04 : External Paging Zone Group
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 31-04 : External Paging Zone Group to assign each External Paging
zone to an External Paging group. Users call the External Paging group when
broadcasting announcements to the external zone. When programming, the zones on
the PGD(2)-U10 ADP are numbers 1~8. On the UNIVERGE SV8100 system, the
CD-CP00 zone is number 9.

To simplify programming and troubleshooting, always make the External Paging Zone
Group the same number as the External Paging zone (i.e., 1 = 1, 2 = 2, etc.).

Input Data

External Speaker Number 1~9

Item Paging Group

Default
No. Number

01 0~8 (0 = No Setting) Speaker 1 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 1 (Group 1)

Speaker 2 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 2 (Group 2)
Speaker 3 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 3 (Group 3)
Speaker 4 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 4 (Group 4)
Speaker 5 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 5 (Group 5)
Speaker 6 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 6 (Group 6)
Speaker 7 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 7 (Group 7)
Speaker 8 [PGD(2)-U10 ADP] = 8 (Group 8)
Speaker 9 (CD-CP00) = 1 (Group 1)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Paging, External

Programming Manual 2 - 395

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 31-05 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Page to assign Universal
Night Answer ringing to each External Paging zone. For each trunk port, make a
separate entry for each External Paging zone. When programming, the zones on the
PGD(2)-U10 ADP are numbers 1~8. The CD-CP00 zone is number 9. For UNA
ringing, make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 1~200

External Speaker Number 1~9

Item
No. Day/Night Mode Input Data Default

01 1~8 0 = No Ringing (No) 0

1 = Ringing (Yes)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Night Service
Paging, External

2 - 396 Program 31 : Paging Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-06 : External Speaker Control
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 31-06 : External Speaker Control to define the settings for the
external speaker using an amplifier.

Input Data

External Speaker Number 1~9

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Broadcast Splash Tone Before 0 = No Tone (None) 2

Paging (Paging Start Tone)
1 = Splash Tone
Use this option to enable or 2 = Chime Tone
disable splash tone before Paging
over an external zone. If enabled,
the system broadcasts a splash
tone before the External Paging
announcement.

02 Broadcast Splash Tone After 0 = No Tone (None) 2

Paging (Paging End Time)
1 = Splash Tone
Use this option to enable or 2 = Chime Tone
disable splash tone after Paging
over an external zone. If enabled,
the system broadcasts a splash
tone at the end of an External
Paging announcement.

03 Speech Path 0 = Both Way (Duplex) 1

Determine if the external speaker 1 = One Way (PGD(2)-U10 ADP J
will be used for talkback (As this SPK) (Simplex)
option is not available with the
CD-CP00 external page zone,
speaker 9 should be left at 1).

04 CODEC Transmit Gain Setup 1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB) 32

05 CODEC Receive Gain Setup 1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5dB) 32

Programming Manual 2 - 397

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Paging, External

2 - 398 Program 31 : Paging Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments to assign an External Paging
Group (0~8) to an Internal Paging Zone (0~64) for Combined Paging. When an
extension user makes a Combined Page, they simultaneously broadcast into both the
External and Internal Zone.

Use Program 31-04-01 to assign an External Paging Zone (1~9) to an External Page
Group (1~8).

Input Data

External Paging Group Number 0~8 (0 = All External Paging)

Item
Internal Paging Group Number Default
No.

01 0~64 (0 = All Internal Paging) 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Paging, External
Paging, Internal

Programming Manual 2 - 399

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 31 : Paging Setup

31-08 : BGM on External Paging
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 31-08 : BGM on External Paging to set the Background Music option
for each External Paging zone. If enabled, the system plays Background Music over
the zone when it is idle.

When programming, the zones on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP are numbers 1~8. The
CD-CP00 zone is number 9.

Input Data

External Speaker Number 1~9

Item
Item Item Input Data Default
No.

01 BGM Use this option to allow or prevent 0 = Disable 0

the External Paging zone you select (No)
from broadcasting Background 1 = Enable
Music when it is idle. (Yes)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Background Music
Paging, External

2 - 400 Program 31 : Paging Setup

 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 32-01 : Door Box Timers Setup to assign the timers used for
the Door Box.
Program
The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via
WebPro and using a multiline terminal.

Input Data

Item
32
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Door Box Answer Time 0~64800 30

A multiline terminal user must answer Door Box chimes
(sec)
during this time.

02 Door Lock Cancel Time 0~64800 10

When a single line (2500 type) telephone user hook
(sec)
flashes or a multiline user presses the Recall key while
talking to a Door Box, the strike stays open for this time.

03 Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box Disconnect 0~64800 60

Timer (sec)
Define the conversation period for an Off-Premise Call
Forward by Door Box call. When this timer expires, the
caller hears busy tone for three seconds (fixed time), and
the call is then disconnected.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Door Box

Programming Manual 2 - 401

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment to assign the extension which
rings when a caller presses the associated Door Box call button.

The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and
using a multiline terminal.

Input Data

Door Box Number 1~8

Day/Night Mode 1~8

Item Door Box Ring Extension Default

No. Group Number Number

01 01~32 Maximum No
eight digits Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Door Box

2 - 402 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup to select the chime pattern and gain
level for each Door Box. There are six distinctive chime patterns. The chime tones are
defined in 80-01 : Service Tone Setup on page 2-593.

The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and
using a multiline terminal.

Input Data

Door Box Number 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Chime Pattern 0 = None Door Box 1 = 1

1 = Door Box Ring 1 Door Box 2 = 2
2 = Door Box Ring 2 Door Box 3 = 3
3 = Door Box Ring 3 Door Box 4 = 4
4 = Door Box Ring 4 Door Box 5 = 5
5 = Door Box Ring 5 Door Box 6 = 6
6 = Door Box Ring 6 Door Box 7 = 1
Door Box 8 = 1

02 CODEC Transmit Gain Setup 1~63 (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB) 32

(PGD(2)-U10 ADP to Door
Box)

03 CODEC Receive Gain Setup 1~63 (-15.5dB ~ +15.5dB) 32

(Door Box to PGD(2)-U10
ADP)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Door Box

Programming Manual 2 - 403

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

32-04 : Door Box Name Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 32-04 : Door Box Name Setup to define the name of each Door Box.

The Door Box feature is called Door Phone when programming via WebPro and
using a multiline terminal.

Input Data

Door Box Number 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Door Box Name Up to 12 characters Door Box Name 1 = DOOR- 1

Door Box Name 2 = DOOR- 2
Door Box Name 3 = DOOR- 3
Door Box Name 4 = DOOR- 4
Door Box Name 5 = DOOR- 5
Door Box Name 6 = DOOR- 6
Door Box Name 7 = DOOR- 7
Door Box Name 8 = DOOR- 8

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Door Box

2 - 404 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup

 Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup
33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup to set the function of each
software port on an Analog Communications Interface. Each ACI software port
can have only one function (input, output or none). Program

Input Data

ACI Port Number 01~96

33
Item
ACI Type Default
No.

01 0 = None 0
1 = MOH/BGM (Input)
2 = External Audio Port (Input/Output)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

Programming Manual 2 - 405

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup

33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group to assign ACI ports to
Department Groups. An ACI port can be in only one group.

Also use this program to set the ACI port priority. When a call comes into the ACI
Department Group, it connects to the ACI port in order of its priority. A higher priority
port (e.g., 1) receives calls before a lower priority port (e.g., 6). There are 96 ACI
ports and 16 ACI Department Groups available.

Input Data

ACI Port Number 01~96

Item Group
Priority
No. Number

01 01~16 1~96

Default

ACI Port Group Priority

01 1 1

02 1 2

: : :

96 1 96

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Analog Communications Interface (ACI)

2 - 406 Program 33 : CTA and ACI Setup

 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup to define the basic settings
for each E&M Tie line.
Program
Input Data

34
Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Related
Item Input Data Default Description
No. Program

01 DID/E&M Start 0 = 2nd Dial Tone 0 Set the start signaling mode for 22-02
Signaling DID and Tie trunks. DID and
1 = Wink
2 = Immediate Tie trunks can use either
immediate start or wink start
3 = Delay
signaling.

02 Receive Dial Type 0 = DP 1 10-09

for E&M Tie Line 1 = DTMF

03 E&M Dial-In Mode 0 = Specify Extension 0 Determine if the incoming Tie 22-11
Number Line call should be directed as
(Intercom) an intercom call or if it should
1 = Use Conversion follow the DID Translation
Table in Program 22-11.
Table (NTT)

04 E&M Line Dial Tone 0 = Disable (No) 1 Enter 1 if the Tie Line should
1 = Enable (Yes) send dial tone to the calling
system after the call is set up.
Enter 0 if the Tie Line should
not send dial tone.

05 System Toll 0 = No (Off) 0 Determine if an incoming Tie 21-05

Restriction Line call should be subject to
1 = Yes (On)
Toll Restriction.

Programming Manual 2 - 407

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Tie Lines

2 - 408 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service to assign a Class of Service to
a Tie line (there are 15 Tie line Classes of Service). The Class of Service options are
defined in Program 20-14. For each Tie line, make a separate entry for each Night
Service mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 1~200

Item Day/Night Related

Class Default
No. Mode Program

01 1~8 1~15 1 20-14

Conditions

Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Class of Service to Tie lines.

Feature Cross Reference

Tie Lines

Programming Manual 2 - 409

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines to assign the trunk
group route 1~8 or 1~100) chosen when a user seizes a Tie Line and dials 9. (Set
Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-07.) If the system has Automatic Route
Selection, dialing 9 accesses ARS. Make a separate entry for each Tie Line – for
each Night Service Mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Day/Night Route Table

Default
No. Mode Number

01 1~8 0~100 1
(0 = No Setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Tie Lines

2 - 410 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class to enter a Toll Restriction
Class for each Tie Line. There are 15 Toll Restriction Classes which are defined in
Programs 21-05 and 21-06. For each Tie Line, you make a separate Toll Restriction
Class entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 001~200

Item Day/Night Toll Restriction Related

Default
No. Mode Class Program

01 1~8 1~15 1 21-05

14-01-08

Conditions

Program 20-06 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to Tie Lines.

Feature Cross Reference

Tie Lines

Programming Manual 2 - 411

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction to build a restriction matrix
for outgoing trunk calls placed from an inbound trunk (e.g., dialed from a Tie Line).
For each inbound trunk group, enable or disable access to each CO trunk group.

Input Data

Incoming Trunk Group Number 001~100

Outgoing Trunk
Input Data Default
Group Number

1~100 0 = Enable (Y-Tandem) 0

1 = Disable (N-Tandem)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Tie Lines

2 - 412 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 34-06 : Add/Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line to set digits that the
system should add or delete for Tie Lines.

Delete Digit
Some Tie Line networks pass the location number and extension number to the
remote side. This program allows the system to ignore such numbers for a call.

If individual extension users do not want to receive an incoming call, they could
delete all digits including the extension number.
Add Digit
If a Tie Line network requires additional digits to reroute the call to a location, the
digits for the location can be added to the received digits.

Input Data

Incoming Trunk Group Number 001~100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Delete Digit 0~255 (255 = delete all digits) 0

02 Additional Dial Digits Up to four digits (0~9, , #) No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Tie Lines

Programming Manual 2 - 413

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer to define the system service tone timers.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 First Digit Pause (E&M Immediate Start) 0~64800 3

02 First Digit Pause (E&M Wink Start) 0~64800 0

03 First Digit Pause (LD Trunk) 0~64800 3

04 LD Trunk Guard Time 0~64800 0

05 Trunk Answer Detect Timer for E&M 0~64800 30

Conditions

If PRG 34-07-05 is left at default (30) the transferred call recalls to the
station that performed the transfer when not answered.

Feature Cross Reference

Tie Lines

2 - 414 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines to define the toll
restriction data for E&M Tie Lines. This data should be defined if Tie Line Toll
Restriction is enabled in Program 21-05-13.

Input Data

Class of Service 01~15

Item Table Related

Dial Data Default
No. No. Program

01 01~20 Up to 10 Digits (0~9, , #) No Setting 21-05-13

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Tie Lines

Programming Manual 2 - 415

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options to define the ANI//DNIS service
option setup for E&M Class of Service.

Input Data

Class of Service 01~15

Default Default
Item Related
No. Name Input Data Program
COS 1 COS 2~15

01 Receive Format 0 = Address 0 0 34-01-02

Use this option to specify the format of the 1 = ANI 34-09-02
ANI/DNIS data received from the telco. 2 = DNIS
Make sure your entry is compatible with the 3 = ANI Address
service the telco provides. The character
4 = ANI DNIS
indicates a delimiter.
5 = DNIS ANI
If PRG34-01-02 is selected to 2 (MF), this ( = Delimiter Code)
PRG works only as 4 =*ANI*DNIS*.

02 Delimiter Dial Code 1~9, 0, #, 34-09-01

This option defines the character Telco uses
as a delimiter (see entries 1~5 in Item 1
above). Valid entries are 0~9, #, and Q.

03 Route Setup of Receive Dial 0 = Fixed Route (Item 0 0 22-09-01

This option specifies the source of the data 08) (No Routing) 22-11-01
34-09-04
the system uses to route incoming ANI/DNIS 34-09-08
calls. If option 2 is selected, refer to Program 1 = Routes on
34-09-04. Received DNIS or
Address Data

2 = Routes on
Received ANI
Data

2 - 416 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Default Default
Item Related
Name Input Data
No. Program
COS 1 COS 2~15

04 Route Table Setup of Target Dial 0 = SPD Table 0 0 13-04-01

The option sets how the system uses the (Program 13-03) 13-04-03
1 = DID Table 22-09-01
route data (gathered in Item 3) to route 22-11
incoming ANI/DNIS calls. (Program 22-11) 34-09-05
If option 2 is selected, and the call is to be 34-09-06
routed using the DID table (1), up to eight
digits can be matched. The number of
expected digits set in Program 22-09-01
must match the ANI digits defined in
Program 22-11-01. For example, if an ANI/
DNIS number received was
2035551234 3001 and Program 22-09-
01=4, the entry in 22-11-01 must be 1234
with the defined target extension.
If the call is to be routed using the ABB table
(0), up to 24 digits can be matched. Define
the range of the ABB table to be used in
Program 34-09-06. The data is compared to
the entries in Program 13-04-01 and then
routed according to Program 13-04-03.

05 ANI/DNIS Display as Target Dial Name 0 = Display Off 1 0 13-04

Use this option to set whether or not ANI 1 = Display On 20-09-02
22-11-03
data should appear on telephone displays as 23-09-04
part of Caller ID display.

06 Routing SPD Table Setup Start = 0, 100~1900 Start = Start = 0 13-04

Use this option to define which part of the End = 0, 99~1999 1000 End = 0
End = 1199
ABB Table set up in Program 13-04 the
system uses for ANI/DNIS Caller ID look-
ups and ANI/DNIS routing.
This is required if Items 4 and 5 above are 1
(Caller ID on). When you specify a starting
and end address, the system uses the part
of the table for look-ups.
When you specify a starting address and
length, the system uses that part of the table
for routing. If the incoming ANI/DNIS number
data matches the Number entry in the table,
the system routes according to the
associated Name data. That data can be an
extension, Department Group pilot number,
the voice mail master number or a trunk ring
group.

07 Routing on ANI/DNIS Error 0 = Play Busy Tone to 1 0 25-03

This option lets you determine how the Caller
system handles an ANI/DNIS call if a data 1 = Route Caller to Ring
error is detected in the incoming data string. Group Specified in
Program 25-03
(Transfer)

Programming Manual 2 - 417

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Default Default
Item Related
Name Input Data
No. Program
COS 1 COS 2~15

08 Routing When Destination Busy or No 0 = Play Busy or 0 0 25-04

Answer Ringback Tone to
This option lets you determine how the Caller (Busy/
system handles an ANI/DNIS call if NoAns)
destination is busy or does not answer. 1 = Route Caller to
Ring Group
Specified in
Program 25-04
(Transfer)

09 Calling Number Address Length 1~8 7 7 34-09-01

When Item 1=0 (ANI/DNIS receive format is
the address), use this option to specify the
address length. The choices are from 1~ 8
digits.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Tie Lines

2 - 418 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup

 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup
35-01 : SMDR Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 35-01 : SMDR Options to set the SMDR (Station Message
Detail Recording) options for each of the eight SMDR ports. Refer to the
following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Program

Input Data

SMDR Port Number 1~8

35
Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Output Port Type 0 = None 0

This option specifies the type of 3 = LAN
connection used for SMDR. The baud rate 4 = CTA/CTU
for the COM port should be set in Program
10-21-02 or 15-02-19.

02 Output Destination Number Up to eight digits No

This option specifies the SMDR printer
Setting
output extension (CTA/CTU extension
number).

03 Header Language 0 = English 0

Specify the language in which the SMDR 1 = German
header should be printed. 2 = French
3 = Italian
4 = Spanish

04 Omit Digits 0~24 (0 = Not applied) 1

The number of digits entered in this option
do not print on the SMDR report. For
example, if the entry is 10, the first 10
digits a user dials do not appear on the
SMDR report.

05 Minimum Digits 0~24 (0 = Not applied) 0

Outgoing calls must be at least this
number of digits for inclusion in the SMDR
report.

Programming Manual 2 - 419

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

06 Minimum Call Duration 0~65535 (sec) (0 = All) 0

The duration of the call must be at least
this time to be included on the SMDR
report.

07 Minimum Ring Time (For Incoming 0~65535 (sec) (0 = All) 0

Calls)
A call must ring for at least this time to be
included on the SMDR report.

08 Format Selection 0 = NA Type (North 1

America)
1 = G/J Type (Overseas/
Japan)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Station Message Detail Recording

2 - 420 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-02 : SMDR Output Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 35-02 : SMDR Output Options to set the SMDR (Station Message
Detail Recording) output options for each of the eight SMDR ports. Refer to the
following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

Input Data

SMDR Port Number 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Toll Restricted Call 0 = Not Displayed 1

SMDR can include or exclude calls blocked by 1 = Displayed
Toll Restriction.

02 PBX Calls 0 = Not Displayed 1

When the system is behind a PBX, SMDR can 1 = Displayed
include all calls or just calls dialed using the
PBX trunk access code.

03 Trunk Number or Name 0 = Name 1

Select whether the system should display the 1 = Number
trunk name (0) or the number (1) on SMDR
reports.
If this option is set to 1, Program
35-02-14 must be set to 0.

04 Summary (Daily) 0 = Not Displayed 1

Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR report 1 = Displayed
provide a daily summary (at midnight every
night).

05 Summary (Weekly) 0 = Not Displayed 1

Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR report 1 = Displayed
provide a weekly summary (every Saturday at
midnight).

06 Summary (Monthly) 0 = Not Displayed 1

Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR report 1 = Displayed
provide a monthly summary (at midnight on the
last day of the month).

Programming Manual 2 - 421

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

07 Toll Charge Cost 0 = Not Displayed 1

Set this option to (1) have the SMDR report 1 = Displayed
include toll charges.

08 Incoming Call 0 = Not Displayed 1

Enable this option (1) to have the SMDR report 1 = Displayed
include incoming calls. If you disable this option
(0), incoming calls do not print.

09 Extension Number or Name 0 = Name 0

Set this option (1) to have the SMDR report 1 = Number
include extension numbers. Set this option (0)
to have the SMDR report include extension
names.

10 All Lines Busy (ALB) Output 0 = Not Displayed 0

Determine if the All Lines Busy (ALB) indication 1 = Displayed
should be displayed.

11 Walking Toll Restriction Table Number 0 = Not Output 1

1 = Output

12 DID Table Name Output 0 = Not Displayed 0

Determine if the DID table name should be 1 = Displayed
displayed.

13 CLI Output When DID to Trunk 0 = Not Displayed 0

Determine if the CLI output should be displayed 1 = Displayed
for DID.

14 Date 0 = Not Displayed 0

Determine whether the date should be 1 = Displayed
displayed on SMDR reports.
This option must be set to 0 if the trunk
name is set to be displayed in Program
35-02-03.

15 CLI/DID Number Switching 0 = CLI (CLIP) 0

Determine whether or not the CLI/DID Number 1 = DID Calling
Switching should be displayed. Number

16 Trunk Name or Received Dialed Number 0 = Trunk Port 0

Determine how the SMDR should print Name
incoming calls on ANI/DNIS or DID trunks. If set 1 = Received
to (1), ANI/DNIS trunks can print DNIS digits. If Dialed Number
set to (0) trunk names are printed instead. 2 = Both

17 Print Account Code or Caller Name of 0 = ACC 0

Incoming Call
1 = CNAME
Determine if SMDR should print Account Code
or Caller Name of Incoming Call.

2 - 422 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

18 Print Mode for Caller Name of Incoming Call 0 = Normal 0

Determine how SMDR should print Caller 1 = Line Feed
Name of Incoming Call.

19 Dialed Number Output Format 0 = First 20 Digits 0

Determine if the dialed number should display 1 = Last 20 Digits
the first 20 digits or the last 20 digits. This
option is only available for outgoing calls.

20 External Information CFW Mode 0 = Transfer 0

Determine which information is displayed in the Information
"STATION" area for a transferred call when the 1 = Incoming
extension has Call Forward set with an Information
Abbreviated Dial number as the destination.
Selecting "0" (Transfer Info) will display the
extension number which called the extension
with external Call Forward set. Selecting "1"
(Incoming Info) will display the extension
number which has the external Call Forward
set.
This option only applies when Call Forward is
set using a service code (Program 11-11-
01~11-11-07) and the destination uses an
Abbreviated Dial bin. It does not include Off-
Premise or Centrex transfers.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Station Message Detail Recording

Programming Manual 2 - 423

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group to assign the
SMDR port for each trunk group. For each Trunk Group, select the SMDR port where
the incoming SMDR information should be sent.

Input Data

Trunk Group Number 1~100

Item
SMDR Port No. Default
No.

01 1~8 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Station Message Detail Recording
Trunk Group Routing

2 - 424 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups to assign
the SMDR port for each Department Group. For each Department Group, select the
SMDR port where the outgoing SMDR information should be sent.

There are 64 available Department Groups.

Input Data

Department Group Number 01~64

Item
SMDR Port No. Default
No.

01 1~8 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Station Message Detail Recording

Programming Manual 2 - 425

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-05 : Account Code Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 35-05 : Account Code Setup to set various Account Code options for an
extension Class of Service. Assign a Class of Service to extensions in Program
20-06.

Input Data

Class of Service Number 01~15

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Account Code Mode 0 = Account Codes Disabled (None) 0

Use this option to select the Account 1 = Account Codes optional
Code Mode (0~3). 2 = Account Codes Required but not
verified (No verify)
3 = Account Codes Required and
Verified (Verify)

02 Forced Account Code Toll Call 0 = Account Codes for toll and local 0
Setup calls (All)
Use this option enable Account 1 = Account Codes just for toll calls
Codes for all calls or just toll calls (for (STD)
mode 2 or 3 in Item 01 above).

03 Account Codes for Incoming Calls 0 = Account Codes for incoming calls 0
Use this option to allow users to enter disabled (No)
Account Codes for incoming calls. If 1 = Account Codes for incoming calls
disabled, any codes entered dial out enabled (Yes)
on the connected trunk.

04 Hiding Account Codes 0 = Account Codes displayed 0

Use this option to either hide or show 1 = Account Codes not displayed
the Account codes on a telephone
display.

2 - 426 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Account Codes

Programming Manual 2 - 427

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

35-06 : Verified Account Code Table
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 35-06 : Verified Account Code Table to enter Account Codes into the
Verified Account Code list. You can enter up to 2000 codes with 3~6 digits, using the
characters 0~9 or #. Use the LK1 to enter a wild card. For example, the entry @234
means the user can enter 0234-9234.

Input Data

Verified Account Code Bin Number 1~2000

Item
Verified Account Code Default
No.

01 1~9, 0, #, @ (@ = Wild card) No Setting

(Up to 16 digits)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Account Codes – Forced/Verified/Unverified

2 - 428 Program 35 : SMDR Account Code Setup

 Program 40 : Voice Recording System
40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup to define the basic operation of
Voice Mail.
Program
Input Data

40
Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 --- Not Used ---

02 --- Not Used ---

03 --- Not Used ---

04 --- Not Used ---

05 --- Not Used ---

06 --- Not Used ---

07 --- Not Used ---

09 1 Digit access 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

10 --- Not Used ---

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Mail Integration (Analog)

Programming Manual 2 - 429

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

40-04 : Live Recording Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 40-04 : Live Recording Setup to define the conversation recording
operation of the Voice Mail.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 --- Not Used ---

02 --- Not Used ---

03 Live Recording Display 0 = Display 0 Enables or disables the

1 = Not Display system’s ability to display
the recording feature
active.

04 Recall destination when 0 = Starting extension 0

destination is not found of the conversaton
recording
1 = Last extension of
the conversation
recording

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Mail Integration (Analog)

2 - 430 Program 40 : Voice Recording System

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS to specify the
language to be used for the VRS prompts.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment 01 = US English 2

for VRS 02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin America Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Reserved
18 = Reserved
19 = Reserved
20 = Flexible

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Mail Integration (Analog)

Programming Manual 2 - 431

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option
Level:
IN

Description
In Program 40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option define the system options for
the Voice Announcement feature.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 VRS Fixed Message 0 = Not Used 1

Enable (1) or disable (0) the system ability to play the 1 = Used
fixed VRS messages (such as You have a message).

02 General Message Number 0~100 0

This item assigns the VRS message number to be (0 = No General
used as the General Message. Message Service)

03 VRS No Answer Destination 0~100 0

This item assigns the transferred Ring Group when (Incoming Ring (No Setting)
the VRS is unanswered after Call Forwarding with Group Number)
Personal Greeting Message.

04 VRS No Answer Time 0~64800 (sec) 0

If an extension has Personal Greeting enabled and all
VRS ports are busy, a DIL or DISA call to the
extension waits this time for a VRS port to become
free.

05 Park and Page Repeat Timer (VRS Msg Resend) 0~64800 (sec) 0
If a Park and Page is not picked up during this interval,
the Paging announcement repeats.

06 Set VRS Message for Private Call Refuse 0~101 0

(VRS Msg Private Call) (0 = No message)
This item assigns the VRS Message number to be (101 = Fixed
used as Private Call Refuse. message )
When Fixed message is set, VRS message guidance
is: “Service finished. Disconnect the line, please.”

2 - 432 Program 40 : Voice Recording System

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

07 Set VRS Message for Caller ID Refuse 0~101( 0

(VRS Msg CID) 0 = No message)
This item assigns the VRS Message number to be (101 = Fixed
used as Caller ID Refuse. message )
When Fixed Message is set, VRS message guidance
is: “Service finished. Disconnect the line, please.”

08 Call Attendant Busy Message 0~100 0

(0 = No message)

09 Call Attendant No Answer Message 0~100 0

(0 = No message)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Response System (VRS)

Programming Manual 2 - 433

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
In Program 40-11 : Preamble Message Assignment to assign the VRS message
number to be used as the Preamble Message for each trunk. When the extension
user answers the incoming call, the assigned VRS message is sent to the outside
caller.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 1~200

Item Day/Night
VRS Message Number Default
No. Mode

01 1~8 0~100 (0 = No Service) 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Response System (VRS)

2 - 434 Program 40 : Voice Recording System

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 40 : Voice Recording System

40-12 : 1 Digit Access Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 40-12 : 1 Digit Access Setup define the service code & an option
code at the time of the message hearing are allocated to one arbitrary digit in the
Voice Service announcement

Input Data

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Service Code 0-9, (11 dials) No

Arbitrary service codes are assigned to each Up to 2 digits Setting
dial.

02 Option Code at the time of the

message hearing
The arbitrary option codes are assigned to
each dial.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Mail

Programming Manual 2 - 435

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2 - 436 Program 40 : Voice Recording System

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-01 : System Options for ACD
Level:
IN

Description
In Program 41-01 : System Options for ACD define the system options for
the ACD feature.
Program
Input Data

41
Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 System Supervisory Up to eight digits (0~9, , #) No

Extension Setting

02 Login ID Code Digit 0~20 0

(0 = No Login ID)

03 ACD MIS Connection 0 = None 0

Ports
3 = LAN (CD-CP00)

04 ACD-MIS Command 0 = Notifies 0

Notification when a
BT Message is
1 = No notification
returned

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Programming Manual 2 - 437

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments
Level:
SA

Description
In Program 41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments, for each ACD extension
number, assign an ACD Group (1~64). An ACD Group number is assigned to each
Work Period number (1~8).

The assigned extension will work as an ACD agent extension in the following cases:

The trunk belonging to an ACD group receives an incoming call while an ACD agent
is logged in.
An extension transfers a call to an ACD group using the ACD group pilot number.
An incoming call is received with a DID/DISA number which is assigned as an ACD
pilot number.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item
ACD Work Period Mode Number ACD Group No. Default
No.

01 1~8 0~64 0
(0 = No setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

2 - 438 Program 41 : ACD Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group
Level:
SA

Description
In Program 41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group, for each
incoming trunk group set up in Program 22-05, designate which ACD Group (1~64)
the trunks should ring for each of the eight Work Periods. Also use this program to
assign an Incoming Trunk Ring Group as priority or normal. Use Program 41-06 to
set up the Work Schedules and Work Periods for trunks. Use Program 41-07 to
assign the Work Schedules to the days of the week.

Input Data

Incoming Ring Group Number 1~100

ACD Work Period Mode Number 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 ACD Group Number 0~64 (0 = No setting) 0

02 Night Announcement Service 0 = No 0

1 = Yes

03 Priority Data 0, 1~7 0

Determine whether an incoming call to a (0 = No Priority)
trunk ring group should follow a priority (1 = Highest Priority)
assignment. (7 = Lowest Priority)
0 = No Priority
1~7: 1 = Highest Priority
7 = Lowest Priority

Programming Manual 2 - 439

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Ring Groups

2 - 440 Program 41 : ACD Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor
Level:
SA

Description
For each ACD Group (1~64), use Program 41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor to assign
the group supervisor extension and operating mode. Operating modes are:

0 = Supervisor extension does not receive ACD Group calls.

1 = Supervisor extension receives ACD Group overflow calls only.
2 = Supervisor extension receives ACD Group calls just like all other agents.
An ACD Group can have only one supervisor. In addition, an extension can be a
supervisor for only one ACD Group.

Input Data

ACD Group No. 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Group Supervisor Extension Number (Up to eight digits) No

Extension Setting

02 Operation Type 0 = Do not receive any ACD incoming calls (No) 0

1 = Receive ACD incoming calls in case of
overflow (Busy)
2 = Receive ACD incoming calls all the time (Yes)

Conditions

If you assign an extension as a ACD Group Supervisor in this program, you

cannot program the same extension as a System Supervisor in
Program 41-01-01.

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Programming Manual 2 - 441

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for
ACD Agents and Groups. For each ACD Work Schedule (1~4), designate the start
and stop times for each of the eight Work Periods. After you set up the schedules in
this program, assign them to days of the week in Program 41-07. (This is the same
program used by the Trunk Work Schedules.)

ACD extensions can log in only during their work period. ACD extensions receive the
following calls when they are logged in.

ACD Call on a Trunk

When the incoming ring group is assigned in the operating time (Program 41-03 and
41-06).
ACD Pilot Number Call
Any time – if ACD extensions are available.

Input Data

ACD Work Schedule Time Pattern 1~4

Item Work Period

Start Time End Time Default
No. Mode Number

01 1~8 0000~2359 0000~2359 (Start) 0000

(End) 0000

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

2 - 442 Program 41 : ACD Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for trunks.
For each Work Schedule (1~4), designate the start and stop times for each of the
eight Work Periods. After you set up the schedules, assign them to days of the week
in Program 41-07. (This is the same program used by the ACD Agent Work
Schedules.)

Input Data

ACD Work Schedule Time Pattern Number 1~4

Item Work Period

Start Time End Time Default
No. Mode Number

01 1~8 0000~2359 0000~2359 (Start) 0000

(End) 0000

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Programming Manual 2 - 443

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup to assign the four Work Schedules
(1~4) to days of the week. The assignments you make in this program apply to both
the ACD Agent Work Schedules (Program 41-05) and the Trunk Work Schedules
(Program 41-06).

Input Data

Item
Day Number Time Pattern Default
No.

1 = Sunday 0~4 (0 = No ACD) 0

2 = Monday 0~4 (0 = No ACD) 0

3 = Tuesday 0~4 (0 = No ACD) 0

01 4 = Wednesday 0~4 (0 = No ACD) 0

5 = Thursday 0~4 (0 = No ACD) 0

6 = Friday 0~4 (0 = No ACD) 0

7 = Saturday 0~4 (0 = No ACD) 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

2 - 444 Program 41 : ACD Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-08 : ACD Overflow Options
Level:
SA

Description
For each ACD Group (1~64), use Program 41-08 : ACD Overflow Options to assign the
overflow mode (0~9), destination and announcement message types. Delay
Announcement functions are not available for ACD pilot number calls. Each ACD
Group can have unique overflow options. The table below outlines the entry options.

Input Data

ACD Group No. 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Overflow 0 = No Overflow (None) 0

Operation Mode
1 = Overflow with No Announcement
2 = No Overflow with First Announcement Only
3 = No Overflow with First & Second
Announcements
4 = Overflow with First Announcement Only
5 = Overflow with First & Second Announcement
6 = --- Not Used ---
7 = --- Not Used ---
8 = No Overflow with Second Announcement Only
9 = Overflow with Second Announcement Only

02 ACD Overflow 0 = No Setting 0

Destination
1~64 = ACD Group
65 = Overflow Table (Program 41-09)
66 = Voice Mail Integration
67 = System Speed (Program 41-08-05)
68 = Incoming Ring Group (Program 41-08-06)

03 Delay 0 = ACI 0
Announcement
Source Type
1 = VRS
2 = IPK II In-Mail

04 ACD Overflow 0~64800 (sec) 0

Transfer Time

05 System Speed Dial 0~1999 (Used when 41-08-02 is set to 67) 1999
Bin

Programming Manual 2 - 445

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

06 Incoming Ring 1~100 (Used when 41-08-02 is set to 68) 1

Group when
Overflow

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

2 - 446 Program 41 : ACD Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting to define the ACD group to which
a call is transferred when overflow occurs.

Input Data

ACD Group No. 01~64

Item Priority Order

Transfer ACD Group Number With Overflow Default
No. Number

01 1~7 0~65 (0 = No Setting) 0

65 = In-Skin Voice Mail Integration

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Programming Manual 2 - 447

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-10 : ACI Delay Announcement
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 41-10 : ACI Delay Announcement to define the ACI port number to be
used for the delay announcement.

This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are
assigned as ACI in Program 41-08-03.

Input Data

ACD Group No 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 1st Delay Announcement ACI Port Number 0~96 0

0 = No Setting

02 2nd Delay Announcement ACI Port Number 0~96 0

0 = No Setting

03 1st Delay Announcement Connection Timer 0~64800 (sec) 30

Set the time before the 1st Delay Announcement is played.

04 2nd Delay Announcement Connection Timer 0~64800 (sec) 30

Set the time the 1st Delay Announcement plays before the 2nd
Delay Announcement starts to play.

05 2nd Delay Announcement Sending Duration 0~64800 (sec) 30

Set the timer for how long the 2nd Delay Announcement plays.
After this timer expires, the call disconnects. To keep the call in
queue, set this timer to 0.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

2 - 448 Program 41 : ACD Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 41-11 : VRS Delay Announcement to assign the VRS message number to
be used as the message source for the 1st and 2nd Delay Announcement Messages.
Refer to Program 41-08 for more on setting up the ACD overflow options.

This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are
assigned as VRS in Program 41-08-03.

Input Data

ACD Group No. 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Delay Message Start Timer 0~64800 (sec) 0

Input the time before the 1st Delay Message Starts.

02 1st Delay Message Number 0~101 101

Input the VRS Message to be played as the 1st Delay 0 = No Message
Message. 101 = Fixed Message

03 1st Delay Message Sending Count 0~255 0

Input the number of times the 1st Delay Message is sent.
If set to 0, the message is not played.

04 2nd Delay Message Number 0~101 101

Input the VRS Message to be played as the 2nd Delay 0 = No Message
Message. 101 = Fixed Message

05 2nd Waiting Message Sending Count 0~255 0

Input the number of times the 2nd Delay Message is
sent. If set to 0, the message is not played.

06 Tone Kind at Message Interval 0 = Ring Back Tone 0

Input what is heard between the Delay messages. 1 = MOH Tone
2 = BGM Source

07 ACD Forced Disconnect Time after the 2nd Delay 0~64800 (sec) 60
Message
(0 = No Disconnect)
Set the time, after the last 2nd Delay Message is played,
before the call is disconnected.

Programming Manual 2 - 449

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 Queue Depth Announcement 0 = Disable 0

Input when the Queue Depth Announcement will be 1 = After 1st (1st)
played. 2 = After 2nd (2nd)
3 = After 1st and 2nd
(1st and 2nd)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

2 - 450 Program 41 : ACD Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-12 : Night Announcement Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 41-12 : Night Announcement Setup to define the night announce
voice resource and sending time for each ACD group. Night announcement
availability depends on the setting in Program 41-03-02. The night announcement
function is not available for ACD pilot number calls.

Input Data

ACD Group Number 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Night Announcement Source Type 0 = ACI 0

1 = VRS

02 Night Announcement ACI Port Number 0~96 0

Only used when PRG 41-12-01 is set to 0. 0 = No Setting

03 ACD Night Announce Sending Time 0~64800 (sec) 0

Only used when PRG 41-12-01 is set to 0.

Conditions

The Night Announcement function is not available for ACD pilot number call.

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Programming Manual 2 - 451

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement to define
the VRS message number to be used as the night announcement. This program is
activated when the night announcement source is assigned as VRS in Program
41-12-01.

Input Data

ACD Group No. 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 VRS Message Number 0~100 0

Input the VRS Message to be 0 = No Message
used for the Night
Announcement.

02 Tone Kind at Message Interval 0 = Ring Back Tone 0

Input what is heard between the 1 = MOH Tone
Night Announcements. 2 = BGM Source

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

2 - 452 Program 41 : ACD Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-14 : ACD Options Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 41-14 : ACD Options Setup to set various options for ACD Groups.
When you set an option for an ACD Group, the setting is in force (if applicable) for all
agents in the group. The chart below shows each of the ACD options, the entries
available, and the default entry.

Input Data

ACD Group No 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Emergency Call Operation Mode 0 = Call to system supervisory 0

The supervisor must be logged in and extension when group
have an Emergency Key programmed supervisory extension is busy.
for this feature. By pressing the key 1 = No calls to system supervisory
once, the supervisor monitors the call – extension when group
pressing twice barges in on the call. supervisory extension is busy.

02 Automatic Wrap Up Mode 0 = After wrap up the mode key is 0

Enable/disable Automatic Wrap Up pressed. (Manual)
mode. 1 = After call is finished
automatically. (Auto)

03 ACD Priority for Overflow Calls 0 = Own group priority 0

Determine whether the ACD group 1 = Priority order by Program
should use its own priority assignment 41-03-03
or if it should follow the priority assigned
in Program 41-03-03.

04 Automatic Answer at Headset 0 = Off 0

Enable/disable Automatic Answer for 1 = On
agents using headsets.

06 Call Queuing after 2nd 0 = Enable (Yes) 0

Announcement
1 = Disable (No)
Use this option to determine whether
the caller should hear the 2nd Delay
Announcement and then taken out of
queue (1), or place back into queue (0).

Programming Manual 2 - 453

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

07 Automatic Off Duty for SLT 0 = No change to Off Duty mode 0

Enable/disable Automatic Off Duty 1 = Change to Off Duty mode
(rest) mode for agents with SLT. automatically (Skip)

08 ACD Off Duty Mode 0 = Cannot receive internal call 0

Enable (1) or Disable (0) the ability to 1 = Can receive internal call
receive internal calls when in Off Duty
Mode.

09 Automatic Wrap Up End Time 0~64800 (sec) 0

Input the time the agent will be in Wrap
mode when Wrap key is pressed, or
automatically put into Wrap mode.

10 ACD No Answer Skip Time 0~64800 (sec) 0

Set how long a call to the ACD Group
rings an idle extension before routing to
the next agent.

12 Start Headset Ear Piece Ringing (for 0~64800 (sec) 0

SLT)

13 1st Data – ACD Queue 1-Digit 1st Data – Blank

Assignment
Up to one Digit (0, 1~9, #, )

2nd Data – Destination Number Type 2nd Data – 0

0 = None
1 = Extension or Voice Mail
2 = Incoming Ring Group
3 = Speed Dial Areas
4 = ACD Group

3rd Data – Destination Number 3rd Data – Blank

Up to eight digits (0, 1~9, #, )

14 DTMF Detection Assignment during 0 = Does not detect during message 1

Delay Announcement
1 = Detect during message
Is the DTMF Detection for Dial Out
during (1) or after (0) the message is
played.

15 DTMF Detect Time after Delay 0~64800 (sec) 0

Announcement Message
How long is the DTMF Detection after
the Delay Announcement Message.

2 - 454 Program 41 : ACD Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Programming Manual 2 - 455

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information to assign the options for
Audible Indication for Log Out/Off Duty mode for each ACD group.

These program settings provide an alarm to the agents, but no Queue Status Display
is indicated. Do not use these programs if the alarm options are defined in Program
41-20-01 through 41-20-05.

Feature Available in Program 41-15 Available in Program 41-20

Queue Status Display --- Yes

Queue Status Display --- Yes

Time

Alarm Yes Yes

Alarm Send Time Yes

Program 41-15-02 determines the
Interval Time of Queue length/interval of the alarm. Yes
Status Display

Class of Service --- Yes

Timing of Alarm and Alarm triggered after the number Alarm triggered after the number of
Display Queue Status of calls in Program 41-15-01 is calls in Program 41-20-01 is
exceeded. exceeded. Then follows Program
41-20-03 time for displaying status.

Input Data

ACD Group No. 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of Calls in ACD Queue to Activate 0~200 0

Alarm Information
(0 = No Alarm)

02 Interval Time of Alarm Information 0~64800 (sec) 0

Input the alarm sound time.

2 - 456 Program 41 : ACD Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Programming Manual 2 - 457

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow to define the value of the ACD
threshold call overflow and the mode for each ACD group.

Input Data

ACD Group No. 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of Calls in Queue 0~200 0

Define the maximum number of (0 = No Limitation)
calls allowed in the ACD queue
before overflow occurs.

02 Operation Mode for ACD Queue 0 = The last waiting call is 0

Define how the system should transferred
handle calls when the number of 1 = The longest waiting call is
calls in queue exceeds the transferred
threshold. 2 = Send Busy Tone

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

2 - 458 Program 41 : ACD Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-17 : ACD Login Mode Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 41-17 : ACD Login Mode Setup to define the ACD login mode for each
extension. If the AIC Login Mode is enabled, set the AIC Login and AIC Logout
service codes for the AIC members in Program 11-13-08 and 11-13-09.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item
Login Mode Default
No.

01 0 = Normal Login Mode 0

1 = AIC Login Mode

Conditions

If set to 1, note that a supervisor cannot log in/out an AIC member as they are not
normal ACD agents.

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Programming Manual 2 - 459

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup to define the ACD Agent Identity
Code Table.

Input Data

AIC Table No. 001~512

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 ACD Agent Identity Code Up to four digits No Setting

02 Default ACD Group Number 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

03 ACD Group Number in Mode 1 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

04 ACD Group Number in Mode 2 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

05 ACD Group Number in Mode 3 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

06 ACD Group Number in Mode 4 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

07 ACD Group Number in Mode 5 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

08 ACD Group Number in Mode 6 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

09 ACD Group Number in Mode 7 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

10 ACD Group Number in Mode 8 0~64 0

0 = No Setting

2 - 460 Program 41 : ACD Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 461

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-19 : ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 41-19 : ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement to assign IPK II In-Mail
Master Mailboxes (PRG 47-03) as ACD Delay “Announcement” Mailboxes.

Input Data

ACD Group Number 1 ~ 64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Delay Message Start Timer 0 ~ 64800 (sec) 0

Determines how long the system waits before playing the
Delay Message.

02 Mailbox Number for 1st Announcement Message Dial No Setting

Assigns the Voice Mail ACD Announcement Mailbox as (up to eight digits)
the message source for the 1st Announcement Message.

03 1st Delay Message Sending Count 0 = No message is 0

Determines the 1st Delay Message Sending Count. This played.
entry must be set to 1 or higher for the message to play. 1 ~ 255

04 Mailbox Number for 2nd Announcement Message Dial No Setting

Assigns the Voice Mail ACD Announcement Mailboxes as (up to eight digits)
the message source for the 2nd Announcement Message.

05 2nd Delay Message Sending Count 0 = No message is 0

Determines the 2nd Delay Message Sending Count. This played.
entry must be set to 1 or higher for the message to play.
1 ~ 255

06 Wait Tone Type at Message Interval 0 = Ring Back 0

Determines what the caller hears between the messages. Tone
1 = Music On Hold
Tone
2 = Background
Music Source

07 ACD Forced Disconnect Time after 2nd 0 ~ 64800 (sec) 0

Announcement
Assigns how long the system should wait after the end of
the ACD Delay Message before disconnecting.

2 - 462 Program 41 : ACD Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 Delay Message Interval Time 0 ~ 64800 (sec) 20

Sets the timer for the interval between the Delay
Messages.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 463

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 41 : ACD Setup

41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 41-20 : ACD Queue Display Settings to assign the options for the ACD
Queue Status Display feature. This program allows the Queue Status Display, and
causes an alarm to sound, when the parameters in this program are met.

Program 41-15 can also provide a queue alarm to the agents. The options in Program
41-20 should not be used if 41-15 is set.

Available in Available in
Feature
Program 41-15 Program 41-20

Queue Status Display --- Yes

Queue Status Display --- Yes

Time

Alarm Yes Yes

Alarm Send Time Yes

Program 41-15-02 determines the
Interval Time of Queue length/interval of the alarm. Yes
Status Display

Class of Service --- Yes

Timing of Alarm and Alarm triggered after the number

Display Queue Status Alarm triggered after the number of of calls in Program 41-20-01 is
calls in Program 41-15-01 is exceeded. Then follows Program
exceeded. 41-20-03 time for displaying
status.

2 - 464 Program 41 : ACD Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

ACD Group No. 01~64

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of Calls in Queue 0 = No Display, 0

Set the number of calls that can accumulate in the 1~200
ACD queue before the Queue Status Display (and
optional queue alarm) occurs.

02 Queue Status Display Time 0~64800 (sec) 5 (sec)

Set how long the Queue Status display remains on
the telephone display.

03 Queue Status Display Interval 0~64800 (sec) 60 (sec)

Set the interval that refreshes the Queue Status
Alarm time in queue display and causes the optional
queue alarm to occur on phones active on a call,
logged out, or in wrap-up.

04 ACD Call Waiting Alarm 0 = Disable (Off) 0

Enable or disable the queue alarm. 1 = Enable (On)

05 ACD Call Waiting Alarm Hold Time 0~64800 (sec) 0

Set how long the Call Waiting Alarm should sound.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Programming Manual 2 - 465

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2 - 466 Program 41 : ACD Setup

 Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel to assign the system
options for Hotel/Motel Service.
Program
Input Data

42
Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Answering Message Mode for Wake 0 = MOH (Hold Time) 0

Up Call (Hotel Mode)
1 = VRS Message
2 = VRS Message + Time

02 Wake Up Call Message Assignment 0~100 0

VRS Message for Wake Up Calls. You (0 = No Setting)
will need to make an entry for this
program if you have selected 1 or 2 in
Item 1 above.

03 Wake Up Call No Answer 0 = No Transfer 0

1 = Transfer to the
Operator

04 Setup Message Mode for Wake Up 0 = Fixed Message 0

Call (Hotel Mode)
1 = VRS Message
2 = Time Information and
VRS

05 Wake Up Call Message Assignment 0~100 0

(0 = No Setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel

Programming Manual 2 - 467

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup to define the basic operation of
the Hotel/Motel extensions.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Hotel Mode 0 = Normal 0

If you want an extension to operate in the Hotel/ 1 = Hotel
Motel mode, enter 1. If you want the telephone
to operate in the business mode, enter 0.

02 Toll Restriction Class When Check In 1~15 1

Assign an extension Toll Restriction Class
when it is checked in. The system has 15 Toll
Restriction Classes (1~15). The entry you
make in this option affects the telephone in all
Night Service modes. (Refer to Programs 21-05
and 21-06 to set up the Toll Restriction dialing
options.) When the extension is checked out, it
uses the Toll Restriction Class set in Program
21-04.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel

2 - 468 Program 42 : Hotel Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) to set the Hotel/Motel
Class of Service (COS) options. Assign Class of Service to extensions in Program
42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup. There are 15 Classes of Service. Refer to the
following chart for a description of each COS option, its range and default setting. For
additional Class of Service options, refer to Programs 20-06 ~ 20-14.

Input Data

Class of Service Number 01~15

Default
Item Input
Item
No. Data Class Class
01 02~15

01 Check-In Operation 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

02 Check-Out Operation 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

03 Room Status Output 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

04 DND Setting for Other Extension 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

05 Wake up Call Setting for Other Extension 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

06 Room Status Change for Other Extension 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

07 Restriction Class Changing for Other 0 = Off 0 0

Extension
1 = On

08 Room to Room Call Restriction 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

09 DND Setting for Own Extension 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

Programming Manual 2 - 469

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Default
Item Input
Item
No. Data Class Class
01 02~15

10 Wake Up Call Setting for Own Extension 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

11 Change Room Status for Own Extension 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

12 SLT Room Monitor 0 = Off 0 0

Enable (1) or disable (0) a single line 1 = On
telephone ability to use Room Monitor.

13 PMS Restriction Level 0 = Off 0 0

1 = On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Class of Service
Hotel/Motel

2 - 470 Program 42 : Hotel Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes to set up the Hotel
Mode one-digit service codes which are assigned in 42-02-01. For each Department
Calling Group (1~64), you enter the destination for each single digit code (1~9, 0, ,
#). The destination can be any code with up to four digits, such as an extension
number or access code.

Input Data

Department (Extension) Group Number 01~64

Item Received Destination

Default
No. Dial Number

01 1~9,0, ,# Up to eight digits No Setting

Conditions

The one-digit service codes you assign in this program wait until the interdigit time
expires before executing.

Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel

Programming Manual 2 - 471

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer to set the CTA port to output the
Hotel Data (Check-Out sheet, Room Status, etc.) and the output options for the Hotel/
Motel feature.

Input Data

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Output Port Type 0 = No Setting 0

1 = CTA
3 = LAN

02 Output Destination Number Up to eight digits No

(Extension number which CTA/CTU is Setting
equipped)

03 Wake Up Call No Answer 0 = Not Output 0

Data
1 = Output

04 Check-Out Sheet 0 = Not Output 0

1 = Output

Conditions

Room Status Reports output via a CTA or CTU adapter require a DTH terminal
and a compatible external device.

Room Status Reports can be output via LAN port , or when using DTH terminals,
a CTA or CTU adapter and a compatible external device.

Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel

2 - 472 Program 42 : Hotel Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-06 : PMS Service Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 42-06 : PMS Service Setting to set the PMS integration settings when
using PMS-U10 and PMS feature.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 PMS Port Number 0~65535 5129

02 3:00 AM Auto Room Scan 0 = Off 0

At 3:00 AM sets ‘maid required’ 1 = On
status for all checked-in rooms.

03 CheckIn Message Type 0 = Off 0

1 = On

04 CheckOut Auto Status Change 0 = Off 0

1 = On

05 AREYUTHERE/LINETEST Send 1~128 (sec) 10

Timing

06 AREYUTHERE/LINETEST Send 0~20 (times) 3

Count

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel

Programming Manual 2 - 473

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 42 : Hotel Setup

42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 42-07 : PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table to change the
default Toll Restriction class on check in for a room (PRG 42-02-02).

Input Data

Restriction Level 0~3

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table 1~15 Level 0 = 10

Level 1 = 11
Level 2 = 12
Level 3 = 13

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Hotel/Motel

2 - 474 Program 42 : Hotel Setup

 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route to define the system
options for the ARS/F-Route feature.
Program
Input Data

44
Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 ARS/F-Route Time Schedule 0 = Not Used 0

If this option is set to 0, the F-Route table selected is 1 = Used
determined only by the digits dialed without any relation to
the day or time of the call.
If this option is set to 1, the system first refers to Program
44-10. If there is a match, the pattern defined in that
program is used. If not, the F-Route pattern in Program
44-09 and time setting in 44-08 are used.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Uniform Numbering Network

Programming Manual 2 - 475

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the
Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS/F-Route.

Input Data

Dial Analysis Table Number 1~120

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Dial Up to eight digits No

Set the number of digits to be analyzed by the (Use line key 1 for a Don’t Setting
system for ARS routing. Care digit, @)

02 Service Type 0 = No setting (None) 0

Service Type 1 (Extension Number) 1 = Extension Call (Own)
The number goes to an extension after 2 = ARS/F-Route Table
deleting the front digit(s). (F-Route)
3 = Dial Extension Analyze
Additional Data
Table (Option)
Assign the digit(s) to be deleted on top of the
number for extension number usage. At least
one digit must be deleted.
Service Type 2 (ARS/F-Route)
The number is controlled by ARS/F-Route
table.

Additional Data:
If the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is not
used, assign the ARS/F-Route table number
for Program 44-05.

If the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is used,

assign the ARS/F-Route selection number for
Program 44-04.
Service Type 3 (Dial Extension Analyze Table)
The total length of the number exceeds more
than 8 digits.

Additional Data:
Assign the Dial Extension Analysis Table
number to be used in Program 44-03.

2 - 476 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

03 Additional Data 1 = Delete Digit = 0~255 0

For the Service Type selected in 44-02-02, enter (255 : Delete All Digits)
the additional data required. 2 = 0~500
(0 = No Setting)
1: Delete Digit = 0~255 3 = Dial Extension Analyze
(255 = Delete All Digits)
Table Number = 0~4
2: [Program 44-01 : 0] (0 = No Setting)
ARS/F-Route Table Number = 0~500
(0 = No Setting)
Refer to Program 44-05.
[Program 44-01 : 1]

ARS/F-Route Select Table Number = 0~500

(0 = No Setting)
Refer to Program 44-04.

3: Dial Extension Analyze Table Number =

0~4 (0 = No Setting)
Refer to Program 44-03.

04 Dial Tone Simulation 0 = Off 0

If enabled, this option sends dial tone to the calling 1 = On
party after the routing is determined. This may be
required if the central office at the destination does
not send dial tone.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Programming Manual 2 - 477

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table
Level:
IN

Description
When Program 44-02-02 is set to type 3, use Program 44-03 : Dial Analysis
Extension Table to set the dial extension analysis table. These tables are used when
the analyzed digits must be more than eight digits. If the received digits do not match
the digits set in tables 1~250, table number 252 is used to refer to the next Extension
Table Area (1~4) to be searched. If the received digits are not identified in tables
1~250, the F-Route selection table number defined in table 251 is used.

Input Data

Extension Table Area Number 1~4

Dial Analysis Table Number 1~252

Dial Analysis Table Number : 1~250

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Dial Up to 24 digits No Setting

Digits = 1~9, 0, , #, @
(Press Line Key 1 for wild character @)

02 ARS/F-Route Select 0~500 (ARS/F-Route Table Number) 0

Table Number
With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is
checked.
With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is
checked.

2 - 478 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Dial Analysis Table Number : 251

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

03 ARS/F-Route Select 0~500 (ARS/F-Route Table Number) 0

Table Number
With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is
checked.
With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is
checked.

Dial Analysis Table Number : 252

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

04 Next Table Area Number 0~4 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Programming Manual 2 - 479

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule to assign each ARS/
F-Route Selection number to an ARS/F-Route table number for each ARS/F-Route
time mode. There are eight time modes for ARS/F-Route Access.

Input Data

ARS/F-Route Selection Number 1~500

Item ARS/F-Route ARS/F-Route

Default
No. Time Mode Table Number

01 1~8 0~500 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

2 - 480 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table to set the ARS/F-Route table. There are four
kinds of order. If the higher priority trunk groups are busy, the next order group is
used. If a lower priority route is selected, the caller may be notified with a beep tone.

Input Data

ARS/F-Route Table Number 1~500

Priority Number 1~4

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Trunk Group Number 0~100, 255 0

Select the trunk group number to be used for the 0 = No Setting
outgoing ARS call. 255 = Extension Call

02 Delete Digits 0~255 0

Enter the number of digits to be deleted from the (255 = Delete All)
dialed number.

03 Additional Dial Number Table 0~1000 0

Enter the table number (defined in Program 44-06)
for additional digits to be dialed.

04 Beep Tone 0 = Off 0

Select whether or not a beep is heard if a lower 1 = On
priority trunk group is used to dial out.

05 Gain Table Number for Internal Calls 0~500 0

Select the gain table number to be used for the 0 = No Setting
internal call (defined in Program 44-07).

06 Gain Table Number for Tandem Connections 0~500 0

Select the gain table number to be used for the 0 = No Setting
tandem call (defined in Program 44-07).

07 ARS Class of Service 0~16 0

Select the ARS Class of Service to be used for the
table. An extension ARS COS is determined in
Program 26-04-01.

Programming Manual 2 - 481

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 Dial Treatment 0~15 0

Select the Dial Treatment to be used for the table. If
a Dial Treatment is selected, Programs 44-05-02
and 44-05-03 are ignored and the Dial Treatment
defined in Program 26-03-01 is used instead.

09 Maximum Digit 0~24 0

Input the maximum number of digits to send when
using the F-Route.

10 CCIS over IP Destination Point Code 0~16367 0

Input the Destination Point Code to send when using
this F-Route.

11 Network Specified Parameter Table 0~16 0

Enter a table number from Program 26-12.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

2 - 482 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-06 : Additional Dial Table
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 44-06 : Additional Dial Table to set the additional dial table to add prior to
the dialed ARS/F-Route number. The Additional Dial Table used is determined in
Program 44-05-03.

Input Data

Additional Dial Table Number 1~1000

Item
Additional Dial Default
No.

01 Up to 24 digits No Setting
Enter: 1~9, 0, , #, Pause (press LK 1 to enter a pause)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Programming Manual 2 - 483

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the gain/PAD table. If
an extension dials ARS/F-Route number:

The Extension Dial Gain Table, assigned in Program 44-05, is activated.

The Extension Dial Gain Table follows Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive
settings.
If the incoming call is transferred to another line using ARS/F-Route:

The Tandem Gain Table, assigned in Program 44-05, is activated.

The Tandem Gain Table follows the Incoming transmit and Incoming receive
settings for incoming line, and Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings for
the outgoing line.
For ARS/F-Route calls, the CODEC gains defined in Program 14-01-02 and
14-01-03 are not activated.

Input Data

Gain Table Number 1~500

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Incoming Transmit 1~63 32

(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB) (0dB)

02 Incoming Receive 1~63 32

(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB) (0dB)

03 Outgoing Transmit 1~63 32

(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB) (0dB)

04 Outgoing Receive 1~63 32

(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB) (0dB)

2 - 484 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Programming Manual 2 - 485

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define the daily pattern of the
ARS/F-Route feature. ARS/F-Route has 10 time patterns. These patterns are used in
Program 44-09 and 44-10. The daily pattern consists of 20 time settings.

Input Data

Schedule Pattern Number 01~10

Item Time
Start Time End Time Mode
No. Number

01 01~20 0000~2359 0000~2359 1~8

Default
All Schedule Patterns : 0:00 – 0:00, Mode 1
Example:

Pattern 1

0:00 8:00 18:00 22:00 0:00

Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3

Time Number 01 : 00:00 – 08:00 Mode 3

Time Number 02 : 08:00 – 18:00 Mode 1
Time Number 03 : 18:00 – 22:00 Mode 2
Time Number 04 : 22:00 – 00:00 Mode 3

Pattern 2

0:00 0:00
Mode 2

Time Number 01 : 0:00 – 0:00 Mode 2

2 - 486 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Programming Manual 2 - 487

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a weekly schedule for
using ARS/F-Route. The pattern number is defined in Program 44-08-01.

Input Data

Item Schedule
Day Number Default
No. Pattern Number

1 = Sunday 1~10 Pattern 1

2 = Monday 1~10 Pattern 1

3 = Tuesday 1~10 Pattern 1

01 4 = Wednesday 1~10 Pattern 1

5 = Thursday 1~10 Pattern 1

6 = Friday 1~10 Pattern 1

7 = Saturday 1~10 Pattern 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

2 - 488 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a yearly schedule for
ARS/F-Route. This schedule is used for setting special days such as national
holidays. The pattern number is defined in Program 44-08-01.

Input Data

Item
No. Date Schedule Pattern Number Default

01 0101~1231 0~10 (0 = No Setting) 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Programming Manual 2 - 489

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2 - 490 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup

 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options to customize certain voice
mail integration options.
Program
Input Data

45
Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Voice Mail Department Group Number 0~64 0

Assign which Extension (Department) Group 0 = No Voice Mail
number is to be assigned as the voice mail
group.

02 Voice Mail Master Name Up to 12 Characters VOICE

Enter the Voice Mail Master Name.
MAIL

04 Park and Page 0 = Off 1

Enable/disable the system ability to process the 1 = On
Voice Mail Park and Page ( ) commands. You
should normally enable this option.

05 Message Wait 0 = Off 1

Enable/disable the system ability to process the 1 = On
Voice Mail Message Wait (#) commands. You
should normally enable this option. If enabled,
be sure that the programmed Message
Notification strings don’t contain the code for
trunk access.

06 Record Alert Tone Interval Time 0~64800 (sec) 30

This time sets the interval between Voice Mail
Conversation Record alerts

07 Centralized Voice Mail Pilot Number Dial (up to eight No Setting

This number is the same as the extension digits)
number or pilot number.

Programming Manual 2 - 491

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 Centralized Voice Mail Department Group 0~64 0

Number
Assigns which Extension (Department) Group
Number is to be assigned as the Centralized
Voice Mail group.

09 Centralized Voice Mail Master Name Up to 12 characters “C.V.M.”

Assigns the Centralized Voice Mail Master
Name.

10 New NSL Protocol support 0 = Off 0

1 = On

11 Prefix for Call Screening Dial (One digit) 1

12 Prefix for Park and Page Dial (One digit)

13 Prefix for Message Wait Dial (One digit) #

14 CCIS Centralized Voice Mail Number Dial (up to eight No Setting
Assign the pilot number to Centralized Voice digits)
Mail over CCIS Link. This is assigned only in
the remote switches.

15 Analog Voice Mail Protocol Selection 0: Fixed 0

Assigns whether fixed codes are used or the 1: Program
codes used in PRG 45-04 are used for analog
voice mail protocol.

16 Voice Mail Fax Digit Add Assignment Up to four digits None

Assign up to four digits in front of the station
number sent to the SLT port when a call is
forwarded.

17 Reply Mailbox Number 0: No 1

Whether or not to include the mailbox number 1: Yes
in the analog voice mail protocol.

18 Trunk Number Mapping 2~3 2

Assign the digits of trunk number mapping.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Mail Integration (Analog)

2 - 492 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

45-02 : NSL Option Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 45-02 : NSL Option Setup to setup the NSL options for Voice Mail integration.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Send DTMF tone or 6KD 0 = Send DTMF tone to SLT-VM port 1

message 1 = Send 6KD message to Serial port

03 Send 51A Message 0 = Off 1

1 = On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 493

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 45-04 : Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment to define the digits to add.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Remote Logon (Internal) Up to four digits None

02 Direct Logon Up to four digits None

03 Transfer Message Up to four digits None

04 Forward-All Up to four digits None

05 Forward-Busy Up to four digits None

06 Forward RNA Up to four digits None

07 Remote Logon Up to four digits None

08 Conversation Recording Up to four digits None

09 Clear Down String Up to four digits None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 494 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 45-05 : Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits
to send trunk number and/or station number information if integrating to Voice Mail
when PRG 45-04-XX is left blank and 45-01-15 is set to "Program".

Input Data

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Remote Log-On Internal 0:Off 0

1:On

02 Direct Log-On 0:Off 0

1:On

03 Transfer Message/QVM 0:Off 0

1:On

04 Forward-All 0:Off 0
1:On

05 Forward-Busy 0:Off 0
1:On

06 Forward RNA 0:Off 0

1:On

07 Remote Log-On 0:Off 0

1:On

08 Conversation Recording 0:Off 0

1:On

09 Clear Down String 0:Off 0

1:On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 495

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2 - 496 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration

 Program 47 : InMail
47-01 : VM8000 InMail System Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 47-01 : VM8000 InMail System Options to set up the VM8000
InMail system-wide options.
Program
Input Data

47
Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

02 VM8000 InMail Master Name Up to 12 characters InMail ##

(MasterName) (The system
substitutes the port
The CD-CP00 must be reset for a
number for the #
change to this program to take
effect. when calling the
port).
Use this option to modify the
name for all UNIVERGE SV8100
VM8000 InMail ports. The system
briefly displays this name when a
display multiline terminal user
calls a Voice Mail port (either by
pressing Message, their voice
mail key, or by dialing the master
number). You should always end
the name with the ## characters.
The system substitutes the port
number for the last #. Using the
default name InMail ##, for
example, the telephone display
shows VM8000 InMail #1 when
calling port 1.

Programming Manual 2 - 497

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

03 Subscriber Message Length 1~4095 (sec) 120

(Subs Msg Length)
Use this option to set the
maximum length of recorded
messages for:

Subscriber Mailbox users

dialing RS to record and
send a message.

Extension users leaving a

message in a Subscriber
Mailbox.

Outside Automated
Attendant callers accessing
a mailbox via a GOTO
command and then dialing
RS to record and send a
message.

Subscriber Mailbox
Greetings.

Announcement Messages.

Call Routing Mailbox

Instruction Menus.
The length of a
Conversation Record is 10
times the Subscriber
Message Length. Since the
Conversation Record time
cannot exceed 4095
seconds, any setting in
Subscriber Message
Length larger than 409
has no effect on the length
of recorded conversations.

04 Non-Subscriber Message 1~4095 (sec) 120

Length
(Mbox Msg Length)
Use this option to set the
maximum length of recorded
messages for:

Automated Attendant callers

leaving a message or Quick
Message in a Subscriber
Mailbox.

Outside callers transferred

by an extension user to a
Subscriber Mailbox.

2 - 498 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

05 Message Backup/Go Ahead 1~60 (sec) 5

Time
(Msg Bkup/Adv Time)
Use this option to set the backup/
go ahead interval. This time sets
how far VM8000 InMail backs up
when a user dials B while
listening to a message. This
interval also sets how far
VM8000 InMail jumps ahead
when a user dials G while
listening to a message.

07 Digital Pager Callback Number Digits X M#

(Pager CBack) (12 maximum, using 0~9,
Use this option to set the Digital # and )
Pager Callback Number portion
of the Message Notification M (Number of
callout number for a digital pager. messages –
This is the portion of the callout entered by pressing
number that is appended to the
LK1)
pager service telephone number.
Normally, this option should be
X M#, where: X (Extension
number – entered
X is the number of the by pressing LK2)
extension that generated the
notification.
VM8000 InMail
is a visual delimiter (to automatically
make the pager display
easier to read). replaces the X
command with the
M is the number of new
messages in the extension number of the
mailbox. extension that
initially received the
# is the digit normally used
by the pager service for message.
positive disconnect.

Programming Manual 2 - 499

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 Delay in Dialing Digital Pager 0~99 (sec) 9

Callback Number
(Pager Dial Delay)
Use this option to set the delay
(0~99 seconds) that occurs just
before VM8000 InMail dials the
Digital Pager Callback Number
portion of the Message
Notification callout number for a
digital pager. Set this delay so the
pager service has enough time to
connect to the digital pager
before sending the callback
number. Your pager service may
be able to help you determine the
best value for this option (0~99
seconds). By default, this option
is 9 seconds. When placing a
digital pager notification, the
system:
Seizes the trunk specified.
Dials the user-entered
notification number (in Message
+ OP + N).
Waits the 47-01-08: Delay in
Dialing Digital Pager Callback
Number interval.
Dials the number entered in
47-01-07: Digital Pager
Callback Number.
The system assumes that the
notification number completes
dialing approximately 4 seconds
after trunk seizure. This means
that, by default, the Digital Pager
Callback Number is dialed into
the pager service about 13
seconds after trunk seizure.

2 - 500 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

09 Wait Between Digital Pager 1~255 (min) 15

Callout Attempts
(Notify Pager Intvl)
Use this option to set the
minimum time (1~255 minutes)
between unacknowledged or
unanswered digital pager
Message Notification callouts. (A
subscriber acknowledges a
digital pager notification by
logging onto their mailbox.) After
this interval expires, VM8000
InMail tries the callout again (for
up to the number of times set in
47-01-14: Number of Callout
Attempts).
If the system dials the callout
number and the pager service is
busy, it retries the number in one
minute.

10 Wait Between Non-Pager 1~255 (min) 20

Callout Attempts
(Notify N-Pgr Intvl)
Use this option to set the
minimum time (1~255 minutes)
between non-pager Message
Notification callouts in which the
destination answers, says Hello,
dials 1 to acknowledge and then
enters the wrong security code.

11 Wait Between Busy Non-Pager 1~255 (min) 15

Callout Attempts
(Notify Busy Intvl)
Use this option to set how long
VM8000 InMail waits (1~255
minutes) after it dials a busy
non-pager callout destination,
before retrying the callout
number.

Programming Manual 2 - 501

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

12 Wait Between RNA Non-Pager 1~255 (min) 30

Callout Attempts
(Notify RNA Intvl)
Use this option to set how long
VM8000 InMail waits (1~255
minutes), after it dials an
unanswered non-pager callout
destination, before retrying the
callout number.
There are 3 types of unanswered
non-pager callouts:

If the callout rings the

destination longer than the
47-01-13: Wait for Answer
Non-Pager Callout Attempts
option.

If the destination answers,

says Hello (or the system
detects answer supervision)
and then hangs up without
dialing 1 to log onto their
mailbox. This typically
happens if someone
unfamiliar with notification
answers the callout, or if the
callout is picked up by an
answering machine.

If the destination answers

and then hangs up without
saying Hello. This typically
happens if someone
unfamiliar with the
notification answers the
callout (like the above
example), or if the call is
picked up by an answering
machine with insufficient
outgoing message volume.

13 Wait for Answer Non-Pager 1~99 (rings) 5

Callout Attempts
(Notify RNA Rings)
If a non-pager callout rings the
destination longer than this
interval (1~99 rings), VM8000
InMail marks the call as
unanswered (Ring No Answer)
and hangs up.

2 - 502 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

14 Number of Callout Attempts 1~99 (attempts) 5

(Notify Call Attmpt)
Use this option to set how many
times (1~99 attempts) VM8000
InMail retries an incomplete
Message Notification callout.
This total includes
unacknowledged callouts,
callouts to a busy destination,
and callouts to an unanswered
destination. This option applies to
pager and non-pager callouts.

15 Send Pager Callout Until 0 = No (Disabled) 0

Acknowledged
1 = Yes (Enabled)
(Retry Until Ack)
When this option is enabled (1),
VM8000 InMail continues to retry
a digital pager Message
Notification callout until the
notification is acknowledged. If
this option is disabled (0),
VM8000 InMail retries a digital
pager Message Notification the
number of times specified in
47-01-14 Number of Callout
Attempts. This option does not
apply to Message Notification
callouts to telephone numbers.
A digital pager notification is
considered acknowledged when
the recipient logs onto the
mailbox.

16 Name Format 0 = 1st Last 0

Specify if names are displayed in 1 = Last 1st
First Last format or Last First.

17 InMail Port 0~497 0

Specify the port number of the The first port of InMail
first InMail Port. must start with one of the
following ports:
1, 5, 9, 12, 16, ......237,
241, 245, 249 and uses
the first port assigned +
next three consecutive
ports.

18 Play PAD Control 1~63 32

(-15dBm~ +15dBm)

Programming Manual 2 - 503

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

19 Record PAD Control (for 1~63 32

Networking)
(-15dBm~ +15dBm)

Conditions

When changing 47-01-01 or 47-01-02, a system reset is required for the new
setting to take effect.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 504 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-02 : VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use 47-02 : VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox Options to set up a station/extension
mailbox. Station mailboxes are automatically assigned as Subscriber Mailboxes.
Normally, VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox numbers 1~26 should correspond to
extensions 101~126.

Station Mailboxes are one of three mailbox categories: Station, Routing, or

Master. You can also set up Master Mailboxes as Subscriber Mailboxes.

Input Data

Station Mailbox Number 1~512

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Mailbox Type 0 = None 1

Use this option to enable or disable the mailbox. An 1 = Personal
extension mailbox is not accessible when it is 2 = Group
disabled (even though its stored messages and
configuration are retained in memory.) If disabled, a
user pressing Message initiates a remote logon and
is asked to enter their mailbox number. A voice
prompt then announces: “That mailbox does not
exist.”
To make programming easier, consider associating
a mailbox number with a station port. For example,
mailbox 1 could correspond to port 1, which in turn
corresponds to extension 101.

02 Mailbox Number Digits (eight Mailbox 1 = 200

Use this option to select the extension number maximum, using Mailboxes 2~64 =
associated with the mailbox you are programming. 0~9) 201-263
Normally, mailbox 1 should use Mailbox Number Mailboxes 65~512
101, mailbox 2 should use Mailbox Number 102, etc. = No entry
To make programming easier, consider associating
a mailbox number with a station port. For example,
mailbox 1 could correspond to port 1, which in turn
corresponds to extension 101.

Programming Manual 2 - 505

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

03 Number of Messages 0~99 messages 99 for mailbox 1

Use this option to set the maximum number of To conserve storage 20 for all other
messages that can be left in the Subscriber Mailbox. space, enter 0 for all mailboxes
If a caller tries to leave a message after this limit is unused mailboxes.
reached, they hear: “That mailbox is full.” VM8000
InMail then hangs up.

04 Message Playback Order 0 (FIFO = first-in/ 0

Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox first-out, or oldest
message playback order. When a subscriber listens messages first).
to their messages, VM8000 InMail can play the 1 (LIFO = last-in/
oldest messages first (first-in/first-out, or FIFO), or first-out, or newest
the newest messages first (last-in/first-out, or LIFO). messages first)

05 Auto Erase/Save of Messages 0 (Erase) 1

Use this option to determine what happens when a After the subscriber
Subscriber Mailbox user completely listens to a new listens to the entire
message and then exits the mailbox without either new message and
saving (SA) or erasing (E) the message. Depending hangs up, VM8000
on the setting of this option, VM8000 InMail either InMail erases the
automatically saves or erases the message. If the message.
mailbox user hangs up before listening to the entire 1 (Save)
new message, VM8000 InMail retains the message
After the subscriber
as a new message.
listens to the entire
new message and
hangs up, VM8000
InMail saves the
message.

06 Message Retention 1~99 Days 0

Use this option to determine how long a Subscriber 0 (Indefinite)
Mailbox retains held and saved messages. If a
message is left in a Subscriber Mailbox longer than
this interval, VM8000 InMail deletes it.

2 - 506 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

07 Recording Conversation Beep 0 = No (Disabled) 1

(Rec Conv Beep) 1 = Yes (Enabled)
Use this option to enable or disable the
Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all parties on
a call hear the voice prompt “Recording”, followed by
a single beep when the extension user initiates
Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice prompt
and beep do not occur. When you disable the
Conversation Record beep, the following voice
prompts do not occur while VM8000 InMail records
the conversation:
Recording
(followed by a beep)
That mailbox is full
(if the mailbox message storage capacity is reached)
You have reached the recording limit
(if the recorded message is too long)
The UNIVERGE SV8100 telephone system software
provides an additional Conversation Record beep.
This beep repeats according to the setting of
Program 45-01-06: Voice Mail Integration
Options: Record Alert Tone Interval Time
(0~64800 seconds). To disable the UNIVERGE
SV8100 telephone system Conversation Record
beep, enter 0 for this option.

08 Message Waiting Lamp 0 = No (Disabled) 1

(Update MW Lamp) 1 = Yes (Enabled)
Use this option to enable or disable Message
Waiting lamping at the extension associated with the
Subscriber mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes, you
should leave this option enabled. For Guest
Mailboxes, you should leave this option disabled.

09 Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail 0 = No (Disabled) 0

(Auto-ATT DND) 1 = Yes (Enabled)
Use this option to enable or disable Auto Attendant
Do Not Disturb. When a subscriber enables Auto
Attendant Do Not Disturb, an Automated Attendant
caller routes directly to the mailbox, hears the
greeting, and is asked to leave a message. A
subscriber can also enable Auto Attendant Do Not
Disturb while recording their mailbox greeting.

Programming Manual 2 - 507

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

10 Forced Unscreened Transfer 0 = No (Disabled) 0

(Forced UTRF) 1 = Yes (Enabled)
Use this option to enable or disable Automated
Attendant Forced Unscreened Transfer for the
Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, each Screened
Transfer (TRF) to the extension is converted to an
Unscreened Transfer (UTRF). If disabled, Screened
Transfers from the Automated Attendant occur
normally.

11 Auto Time Stamp 0 = No (Disabled) 0

Use this option to enable or disable Auto Time 1 = Yes (Enabled)
Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, after
the subscriber listens to a message VM8000 InMail
announces the time and date the message was left.
Auto Time Stamp also announces the message
sender (if known).
A subscriber can also enable Auto Time Stamp from
their mailbox.

12 System Administrator 0 = No (Disabled) Mailbox 1 (101)=1

Use this option to designate the Subscriber Mailbox 1 = Yes (Enabled)
Other mailboxes=0
as a System Administrator. This allows the
subscriber to use the SA options after logging onto
their mailbox.

13 Dialing Option 0 = No (Disabled) 0

Dialing Option provides additional dialing options for 1 = Yes (Enabled)
Next Call Routing Mailbox calls (see Next Call
Routing Mailbox below). If enabled, a caller who
accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a
message can dial any of the options in the Next Call
Routing Mailbox Dial Action Table. If disabled, the
caller can dial only 0 (to use the Next Call Routing
Mailbox 0 action).

14 Next Call Routing Mailbox Call Routing 1 (Call Routing

(Next CR Mbox) Mailbox Number Mailbox 01)
(1~3 digits, 01~032) By default, Call
Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing
Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox. This provides No entry (Entered Routing Mailbox
callers with additional dialing options while listening by pressing CLEAR) numbers are
to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting. 01~08.
The digits the caller can dial depends on the setting
of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Alternate Next
Call Routing Mailbox options.

15 Directory List Number 0 = None 0

1~8 = List Number
= All

16 Voice Prompt Language Refer to Table 2-9 2

47-02-16 Default
Table

2 - 508 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

17 Enable Paging 0 = No (Disabled) 0

1 = Yes (Enabled)

18 Paging Option 0 = RNA 0

1 = Immediately

19 Telephone User Interface Type 0 = Numeric 0

1 = Mnemonic

20 Enable E-mail Notification 0 = No 0

(Not supported in V1000) 1 = Yes

21 E-mail Address Up to 48 characters No Setting

(Not supported in V1000)

22 Include Message as Attachment 0 = No 1

(Not supported in V1000) 1 = Yes

Table 2-9 47-02-16 Default Table

Item Name Input Data

47-02-16 Voice Prompt Language 01 = US English

02 = UK English

03 = Australian English

04 = French Canadian

05 = Dutch

06 = Mexican Spanish

07 = Latin American Spanish

08 = Italian

09 = German

10 = Madrid Spanish

11 = Norwegian

12 = Parisian French

13 = Brazilian Portuguese

14 = Japanese

15 = Mandarin Chinese

16 = Korean

17 = Reserved

Programming Manual 2 - 509

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Table 2-9 47-02-16 Default Table

Item Name Input Data

18 = Reserved

19 = Reserved

20 = Flexible

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 510 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-03 : VM8000 InMail Group Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use 47-03 : VM8000 InMail Group Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Group Mailboxes
(01~32). A Group Mailbox is used for Department Group overflow and can be a
Subscriber or Call Routing.

Input Data

Group Mailbox Number 1~32

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

02 Mailbox Number Digits (eight No Setting

(Mailbox Number) maximum, using
0~9)
The Group Mailbox Number is the same as the
Department Group master (pilot) number. Use this No Setting
option to select the Department Group master (pilot) (entered by
number associated with the Group Mailbox you are pressing Hold)
programming.

03 Mailbox Type 0 = None 1

(Mailbox Type) 1 = Subscriber
Use this option to set the Group Mailbox type. There 2 = Routing
are three types of VM8000 InMail mailboxes: None (0),
Subscriber (1) and Routing (2).

Programming Manual 2 - 511

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 512 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use 47-06 : Group Mailbox Subscriber Options to set up a Master Mailbox assigned as
a Subscriber Mailbox in 47-03-03: Master Mailbox Type.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of Messages 0~99 messages 20

Use this option to set the maximum number of
messages that can be left in the Subscriber To conserve storage
Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave a message after space, enter 0 for all
this limit is reached, they hear, “That mailbox is unused mailboxes.
full.” VM8000 InMail then hangs up.

02 Message Playback Order 0 (FIFO = first-in/ 0

Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox first-out, or oldest
message playback order. When a subscriber listens messages first).
to their messages, VM8000 InMail can play the 1 (LIFO = last-in/
oldest messages first (first-in/first-out, or FIFO), or first-out, or newest
the newest messages first (last-in/first-out, or messages first).
LIFO).

03 Auto Erase/Save of Messages 0 (Erase) 1

Use this option to determine what happens when a After the subscriber
Subscriber Mailbox user completely listens to a listens to the entire new
new message and then exits the mailbox without message and hangs
either saving (SA) or erasing (E) the message. up, VM8000 InMail
Depending on the setting of this option, VM8000 erases the message.
InMail either automatically saves or erases the 1 (Save)
message. If the mailbox user hangs up before After the subscriber
listening to the entire new message, VM8000 listens to the entire new
InMail retains the message as a new message. message and hangs
up, VM8000 InMail
saves the message.

04 Message Retention 1~90 days 0

Use this option to determine how long a Subscriber 0 (Indefinite)
Mailbox retains held and saved messages. If a
message is left in a Subscriber Mailbox longer than
this interval, VM8000 InMail deletes it.

Programming Manual 2 - 513

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

05 Recording Conversation Beep 0 = No (Disabled) 1

(Rec Conv Beep) 1 = Yes (Enabled)
Use this option to enable or disable the
Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all parties
on a call hear the voice prompt “Recording”,
followed by a single beep when the extension user
initiates Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice
prompt and beep do not occur. When you disable
the Conversation Record beep, the following voice
prompts do not occur while VM8000 InMail records
the conversation:
Recording
(followed by a beep)
That mailbox is full
(if the mailbox message storage capacity is
reached)
You have reached the recording limit
(if the recorded message is too long)
The UNIVERGE SV8100 telephone system
software provides an additional Conversation
Record beep. This beep repeats according to the
setting of Program 45-01-06: Voice Mail Integration
Options: Record Alert Tone Interval Time (0~64800
seconds). To disable the UNIVERGE SV8100
telephone system Conversation Record beep,
enter 0 for this option.

06 Message Waiting Lamp 0 = No (Disabled) 1

(Update MW Lamp) 1 = Yes (Enabled)
Use this option to enable or disable Message
Waiting light at the extension associated with the
Subscriber mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes, you
should leave this option enabled. For Guest
Mailboxes, you should leave this option disabled.

07 Auto Attendant Direct to VoiceMail 0 = No (Disabled) 0

Use this option to enable or disable Auto Attendant 1 = Yes (Enabled)
Direct to VM. When a subscriber enables Auto
Attendant Direct to VM, an Automated Attendant
caller routes directly to the mailbox, hears the
greeting, and is asked to leave a message. A
subscriber can also enable Auto Attendant Direct to
VM while recording their mailbox greeting.

2 - 514 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 Forced Unscreened Transfer 0 = No (Disabled) 0

(Forced UTRF) 1 = Yes (Enabled)
Use this option to enable or disable Automated
Attendant Forced Unscreened Transfer for the
Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, each Screened
Transfer (TRF) to the extension is converted to an
Unscreened Transfer (UTRF). If disabled,
Screened Transfers from the Automated Attendant
occur normally.

09 Auto Time Stamp 0 = No (Disabled) 0

Use this option to enable or disable Auto Time 1 = Yes (Enabled)
Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, after
the subscriber listens to a message VM8000 InMail
announces the time and date the message was left.
Auto Time Stamp also announces the message
sender (if known).
A subscriber can also enable Auto Time Stamp
from their mailbox.

10 System Administrator 0 = No (Disabled) 0

(System Admin) 1 = Yes (Enabled)
Use this option to designate the Subscriber Mailbox
as a System Administrator. This allows the
subscriber to use the options after logging onto
their mailbox.

11 Dialing Option 0 = No (Disabled) 0

Dialing Option provides additional dialing options 1 = Yes (Enabled)
for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls (see Next Call
Routing Mailbox below). If enabled, a caller who
accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a
message can dial any option in the Next Call
Routing Mailbox Dial Action Table. If disabled, the
caller can dial only 0 (to use the Next Call Routing
Mailbox 0 action).

12 Next Call Routing Mailbox Call Routing Mailbox 1

(Next CR Mbox) Number (0~32) (Call Routing
No entry (entered by Mailbox 01)
Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing
Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox. This provides pressing CLEAR) By default, Call
callers with additional dialing options while listening Routing Mailbox
to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default numbers are
greeting. The digits the caller can dial depends on 01=16.
the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and
Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox options.

13 Directory List Number 0 = None 0

Specify the Directory List number to which the 1~8 = List Number
Group Mailbox belongs. = All

Programming Manual 2 - 515

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

14 Voice Prompt Language Refer to Table 2-10 47- 2

06-14 Default Table.

15 Enable Paging 0 = No 0
1 = Yes

16 Paging Option 0 = RNA 0

1 - Immediate

17 Telephone User Interface 0 = Numeric interface 0

1 = Mnemonic interface
2 = Octel (future)

18 --- Not Used ---

19 --- Not Used ---

20 --- Not Used ---

2 - 516 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Table 2-10 47-06-14 Default Table

Item Name Input Data

47-06-14 Voice Prompt Language 01 = US English

02 = UK English

03 = Australian English

04 = French Canadian

05 = Dutch

06 = Mexican Spanish

07 = Latin American Spanish

08 = Italian

09 = German

10 = Madrid Spanish

11 = Norwegian

12 = Parisian French

13 = Brazilian Portuguese

14 = Japanese

15 = Mandarin Chinese

16 = Korean

17 = Reserved

18 = Reserved

19 = Reserved

20 = Flexible

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 517

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 47 : InMail
47-07 : VM8000 InMail Routing Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use 47-07 : VM8000 InMail Routing Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Routing
Mailboxes. Routing Mailboxes can be either Announcement or Call Routing
Mailboxes.

Input Data

Routing Mailbox Number 1~32

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

02 Routing Mailbox Type 0 = None Mailboxes 01~08 = 1

(Mailbox Type) 1 = Call Routing (Call Routing)

Use this option to set the Routing 2 = Announcement Mailboxes 09~32 = 2

Mailbox type. (Announcement)
3 = Directory
4 = Distribution

03 Prompt Language Refer to Table 2-11 47-07-03 2

Default Table

04 Telephone User Interface 0 = Numeric interface 0

1 = Mnemonic interface
2 = Octel (future)

2 - 518 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Table 2-11 47-07-03 Default Table

Item Name Input Data

47-07-03 Voice Prompt Language 01 = US English

02 = UK English

03 = Australian English

04 = French Canadian

05 = Dutch

06 = Mexican Spanish

07 = Latin American Spanish

08 = Italian

09 = German

10 = Madrid Spanish

11 = Norwegian

12 = Parisian French

13 = Brazilian Portuguese

14 = Japanese

15 = Mandarin Chinese

16 = Korean

17 = Reserved

18 = Reserved

19 = Reserved

20 = Flexible

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 519

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 47 : InMail
47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use 47-08 : Call Routing Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned as
Call Routing Mailboxes in 47-07-02: Routing Mailbox Type.

Input Data

Routing Mailbox Number 1~32

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Dial Action Table 1~16 1 (Dial Action Table

Use this option to assign the Dial Action Table to the (Dial Action 1)
Call Routing Mailbox. The Dial Action Table defines the Table 1~16)
dialing options for the call Routing Mailbox.

02 Screened Transfer Timeout 0~255 (sec) 15

(Scrn Trf Timeout) Entering 0
Use this option to set how long a Screened Transfer causes
(TRF) from the Automated Attendant rings an immediate
unanswered extension before recalling. recall.

This option has a similar function as Customize:

Mailbox Options: Call Routing: [Call Handling] Options:
Delay Rings Before Redirect Transfer in VM8000
InMail.

03 Time Limit for Dialing Commands 0~99 (sec) 5

(Dialing Timeout) Entering 0
causes the
This option determines how long VM8000 InMail waits
Automated
for an Automated Attendant caller to dial before routing
Attendant to
the call to the Timeout destination.
immediately
Be sure your Dial Action Tables have a Timeout action route callers to
programmed. the Timeout
If the caller waits too long to dial: destination
When the associated Dial Action Table has a Timeout programmed in
action programmed, the caller routes to that the active Dial
destination. Action Table.

When the associated Dial Action Table does not have

a Timeout action programmed, the Instruction Menu
repeats three times and then VM8000 InMail hangs up.

2 - 520 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

04 Fax Detection 0 = No 0
Use this option to enable or disable Fax Detection for (Disabled)
the Call Routing Mailbox. In enabled, the VM8000 1 = Yes
InMail Automated Attendant (when using this Call (Enabled)
Routing Mailbox) detects incoming fax CNG tone. The
fax call then routes to the company fax machine
according to the setting of 47-01-06 : Fax Extension. If
disabled, the Automated Attendant does not detect
incoming fax calls.

05 Fax Extension Up to eight No entry

digits

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 521

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 47 : InMail
47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use 47-09 : Announcement Mailbox Options to set the options for mailboxes assigned
as Announcement Mailboxes in 47-07-02 : Routing Mailbox Type.

Input Data

Routing Mailbox Number 1~32

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Next Call Routing Mailbox Call Routing Mailbox 0

(Next CR Mbox) Number (1~32)

If you set up an Announcement Mailbox to answer 0 = Undefined

Automated Attendant calls, use this option to
provide additional routing options to the Automated
Attendant callers. This option interacts with Repeat
Count and Hang Up After below.
For more detail on this interaction, refer to Direct
Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed
Announcement Mailbox Routing in the VM8000
InMail System Guide.

02 Repeat Count 0 (No Repeats) 0

Enter the number of times you want the 1~10
Announcement Mailbox message to repeat to (Announcement
callers. After an Announcement Mailbox caller repeats 1~10 times)
initially listens to the message, it repeats the
number of times specified in this option. This option
interacts with Next Call Routing Mailbox and Hang
Up After when providing routing options.
For more detail on this interaction, refer to Direct
Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed
Announcement Mailbox Routing in the VM8000
InMail System Guide.

2 - 522 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

03 Hang Up After 0 = None 0

(HangUp) 1 = Goodbye
Use this option along with Next Call Routing 2 = Silent
Mailbox and Repeat Count above to provide
additional routing options to Automated Attendant
callers.
For more detail on this interaction, refer to Direct
Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed
Announcement Mailbox Routing in the VM8000
InMail System Guide.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 523

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 47 : InMail
47-10 : VM8000 InMail Trunk Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use 47-10 : VM8000 InMail Trunk Options to assign VM8000 InMail options for each
trunk. Currently, only 47-10-01: Answer Table Assignment is available.

Input Data

Trunk Port Number 1~200

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Answer Table Assignment Answer Table (1~8) 1

(Answer Table)
Use this option to assign an VM8000 InMail
Answer Table to each Direct Inward Line (DIL)
the Automated Attendant should answer. The
Automated Attendant follows the routing
specified by the selected Answer Table.

02 Record PAD Control 1~63 (-15dBm~ +15dBm) 32

03 Voice Prompt Language Refer to Table 2-12 47-10-03 2

Default Table

04 Telephone User Interface 0 = Numeric interface 0

1 = Mnemonic interface
2 = Octel (future)

2 - 524 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Table 2-12 47-10-03 Default Table

Item Name Input Data

47-10-03 Voice Prompt Language 01 = US English

02 = UK English

03 = Australian English

04 = French Canadian

05 = Dutch

06 = Mexican Spanish

07 = Latin American Spanish

08 = Italian

09 = German

10 = Madrid Spanish

11 = Norwegian

12 = Parisian French

13 = Brazilian Portuguese

14 = Japanese

15 = Mandarin Chinese

16 = Korean

17 = Reserved

18 = Reserved

19 = Reserved

20 = Flexible

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 525

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 47 : InMail
47-11 : VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use 47-11 : VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options to set options for the Answer
Tables. VM8000 InMail provides eight Answer Tables (1~8). To set up the schedules
for each Answer Table, go to 47-12 : VM8000 InMail Answer Table Schedule.

Input Data

Answer Table Number 1~8

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Answer Schedule Override 0 = No (Disabled) 0

(Schedule Override) 1 = Yes (Enabled)
Use this option to enable or disable Answer
Schedule Override for the selected Answer Table. If
enabled (and you make an entry for Override
Mailbox below), the active Answer Table routes calls
to the Override Mailbox.

2 - 526 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

02 Override Mailbox Category 0 (Undefined) 0

(Override MB Ctg) 1 (Subscriber
Use this option to specify the category of the Mailbox – STA)
mailbox where Automated Attendant calls should 2 (Group Mailbox)
route when you enable Answer Schedule Override. 3 (Routing Mailbox)
VM8000 InMail mailbox categories are Subscriber
Mailbox, Master Mailbox, and Routing Mailbox.
VM8000 InMail handles the routing according to the
type of mailbox (Subscriber, Call Routing, or
Announcement) within the specified category:

If the Override Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox,

the outside caller hears the mailbox greeting (if
recorded) and can leave a message.

If the Override Mailbox is an Announcement

Mailbox, the outside caller shears the recorded
announcement. Depending on how the
Announcement Mailbox is programmed,
VM8000 InMail then hangs up, reroutes the
call, or provides additional dialing options.

If the Override Mailbox is a Call Routing

Mailbox, the outside caller hears the instruction
menu and can dial any option allowed by the
associated Dial Action Table.
If any of the Input Data values are entered, the
terminal displays the Override Mailbox
Number selection (below).

Override Mailbox Number Digits No Entry

(Override MB Num) (three maximum,
using 0~9)
Use this option to specify the mailbox where
Automated Attendant calls should route when you
enable Answer Schedule Override. The mailbox
number you select in this option should match the
mailbox category specified in 47-11-02: Override
Mailbox Category above.

Programming Manual 2 - 527

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

03 Default Mailbox Category 0 (Undefined) Answer Table 1 = 3

(Default MB Ctg) 1 (Subscriber Answer Table 2~8
Use this option to specify the category of mailbox Mailbox - STA) =0
used as the Default Mailbox. VM8000 InMail 2 (Group Mailbox)
mailbox categories are Subscriber Mailbox, Master 3 (Routing Mailbox)
Mailbox, and Routing Mailbox. VM8000 InMail uses
the Default Mailbox when an Answer Schedule is
not in effect.
VM8000 InMail handles the routing according to the
type of mailbox (Subscriber, Call Routing, or
Announcement) within the specified category:

If the Default Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox,

the outside caller hears the mailbox greeting (if
recorded) and can leave a message.

If the Default Mailbox is an Announcement

Mailbox, the outside caller hears the recorded
announcement. Depending on how the
Announcement Mailbox is programmed,
VM8000 InMail then hangs up, reroutes the
call, or provides additional dialing options.

If the Default Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox,

the outside caller hears the instruction menu
and can dial any option allowed by the
associated Dial Action Table.
If any of the Input Data values are entered, the
terminal displays the Override Mailbox
Number selection (below).

Default Mailbox Number Digits (Three Answer Table 1 = 1

(Default MB Num) maximum, using Answer Table
0~9) 2~8 = No Entry
Use this option to set the Answer Table Default
Mailbox number. VM8000 InMail uses the Default
Mailbox when an Answer Schedule is not in effect.
By default, this occurs at all times other than
Monday through Friday from 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM.

04 Next Answer Table Answer Table (1~8) 0

When 10 Answer Schedules in an Answer Table are 0 = Undefined
not sufficient, use this option to link two Answer
Tables together. VM8000 InMail treats the two linked
tables as a single 20 entry Answer Table.

2 - 528 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 529

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 47 : InMail
47-12 : VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules
Level:
IN

Description
Use 47-12 : VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules to set up the VM8000 InMail Automated
Attendant Answer Schedules. There are eight Answer Tables, with up to 10 Answer
Schedules in each Answer Table.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Schedule Type 0 = Undefined Answer Table 1/

(Entryxx Schedule Type) 1 = Day of the Week Schedule 1 = 2
Use this option to assign a Schedule Type to the 2 = Range of Days All other
selected Answer Schedule. The Schedule Type schedules = 0
3 = Date
determines how the Answer Schedule answers
calls.
The schedule can be one of the following types:
1. Day of the Week
A Type 1 Answer Schedule runs on a
specific day of the week. For this type of
schedule, you select:
The day of the week the schedule
should run:
The schedule start time.
The schedule end time.
The Call Routing or Announcement
Mailbox used to answer calls.
2. Range of Days
A Type 2 Answer Schedule runs for a range
of days. For this type of schedule, you
select:
The day of the week the schedule
should start.
The day of the week the schedule
should stop.
The time on the start day the schedule
should start.
The time on the stop day the schedule
should stop.
The Call Routing or Announcement
Mailbox used to answer the calls.
(continued on next page)

2 - 530 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 (continued from previous page) 0 = Undefined Answer Table 1/

3. Date 1 = Day of the Week Schedule 1 = 2
A type 3 Answer Schedule runs only on a 2 = Range of Days All Other
specific day of the year. For this type of Schedules = 0
schedule, you select: 3 = Date
The specific date the schedule should
run.
On the selected date, the time the
schedule should start.
On the selected date, the time the
schedule should stop.
The Call Routing or Announcement
Mailbox used to answer the calls.

02 Answering Mailbox Category 0 = Undefined 3

(Entryxx MB Ctg) 1 = Subscriber Mailbox -
Use this option to specify the category of STA
mailbox to which Automated Attendant calls 2 = Group Mailbox
should route when the schedule is in effect. 3 = Routing Mailbox
VM8000 InMail mailbox categories are
Subscriber Mailbox, Master Mailbox, or Routing
Mailbox.
VM8000 InMail handles the routing according to
the exact type of Subscriber, Master, or Routing
Mailbox specified.
If the Answering Mailbox is a Subscriber
Mailbox, the outside caller hears the mailbox
greeting (if recorded) and can leave a message.
If the Answering Mailbox is an Announcement
Mailbox, the outside caller hears the recorded
announcement. Depending on how the
Announcement Mailbox is programmed,
VM8000 InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call,
or provides additional dialing options.
If the Answering Mailbox is a Call Routing
Mailbox, the outside caller hears the instruction
menu and can dial any option allowed by the
associated Dial Action Table.
Answering Mailbox Number Digits (three maximum, Answer Table 1/
(Entryxx MB Num) using 0~9) Schedule 1 = 1
Use this option to set the number of the All Other
Answering Mailbox the Automated Attendant Answer
uses when the selected schedule is in effect. Schedules = No
This mailbox is defined in 47-12-02: Answering Entry
Mailbox Category.

Programming Manual 2 - 531

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data (Continued)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

03 Day of the Week 1 = Sunday 1

(Entryxx Day) 2 = Monday
For Day of the Week (Type 1) Answer 3 = Tuesday
Schedules, use this option to select the day of 4 = Wednesday
the week the Answer Schedule should be
5 = Thursday
active.
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday

04 Start Day 1 = Sunday 1

(Entryxx Start Day) 2 = Monday Answer Table 1/
For Range of Days (Type 2) Answer Schedules, 3 = Tuesday Schedule 1 = 2
use this option to select the day of the week the 4 = Wednesday All Other
Answer Schedule should start. Schedules = 1
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday

05 End Day 1 = Sunday Answer Table 1/

(Entryxx End Day) 2 = Monday Schedule 1 = 6
For Range of Days (Type 2) Answer Schedules, 3 = Tuesday All Other
use this option to select the day of the week the Answer
4 = Wednesday
Answer Schedule should end. Schedules = 1
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday

06 Date MMDD 0000

(Entryxx Date) For example:
- 0101 = January 1
For Date (Type 3) Answer Schedules, use this
- 1231 = December 31
option to select the date the Answer Schedule
- 0000 = No date set
should be active.

07 Schedule Start Time HHMM (24-hour clock) Answer Table 1/

(Entryxx Start Time) For example: Schedule 1 =
- 0130 = 1:30AM 0830 (8:30AM)
Use this option to specify the time the Answer
- 1700 = 5:00PM All other
Schedule should start. It applies to Day of the
Week (Type 1), Range of Days (Type 2), and schedules are
Date (Type 3) schedules. (To make a schedule 0000.
run continuously, make the same entry for
47-12-07: Schedule Start Time and 47-12-08:
Schedule End Time.)

08 Schedule End Time HHMM (24-hour clock) Answer Table 1/

(Entryxx End Time) For example: Schedule 1 =
- 0130 = 1:30AM 1700
Use this option to specify the time the Answer
- 1700 = 5:00PM All Other
Schedule should end. It applies to Day of the
Week (Type 1), Range of Days (Type 2), and - 0000 = Undefined Schedules =
Date (Type 3) schedules. (To make a schedule 0000
run continuously, make the same entry for
47-12-07: Schedule Start Time and 47-12-08:
Schedule End Time.)

2 - 532 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Example
Type 1 (Day of the Week) Answer Schedule Options
Type 1 (Day of Week) Example

In this example, Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows:

Schedule 1 uses Routing Mailbox 2 and runs Sunday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
Schedule 2 uses Subscriber Mailbox 3 and runs Wednesday from 10:30AM to
5:00PM.
Schedule 3 uses Routing Mailbox 4 and runs Tuesday from 9:00AM to 10:00AM.
At all other times, routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in 47-11-03:
Default Mailbox Category and 47-11-03: Default Mailbox Number.
When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types, build the Answer Schedules in
the following order:

Range of Days
Day of Week
Date

Programming Manual 2 - 533

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Type 1 (Day of Week) Example

Answer Table 1

Answer Schedule 1
Answer Schedule 1 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Sunday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.

47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 1

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 2

47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1

47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM)

47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)

Answer Schedule 2
Answer Schedule 2 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Wednesday from10:30AM to 5:00PM.

47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 1

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 1

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 3

47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 4

47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 1030 (10:30AM)

47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)

Answer Schedule 3
Answer Schedule 3 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Tuesday from9:00AM to 10:00AM.

47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 1

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3

47-12-02: Entry01 MB num = 4

47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 3

47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0900 (9:00AM)

47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1000 (10:00PM)

2 - 534 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Type 2 (Range of Days) Answer Schedule Options

Type 2 (Range of Days) Example

In this example, Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows:

Schedule 1 uses Routing Mailbox 1 and runs Sunday through Wednesday from
8:30AM to 5:00PM.
Schedule 2 uses Routing Mailbox 2 and runs Thursday and Friday from 11:00AM to
1:00PM.
At all other times, routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in 47-11-03:
Default Mailbox Category and 47-11-03: Default Mailbox Number.
When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types, build the Answer Schedules in
the following order:

Range of Days
Day of Week
Date

Programming Manual 2 - 535

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Type 2 (Range of Days) Example

Answer Table 1

Answer Schedule 1
Answer Schedule 1 is a Range of Days schedule that starts schedule that runs Sunday through Wednesday from
8:30AM to 5:00PM.

47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 2

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 1

47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Sunday)

47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 4 (Wednesday)

47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM)

47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)

Answer Schedule 2
Answer Schedule 2 is a Range of Days schedule that runs Thursday and Friday from 11:00AM to 1:00PM.

47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 2

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 2

47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 4 (Wednesday)

47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 5 (Thursday)

47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 1100 (11:00AM)

47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1300 (1:00PM)

2 - 536 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Type 3 (Date) Answer Schedule Options

Type 3 (Date) Example

In this example, Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows:

Schedule 1 uses Routing Mailbox 1 and runs every day from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
Schedule 2 uses Routing Mailbox 9 and runs only on Christmas day from 8:30AM to
5:00PM.
At all other times, routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in 47-11-03:
Default Mailbox Category and 47-11-03: Default Mailbox Number.
When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types, build the Answer Schedules in
the following order:
Range of Days
Day of Week
Date

Type 3 (Date) Example

Answer Table 1

Answer Schedule 1
Answer Schedule 1 is a Range of Days schedule that starts schedule that runs every day from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.

47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 2

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 1

47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Sunday)

47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Sunday)

47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM)

47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)

Answer Schedule 2
Answer Schedule 2 is a Date schedule that runs only on Christmas day from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.

47-12-01: Entry01 Schedule Type = 3

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Ctg = 3

47-12-02: Entry01 MB Num = 9

47-12-03: Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-04: Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-05: Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)

47-12-06: Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 1225 (December 25, Christmas day)

47-12-07: Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM)

47-12-08: Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)

Programming Manual 2 - 537

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 538 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-13 : VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables
Level:
IN

Description
Use 47-13 : VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables to set up the VM8000 InMail Dial
Action Tables. The Dial Action Table defines the options than an Automated Attendant
caller can dial. A Dial Action Table is associated with a Call Routing Mailbox, which is
in turn associated with an Answer Table. When an Answer Table is active, its
associated Call Routing Mailbox selects the Dial Action Table which provides dialing
options to callers. The illustration below shows how this works in a default VM8000
InMail system. There are 16 Dial Action Tables.

DIL to Voice Mail Master (200)

InMail
22-01-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup
22-07-01 DIL Setup
Default
Automated Attendant Answering

Trunks Route to Answer Table 1

47-10-01 Answer Table Assignment

Answer Table 1
47-11 Answer Table Options

All calls route to Call Routing Mailbox 1

Schedule 1 or Default Mailbox
Schedule 1 active M-F 8:30AM-5:00PM
47-12 Answer Schedules Default Mailbox active all other times
47-11-05 Default Mailbox

From a System Administrator mailbox,

Call Routing Mailbox 1
record an Instruction Menu (SA + I) for
47-08 Call Routing Mailbox Options the active Call Routing Mailbox.

Dial Action Table 1 Dial Action Table 1 Dialing Options:

47-13 Dial Action Tables Dial an extension number, or
O for the operator

Programming Manual 2 - 539

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Dial Action Table Actions

TRF Action - Screened Transfer (1) (TRF)
Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place a Screened
Transfer to an extension. After an Automated Attendant caller dials an
extension, VM8000 InMail calls (screens) the destination to see if the transfer
can go through.
If the destination is available, the Automated Attendant rings it. If the destination
answers, the call goes through.
If the destination does not answer during a preset interval, is busy, or is in Do
Not Disturb, the Automated Attendant does not extend the call. It then provides
the caller with additional options.
Number Option
Normally, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. Note that the key
you choose for this action is the first digit of the called extension number.
For example, to allow callers to place Screened Transfers to extensions
301~399, for key 3 enter TRF for the Action and XXX for the
corresponding Number.
To have Screened Transfer call a specific extension, the corresponding Number
option should be that extension number. The caller then dials that single digit to
reach the extension.
For example, to have callers dial 8 to reach extension 303, for key 8 enter
TRF for the Action and 303 for the corresponding Number.
UTRF Action – Unscreened Transfer (2) (UTRF)
Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place an Unscreened
Transfer to an extension. This is similar to telephone system unscreened
transfers in which the transferring party immediately extends the call. After an
Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, VM8000 InMail transfers the call
to the destination and hangs up. Any recalls or additional routing are handled by
the telephone system – just as with any other unscreened transfer.
Number Option
Normally, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. Note that the key
you choose for this action is the first digit of the called extension number.
For example, to allow callers to place Unscreened Transfers to
extensions 301~399, for key 3 enter UTRF for the Action and XXX for the
corresponding Number.

2 - 540 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

To have Unscreened Transfer call a specific extension, the corresponding

Number option should be that extension number. The caller then dials that
single digit to reach the extension.
For example, to have callers dial 8 to reach extension 303, for key 8 enter
UTRF for the Action and 303 for the corresponding Number.
REC1 Action – Quick Message With Greeting (3) (REC1)
Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick
Message at an extension. With this action, the caller hears the extension
greeting prior to leaving the message.
Number Options
To have the caller leave a quick Message at a specific extension, the
corresponding Number option should be the extension number.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at any caller-dialed extension, the
corresponding Number option should be IXXX.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a caller-dialed extension in a
specific range, the corresponding Number option should be XXX.
For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick Message extensions
301~399, for key 3 enter REC1 for the Action and XXX for the
corresponding Number.
REC2 Action – Quick Message Without Greeting (4) (REC2)
Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick
Message at an extension. With this action, the caller does not hear the
extension greeting prior to leaving the message. Instead, the caller hears the
voice prompt Recording followed by a beep.
Number Option
To have the caller leave a quick Message at a specific extension, the
corresponding Number option should be the extension number.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at any caller-dialed extension, the
corresponding Number option should be IXXX.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a caller-dialed extension in a
specific range, the corresponding Number option should be XXX.
For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick Message extensions
301~399, for key 3 enter REC2 for the Action and XXX for the
corresponding Number.

Programming Manual 2 - 541

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

LOGON Action – Log Onto Voice Mail (5) (LOGON)

Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to log onto Voice
Mail. Depending on programming (see Number Option below), the caller is
logged directly into a Subscriber Mailbox or is prompted to enter a Subscriber
Mailbox of their own choosing. You cannot use the LOGON option with Call
Routing and Announcement Mailboxes.
Number Option
To log directly into a specific Subscriber Mailbox, enter the mailbox number in
the corresponding Number option.
For example, to have key 4 log directly into Subscriber Mailbox 305, for
key 4 enter LOGON for the Action and 305 for the corresponding Number.
To have VM8000 InMail request Automated Attendant callers to select a
Subscriber Mailbox to log into, enter N in the corresponding Number option. The
key you choose must represent the first digit in the Subscriber Mailbox numbers.
For example, to have the Automated Attendant request callers enter the
number of the Subscriber Mailbox where they want to log into, for key 3
enter LOGON for the Action and N for the corresponding Number. When
callers dial 3, they hear, Please enter your mailbox number.
To have VM8000 InMail require Automated Attendant callers to enter a
Subscriber Mailbox to log into (without playing an announcement), enter XXX in
the corresponding Number option. The key you choose must represent the first
digit in the Subscriber Mailbox numbers.
For example, to allow callers to log onto mailboxes 301~399, for key 3
enter LOGON for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.
To log into any valid Subscriber Mailbox, enter IXXX in the corresponding
Number option.
For example, to allow callers to dial 1 plus any Subscriber Mailbox
number to log on, for key 1 enter LOGON for the Action and IXXX for the
corresponding Number.
Hang Up Action (6) (HNGUP)
When an Automated Attendant caller presses a key assigned to this action,
VM8000 InMail says Goodbye and immediately hangs up.
Number Option
No entry is required in the corresponding Number Option.

2 - 542 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

GOTO Action – Go to Mailbox (7) (GOTO)

Use this option to provide Automated Attendant callers with the ability to route to
Call Routing and Announcement Mailboxes. For example, a caller can dial a
digit for Sales, and then go to the Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox that
provides the dialing options and instructions for Sales.
Number Option
To have Automated Attendant callers dial a single digit to go to a Call Routing or
Announcement Mailbox, enter the mailbox number in the corresponding
Number option.
For example, to have key 1 go to Call Routing Mailbox 01, for key 1 enter
GOTO for the Action and 01 for the corresponding Number.
To have VM8000 InMail require Automated Attendant callers to enter a Call
Routing or Announcement Mailbox to go to, enter XXX in the corresponding
Number option. The key you choose must represent the first digit in the mailbox
number.
For example, to allow callers to go to mailboxes 000~015, for key 0 enter
GOTO for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.
To log into any valid Call Routing or Subscriber Mailbox, enter IXXX in the
corresponding Number option.
For example, to allow callers to dial 1 plus any Call Routing or
Announcement Mailbox number to go to, for key 1 enter GOTO for the
Action and IXXX for the corresponding Number.
UND Action – Undefined Routing (0) (UND)
Use this key action if you want a key to have no routing (no operation). When an
Automated Attendant caller presses an undefined key, they hear, That is an
invalid entry. The caller can then dial another option.

Programming Manual 2 - 543

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Dial Action Table Number 01~16

Key
Dial Action Table Action Additional Data
No.

1 TRF Action - Screened Digits Entry : 0-9, #, and

Transfer (1) (8 digits max.)
2 (TRF) Use Dial Action Table digits to route an Automated
Attendant call to a specific location (such as an
3 UTRF Action - extension). For example, to set up a TRF Action to route
Unscreened Transfer (2) to extension 305, for 3 enter TRF for the Action and 305
(UTRF) for the corresponding Number.
4
REC1 Action - Quick Caller Dialed Digits Entry : X
5 (Entered by pressing LK2)
Message With Greeting
(3) Use the X option to route an Automated Attendant call
6 based on digits the caller dials. Each X entry represents
(REC1)
one caller-dialed digit. For example, to set up a TRF
7 REC2 Action - Quick Action to route to any caller dialed extension in the
301‘399 range, for 3 enter TRF for the Action and XXX
Message Without for the corresponding Number.
8 Greeting (4)
(REC2) Ignore Digits Entry : I
9 (Entered by pressing LK3)
LOGON Action - Log Use the I option to represent any digit dialed by the
0 Onto Voice Mail (5) Automated Attendant caller that VM8000 InMail ignores
(LOGON) for routing. An example of this is REC action assigned
to the * key in Dial Action Table 1 by default. The Action
Hang Up Action (6) is REC2 and the Number is IXXX. This means that a
# (HNGUP) caller can dial * + any mailbox number to leave a Quick
Message in that mailbox. VM8000 InMail ignores the
TIMEOUT GOTO Action - Go to first digit dialed by the caller (*), and routes according to
Mailbox (7) the next 3 digits dialed.
(GOTO)
No Routing Entry : N
UND Action - Undefined (Entered by pressing LK1)
Routing (0) Use the N option when you want no Automated
(UND) Attendant routing to automatically occur. This can be
used with the LOGON action when you want to prompt
the caller to enter a mailbox number. To do this for the #
key (for example), for the # key enter LOGON for the
Action and N for the corresponding Number. When the
caller dials #, they hear, Please enter the mailbox
number. Or, to exit, press the pound key.”
Pause Entry : P
(Entered by pressing LK4)
Use the P option when you want the Automated
Attendant to pause while dialing.

2 - 544 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Defaults

Dial Action Table Default Settings

Key Dial Action Table 1 Dial Action Tables 2~16

1 UND UND
(Undefined) (Undefined)

UTRF to XXX UND

2 (Unscreened Transfer to user-dialed (Undefined)
extension)

UTRF to XXXX UND

3 (Unscreened Transfer to user-dialed (Undefined)
extension)

UND UND
4 (Undefined) (Undefined)

UND UND
5
(Undefined) (Undefined)

UND UND
6
(Undefined) (Undefined)

UND UND
7 (Undefined) (Undefined)

UND UND
8
(Undefined) (Undefined)

HNGUP UND
9
(Hangup) (Undefined)

UTRF to 200 UND

0 (Unscreened Transfer to 200) (Undefined)

REC1 to IXXX UND

(Quick Message with greeting to (Undefined)
user-dialed extension)

LOGON to IXXX UND

# (Logon to user-dialed mailbox) (Undefined)

UTRF to 200 UND

TIMEOUT
(Unscreened Transfer to 200) (Undefined)

TIMEOUT provides the routing for rotary dial callers.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 545

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 47 : InMail
47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use 47-15 : Routing Directory Mailbox Options to define the Routing Directory Mailbox
Options. This data is referred if Program 47-07-02 (Routing Master Mailbox Type)
was set to Type 4 (Directory).

Input Data

Master Mailbox Number 1~32

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Minimum Number of Letters 1~3 1

Required

02 Directory List Number to Use 1~8 1

03 Name Match 0 = First 0

1 = Last

04 Transfer Option 0 = TRF 0

1 = UTRF

05 Screened Transfer Timeout 0~255 15

06 Time Limit for Dialing 0~99 5

Commands

07 Fax Detection 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

08 Next Call Routing Mailbox 0~32 0

09 Fax Extension Up to eight digits No entry

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 546 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-16 : InMail Language License
Level:
IN

Description
Use 47-16 : InMail Language License to define the language order InMail uses.
Depending on the language license number, InMail uses the languages defined
starting from Language 1. For example, if the system has a two language license
InMail uses the language defined as Language 1 and 2 in the provided default table.

Input Data

Language 1~20

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 = US English
02 = UK English
03 = Australian English
04 = French Canadian
05 = Dutch
06 = Mexican Spanish
07 = Latin American Spanish
08 = Italian
09 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish Refer to Table 2-
01 Language License 13 47-16-01
11 = Norwegian Default Table
12 = Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Reserved
18 = Reserved
19 = Reserved
20 = Flexible

Programming Manual 2 - 547

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Table 2-13 47-16-01 Default Table

Language No. 47-16-01 Default

Language 1 02(UK English)

Language 2 03(Australian English)

Language 3 08(Italian)

Language 4 09(German)

Language 5 10(Madrid Spanish)

Language 6 11(Norwegian)

Language 7 00 (No entry)

Language 8 00 (No entry)

Language 9 00 (No entry)

Language 10 00 (No entry)

Language 11 00 (No entry)

Language 12 00 (No entry)

Language 13 00 (No entry)

Language 14 00 (No entry)

Language 15 00 (No entry)

Language 16 00 (No entry)

Language 17 00 (No entry)

Language 18 00 (No entry)

Language 19 00 (No entry)

Language 20 00 (No entry)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 548 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use 47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options to assign data when Program
47-07-02 is set to 4 (Distribution).

Input Data

Routing Mailbox Number 1~32

Input Data

Entry Number 1~20

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

Distribution Mailbox Category 0 = Undefined 0

Use Undefined (0) to skip Mailbox 1 = Station Mailbox
Number setting. 2 = Group Mailbox
Use Station Mailbox (1) for setting
Mailbox Number to 1~512
01 (PRG 47-02).
Use Group Number (2) for setting
Group Mailbox (1~32)
(PRG 47-03).

Distribution Mailbox Number Up to three digits

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 549

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 47 : InMail
47-18 : VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use 47-18 VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup to set the SNMP e-mail notification.

(Not supported in V1000)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 SMTP Enabled 0 = No 0
1 = Yes

02 Server Name Up to 48 characters No Setting

03 SMTP Port 0~65535 25

04 Encryption 0 = No 0
1 = Yes

05 Authentication 0 = No 0
1 = Yes

06 User Name Up to 48 characters No Setting

07 Password Up to 48 characters No Setting

08 E-mail Address Up to 48 characters No Setting

09 Reply to Address Up to 48 characters No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 550 Program 47 : InMail

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 47 : InMail
47-19 : VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use 47-19 : VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup to set the InMail e-mail notification.

(Not supported in V1000)

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Server Name Up to 48 characters No Setting

02 POP3 Port 0~65535 110

03 Encryption 0 = No 0
1 = Yes

04 User Name Up to 48 characters No Setting

05 Password Up to 48 characters No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 551

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2 - 552 Program 47 : InMail

 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice
Signaling Service
50-01 : CCIS System Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 50-01 : CCIS System Setting to set the availability of CCIS in Program
the UNIVERGE SV8100. No other CCIS settings function if this program is
disabled.

Input Data
50
Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 CCIS Availability 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 553

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

50-02 : Connecting System Settings
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 50-02 : Connecting System Settings to define the settings for
each CCIS Route ID.

Input Data
CCIS Route ID Route ID 1~8: CCIS via DTI
Route ID 9: CCIS via IAD/CD-PVAA (IP-CCIS)

Item
Item Description Input Data Default
No.

01 Port Number of Common Specify the Trunk port to send D-channel information. 0~200 0
Signaling Channel (T1) This program is available for using DTI package.

02 Common Signaling Assign the baud rate of Common Signaling Channel 0 = 64Kbps 1
Channel Data Speed on DTI package.
Assignment (T1) 1 = 56Kbps
2 = 48Kbps(1)
3 = 48Kbps(2)

03 Originating Point Code Assign the Point Code of own side. 0~16367 0

04 Destination Point Code Assign the Point Code of destination side on the DTI 0~16367 0
(T1) link.

05 Calling Name Indication Calling name indication does not send to destination 0 = Disable 1
(T1) party if switch is turned to Disable. 1 = Enable

06 Channel Number on the 0: No setting 0-4 0

CCH package Assignment
1: Channel number on the CCH Package

2 - 554 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions

If 56K K-CCIS is used, 24 Multi-Frame (ESF) must be assigned in Program

10-03-02.

DPC must be what the OPC is on the opposite side of the link.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 555

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

50-03 : CCIS Destination System Settings
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 50-03 : CCIS Destination System Settings to assign information of
remote systems in a CCIS Network.

Input Data
CCIS System ID 1~255

Item
Item Description Input Data Default
No.

01 Destination Point Define the Point Code at the 0~16367 0

Code Destination Party.

02 CCIS Route ID Select the CCIS Route ID defined in 0~8 0

(T1 only) Program 14-13 when the user tries to (CCIS Route IDs
access the system in a CCIS network. 5~8 are for
future use and
should not be
used.)

03 IP Address Assign the IP Address to a CCIS xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 0.0.0.0

(IP only) System ID. (xxx = 0~255)

04 Point Code Define if the system associated with 0:Disable 1

Availability Destination Code can be Reached (1) 1:Enable
or Not Reach (0). If set to 0 (Disable),
when using the IP-CCIS that system
will not be able to be called until it is set
to 1 (Enable).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 556 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

50-04 : CCIS Office Code Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 50-04 : CCIS Office Code Assignment to define the Office Code
when the CCIS Network is constructed with an Open Numbering Plan.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 CCIS Office Code xxxx (up to four digits) 0~9 No Setting

Conditions

This program is used only in an Open Numbering Plan network. This should
include the Trunk Access Code and Office Code number.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 557

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

50-05 : CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Counter
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 50-05 : CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Counter to define the
maximum hop counter of call forwarding.

Input Data
Item Input Data Default

Maximum Hop Counter 1~7 5

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 558 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

50-06 : CCIS Feature Availability
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 50-06 : CCIS Feature Availability to define the availability of CCIS
features.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

01 Link Reconnect 0 = Not available 1 If this data is set to 0,

1 = Available Link Reconnect does
not run.

02 Centralized Day/Night 0 = Disable 1 If this data is turned to

Switching (for message 0, Day/Night mode is
receiver side)
1 = Enable
not changed even if
system receives
Switching message
from center.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 559

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

50-07 : CCIS Centralized Billing Center Office
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 50-07 : CCIS Centralized Billing Center Office to define the Point
Code and CCIS Route ID for the Billing Center Office.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

01 Destination Point Code 0~16367 0 Define the Point Code

of Billing Center
Office.

02 CCIS Route ID 0~8 0 Define the CCIS

Route ID to send
Billing Center Office.

03 Billing Message Format 0: Normal Format 0

1: Expand Format

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 560 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

50-08 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Group Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 50-08 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Group Assignment to define
the destination of BLF for the sending system. Eight sending systems can be
registered in this program.

Input Data
BLF Sending Group 1~8

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Destination Point Code 0~16367 0 Define the Point Code

of Billing Center
Office.

02 CCIS Route ID 0~8 0 Define the CCIS

Route ID to send
Billing Center Office.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 561

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

50-09 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Extension Number Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 50-09 : CCIS Centralized BLF Sending Extension Number
Assignment to define the extension number for sending BLF messages. One
extension number can have a sending switch for each sending group, which is
defined in Program 50-08.

Input Data
Entry 1~120

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Extension Number xxxxxxxx No Extension number. BLF

(up to eight Setting message is indicated when
digits) the status of the specified
extension number is
changed.

02 Send to Sending Group 1 0 = Disable 0 Enable (0) or Disable (1)

1 = Enable the ability to send the BLF
to Send Group 1 assigned
in PRG 50-08-XX.

03 Send to Sending Group 2 0 = Disable 0 Enable (0) or Disable (1)

1 = Enable the ability to send the BLF
to Send Group 2 assigned
in PRG 50-08-XX.

04 Send to Sending Group 3 0 = Disable 0 Enable (0) or Disable (1)

1 = Enable the ability to send the BLF
to Send Group 3 assigned
in PRG 50-08-XX.

05 Send to Sending Group 4 0 = Disable 0 Enable (0) or Disable (1)

1 = Enable the ability to send the BLF
to Send Group 4 assigned
in PRG 50-08-XX.

06 Send to Sending Group 5 0 = Disable 0 Enable (0) or Disable (1)

1 = Enable the ability to send the BLF
to Send Group 5 assigned
in PRG 50-08-XX.

2 - 562 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

07 Send to Sending Group 6 0 = Disable 0 Enable (0) or Disable (1)

1 = Enable the ability to send the BLF
to Send Group 6 assigned
in PRG 50-08-XX.

08 Send to Sending Group 7 0 = Disable 0 Enable (0) or Disable (1)

1 = Enable the ability to send the BLF
to Send Group 7 assigned
in PRG 50-08-XX.

09 Send to Sending Group 8 0 = Disable 0 Enable (0) or Disable (1)

1 = Enable the ability to send the BLF
to Send Group 8 assigned
in PRG 50-08-XX.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 563

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

50-10 : CCIS Centralized BLF Interval Time Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 50-10 : CCIS Centralized BLF Interval Time Assignment to define
the time to send BLF messages.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Type of Interval Time 0 = 4 seconds 0

Define the time to send BLF 1 = 8 seconds
messages. 2 = 12 seconds
3 = 16 seconds

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 564 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

50-11 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Switching Sending Group Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 50-11 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Switching Sending Group
Assignment to define Point Code and CCIS Route ID for sending Day/Night
Switching message.

Input Data
Day/Night Mode Sending Group 1~16

Input Data
Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Destination Point Code 0~16367 0 Define the Point Code

for Day/Night
Switching.

02 CCIS Route ID 0~8 0 Define the CCIS

Route ID to send Day/
Night Switching
messages. (T1 only)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 565

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

50-12 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Mode to System Mode Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 50-12 : CCIS Centralized Day/Night Mode to System Mode
Assignment to define corresponding night mode to switch to when Day/Night mode
switching message arrives.

Input Data
Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Day Mode 1~8 1

02 Night Mode 1~8 2

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 566 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

50-13 : CCIS Centralized Response Timeout Assignment
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 50-13 : CCIS Centralized Response Timeout Assignment to define
the response timeout value.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 IAI Response Timer 0~99 30

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 567

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

50-14 : CCIS Intercom Digits for Caller ID Call Return
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 50-14 : CCIS Intercom Digits for Caller ID Call Return to eliminate
the 9 on Caller ID redial except for 7- and 8-digit extensions.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 CCIS Intercom Digits for 0~24 (0 = Ignore setting) 0

Caller ID Call Return

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 568 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

50-15 : CCIS over IP Basic Information Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 50-15 : CCIS over IP Basic Information Setting to set the basic
parameters for CCIS over IP.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Connection Method 0 = Peer to Peer disable 1

1 = Peer to Peer enable

02 TCP Server Port Number 0~65535 57000

03 TCP Client Base Port 0~65535 59000

Number

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 569

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2 - 570 Program 50 : Common Channel Interoffice Signaling Service

 Program 51 : NetLink Service
51-01 : NetLink System Property Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 51-01 : NetLink System Property Setting to define the
parameters of the NetLink feature.
Program
Each system must be set with its own information.

51
When the NetLink System ID is changed (Item 01), the system must be
reset.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 NetLink System ID 0~50 0

This is the ID of each NetLink system. (0 = No operation)
Setting should insure that no overlap
occurs between nodes.

02 Primary Candidate Order 1~50 30

When the Primary system is turned
off or disconnect from network, this
value is used to select a new Primary
system. Smaller number is higher
priority.
If this value is the same number, the
System ID (PRG 51-01-01) is
referred, and the system which has
the smaller number is selected as
Primary system.

03 Secondary System Flag 0 = Disable 0

0: NetLink is dynamically established 1 = Enable
based on Node List in PRG 51-03-01.
Primary System will be selected in
the order which the system wakes up.
1: The system will connect with Top
Priority Primary System.
If Top Priority Primary System was
not found, the system will search
Primary System like this setting is 0.

Programming Manual 2 - 571

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 572 Program 51 : NetLink Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-02 : NetLink System Individual Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 51-02 : NetLink System Individual Setting to set system data for
each NetLink system.

Program 51-02-03 is not used in US, but is used in other countries.

Input Data
System ID 1~50

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 System Name Up to 20 characters. blank

This is the name given to each system.

02 Time Zone (Hour) 0~24 12

Determines the time offset from the
Primary system.
(0 = -12, 1 = -11, 2 = -10.... 12 = 0
13 = +1, 14 = +2, 24 = +12)
This setting affects Time Display on MLT
(see 51-13-02).

03 Time Zone (Minute) 0~120 60

Determines the time offset from the
Primary system.
(0 = -60, 1 = -59, 2 = -58.... 120 = +60)
This setting affects Time Display on MLT
(see 51-13-02).
This PRG is not used in the US, but is
used in other countries.

04 Authenticate System MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-00~ 00-00-00-00-00-00

To use this function, set PRG 51-13-03 to FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
1 (enable), NetLink systems will reject the
connection from unauthenticated system
access.

Programming Manual 2 - 573

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 574 Program 51 : NetLink Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-03 : NetLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 51-03 : NetLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting to set the IP
address of the NetLink system.

Input Data
List ID 1~50

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Internet Protocol Address List 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

The system seeks the Primary system based on 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
this list. 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
When there is no Primary system yet, or Fail
Over occurs, Node List is referred to establish
new link. This setting is necessary when PRG
51-01-03 is 0, or PRG 51-05-02 is other than 0.
Once the system connects to the Primary
System, this setting is updated by the Primary
system when PRG 51-13-01 is On. So, enter IP
address of the systems which may become
Primary at least.

Conditions

The system seeks Primary system based on this list.

When there is no Primary System yet, or Fail Over occurs, Node List is referred to
establish new link.

This setting is necessary when PRG 51-01-03 is 0, or PRG 51-05-02 is other than
0. Once the system connects to the Primary System, this setting is updated by the
Primary system when PRG 51-13-01 is on. So, enter IP address of the systems
which may become Primary at least.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 575

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-04 : IP Address Setting of Top Priority Primary System of NetLink
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 51-04 : IP Address Setting of Top Priority Primary System of
NetLink to set the IP address of the new Primary System.

Input Data
List ID 1~50

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Internet Protocol Address of Top Priority 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Primary 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
Enter the IP address of the Top Priority Primary 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
System.
To use this feature, set PRG 51-06-01 to 1(On).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 576 Program 51 : NetLink Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-05 : NetLink Timer Settings
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 51-05 : NetLink Timer Settings to set the various timers within the
NetLink system.

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Keep Alive Sending Interval 1~3600 5

This is the Keep Alive timer sending interval
from the Secondary system to confirm
communication with the Primary system.

02 Keep Alive Response Waiting Time 0, 5~10800 0

This is the time interval the Secondary system (0 = infinity)
waits for a response from the Primary system
before cutting off communication.

03 Primary Search Packet Sending Interval 1~3600 5

While searching the Primary system, the system
sends a packet at this interval.

04 Primary Search Time Maximum Value 5~10800 20

Total time of Primary system seek time.

05 Top Priority Primary Detection Packet 1~3600 10

Sending Interval
When current Primary system is not Top Priority
Primary System, the system sends packet to
check if Top Priority System exists.

06 Primary Compulsion Specification Trial 1~10800 30

Maximum Time
When the forced change Primary command is
executed, the system will search the new
Primary system for this amount of time.

07 Socket Refresh Time 20~3600 40

For some reason, the IP connection may
become unstable. Then keep-alive function does
not work. To avoid this, if there is no data traffic
for this time, the socket is refreshed.

Programming Manual 2 - 577

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 578 Program 51 : NetLink Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-06 : NetLink Primary Automatic Integration Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 51-06 : NetLink Primary Automatic Integration Settings to set the
automatic integration of the Primary system.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Primary Integration Right or Wrong 0 = Off 0

When LAN cable was divided, multiple Primary 1 = On
systems may appear. If the LAN connection is
recovered, multiple Net-Links exist in the
network. When this option is enabling, NetLink
will be composed around Top priority Primary
System.

02 Package Reset Timing Option 0 = Reset when all packages 0

When Primary System Automatic Integration is are in idle condition.
done, all packages of secondary systems will 1 = Anytime
reset. This option can select the timing of
package reset.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 579

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-07 : NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 51-07 : NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification Setting to set
compulsion specification of the Primary system.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Forced Change Primary System Enabling 0 = Disable 0

Set this item whether the Forced Change 1 = Enable
Primary is available or not.

02 Package Reset Timing Option 0 = On 0

When Forced Change Primary System is done, 1 = Off
all packages will reset. This option can select the
timing of package reset.
0 = Reset when all packages are in idle
condition, otherwise reject Primary System
Integration.
1 = Anytime

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 580 Program 51 : NetLink Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-08 : Primary NetLink Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 51-08 : Primary NetLink Setting to set the IP address and system ID
of the compulsory specification of the Primary system.

(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 IP Address of New Primary System 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

Enter target IP address for New Primary system. 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254
When the Forced Change Primary system is 192.0.0.1 ~ 223.255.255.254
done, this setting will be erased.

02 System ID of New Primary System 0~50 No

When set to 0, top priority Primary system is
setting
assumed to be the new Primary system.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 581

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-09 : NetLink Communication Port Settings
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 51-09 : NetLink Communication Port Settings to set the various
communication ports used on the system.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Primary Waiting Port 0~65535 58000

Sets the communication port that the Primary
system uses to communicate with the
Secondary system.

02 Communication Waiting Port 0~65535 58001

Port used to communicate between nodes. It is
always opened by all nodes.

03 Secondary Communication Port 0~65535 0

Secondary system communicates with Primary
system at this port number. If 0 is specified,
temporary port is selected by dynamic.

04 Primary Search Port 0~65535 0

When Fail-Over occurred, each system
communicates with other system at this port
number.
If 0 is set, temporary port is selected by dynamic.
If 0 is not specified, the number and continuous
maximum 50 number is used.
(Ex. 5000 is specified 5001, 5002…5049 will be
used).

05 Primary Detection Port 0~65535 0

Enter port number to seek the Top Priority
Primary system.
If 0 is specified, temporary port is selected by
dynamic.

06 Database Replication Communication 0~65535 58002

Listening Port
This port is used to replicate database.

2 - 582 Program 51 : NetLink Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data
Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

07 Database Replication Primary Detection Port 0~65535 0

This port is used to replicate database.
If 0 is specified, temporary port is selected by
dynamic.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 583

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-10 : Virtual Slot Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 51-10: Virtual Slot Setting to view the number of Virtual slots that are
remaining in a NetLink network. There can be up to 240 virtual slots available in
NetLink.

Input Data
Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of Available Virtual Slots

240 slots can be controlled in NetLink. This
command can check how many slots are
available.

Conditions

This Program is “Read Only.”

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 584 Program 51 : NetLink Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-11 : NetLink System Information
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 51-11: NetLink System Information to reference information about
other systems in the NetLink network.

Input Data
System ID 1~50

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 System Name For reference only. blank

02 Connected State For reference only. 0

03 IP Address For reference only. 000.000.000.000

04 MAC Address For reference only. 00:00:00:00:00:00

05 Primary Priority Level For reference only. 0

06 Main Software Version For reference only. XX.XX

Conditions

This Program is “Read Only.”

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 585

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-12 : Primary System Information
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 51-12: Primary System Information to reference information about the
Primary System in the NetLink network.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 System ID For reference only. 0

02 System Name For reference only. blank

03 IP Address For reference only. 000.000.000.000

04 MAC Address For reference only. 00:00:00:00:00:00

05 Primary Priority Level For reference only. 0

06 Main Software Version For reference only. XX.XX

Conditions

This Program is “Read Only.”

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 586 Program 51 : NetLink Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-13 : NetLink Options
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 51-13: NetLink Options to enable automatic IP address List Operation
updates, time zone information, and MAC address authorization.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Automatic IP Address List Operation Update 0 = Disable (Off) 1

When set to 1 (On), the list in PRG 51-03-01 is 1 = Enable (On)
automatically updated.

02 Time Zone Option 0 = Disable (Off) 0

When set to 0, the following features are 1 = Enable (On)
affected: Clock Display, Incoming/Outgoing
History List.
When set to 1, the following features are
affected: VRS Time Announce, Date and Time
Setting Service Code, Alarm Clock setting, and
Hotel mode wake-up call.

03 MAC Address Authorization Enable 0 = Disable (Off) 0

Refers to PRG 51-02-04 for setting MAC 1 = Enable (On)
address.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 587

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-14 : NetLink System Control
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 51-14: NetLink System Control to delete system and slot information.

(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).

Input Data
System ID 1~50

Menu Number 1 = System information deletion

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Delete System Information 1~50 1

This command is used to delete system
information and the slot information. The system
must be disconnected.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 588 Program 51 : NetLink Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-15 : Demonstration Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 51-15: Demonstration Setting to automatically set the minimum
setting values in NetLink. A system reset occurs after this command is executed.

(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).

Input Data
Menu Number 1 = Primary automatic setting
2 = Secondary 1 - automatic operation setting
3 = Secondary 2 - automatic operation setting
4 = Secondary 3 - automatic operation setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 589

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 51 : NetLink Service

51-16 : NetLink System Data Replication Mode Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 51-16: NetLink System Data Replication Mode Setting to set the
system data replication between the Primary and Secondary systems.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 System Data Replication Mode 0 = Disable 0

Sets the synchronous mode of the system data. 1 = Setting Time Mode
When set to 1 (Setting Time Mode), the systems 2 = Interval Mode
are synchronized at the time set in Item 02
below.
When set to 2 (Interval Mode), the systems are
synchronized at regular time intervals set in Item
03 below.

02 System Data Replication Time Setting 0000~2359 0200

Sets the time of day that both systems
synchronize database (when Item 01 is set to 1.)

03 System Data Replication Interval Setting 15~1440 (minutes) 30 (min)

Sets the time interval that both systems
synchronize database (when Item 01 is set to 2).

Month: 0~12 –

Replication Time Stamp Day: 0~31 –

04
Show next replication time. (Read-Only) Hour: 00~23 –

Minute: 00~59 –

05 System Data Replication Wait Time 1~86400 (seconds) 180 sec

This sets the wait time until replication starts
when NetLink is created.

06 System Data Replication Interval 0~86400 (seconds) 1 sec

This program sets an interval time to start
replication to the next node after replication to
one node is completed.

2 - 590 Program 51 : NetLink Service

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 591

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2 - 592 Program 51 : NetLink Service

 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-01 : Service Tone Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 80-01 : Service Tone Setup to define up to 64 Service Tones.
Each service tone is defined by the combination of 32 Basic Tones.
Program
Input Data

80
Service Tone Number 01~64

Item Item Input Data

No.

01 Repeat Count 0~255 (0 = until On-Hook)

Unit Number 1~8

Item
Item Input Data
No.

02 Basic Tone Number 1~33

(0 = No Tone)
(33=Default Time Slot)

03 Duration Count 1~255 (100~25500ms)

04 Gain Level (dB) 1~63 (-15.5 ~ +15.5)

Programming Manual 2 - 593

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Table 2-14 Basic Tones

Basic Level Basic

Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz) Level (dB)
Tone No. (dB) Tone No.

01 420 - 13 17 520 / 650 -13 / -19

02 520 -13 18 650 / 780 -13 / -19

03 580 -13 19 780 / 1040 -13 / -19

04 660 -13 20 1040 -13

05 700 -13 21 450 -13

06 800 -13 22 950 -13

07 880 -13 23 1080 -13

08 1050 -13 24 400/450 -13/-13

09 430 -13 25 400 -13

10 440 / 480 -13 / -13 26 350 / 440 -13/-13

11 480 / 620 -13 / -13 27 420 (Amplitude -13

Modulated)

12 440 -16 28 -- Reserve -- -

13 -- Reserve -- - 29 -- Reserve -- -

14 520 / 650 -19 / -13 30 -- Reserve -- -

15 650 / 780 -19 / -13 31 -- Reserve -- -

16 780 / 1040 -19 / -13 32 -- Reserve -- -

Default

Service
Tone Service tone Name Repeat Unit Basic Duration Gain Level
count count Tone No. (dB)
No.

1 No tone 0 1 0 10 32 (0dB)

2 Internal Dial Tone 0 1 1 10 42 (+5dB)

3 Stutter Dial Tone 0 1 24 10 35 (+1.5dB)

(Special Dial Tone)

4 Internal Recall Dial Tone 0 1 24 10 35 (+1.5dB)

(Transfer Dial Tone)

5 Trunk Dial Tone 0 4 21 6 45 (0dB)

0 10 45 (0dB)
21 2 45 (0dB)
0 2 45 (0dB)

2 - 594 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Service
Repeat Unit Basic Gain Level
Tone Service tone Name Duration
count count Tone No. (dB)
No.

6 Internal Busy Tone 0 2 1 5 42 (+5dB)

(Busy Tone) 0 5 42 (+5dB)

7 DND Busy Tone 0 2 1 2 42 (+5dB)

0 2 42 (+5dB)

8 B-busy Tone 0 2 1 5 42 (+5dB)

0 5 42 (+5dB)

9 Internal Reorder Tone 0 2 1 2 42 (+5dB)

(Congestion Tone) 0 2 42 (+5dB)

10 Internal Interrupt Tone 0 2 1 2 42 (+5dB)

(Warning Tone) 0 2 42 (+5dB)

11 Internal Confirmation Tone 1 2 0 5 42 (+5dB)

(Confirmation Tone) 1 1 42 (+5dB)

12 Internal Hold Tone 0 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

13 External Hold Tone 0 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

14 Internal Ring-back Tone 0 2 1 10 42 (+5dB)

(Internal Audible Ring) 0 40 42 (+5dB)
(Ring Back Tone)

15 Override Tone 1 2 0 1 42 (+5dB)

1 1 42 (+5dB)

16 Lock-out Tone 0 2 23 2 32 (0dB)

0 2 32 (0dB)

17 Clock alarm tone 0 8 1 1 39 (+3.5dB)

0 1 39 (+3.5dB)
1 1 39 (+3.5dB)
0 1 39 (+3.5dB)
1 1 39 (+3.5dB)
0 1 39 (+3.5dB)
1 1 39 (+3.5dB)
0 13 39 (+3.5dB)

18 BGM 0 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

19 Doorphone chime 1 3 6 4 2 38 (+3dB)

4 2 26 (-3dB)
2 3 38 (+3dB)
2 4 26 (-3dB)
2 6 14 (-9dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)

20 Doorphone chime 2 3 6 7 2 38 (+3dB)

7 2 26 (-3dB)
5 3 38 (+3dB)
5 4 26 (-3dB)
5 6 14 (-9dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)

Programming Manual 2 - 595

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Service
Repeat Unit Basic Gain Level
Tone Service tone Name Duration
count count Tone No. (dB)
No.

21 Doorphone chime 3 3 6 8 2 38 (+3dB)

8 2 26 (-3dB)
6 3 38 (+3dB)
6 4 26 (-3dB)
6 6 14 (-9dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)

22 Doorphone chime 4 3 6 4 1 38 (+3dB)

4 1 26 (-3dB)
2 2 38 (+3dB)
2 2 26 (-3dB)
2 3 14 (-9dB)
0 2 32 (0dB)

23 Doorphone chime 5 3 6 7 1 38 (+3dB)

7 1 26 (-3dB)
5 2 38 (+3dB)
5 2 26 (-3dB)
5 3 14 (-9dB)
0 2 32 (0dB)

24 Doorphone chime 6 3 6 8 1 38 (+3dB)

8 1 26 (-3dB)
6 2 38 (+3dB)
6 2 26 (-3dB)
6 3 14 (-9dB)
0 2 32 (0dB)

25 Service Set Tone 1 2 0 1 42 (+5dB)

1 1 42 (+5dB)

26 Service Clear Tone 1 2 0 1 42 (+5dB)

1 1 42 (+5dB)

27 Talk-Back Tone 2 2 0 1 42 (+5dB)

1 1 42 (+5dB)

28 Speaker Monitor Tone 1 2 0 1 42 (+5dB)

1 1 42 (+5dB)

29 Door Relay Tone 1 2 0 1 42 (+5dB)

1 1 42 (+5dB)

30 Doorphone Call Tone 1 2 0 1 42 (+5dB)

1 1 42 (+5dB)

31 Paging Tone 2 2 0 1 42 (+5dB)

1 1 42 (+5dB)

32 Splash Tone 1 1 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

23 1 32 (0dB)

33 Splash Tone 2 2 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

23 1 32 (0dB)

34 Splash Tone 3 3 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

23 1 32 (0dB)

35 1 Sec Signal Tone 1 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

22 1 32 (0dB)

2 - 596 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Service
Repeat Unit Basic Gain Level
Tone Service tone Name Duration
count count Tone No. (dB)
No.

36 External audible ring tone 0 2 1 10 42 (+5dB)

0 40 42 (+5dB)

37 External reorder tone 0 2 1 2 42 (+5dB)

0 2 42 (+5dB)

38 External busy tone 0 2 1 5 42 (+5dB)

0 5 42 (+5dB)

39 Special audible ring-busy 0 4 24 2 35 (+1.5dB)

tone 0 2 35 (+1.5dB)
24 2 35 (+1.5dB)
0 20 35 (+1.5dB)

40 Internal Call Waiting Tone 1 2 22 1 32 (0dB)

(Transfer, Call Waiting Tone) 0 1 32 (0dB)

41 Intrusion tone 1 2 22 8 32 (0dB)

0 8 32 (0dB)

42 Conference tone 1 2 22 8 32 (0dB)

0 8 32 (0dB)

43 Intrusion tone 2 0 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

44 External Dial Tone 0 4 21 6 45 (-3dB)

(DUD,DISA Dial Tone) 0 10 45 (-3dB)
21 2 45 (-3dB)
0 2 45 (-3dB)

45 External Ring Back Tone 0 2 1 10 42 (+5dB)

(Ring Tone DDI) 0 40 42 (+5dB)

46 External Busy Tone 0 2 1 5 42 (+5dB)

(Busy Tone DDI) 0 5 42 (+5dB)

47 Number unobtainable tone 0 2 1 2 42 (+5dB)

0 2 42 (+5dB)

48 VM message indication tone 0 2 1 2 42 (+5dB)

0 2 42 (+5dB)

49 --Not Used -- 0 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

50 External special audible ring 0 2 1 10 42 (0dB)

tone 0 40 42 (0dB)

51 External intercept tone 0 1 22 10 32 (0dB)

52 External call waiting tone 1 2 1 3 42 (+5dB)

0 3 42 (+5dB)

53 External executive override 1 2 1 10 42 (+5dB)

tone 0 10 42 (+5dB)

54 --Not Used -- 0 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

55 Generate tone for TAPI2.1 0 1 22 10 32 (0dB)

Programming Manual 2 - 597

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Service
Repeat Unit Basic Gain Level
Tone Service tone Name Duration
count count Tone No. (dB)
No.

56 Warning Beep Tone Signaling 1 1 22 8 32 (0dB)

0 8 32 (0dB)

57 Headset Ear Piece Ringing 0 4 24 2 35 (+1.5dB)

Tone 0 2 35 (+1.5dB)
24 2 35 (+1.5dB)
0 20 35 (+1.5dB)

58 Opening Chime tone 1 8 2 2 32 (0dB)

2 2 26 (-3dB)
14 2 32 (0dB)
14 2 26 (-3dB)
15 2 32 (0dB)
15 2 26 (-3dB)
16 6 32 (0dB)
16 4 26 (-3dB)

59 Ending Chime tone 1 8 20 2 32 (0dB)

20 2 26 (-3dB)
19 2 32 (0dB)
19 2 26 (-3dB)
18 2 32 (0dB)
18 2 26 (-3dB)
17 6 32 (0dB)
17 4 26 (-3dB)

60 Splash tone 1(Mute) 0 2 0 1 42 (+5dB)

1 1 42 (+5dB)

61 Splash tone 2(Mute) 1 2 0 1 42 (+5dB)

1 1 42 (+5dB)

62 Splash tone 3(Mute) 3 2 0 1 42 (+5dB)

1 1 42 (+5dB)

63 EXT SPK Ring-back Tone 0 2 24 10 35 (+1.5dB)

0 40 35 (+1.5dB)

64 Special Hold Tone 0 4 24 2 35 (+1.5dB)

0 2 35 (+1.5dB)
24 2 35 (+1.5dB)
0 20 35 (+1.5dB)

Conditions

The system must be reset for any changes to these items to take affect.

Feature Cross Reference

Selectable Ring Tones

2 - 598 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup to define the various levels and
timers for the DTMF Tone Receiver.

DTMF Tone Receiver Type:

1 = DTMF Receiver for Extension

2 = DTMF Receiver for Analog Trunk
3 = DTMF Receiver for Digital Trunk
4, 5 = Reserved

Input Data

DTMF Tone Receiver Type No. 1 = DTMF Receiver for Extension

2 = DTMF Receiver for Analog Trunk
3 = DTMF Receiver for Digital Trunk
4 = --- Reserved ---
5 = --- Reserved ---

Item
Item Input Data
No

01 Detect Level 0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm

1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm

02 Start Delay Time 0~255 (0.25ms ~ 64ms)

03 Min. Detect Level 0~15

DTMF Tone 1 : -15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 2 : -20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 3 : -25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 4 : -30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 5 : -35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)

Programming Manual 2 - 599

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item
Item Input Data
No

04 Max. Detect Level 0~15

DTMF Tone 1 : -5dBm(0) to -20dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 2 : -10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 3 : -15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 4 : -20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
DTMF Tone 5 : -25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)

05 Forward Twist Level 0~9 (1dB ~ 10dB)

06 Backward Twist Level 0~9 (1dB ~ 10dB)

07 ON Detect Time 1~255 (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms)

08 OFF Detect Time 1-255 (15+ 15ms ~ 3825ms)

Default

Item
Item Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5
No

01 Detect Level 0 0 0 0 0

02 Start delay time 0 0 0 0 0

03 Min. detect level 10 (-20dBm) 15 (-25dBm) 10 (-20dBm) 10 (-20dBm) 10 (-20dBm)

04 Max. detect level 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm)

05 Forward twist level 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm)

06 Backward twist level 0 (1dBm) 0 (1dBm) 0 (1dBm) 0 (1dBm) 0 (1dBm)

07 ON detect time 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms)

08 OFF detect time 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 600 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup to define the various
levels and timers for the Call Progress Tone Detector.

Tone Detector Type:

1 = Dial Tone for Trunk

2 = Busy Tone for Trunk
3 = Ring Back Tone for Trunk
4, 5 = Reserved

Input Data

Tone Detector Type Number 1 = Dial Tone for Trunk

2 = Busy Tone for Trunk
3 = Ring Back Tone for Trunk
4 = --- Reserved ---
5 = --- Reserved ---

Item No Item Input Data

01 Detection Level 0 = 0dBm ~ -25dBm

1 = -5dBm ~ -30dBm
2 = -10dBm ~ -35dBm
3 = -15dBm ~ -40dBm
4 = -20dBm ~ -45dBm
5 = -25dBm ~ -50dBm
6 = -30dBm ~ -55dBm

02 Min. Detection Level 0~15

0 = -10dBm(0) to -25dBm(15)
1 = -15dBm(0) to -30dBm(15)
2 = -20dBm(0) to -35dBm(15)
3 = -25dBm(0) to -40dBm(15)
4 = -30dBm(0) to -45dBm(15)
5 = -35dBm(0) to -50dBm(15)
6= -40dBm(0) to -55dBm(15)

03 S/N Ratio 0~4 (0dB ~ -20dB)

Programming Manual 2 - 601

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item No Item Input Data

04 No Tone Time 0~255 (30+30~7680ms)

(0 =not detect)
1~255 = 60~7680ms.
The formula is 30+30N.
When set to N=1, it means 30+30*1=60
When set to N=255, it means
30+30*255=7680

05 Pulse Count 1~255

06 ON Minimum Time 1~255 (30+30~7680ms)

07 ON Maximum Time 0~255 (30+30~7680ms)

08 OFF Minimum Time 1~255 (30+30~7680ms)

09 OFF Maximum Time 0~255 (30+30~7680ms)

12 Frequency No. 1 1~8 (Frequency Table No. set by 80-07)

13 Frequency No. 2 1~8 (Frequency Table No. set by 80-07)

14 Twist Level 0-10 (1dB - 10dB)

Default

Item Name Type 1 (DT) Type 2 (BT) Type 3 (RBT) Type 4 Type 5

1 Detect Level 0 (-25dBm) 0 (-25dBm) 0 (-25dBm) 0 0

2 Min. detect 15 (-25dBm) 15 (-25dBm) 15 (-25dBm) 0 0

level

3 S/N ratio 4 (-20dB) 4 (-20dB) 4 (-20dB) 0 0

4 No tone time 132 (3990ms) 132 (3990ms) 132 (3990ms) 0 0

5 Pulse Count 1 1 1 0 0

6 ON min. time 63 (1920ms) 12(390ms) 25 (780ms) 0 0

7 ON max. time 0 20(630ms) 40 0 0

(1230ms)

8 OFF min. time 1 (60ms) 12(390ms) 52 (1590ms) 0 0

9 OFF max. time 1 (60ms) 20(630ms) 80 (2430ms) 0 0

12 Frequency No 1 1 1 0 0
1

13 Frequency No 0 0 0 0 0
2

14 Twist Level 0 0 0 0 0

2 - 602 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 603

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System to define the date format
when printing out the SMDR, alarm report, and system information report.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Date Format 0 = American Format 2

(Month / Day / Year)
1 = Japanese Format
(Year / Month / Day)
2 = European Format
(Day / Month / Year)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 604 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-06 : Reference Impedance Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 80-06: Reference Impedance Setup to define the change of
Reference Impedance (600 Ω or complex) in LCA PKG and COT PKG

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Reference Impedance 0 = 600 Ω 1

Setup
1 = Complex

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 605

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 80-07 : Call Progress Tone Detector Frequency Setup to set the
frequency of the detection tone set with Program 80-04-12 and Program 80-04-13.

Input Data

Frequency Table No. Input Data Default

1 40 (400 Hz)

2 0

3 0

4 0, 10~255 0
(100~2550 Hz)
5 (0 = Not used) 0

6 0

7 0

8 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 606 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

80-09 : Short Ring Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 80-09 : Short Ring Setup to define the short ring tone for SV8100
multiline terminals.

Input Data

Short Ring Number 01~32

Item
Item Description Default
No.

01 Frequency 1 Refer to Table 2-15 Frequency 1/2 Table 00 = No Setting, 01~15

02 Frequency 2 Refer to Table 2-15 Frequency 1/2 Table 00 = No Setting, 01~15

03 Ring Cycle Refer to Table 2-16 Ring Cycle Table 00 = No Setting, 01~14

When a single tone is sent, Frequency 1/2 is set to the same value.

Table 2-15 Frequency 1/2 Table

Data Frequency (Hz)

01 392

02 440

03 494

04 523

05 587

06 659

07 698

08 784

09 880

10 988

11 1046

Programming Manual 2 - 607

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Table 2-15 Frequency 1/2 Table (Continued)

Data Frequency (Hz)

12 1175

13 1318

14 1397

15 1568

Table 2-16 Ring Cycle Table

Data Ring Cycle (ms)

01 125(On)/Off

02 125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/Off

03 125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/Off

04 125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/125(Off)/125(On)/Off

05 250(On)/Off

06 250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/Off

07 250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/Off

08 250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/250(Off)/250(On)/Off

09 325(On)/Off

10 325(On)/325(Off)/325(On)/Off

11 325(On)/325(Off)/325(On)/325(Off)/325(On)/Off

12 500(On)/Off

13 500(On)/500(Off)/500(On)/Off

14 1000(On)/Off

2 - 608 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Table 2-17 Default Table

Short Ring
Short Tone Name Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Ring Cycle
No.

1 Confirmation Tone 8 8 1

2 Error Tone 8 8 14

3 Alarm Tone for long 4 4 14

conversation call

4 Not defined 0 0 0

: : : : :

32 Not defined 0 0 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 609

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2 - 610 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System

 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-01 : COT Initial Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 81-01 : COT Initial Data Setup to define the various basic data
parameters for the COT Unit.
Program
Input Data

81
Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 PCM Encoding Method 0 = u-law 1 (A-law)

Specification
1 = A-law
02 Loop Current Detection Time 1~255 75
(8~2040ms) (600ms)

03 Clear Signal (Open Loop) 1~255 38

Detection Time (304ms)
(8~2040ms)
04 Ringing Signal Detection Minimum 1~255 13
Time (104ms)
(8~2040ms)
05 Single Ringing Detection Minimum 0~255 82
Time (0,8~2040ms) (656ms)

06 Double Ringing Detection 0~255 13

Minimum Off Time (104ms)
(0,8~2040ms)
07 Double Ringing Detection 0~255 50
Maximum Off Time (400ms)
(0,8~2040ms)
08 Ringing Signal not Detection 1~255 88
Minimum (8~2040ms) (704ms)

09 Time Ringing Signal Stop 1~255 63

Detection Time (4032ms)
(64~16320ms)
10 Continuous Ringing Minimum 0~255 38
Time (304ms)
(0,8~2040ms)
11 Continuous Ringing Maximum 0-255 88
Time (704ms)
(0,8~2040ms)
12 Caller ID Detection Time 0~255 0
(0~16320ms) (0ms)

Programming Manual 2 - 611

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

13 Grounding Time 1~255 9

(16~4080ms) (144ms)

14 Hook Flash 1 Time 1~255 50

(16~4080ms) (800ms)

15 Hook Flash 2 Time 1~255 156

(16~4080ms) (2496ms)

16 Pause Time 1~255 47

(64~16320ms) (3008ms)

17 PFT Idle Detection Time 1~255 47

(64~16320ms) (3008ms)

18 Grounding Start Time 1~255 6

(8~2040ms) (48ms)

19 Grounding Start Give Up Time 1~255 47

(64~16320ms) (3008ms)

20 Loop Reverse Detect Minimum 1~255 13

Time (104ms)
(8~2040ms)
21 Loop Reverse Detect Maximum 1~255 107
Time (856ms)
(8~2040ms)
22 Loop Disconnect Detect Minimum 1~255 63
Time (8~2040ms) (504ms)

23 Loop Disconnect Detect Maximum 1~255 87

Time (696ms)
(8~2040ms)
24 On Hook Normal Detect Time 1~255 3
(8~2040ms) (24ms)

25 On Hook Reverse Detect Time 1~255 2

(8~2040ms) (16ms)

26 On Hook Disconnect Detect Time 1~255 188

(16~4080ms) (3008ms)

27 Dial Pulse Break Time (10pps) 1~255 8

(8~2040ms) (64ms)

28 Dial Pulse Make Time (10pps) 1~255 4

(8~2040ms) (32ms)

29 DP Inter-digit Time (10pps) 1~255 19

(32~8160ms) (608ms)

30 Dial Pulse Break Time (20pps) 1~255 4

(8~2040ms) (32ms)

31 Dial Pulse Make Time (20pps) 1~255 2

(8~2040ms) (16ms)

2 - 612 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

32 DP Inter-digit Time (20pps) 1~255 16

(32~8160ms) (512ms)

33 Charging pulse minimum duration 1-255 9

time (72ms)
(8-2040mS)
34 Charging pulse minimum period 1-255 29
time (232ms)
(8-2040mS)
35 Charging pulse minimum interval 1-255 6
time (48ms)
(8-2040mS)
36 Long Ringing Detection Minimum 1~255 75
Time (1200ms)
(16~4080ms)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 613

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for
the DID Unit.

Input Data

Item Name Input Data Default

01 PCM Method Type 0 = u-law 1 (A-law)

1= A-law

02 Answer Signal Time 1~255 6

(10~2550ms) (60ms)

03 Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time 1~255 7

(100~25500ms) (700ms)

04 Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time 1~255 10

(10~2550ms) (100ms)

05 Hook Flash Time 1~255 25

(8~2040ms) (200ms)

06 Pause Time 1~255 94

(32~8160ms) (3008ms)

07 WINK/DELAY Duration Time 1~255 20

(10~2550ms) (200ms)

08 Incoming-WINK/DELAY Send Time 1~255 3

(100~25500ms) (300ms)

09 Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max. Time 1~255 48

(100~25500ms) (4800ms)

10 Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Min. Time 1~255 13

(10~2550ms) (130ms)

11 Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Max. Time 1~255 31

(10~2550ms) (310ms)

12 Receive DP Make Minimum Time 1~255 5

(2~510ms) (10ms)

13 Receive DP Make Maximum Time 1~255 50

(2~510ms) (100ms)

2 - 614 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item Name Input Data Default

14 Receive DP Break Minimum Time 1~255 5

(2~510ms) (10ms)

15 Receive DP Break Maximum Time 1~255 50

(2~510ms) (100ms)

16 Receive DP Inter-Digit Time 1~255 6

(32~8160ms) (192ms)

17 Loop Off Guard Time 0~25 20

(0,100~25500ms) (2000ms)

18 DP Break Time (10pps) 1~255 16

(4~1020ms) (64ms)

19 DP Make Time (10pps) 1~255 8

(4~1020ms) (32ms)

20 DP Inter-Digit Time (10pps) 1~255 38

(16~4080ms) (608ms)

21 DP Break Time (20pps) 1~255 8

(4~1020ms) (32ms)

22 DP Make Time (20pps) 1~255 4

(4~1020ms) (16ms)

23 DP Inter-Digit Time (20pps) 1~255 29

(16~4080ms) (464ms)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 615

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-03 : ODT Initial Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 81-03 : ODT Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for
the E&M Tie Line Unit.

Input Data

Item Name Input Data Default

01 PCM Method Type 0 = u-law 1 (A-law)

1= A-law

02 Answer Signal Time 1~255 6

(10~2550ms) (60ms)

03 Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time 1~255 7

(100~25500ms) (700ms)

04 Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time 1~255 10

(10~2550ms) (100ms)

05 Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time 1~255 7

(100~25500ms) (700ms)

06 Hook Flash Time 1~255 20

(10~2040ms) (200ms)

07 Pause Time 1~255 50

(60~15300ms) (3000ms)

08 WINK/DELAY Duration Time 1~255 20

(10~2550ms) (200ms)

09 Incoming-WINK/DELAY Send Time 1~255 3

(100~25500ms) (300ms)

10 Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max. Time 1~255 48

(100~25500ms) (4800ms)

11 Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Min. Time 1~255 13

(10~2550ms) (130ms)

12 Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Max. Time 1~255 31

(10~2550ms) (310ms)

13 Receive DP Make Minimum Time 1~255 5

(2~510ms) (10ms)

2 - 616 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item Name Input Data Default

14 Receive DP Make Maximum Time 1~255 50

(2~510ms) (100ms)

15 Receive DP Break Minimum Time 1~255 5

(2~510ms) (10ms)

16 Receive DP Break Maximum Time 1~255 50

(2~510ms) (100ms)

17 Pause Time after WINK/DELAY Receive 1~255 13

(8~2040ms) (104ms)

18 Loop Off Guard Time 0~255 20

(0,100~25500ms) (2000ms)

19 DP Break Time (10pps) 1~255 32

(2~512ms) (64ms)

20 DP Make Time (10pps) 1~255 16

(2~512ms) (32ms)

21 DP Inter-digit Time (10pps) 1~255 19

(32~8160ms) (608ms)

22 DP Break Time (20pps) 1~255 16

(2~510ms) (32ms)

23 DP Make Time (20pps) 1~255 8

(2~510ms) (16ms)

24 DP Inter-digit Time (20pps) 1~255 16

(32~8160ms) (512ms)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 617

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup to define the
various basic timers for layer 3 of ISDN BRI/PRI (defined in Program 10-03-04).

Input Data

Layer 3 Timer Type Number 1~5

Item
Item Description Input Data Default
No.

01 T301 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 0,180~254 (sec) 180 (sec)
of a second of the timer to be started
when the ALERT message is
received.

02 T302 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 1~254 (sec) 15 (sec)

of a second of the timer to be started
when the SETUP ACK is sent. Timer
is also restarted when INFO is
received.

03 T303 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 1~254 (sec) 4 (sec)

of a second of the timer to be started
when SETUP is sent.

04 T304 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 0~254 (sec). 30 (sec)

of a second of the timer to be started
when the SETUP ACK is received.
Timer is also restarted when INFO is
received.

05 T305 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 1~254 (sec) 30 (sec)

of a second of the timer to be started
when DISC without progress No. 8 is
sent.

06 T306 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 0~254 (sec) 30 (sec)

of a second of the timer to be started
when DISC with progress indicator
No. 8 is sent. This timer is valid for
Network side use only.

07 T307 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 1~254 (sec) 180 (sec)
of a second of the timer to be started
when SUSPEND ACK is sent. This
timer is valid for Network side use
only.

2 - 618 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item
Item Description Input Data Default
No.

08 T308 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 1~254 (sec) 4 (sec)

of a second of the timer to be started
when REL is sent.

09 T309 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 1-254 (sec) 90 (sec)

of a second upon data link
disconnection.

10 T310 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 0~180 (sec) 180 (sec)
of a second of the timer to be started
when CALL PROC is sent.

11 T312 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 1~254 (sec) 6 (sec)

of a second of the timer to be started
when SETUP is sent or re-sent on
broadcast data link. This timer is only
valid for Network side use only.

12 T313 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 1~254 (sec) 4 (sec)

of a second of the timer to be started
when connection request is sent.
Valid range 1 ~ 4 seconds in 1 second
increments. Value of 0 indicates timer
not used.

13 T314 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 1~254 (sec) 4 (sec)

of a second of the timer to be started
when message segment is received.

14 T316 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths (T317+1)~254 (sec) 120 (sec)
of a second of the timer to be started
when RESTART is sent.

15 T317 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 1~(T316-1) 60 (sec)

of a second of the timer to be started
when RESTART is received.

16 T318 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 1~254 (sec) 4 (sec)

of a second of the timer to be started
when RES is sent. This timer is valid
for user side use only.

17 T319 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 1~254 (sec) 4 (sec)

of a second of the timer to be started
when SUSPEND is sent. This timer is
valid for user side use only.

18 T320 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 1~254 (sec) 30 (sec)

of a second when B-channel access:
connection is received, or D-channel
access: DL-ESTABLISH confirmation
or indication is received.

19 T321 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 1~254 (sec) 30 (sec)

of a second of the timer to be started
when STATUS ENQ is received.

20 T322 Specifies the timer value in 1/100ths 1~254 (sec) 4 (sec)

of a second upon D-channel failure.

Programming Manual 2 - 619

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

ISDN Compatibility

2 - 620 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Trunk Port to define the
CODEC (QSLAC) Filter for each analog trunk port.

Input Data

Trunk Number 1~200

CODEC Filter Type Default

0 = No filter
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 621

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup to define the basic timer setting of each
T1 Trunk type.

Item Name Input Data Default

01 Answer Signal Detection Time 1~250 15

(Loop) 60ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

02 Answer Signal Detection Time 1~250 15

(Ground) 60ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

03 Answer Signal Detection Time 1~250 15

(DID) 60ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

04 Answer Signal Detection Time 1~250 15

(E&M) 60ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

05 Answer Signal Detection Time 1~250 15

(OPX) 60ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

06 Clear Signal Detection Time 1~255 6

(Loop) 600ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

07 Clear Signal Detection Time 1~255 6

(Ground) 600ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

08 Clear Signal Detection Time 1~255 6

(DID) 600ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

09 Clear Signal Detection Time 1~255 6

(E&M) 600ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

10 Clear Signal Detection Time 1~255 6

(OPX) 600ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

11 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1~250 10

(Loop) 80ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

12 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1~250 10

(Ground) 80ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

13 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1~250 10

(DID) 80ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

2 - 622 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item Name Input Data Default

14 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1~250 10

(E&M) 80ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

15 Ringing Signal Detection Time 1~250 10

(OPX) 80ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

16 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1~255 50

Time (Loop) 5000ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

17 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1~255 50

Time (Ground) 5000ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

18 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1~255 50

Time (DID) 5000ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

19 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1~255 50

Time (E&M) 5000ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

20 Ringing Signal Stop Detection 1~255 50

Time (OPX) 5000ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

21 Loop Current Detection Time 1~250 40

(Loop) 160ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

22 Loop Current Detection Time 1~250 40

(Ground) 160ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

23 Loop Current Detection Time 1~250 40

(DID) 160ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

24 Loop Current Detection Time 1~250 40

(E&M) 160ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

25 Loop Current Detection Time 1~250 40

(OPX) 160ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

26 DP Break Send Time (ALL) 1~250 15

(4ms ~ 1000ms) 60ms

27 DP Make Send Time (ALL) 1~250 10

(4ms ~ 1000ms) 40ms

28 DP InterDigit Send Time (ALL) 1~255 7

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 700ms

29 HookFlash Send Time (Loop) 1~255 5

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 500ms

30 HookFlash Send Time (Ground) 1~255 5

(100ms ~ 25500ms ) 500ms

31 HookFlash Send Time (DID) 1~255 5

(100ms ~ 25500ms ) 500ms

32 HookFlash Send Time (E&M) 1~255 5

(100ms ~ 25500ms ) 500ms

Programming Manual 2 - 623

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Name Input Data Default

33 HookFlash Send Time (OPX) 1~255 5

(100ms ~ 25500ms ) 500ms

34 Pause Send Time (ALL) 1~255 3

(1sec ~ 255sec ) 3sec

35 Wink Send Duration Time (DID) 1~250 25

(8ms ~ 2000ms) 200ms

36 Delay Send Duration Time (DID) 1~250 25

(8ms ~ 2000ms) 200ms

37 Incoming-Wink Send Time (DID) 1~255 3

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 300ms

38 Wink Send Duration Time (E&M) 1~250 25

(8ms ~ 2000ms) 200ms

39 Delay Send Duration Time (E&M) 1~250 25

(8ms ~ 2000ms) 200ms

40 Incoming-Wink Send Time (E&M) 1~255 3

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 300ms

41 Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive 1~255 48

Max. Time (DID) 4800ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

42 Receive Wink Duration Min. Time 1~250 12

(DID) 96ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

43 Receive Wink Duration Max. 1~250 45

Time (DID) 360ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

44 Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive 1~255 48

Max. Time (E&M) 4800ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

45 Receive Wink Duration Min. Time 1~250 12

(E&M) 96ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

46 Receive Wink Duration Max. 1~250 45

Time (E&M) 360ms
(8ms ~ 2000ms)

47 Receive DP Make Min. Time 1~250 3

(ALL) 12ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

48 Receive DP Make Max. Time 1~250 19

(ALL) 76ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

49 Receive DP Break Min. Time 1~250 3

(ALL) 12ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

50 Receive DP Break Max. Time 1~250 25

ALL) 100ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

51 Receive DP InterDigit Min. Time 1~250 125

(ALL) 500ms
(4ms ~ 1000ms)

2 - 624 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item Name Input Data Default

52 Receive HookFlash Duration 1~255 3

Min. Time (E&M) 300ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

53 Receive HookFlash Duration 1~255 6

Max. Time (E&M) 600ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

54 Receive HookFlash Duration 1~255 3

Min. Time (OPX) 300ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

55 Receive HookFlash Duration 1~255 6

Max. Time (OPX) 600ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

56 Loop Off Guard Time (Loop) 1~255 20

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 2000ms

57 Loop Off Guard Time (Ground) 1~255 20

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 2000ms

58 Loop Off Guard Time (DID) 1~255 20

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 2000ms

59 Loop Off Guard Time (E&M) 1~255 20

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 2000ms

60 Loop Off Guard Time (OPX) 1~255 20

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 2000ms

61 Double Ringing Send Time 1 1~255 5

(OPX) 500ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

62 Double Between Ringing Send 1~255 5

Time 1 (OPX) 500ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

63 Double Ringing Send Time 2 1~255 25

(OPX) 2500ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

64 Double Between Ringing Send 1~255 30

Time 2 (OPX) 3000ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

65 Single Ringing Send Time (OPX) 1~255 10

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 1000ms

66 Receive DP Make Max. Time 1~255 9

(ALL) 900ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

67 Receive DP Break Min. Time 1~255 9

(ALL) 900ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

68 Receive DP Break Max. Time 1~255 9

ALL) 900ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

69 Single Between Ringing Send 1~255 9

Time (OPX) 900ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

70 Guard Time 1 (Loop) 1~255 9

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 900ms

Programming Manual 2 - 625

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Name Input Data Default

71 Guard Time 1 (Ground) 1~255 9

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 900ms

72 Guard Time 1 (DID) 1~250 3

(4ms ~ 1000ms) 12ms

73 Guard Time 1 (E&M) 1~255 20

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 2000ms

74 Guard Time 1 (OPX) 1~255 40

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 4000ms

75 Guard Time 2 (ALL) 1~250 6

(4ms ~ 1000ms) 600ms

76 Dial Sending Complete Time 1~255 6

(ALL) 600ms
(100ms ~ 25500ms)

77 ON-HOOK bit Send Time (ALL) 1~255 6

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 600ms

78 Open Loop Time (Loop) 1~255 6

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 600ms

79 Open Loop Time (Ground) 1~255 6

(100ms ~ 25500ms) 600ms

80 Open Loop Time (DID) 1~250 13

(4ms ~ 1000ms) 52ms

81 Open Loop Time (E&M) 1~250 13

(4ms ~ 1000ms) 52ms

82 Open Loop Time (OPX) 1~250 13

(4ms ~ 1000ms) 52ms

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 626 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 81-09 : COT CODEC (QSLAC) Filter Setting to define the filter setting
data (when Program 81-07 is set to 4).

Item Name Input Data Default

01 B1 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 42

02 B1 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 90

03 B1 Filter Setup(3) 0~255 162

04 B1 Filter Setup(4) 0~255 42

05 B1 Filter Setup(5) 0~255 18

06 B1 Filter Setup(6) 0~255 178

07 B1 Filter Setup(7) 0~255 220

08 B1 Filter Setup(8) 0~255 55

09 B1 Filter Setup(9) 0~255 163

10 B1 Filter Setup(10) 0~255 42

11 B1 Filter Setup(11) 0~255 51

12 B1 Filter Setup(12) 0~255 36

13 B1 Filter Setup(13) 0~255 210

14 B1 Filter Setup(14) 0~255 64

15 B2 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 52

16 B2 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 176

17 AISN and Analog Gains 0-255 0

18 Z Filter Coefficients(1) 0-255 34

19 Z Filter Coefficients(2) 0-255 172

20 Z Filter Coefficients(3) 0-255 178

21 Z Filter Coefficients(4) 0-255 164

Programming Manual 2 - 627

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Name Input Data Default

22 Z Filter Coefficients(5) 0-255 202

23 Z Filter Coefficients(6) 0-255 181

24 Z Filter Coefficients(7) 0-255 170

25 Z Filter Coefficients(8) 0-255 78

26 Z Filter Coefficients(9) 0-255 51

27 Z Filter Coefficients(10) 0-255 78

28 Z Filter Coefficients(11) 0-255 171

29 Z Filter Coefficients(12) 0-255 162

30 Z Filter Coefficients(13) 0-255 182

31 Z Filter Coefficients(14) 0-255 159

32 Z Filter Coefficients(15) 0-255 1

33 R Filter Coefficients(1) 0-255 179

34 R Filter Coefficients(2) 0-255 208

35 R Filter Coefficients(3) 0-255 227

36 R Filter Coefficients(4) 0-255 32

37 R Filter Coefficients(5) 0-255 171

38 R Filter Coefficients(6) 0-255 169

39 R Filter Coefficients(7) 0-255 60

40 R Filter Coefficients(8) 0-255 37

41 R Filter Coefficients(9) 0-255 179

42 R Filter Coefficients(10) 0-255 162

43 R Filter Coefficients(11) 0-255 179

44 R Filter Coefficients(12) 0-255 43

45 R Filter Coefficients(13) 0-255 167

46 R Filter Coefficients(14) 0-255 180

47 X Filter Coefficients(1) 0-255 202

48 X Filter Coefficients(2) 0-255 48

49 X Filter Coefficients(3) 0-255 170

50 X Filter Coefficients(4) 0-255 171

51 X Filter Coefficients(5) 0-255 42

52 X Filter Coefficients(6) 0-255 45

2 - 628 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item Name Input Data Default

53 X Filter Coefficients(7) 0-255 170

54 X Filter Coefficients(8) 0-255 164

55 X Filter Coefficients(9) 0-255 74

56 X Filter Coefficients(10) 0-255 159

57 X Filter Coefficients(11) 0-255 61

58 X Filter Coefficients(12) 0-255 79

59 GR Filter Coefficients(1) 0-255 171

60 GR Filter Coefficients(2) 0-255 65

61 GX Filter Coefficients(1) 0-255 194

62 GX Filter Coefficients(2) 0-255 224

Conditions

This is used if Program 81-07 is set to 4 (Specified data).

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 629

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2 - 630 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk

 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone to set the incoming ring tones, which
are the tones a user hears when a call rings an extension. These tones are
grouped into four ring tone Ranges (1~4), also called patterns, that consist of a Program
combination of frequencies. (You assign a specific Range to trunks in Program
22-03 and to extensions in Program 15-02.) Within each Range there are three
frequency Types: High, Middle and Low. (Service Code 720 allows users to
choose the Type for their incoming calls.) Each Type in turn consists of two
frequencies and the modulation played simultaneously to make up the tone.
82
These frequencies are determined by their Frequency Number selected in
Items 1 and 2 (see below). In this program, you assign the two Frequency
Numbers and Modulation for each Type, for each of the four Ranges. The
chart below shows the default Frequency Numbers for each Type in each
Range.

Input Data

Incoming Ringing Tone Number 1 = Pattern 1 (Trunk Incoming)

2 = Pattern 2 (Trunk Incoming)
3 = Pattern 3 (Trunk Incoming)
4 = Pattern 4 (Trunk Incoming)
5 = Intercom Incoming Pattern
6 = Alarm Sensor Tone Pattern

Ringing Tone Type Number 1 = High

2 = Mid
3 = Low

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Frequency 1 1 = 520Hz
2 = 540Hz
02 Frequency 2
3 = 660Hz
4 = 760Hz
5 = 1100Hz
6 = 1400Hz
7 = 2000Hz

Programming Manual 2 - 631

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item
Item Input Data
No.

03 Modulation 0 = No Modulation
1 = 8Hz Modulation
2 = 16Hz Modulation
3 = Envelope

Default
Incoming Ringing Tone Tone Frequency 1 Frequency 2
Modulation
Number Type (Hz) (Hz)

Pattern 1 High 1100 1400 16Hz Modulation

(Trunk Incoming) Mid 660 760 16Hz Modulation
Low 520 660 16Hz Modulation

Pattern 2 High 1100 1400 8Hz Modulation

(Trunk Incoming) Mid 660 760 8Hz Modulation
Low 520 660 8Hz Modulation

Pattern 3 High 2000 760 16Hz Modulation

(Trunk Incoming) Mid 1400 660 16Hz Modulation
Low 1100 540 16Hz Modulation

Pattern 4 High 2000 760 8Hz Modulation

(Trunk Incoming) Mid 1400 660 8Hz Modulation
Low 1100 540 8Hz Modulation

Pattern 5 High 1100 1400 8Hz Modulation

Intercom Incoming Pattern Mid 660 760 8Hz Modulation
Low 520 660 8Hz Modulation

Pattern 6 High 760 760 No Modulation

Alarm Sensor Pattern Mid 760 760 No Modulation
Low 760 760 No Modulation

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns
Selectable Ring Tones

2 - 632 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup to define the LED patterns for
special functions on a DSS console.

Input Data

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 ACD Log In 0~7 1

02 ACD Log Out 0~7 4

03 ACD Emergency Call 0~7 3

LED Pattern 0 : [OFF]

On
Off

LED Pattern 1 : [FL: On(500ms)/Off(500ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 2 : [WK: On(250ms)/Off(250ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 3 : [RW: On(125ms)/Off(125ms)]

On
Off

Programming Manual 2 - 633

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

LED Pattern 4 : [IR: On(125ms)/Off(125ms)/On(125ms)/Off(625ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 5 : [IL: On(875ms)/Off(125ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 6 : [IW: On(625ms)/Off(125ms)/On(125ms)/Off(125ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 7 : [ON]

On
Off

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Station Selection (DSS)

2 - 634 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-04 : LCA Initial Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 82-04 : LCA Initial Data Setup to set the basic data of the LCA.

Input Data

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Companding Method Type 0 = u-law 1

1 = A-law

02 Ringing Frequency 0 = 25Hz 0 (25Hz)

1 = 20Hz
2 = 16Hz

03 Minimum Break Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 2 (10ms)

04 Maximum Break Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 20(100ms)

05 Minimum Make Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 2 (10ms)

06 Maximum Make Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 20 (100ms)

07 Minimum Hook Flash Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 21 (105ms)

08 Maximum Hook Flash Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 200 (1000ms)

09 Minimum Ground Flash Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 21 (105ms)

10 Minimum Off-Hook Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 21 (105ms)

11 No Detection Time after Off-Hook 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 60 (300ms)

12 No Detection Time after Pulse Dial 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 70 (350ms)

Detection

13 Loop Disconnect Time, Reversal 1~255 (10ms~2550ms) 60 (600ms)

Time

14 Ring, Message Wait Period Time 1~255 (5ms~1275ms) 150 (750ms)

Programming Manual 2 - 635

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 636 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analog Station Port to set the filter
value of the CODEC (QSLAC) filter of each analog port.

Input Data

Station Port Number 1~ 384

CODEC Filter Type Default

0 = No filter
1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Direct Station Selection (DSS)

Programming Manual 2 - 637

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-09 : LCA CODEC Filter Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 82-09 : LCA CODEC Filter Data Setup to define the filter setting data
(when Program 82-07 is set to 4).

Input Data

Item Name Input Data Default

01 B1 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 58

02 B1 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 242

03 B1 Filter Setup(3) 0~255 191

04 B1 Filter Setup(4) 0~255 44

05 B1 Filter Setup(5) 0~255 90

06 B1 Filter Setup(6) 0~255 165

07 B1 Filter Setup(7) 0~255 168

08 B1 Filter Setup(8) 0~255 123

09 B1 Filter Setup(9) 0~255 159

10 B1 Filter Setup(10) 0~255 185

11 B1 Filter Setup(11) 0~255 246

12 B1 Filter Setup(12) 0~255 159

13 B1 Filter Setup(13) 0~255 201

14 B1 Filter Setup(14) 0~255 240

15 B2 Filter Setup(1) 0~255 221

16 B2 Filter Setup(2) 0~255 1

17 AISN and Analog Gains 0-255 21

18 Z Filter Coefficients(1) 0-255 163

19 Z Filter Coefficients(2) 0-255 201

20 Z Filter Coefficients(3) 0-255 36

21 Z Filter Coefficients(4) 0-255 163

2 - 638 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item Name Input Data Default

22 Z Filter Coefficients(5) 0-255 59

23 Z Filter Coefficients(6) 0-255 194

24 Z Filter Coefficients(7) 0-255 196

25 Z Filter Coefficients(8) 0-255 195

26 Z Filter Coefficients(9) 0-255 170

27 Z Filter Coefficients(10) 0-255 43

28 Z Filter Coefficients(11) 0-255 38

29 Z Filter Coefficients(12) 0-255 193

30 Z Filter Coefficients(13) 0-255 163

31 Z Filter Coefficients(14) 0-255 188

32 Z Filter Coefficients(15) 0-255 1

33 R Filter Coefficients(1) 0-255 46

34 R Filter Coefficients(2) 0-255 1

35 R Filter Coefficients(3) 0-255 1

36 R Filter Coefficients(4) 0-255 17

37 R Filter Coefficients(5) 0-255 1

38 R Filter Coefficients(6) 0-255 144

39 R Filter Coefficients(7) 0-255 1

40 R Filter Coefficients(8) 0-255 144

41 R Filter Coefficients(9) 0-255 1

42 R Filter Coefficients(10) 0-255 144

43 R Filter Coefficients(11) 0-255 1

44 R Filter Coefficients(12) 0-255 144

45 R Filter Coefficients(13) 0-255 1

46 R Filter Coefficients(14) 0-255 144

47 X Filter Coefficients(1) 0-255 37

48 X Filter Coefficients(2) 0-255 64

49 X Filter Coefficients(3) 0-255 83

50 X Filter Coefficients(4) 0-255 171

51 X Filter Coefficients(5) 0-255 42

Programming Manual 2 - 639

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item Name Input Data Default

52 X Filter Coefficients(6) 0-255 135

53 X Filter Coefficients(7) 0-255 35

54 X Filter Coefficients(8) 0-255 52

55 X Filter Coefficients(9) 0-255 71

56 X Filter Coefficients(10) 0-255 172

57 X Filter Coefficients(11) 0-255 43

58 X Filter Coefficients(12) 0-255 197

59 GR Filter Coefficients(1) 0-255 66

60 GR Filter Coefficients(2) 0-255 97

61 GX Filter Coefficients(1) 0-255 162

62 GX Filter Coefficients(2) 0-255 176

Conditions

This is used if Program 82-07 is set to 4 (Specified data).

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 640 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

82-14 : Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line Telephone
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 82-14: Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi Line Telephone to
define the Handset/Headset Gain Level for Multi Line Telephone.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to 8 digits

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Handset/Headset Transmit Gain 0 = Fixed (6: +6.5dB) 0

level 1-32 = LR value:
-3.5....+58.5dB

02 Handset/Headset Receive Gain 0 = Fixed (15: +4.0dB) 0

level
1-32 = LR value:
-24.....+38.0dB

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 641

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2 - 642 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension

 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-01 : H.323 Trunk Basic Information Setup to set the basic
information of the H.323 Trunk.
Program
Input Data

84
Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

02 Number of G.711 audio frames 1~4 3

03 G.711 VAD mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

04 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 0

1 = u-law

05 Number of G.729 audio frames 1~6 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms
6 = 60ms

06 G.729 VAD mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

07 G.729 Jitter Buffer( min) 0~270ms 30

08 G.729 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~270ms 60

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~270ms 120

11 Number of G.723 audio frames 1~2 1

12 G.723 VAD mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

13 --- Not Used ---

Programming Manual 2 - 643

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

15 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Fixed 3

2 = Self adjusting (silence period)
3 = Self adjusting

16 G.711 Jitter Buffer( min) 0~160 30

17 G.711 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~160 60

18 G.711 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160 120

19 G.723 Jitter Buffer( min) 0~270 30

20 G.723 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~270 60

21 G.723 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~270 120

22 VAD Threshold 0~30 (-19db~ +10db and self 20

adjustment)
0 = Self adjustment
1 = -19db (-49dbm)
:
20 = 0db (-30dbm)
:
29 = 9db (-21dbm)
30 = 10db (-20dbm)

23 Idle Noise Level -5000dbm ~ -7000dbm 7000

24 Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

25 Signal Limiter 1 = Mode 0 6

2 = Mode 1
3 = Mode 2
4 = Mode 3
5 = Mode 4
6 = Mode 5

26 Echo Canceller NLP Mode 0 = 2 wire and 4 wire 1

1 = 2 wire only

28 Echo Canceller NLP Noise 0 = Automatic level adjustment 0

Setting
1 = Fixed level

30 TX Gain 0~40 (-20dbm~ +20dbm) 20

31 RX Gain 0~40 (-20dbm~ +20dbm) 20

33 Priority CODEC setting 0~3 0

Priority of voice encoding 0 = G.711
method. 1 = G.723
2 = G.729
3 = G.722

2 - 644 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

34 --- Not Used ---

35 --- Not Used ---

36 The Maximum FAX 0 = V.27ter, 2400bps 5

Transmission Rate
1 = V.27ter, 4800bps
2 = V.29, 7200bps
3 = V.29, 9600bps
4 = V.17, 12000bps
5 = V.17, 14400bps

37 FAX FIFO Considering Delay 0~600ms 300

Time

38 Size of FAX Packet 20~48 bytes 20

39 FAX Modem Transmission 0~13 (0dBm ~ -13dBm) 9

Level

40 FAX Modem Carrier Signal 0 = -26dBm 1

Detection Threshold
1 = -33dBm
2 = -43dBm

41 FAX Communication no 10~32000 seconds 30

Communication Time-Out

43 High-speed Signal Data (fax 1 = 10ms 4

picture signal) Packet Length
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

44 Low-speed Signal Data (FAX 0~5 0

Procedure Signal)

45 High-speed Signal Data (FAX 0~2 0

Procedure Signal)

46 TCF Operation Setting 1 = Training signal (TCF) of the fax 1

is locally generated and checked.
2 = Training signal (TCF) of the fax
is sent over the network.

47 The Maximum, Low-speed 1~65535 bytes 1

Signal Data (Size of Packet)

48 Network Transmission Time- 10~32000 seconds 150

out

49 Eflag Beginning Timer 0~65535 2600

50 Eflag Stop Timer 0~65535 2300

51 The Former Line Substitution 0 = Disable 1

of Scanning Line 1 = Enable
(FAX Relay item)

Programming Manual 2 - 645

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

52 Eflag Setting at Head DIS 1

(FAX Relay item)

53 TFOP Protocol 1
(FAX Relay item)
0 = Disable
54 NSF Superscription 1 = Enable 0
(FAX Relay item)

55 ECM (Error Correction Mode) 1

56 Enable Modified Read Code 1

57 NSF Country Code Setting 0

0~65535
58 NSF Vendor Code Setting 0

59 FAX Relay Function 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable
2 = Each port mode

60 --- Not Used ---

61 Auto Gain Control 0~5 0

62 DTMF Relay Mode 0 = VoIP 0

Set up information of VoIP is set 1 = RFC2833
by PRG 84-06-10. 2 = H.245
3 = Disable

63 Number of G.722 audio frames 1~4 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

64 G.722 Voice Activity Detection 0 = Disable 0

Mode
1 = Enable

65 G.722 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 30

66 G.722 Jitter Buffer (average) 0~160ms 60

67 G.722 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 120

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2 - 646 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-02 : H.225 and H.245 Information Basic Setup to define the basic
setup information of H.225 and H.245.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 H.225 0~255sec 180

02 H.225 Setup Acknowledge Timer 0~255sec 9

03 H.225 Setup Timer 0~255sec 4

04 H.225 Info Ack Timer 0~255sec 9

05 H.225 Call Proceeding Timer 0~255sec 10

07 H.245 Master Slave Determination Timer 0~255sec 5

08 H.245 Master Slave Determination Retry Count 0~255sec 3

09 H.245 Capability Exchange Timer 0~255sec 5

10 H.245 Logical Channel Establishment Timer 0~255sec 50

11 H.245 Mode Request Procedures Timer 0~255sec 50

12 H.245 Close Logical Channel Timer 0~255sec 50

13 H.245 Round Trip Delay Timer 0~255sec 50

14 H.245 Maintenance Loop 0~255sec 50

15 RAS GRQ Timer 0~255sec 5

16 GRQ Retry Count 0~255 2

17 RAS RRQ Timer 0~255sec 5

18 RRQ Retry Count 0~255 3

19 RAS URQ Timer 0~255sec 3

20 URQ Retry Count 0~255 1

21 RAS ARQ Timer 0~255sec 5

Programming Manual 2 - 647

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

22 ARQ Retry Count 0~255 2

23 RAS BRQ Timer 0~255sec 5

24 BRQ Retry Count 0~255 2

25 RAS IRR Timer 0~255sec 5

26 IRR Retry Count 0~255 2

27 RAS DRQ Timer 0~255sec 8

28 DRQ Retry Count 0~255 2

29 RAS LRQ Timer 0~255sec 5

30 LRQ Retry Count 0~255 2

31 RAS RAI Timer 0~255sec 3

32 RAI Retry Count 0~255 2

33 Call Signaling Port Number 0~65535: 1730

0~1719,
1721~65535

35 Fast Start Mode 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable0

36 RAS Unicast Port Number 0~65535 20001

37 Terminal Type setting 0~255 60

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2 - 648 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-03 : IP Phone Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-03 : IP Phone Information Basic Setup to define the details of
DtermIP.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 NGT Signal Receive Port Number 0-65535 3458

Define the receiving port for IP control protocol

02 DRS Port Number 0-65535 3456

Define the port number for the Device
Registeration Server.

06 Area Number 0 = Japan 3

1 = USA
2 = Australia
3 = EU
4 = Asia
5 = Other Country
6 = Germany
7 = Italy
8 = Netherlands
9 = Austria
10 = Belgium
11 = Spain
12 = Sweden
13 = UK
14 = Denmark
15 = Greece
16 = Switzerland
17 = RSA
18 = New Zealand

07 Type of Service Mode 1: Invalid 1

Set the type of service (ToS) mode. 2: IP Precedence
3: Diffserve

Programming Manual 2 - 649

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 Type of service 0x00-0xff C0

This data will be sent to NGT Terminal when (use line keys 1-6
NGT Terminal is registered. for letters A-F)

09 Start Port 1-512 1

This entry indicates the starting port number for
IP terminals.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2 - 650 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-07 : Firmware Download Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-07 : Firmware Download Setup to configure the settings related to
Central Firmware Download for IP Phones.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Server Mode 0 = TFTP 0

1 = FTP

02 File Server IP Address 0.0.0.0~126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

128.0.0.1~191.255255.254
192.0.1.1~223.255.254.254

03 Login Name Up to 20 Characters None

04 Password Up to 20 Characters None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 651

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-08 : Firmware Name Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-08 : Firmware Name Setup to set up the directory and filename for
the firmware that is downloaded to IP phones.

Input Data

Terminal Type 1 = IP Terminal

2 = IP Adapter

Input Data

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Firmware Directory Up to 64 Characters None

02 Firmware File Name Up to 30 Characters None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 652 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-09 : VLAN Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-09 : VLAN Setup to set up the VLAN data.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 VLAN 0 = Disable (Off) 0

(Future Use) 1 = Enable (On)

02 VLAN ID 1~4094 0
(Future Use)

03 Priority 0~7 0
(Future Use)

Conditions

System programming must be exited before these program options take affect.

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

Programming Manual 2 - 653

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-10 : ToS Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-10 : ToS Setup to set up the Type of Service data.

Input Data

Protocol Type 1 = DRS

2 = Protims
3 = Voice Control
4 = H.323
5 = RTP/RTCP
6 = SIP
7 = CCISoIP
8 = DT700 MLT
9 = SIP Trunk
10 = NetLink

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 ToS Mode 0 = Disable (Invalid) 0 When Input Data is set to 1,

1 = IP Precedence Item No. 07 is invalid.
2 = Diffserv When Data is set to 2, Item
No. 02 ~ 06 are invalid.

02 Priority, IP Precedence 0~7 0 1 = Router queuing priority

0 = Low
7 = High

03 Low Delay 0~1 0 1 = Optimize for low delay

0 = Normal Delay, Low routing
Delay

04 Wideband 0~1 0 1 = Optimize for high

(Throughout) 0 = Normal Throughput bandwidth routing
1 = High Throughput

05 High Reliability 0~1 0 1 = Optimize for reliability

0 = Normal Reliability routing
1 = Low Reliability

07 Priority (D.S.C.P. - 0~63 0 DSCP (Differentiated

Differentiated Services Services Code Point)
Code Point)

2 - 654 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions

The system must be reset for these program options to take affect.

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

Programming Manual 2 - 655

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-11 : Dterm ® IP CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-11 : Dterm IP CODEC Information Basic Setup to set voice (RTP
packet) encoding parameters.

Input Data

Type 1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Number of G.711 Audio Frame 1 = 10 ms 3

Maximum number of G711 Audio 2 = 20 ms
Frames. When the voice is encoded 3 = 30 ms
using the PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) 4 = 40 ms
method, a unit is a frame of 10ms.

02 G.711 Silence Detection (VAD) Mode 0 = Disable 0

Select whether to compress silence with 1 = Enable
G.711. When there is silence, the RTP
packet is not sent.

03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 0

Set the type of G.711. 1 = µ-law

04 G.711 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0-160 ms 30

Set the minimum value of the G.711 Jitter
Buffer.
Moreover, this option is adjusted with the
SV8100 as it is used by both IP terminals
and the IPLA and the range of the
adjustment of Jitter for the IP terminal is
narrower and transmitted to the IP
terminal. The range of IP terminal is 10-
300 (10).

2 - 656 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

05 G.711 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0-160 ms 60

Set the average value of the G.711 Jitter
Buffer.
Moreover, this option is adjusted with the
SV8100 as it is used by both IP terminals
and the IPLA and the range of the
adjustment of Jitter for the IP terminal is
narrower and transmitted to the IP
terminal. The range of IP terminal is 10-
300 (10).

06 G.711 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0-160 ms 120

Set the maximum value of the G.711
Jitter Buffer.
Moreover, this option is adjusted with the
SV8100 as it is used by both IP terminals
and the IPLA and the range of the
adjustment of Jitter for the IP terminal is
narrower and transmitted to the IP
terminal. The range of IP terminal is 10-
300 (10).

07 G.729 Audio Frame 1 = 10ms 3

Maximum number of G729 Audio 2 = 20ms
Frames. G.729 assumes the audio signal 3 = 30ms
made by a specimen by 8kHz and the 4 = 40ms
frame of 10ms is assumed to be a unit to 5 = 50ms
8kbps by the encoding compressed
6 = 60ms
method.

08 G.729 Silence Compression (VAD) 0 = Disable 0

Mode 1 = Enable
Select whether to compress silence with
G.729. When there is silence, the RTP
packet is not sent.

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0-270 ms 30

Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer
of G.729 is set. Jitter is the variation in the
time between packets arriving and the
buffer allows this variation to be
absorbed.
Moreover, this option is adjusted with the
SV8100 as it is used by both IP terminals
and the IPLA and the range of the
adjustment of Jitter for the IP terminal is
narrower and transmitted to the IP
terminal. The range of IP terminal is 10-
300 (10).

Programming Manual 2 - 657

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

10 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0-270 ms 60

Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer.
Moreover, this option is adjusted with the
SV8100 as it is used by both IP terminals
and the IPLA and the range of the
adjustment of Jitter for the IP terminal is
narrower and transmitted to the IP
terminal. The range of IP terminal is 10-
300 (10).

11 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0-270 ms 120

Set the maximum G.729 Jitter Buffer.
Moreover, this option is adjusted with the
SV8100 as it is used by both IP terminals
and the IPLA and the range of the
adjustment of Jitter for the IP terminal is
narrower and transmitted to the IP
terminal. The range of IP terminal is 10-
300 (10).

12 Number of G.723 Audio Frame 1 = 30 msec 1

Maximum number of the G.723 Audio 2 = 60 msec
Frame (corresponds to 5.3kbps ACELP
method).

13 G.723 Silence Compression (VAD) 0 = Disable 0

Mode 1 = Enable
If enabled, RTP packets are not sent for
the compressed silence.

14 G.723 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0-270 ms 30

Set the minimum value of the G.723 Jitter
Buffer.
Moreover, this option is adjusted with the
SV8100 as it is used by both IP terminals
and the IPLA and the range of the
adjustment of Jitter for the IP terminal is
narrower and transmitted to the IP
terminal. The range of IP terminal is 10-
300 (10).

15 G.723 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0-270 ms 60

Set the average value of the G.723 Jitter
Buffer.
Moreover, this option is adjusted with the
SV8100 as it is used by both IP terminals
and the IPLA and the range of the
adjustment of Jitter for the IP terminal is
narrower and transmitted to the IP
terminal. The range of IP terminal is 10-
300 (10).

2 - 658 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

16 G.723 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0-270 ms 120

Set the maximum value of the G.723
Jitter Buffer.
Moreover, this option is adjusted with the
SV8100 as it is used by both IP terminals
and the IPLA and the range of the
adjustment of Jitter for the IP terminal is
narrower and transmitted to the IP
terminal. The range of IP terminal is 10-
300 (10).

17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = static 3

Set the mode of the Jitter Buffer. 2 = adaptive during
1 = Size set to the fixed (standard) silence
amount for the codec. 3 = adaptive
2 = The minimum/maximum range for
immediately
the codec is used.
3 = The minimum/maximum range for
the codec is used and adjusts at
any time, regardless of silence.

18 Silence Compression (VAD) Threshold 0-30 20

Set the voice level judged to be silence. (self-adjustment and
Voice level compression -3dB of the -19db ~ +10db)
standard level is determined to be 0 = self-adjustment
silence. Change value based .30dB 1:-19db (-49dbm)
This entry is ignored if silence
:
compression is disabled in 84-01-03 with
G.711, or 84-01-06 with G.729. 20 = 0db (-30dbm)
(VAD=Voice Activity Detection) :
29 = 9dbm (-21dbm)
30:10dbm (-20dbm)

19 Idle Noise Level 5000-7000 7000

Set the noise level which is generated (-5000 ~ -7000dbm)
when silent. 5000 = -5000dbm
:
7000 = -7000dbm

20 Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1

Determine whether or not to use Echo 1 = Enable
canceller.

21 Signal Limiter 1 = Mode0 6

Set the Signal Limiter Mode. 2 = Mode1
3 = Mode2
4 = Mode3
5 = Mode4
6 = Mode5

Programming Manual 2 - 659

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

22 Echo Canceller NLP Mode 0 = 2 wire & 4 wire 1

Non-linear processing mode. 1 = 2 wire only
Enable this option to decrease the low
level echo. When NLP is enabled, the
voice with low level is replacecd with NLP
noise. As a result, a low echo of the level
is usually removed compared with the
conversation level.

23 --- Not Used ---

24 Echo Canceller NLP Noise Setting 0 = adaptive 0

Becomes invalid item if 84-11-22 is set to 1 = fixed
Disabled.
Set the noise level adjusting method
added with NLP.
When “0” is set, the level is self-adjusted
- when “1” is set, Program 84-11-23 is
used.

25 --- Not Used ---

26 TX (Transmit) Gain 0-40 (-20 ~ +20) 20

Define the setting to amplify and to 0 = -20 dbm (0 dbm)
attenuate the size of the transmission 1 = -19 dbm
voice. The gain given when the voice :
packet is sent from the VOIPDB is set. 20 = 0 dbm
:
39 = 19 dbm
40 = 20 dbm

27 RX (Receive) Gain 0-40 (-20 ~ +20) 20

Define the setting to amplify and to 0 = -20 dbm (0 dbm)
attenuate the size of the received voice. 1 = -19 dbm
The gain given when the voice packet is :
received from the VOIPDB is set. 20 = 0 dbm
:
39 = 19 dbm
40 = 20 dbm

28 Priority Codec Setting 0 = G711 PT 0

The option selected here determines 1 = G723 PT
what other codec options are applied by 2 = G729 PT
priority.

30 Echo Auto Gain Control 0-5 0

2 - 660 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

Programming Manual 2 - 661

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-12 : Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-12: Networking CODEC Information Basic Setup to define the
CODEC Information for Networking.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of G.711 Audio Frame 1 = 10 ms 3

Maximum number of G711 Audio 2 = 20 ms
Frames. When the voice is 3 = 30 ms
encoded using the PCM (Pulse 4 = 40 ms
Code Modulation) method, a unit is
a frame of 10ms.

02 G.711 Silence Detection (VAD) 0 = Disable 0

Mode
1 = Enable
Select whether to compress silence
with G.711. When there is silence,
the RTP packet is not sent.

03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 0

Set the type of G.711. 1 = µ-law

04 G.711 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0~160 ms 30

Set the minimum value of the G.711
Jitter Buffer.

05 G.711 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0~160 ms 60

Set the average value of the G.711
Jitter Buffer.

06 G.711 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0~160 ms 120

Set the maximum value of the
G.711 Jitter Buffer.

07 G.729 Audio Frame 1-6 3

Maximum number of G729 Audio (1 = 10ms, 2 = 20ms, etc.)
Frames. G.729 assumes the audio
signal made by a specimen by
8kHz and the frame of 10ms is
assumed to be a unit to 8kbps by
the encoding compressed method.

2 - 662 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 G.729 Silence Compression 0 = Disable 0

(VAD) Mode
1 = Enable
Select whether to compress silence
with G.729. When there is silence,
the RTP packet is not sent.

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0-270 ms 30

Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of G.729 is set. Jitter is the
variation in the time between
packets arriving and the buffer
allows this variation to be
absorbed.

10 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0-270 ms 60

Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer.

11 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0-270 ms 120

Set the maximum G.729 Jitter
Buffer.

12 Number of G.723 Audio Frame 1 = 30 msec 1

Maximum number of the G.723 2 = 60 msec
Audio Frame.

13 G.723 Silence Compression 0 = Disable 0

(VAD) Mode
1 = Enable
If enabled, RTP packets are not
sent for the compressed silence.

14 G.723 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0~270 ms 30

Set the minimum value of the
G.723 Jitter Buffer.

15 G.723 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0~270 ms 60

Set the average value of the G.723
Jitter Buffer.

16 G.723 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0~270 ms 120

Set the maximum value of the
G.723 Jitter Buffer.

17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = static 3

Set the mode of the Jitter Buffer. 2 = adaptive during
1 = Size set to the fixed amount silence
for the codec. 3 = adaptive immediately
2 = The minimum/maximum
range for the codec is used.
3 = The minimum/maximum
range for the codec is used
and adjusts at any time,
regardless of silence.

Programming Manual 2 - 663

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

18 Silence Compression (VAD) 0-30 20

Threshold
(self-adjustment and
Set the voice level judged to be -19db ~ +10db)
silence. 0 = self-adjustment
Change value based .30
1:-19db (-49dbm)
This entry is ignored if silence
compression is disabled in 84-01- :
03 with G.711, or 84-01-06 with 20 = 0db (-30dbm)
G.729. :
29 = 9dbm (-21dbm)
30:10dbm (-20dbm)

19 Idle Noise Level 5000-7000 7000

Set the noise level which is (-5000 ~ -7000dbm)
generated when silent. 5000 = -5000dbm
:
7000 = -7000dbm

20 Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1

Determine whether or not to use 1 = Enable
Echo canceller.

21 Signal limiter 1 = Mode0 6

Set the Signal Limiter Mode. 2 = Mode1
3 = Mode2
4 = Mode3
5 = Mode4
6 = Mode5

22 Echo Canceller NLP Mode 0 = 2 wire & 4 wire 1

Non-linear processing mode. 1 = 2 wire only
Enable this option to decrease the
low level echo. When NLP is
enabled, the voice with low level is
replacecd with NLP noise. As a
result, a low echo of the level is
usually removed compared with the
conversation level.

23 --- Not Used ---

24 Echo Canceller NLP Noise 0 = adaptive 0

Setting
1 = fixed
Becomes invalid item if 84-12-22 is
set to Disabled.
Set the noise level adjusting
method added with NLP.
When “0” is set, the level is self-
adjusted - when “1” is set, Program
84-13-23 is used.

25 - Not Used - - -

2 - 664 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

26 TX (Transmit) Gain 0-40 (-20 ~ +20) 20 (0 dbm)

Define the setting to amplify and to 0 = -20 dbm
attenuate the size of the 1 = -19 dbm
transmission voice. The gain given :
when the voice packet is sent from 20 = 0 dbm
the VOIPDB is set.
:
39 = 19 dbm
40 = 20 dbm

27 RX (Receive) Gain 0-40 (-20~+20) 20 (0 dbm)

Define the setting to amplify and to 0 = -20 dbm
attenuate the size of the received 1 = -19 dbm
voice. The gain given when the :
voice packet is received from the 20 = 0 dbm
VOIPDB is set.
:
39 = 19 dbm
40 = 20 dbm

28 Priority Codec Setting 0 = G711 PT 0

The option selected here 1 = G723 PT
determines what other codec 2 = G729 PT
options are applied by priority. 3 = G.722 PT

30 EchoAuto Gain Control 0-5 0

Define the Auto Gain Control.

31 DTMF Relay Mode 0 = Disable 2

The initial setup information for the 1 = RFC2833
VOIPU is set in Program 84-27-02. 2 = VoIPU
If this option is set to either 0 or 1,
priority is given.

32 FAX Relay Mode 0 = Disable 0

Select "2" for FAX Relay to SLT 1 = Enable
(Program 15-03-03:special), Trunk 2 = Each Port Mode
and NetLink.
Refer to Program 84-01-36 through
84-01-58 for FAX Relay options.

33 G.722 Audio Frame 1 = 10 ms 3

Maximum number of G.722 Audio 2 = 20 ms
Frames. G.722 assumes the audio 3 = 30 ms
signal made by a specimen by 4 = 40 ms
16kHz and the frame of 10ms is
assumed to be a unit to 64kbps by
the encoding compressed method.

Programming Manual 2 - 665

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

34 G.722 Silence Compression 0 = Disable 0

Mode
1 = Enable
Select whether to compress silence
with G.722. When there is silence,
the RTP packet is not sent.

35 G.722 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0-160 ms 30

Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of G.722 is set. Jitter is the
variation in the time between
packets arriving and the buffer
allows this variation to be
absorbed.

36 G.722 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0-160 ms 60

Set the average G.722 Jitter Buffer.

37 G.722 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0-160 ms 120

Set the maximum G.722 Jitter
Buffer.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2 - 666 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-13 : SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup to set up the
basic CODEC options for SIP trunks.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of G.711 Audio Frame 1 = 10 ms 2

Maximum number of G711 Audio 2 = 20 ms
Frames. When the voice is 3 = 30 ms
encoded using the PCM (Pulse 4 = 40 ms
Code Modulation) method, a unit is
a frame of 10ms.

02 G.711 Silence Detection (VAD) 0 = Disable 0

Mode
1 = Enable
Select whether to compress silence
with G.711. When there is silence,
the RTP packet is not sent.

03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 0

Set the type of G.711. 1 = µ-law

04 G.711 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0~160 ms 20

Set the minimum value of the G.711
Jitter Buffer.

05 G.711 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0~160 ms 40

Set the average value of the G.711
Jitter Buffer.

06 G.711 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0~160 ms 80

Set the maximum value of the
G.711 Jitter Buffer.

07 G.729 Audio Frame 1-6 2

Maximum number of G729 Audio (1 = 10ms, 2 = 20ms, etc.)
Frames. G.729 assumes the audio
signal made by a specimen by
8kHz and the frame of 10ms is
assumed to be a unit to 8kbps by
the encoding compressed method.

Programming Manual 2 - 667

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 G.729 Silence Compression 0 = Disable 0

(VAD) Mode
1 = Enable
Select whether to compress silence
with G.729. When there is silence,
the RTP packet is not sent.

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0-270 ms 20

Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of G.729 is set. Jitter is the
variation in the time between
packets arriving and the buffer
allows this variation to be
absorbed.

10 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0-270 ms 40

Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer.

11 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0-270 ms 80

Set the maximum G.729 Jitter
Buffer.

12 Number of G.723 Audio Frame 1 = 30 msec 1

Maximum number of the G.723 2 = 60 msec
Audio Frame.

13 G.723 Silence Compression 0 = Disable 0

(VAD) Mode
1 = Enable
If enabled, RTP packets are not
sent for the compressed silence.

14 G.723 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0~270 ms 30

Set the minimum value of the
G.723 Jitter Buffer.

15 G.723 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0~270 ms 60

Set the average value of the G.723
Jitter Buffer.

16 G.723 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0~270 ms 120

Set the maximum value of the
G.723 Jitter Buffer.

17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = static 3

Set the mode of the Jitter Buffer. 2 = adaptive during
1 = Size set to the fixed amount silence
for the codec. 3 = adaptive immediately
2 = The minimum/maximum
range for the codec is used.
3 = The minimum/maximum
range for the codec is used
and adjusts at any time,
regardless of silence.

2 - 668 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

18 Silence Compression (VAD) 0-30 20

Threshold
(self-adjustment and
Set the voice level judged to be -19db ~ +10db)
silence. 0 = self-adjustment
Change value based .30
1:-19db (-49dbm)
This entry is ignored if silence
compression is disabled in 84-01- :
03 with G.711, or 84-01-06 with 20 = 0db (-30dbm)
G.729. :
29 = 9dbm (-21dbm)
30:10dbm (-20dbm)

19 Idle Noise Level 5000-7000 7000

Set the noise level which is (-5000 ~ -7000dbm)
generated when silent. 5000 = -5000dbm
:
7000 = -7000dbm

20 Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1

Determine whether or not to use 1 = Enable
Echo canceller.

21 Signal limiter 1 = Mode0 6

Set the Signal Limiter Mode. 2 = Mode1
3 = Mode2
4 = Mode3
5 = Mode4
6 = Mode5

22 Echo Canceller NLP Mode 0 = 2 wire & 4 wire 1

Non-linear processing mode. 1 = 2 wire only
Enable this option to decrease the
low level echo. When NLP is
enabled, the voice with low level is
replacecd with NLP noise. As a
result, a low echo of the level is
usually removed compared with the
conversation level.

23 --- Not Used ---

24 Echo Canceller NLP Noise 0 = adaptive 0

Setting
1 = fixed
Becomes invalid item if 84-12-22 is
set to Disabled.
Set the noise level adjusting
method added with NLP.
When “0” is set, the level is self-
adjusted - when “1” is set, Program
84-13-23 is used.

25 - Not Used - - -

Programming Manual 2 - 669

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

26 TX (Transmit) Gain 0-40 (-20 ~ +20) 20 (0 dbm)

Define the setting to amplify and to 0 = -20 dbm
attenuate the size of the 1 = -19 dbm
transmission voice. The gain given :
when the voice packet is sent from 20 = 0 dbm
the VOIPDB is set.
:
39 = 19 dbm
40 = 20 dbm

27 RX (Receive) Gain 0-40 (-20~+20) 20 (0 dbm)

Define the setting to amplify and to 0 = -20 dbm
attenuate the size of the received 1 = -19 dbm
voice. The gain given when the :
voice packet is received from the 20 = 0 dbm
VOIPDB is set.
:
39 = 19 dbm
40 = 20 dbm

28 Priority Codec Setting 0 = G711 PT 0

The option selected here 1 = G723 PT
determines what other codec 2 = G729 PT
options are applied by priority. 3 = G.722 PT
4 = G.726 PT
5 = iLBC PT

30 EchoAuto Gain Control 0-5 0

Define the Auto Gain Control.

31 DTMF Payload Number 96-127 110

Define the DTMF Payload Number.

32 DTMF Relay Mode 0 = Disable 0

Determine the DTMF setup. 1 = RFC2833

33 G.722 Audio Frame 1 = 10 ms 3

Maximum number of G.722 Audio 2 = 20 ms
Frames. G.722 assumes the audio 3 = 30 ms
signal made by a specimen by 4 = 40 ms
16kHz and the frame of 10ms is
assumed to be a unit to 64kbps by
the encoding compressed method.

34 G.722 Silence Compression 0 = Disable 0

Mode
1 = Enable
Select whether to compress silence
with G.722. When there is silence,
the RTP packet is not sent.

2 - 670 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

35 G.722 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0-160 ms 30

Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of G.722 is set. Jitter is the
variation in the time between
packets arriving and the buffer
allows this variation to be
absorbed.

36 G.722 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0-160 ms 60

Set the average G.722 Jitter Buffer.

37 G.722 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0-160 ms 20

Set the maximum G.722 Jitter
Buffer.

38 G.726 Audio Frame 1 = 10 ms 3

Maximum number of G.726 Audio 2 = 20 ms
Frames. G.726 assumes the audio 3 = 30 ms
signal made by a specimen by 4 = 40 ms
16kHz and the frame of 10ms is
assumed to be a unit to 32kbps by
the encoding compressed method.

39 G.726 Silence Compression 0 = Disable 0

Mode
1 = Enable
Select whether to compress silence
with G.726. When there is silence,
the RTP packet is not sent.

40 G.726 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0-160 ms 30

Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of G.726 is set. Jitter is the
variation in the time between
packets arriving and the buffer
allows this variation to be
absorbed.

41 G.726 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0-160 ms 60

Set the average G.726 Jitter Buffer.

42 G.726 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0-160 ms 120

Set the maximum G.726 Jitter
Buffer.

43 iLBC Audio Frame 2 = 20 ms 3

Maximum number of iLBC Audio 3 = 30 ms
Frames. iLBC assumes the frame 4 = 40 ms
of 10ms is a unit.

44 iLBC Silence Compression Mode 0 = Disable 0

Select whether to compress silence 1 = Enable
with iLBC. When there is silence,
the RTP packet is not sent.

Programming Manual 2 - 671

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

45 iLBC Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0-160 ms 30

Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of iLBC is set. Jitter is the
variation in the time between
packets arriving and the buffer
allows this variation to be
absorbed.

46 iLBC Jitter Buffer - Standard 0-160 ms 60

Set the average iLBC Jitter Buffer.

47 iLBC Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0-160 ms 120

Set the maximum iLBC Jitter
Buffer.

48 ILBC Payload Number 96-127 98

The payload number of iLBC is set.
However, the same number as
Item 31 cannot be set.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 672 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-14 : SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup to define the basic setup
for SIP trunks.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 INVITE ReTx Count 7

Specifies the number of
times the INVITE
message is sent.

02 Request ReTx Count 11

Specifies the number of 0~255
times Request message
except INVITE are sent.

03 Response ReTx Count 7

Specifies the number of
times the Response
message is sent.

04 Request ReTx Start 5(500ms)

Time 0~65535
05 Request Maximum (0ms~6553.5sec.) 40(4000ms)
ReTx Interval

06 SIP Trunk Port Number 1~65535 5060

07 Session Timer Value 1~65535 0

08 Minimum Session 1~65535 1800

Timer Value

09 Called Party 0 = Request URI 0

Information
1 = To Header

10 URL Type 0 = SIP-URL 0

1 = TEL-URL

Programming Manual 2 - 673

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 674 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-15 : H.323/SIP Phone Keep Alive Setup to set the Keep Alive
Configuration of the H.323/SIP phone.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Registration Information Automatic Deletion 0 = Disable 0

When set to 1 (Enable), the registration information 1 = Enable
is automatically deleted (for H.323).

02 Keep Alive Message Interval 1~10 minutes 1

Time interval that system sends a Ping to the
terminal.

03 Keep Alive Message Timeout 1~10 seconds 5

Time that system waits for a Ping response from the
terminal.

04 Keep Alive Timeout 1~5 times 3

How many times the system waits for a non
response before determining the terminal is down.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 675

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-16 : VoIP Limiter Control Gain Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-16 : VoIP Limiter Control Gain to set the Limiter Control Gain
configuration of VoIP.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 RX Limiter Control Gain 0~30 (-15dbm ~ +15dbm) 15

Gain setting to control limiter in the direction 0 = -15dbm (0dbm)
of IP PCM. 1 = -14dbm
This option adds gain to the voice input from :
the LAN and removes it from the voice output 15 = 0dbm
to highway. :
02 TX Limiter Control Gain 29 = 14dbm 15
30 = 15dbm (0dbm)
Gain setting to control limiter in the direction
of PCM IP.
This option adds the gain to the voice input
from highway and removes it from the voice
output to the LAN.

03 RX Limiter Control Gain (CD-4COTB) 15

This option controls the limiter gain for a
(0dbm)
COIU call in the IP to PCM direction.

04 TX Limiter Control Gain (CD-4COTB) 15

This option controls the limiter gain for a
(0dbm)
COIU call in the PCM to IP direction.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2 - 676 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-17 : IPL Echo Canceller Control Setup (IN Level)
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-17 : IPL Echo Canceller Control Setup to configure echo
cancellation.

Input Data

Type 4~5
(Type 1, 2 and 3 are not used)
Type 4 = Analog trunks
Type 5 = Digital/MEGACO trunks

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable Type 4 = 1

1 = Enable Type 5 = 1

02 Echo Canceller Tail Size 1 = 8ms Type 4 = 5

2 = 16ms Type 5 = 1
3 = 32ms
4 = 64ms
5 = 128ms
03 Echo Canceller NLP Mode 0 = Disable Type 4 = 1
1 = Enable Type 5 = 0

04 Echo Canceller NLP Noise Setting 0 = Adaptive 0

1 = Fixed
05 Echo Canceller NLP Noise Level 40~70 60
(-40dbm~ -70dbm)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 677

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-19 : SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup to define
the CODEC information for the SIP extensions.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of G.711 Audio Frame 1 = 10 ms 2

Maximum number of G711 Audio 2 = 20 ms
Frames. When the voice is encoded 3 = 30 ms
using the PCM (Pulse Code 4 = 40 ms
Modulation) method, a unit is a frame
of 10ms.

02 G.711 Silence Detection (VAD) 0 = Disable 0

Mode
1 = Enable
Select whether to compress silence
with G.711. When there is silence, the
RTP packet is not sent.

03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 0

Set the type of G.711. 1 = µ-law

04 G.711 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0~160 ms 20

Set the minimum value of the G.711
Jitter Buffer.

05 G.711 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0~160 ms 40

Set the average value of the G.711
Jitter Buffer.

06 G.711 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0~160 ms 80

Set the maximum value of the G.711
Jitter Buffer.

07 G.729 Audio Frame 1-6 2

Maximum number of G729 Audio (1 = 10ms,
Frames. G.729 assumes the audio 2 = 20ms, etc.)
signal made by a specimen by 8kHz
and the frame of 10ms is assumed to
be a unit to 8kbps by the encoding
compressed method.

2 - 678 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 G.729 Silence Compression (VAD) 0 = Disable 0

Mode
1 = Enable
Select whether to compress silence
with G.729. When there is silence, the
RTP packet is not sent.

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0-270 ms 20

Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of G.729 is set. Jitter is the
variation in the time between packets
arriving and the buffer allows this
variation to be absorbed.

10 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0-270 ms 40

Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer.

11 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0-270 ms 80

Set the maximum G.729 Jitter Buffer.

12 Number of G.723 Audio Frame 1 = 30 msec 1

Maximum number of the G.723 Audio 2 = 60 msec
Frame.

13 G.723 Silence Compression (VAD) 0 = Disable 0

Mode
1 = Enable
If enabled, RTP packets are not sent
for the compressed silence.

14 G.723 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0~270 ms 30

Set the minimum value of the G.723
Jitter Buffer.

15 G.723 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0~270 ms 60

Set the average value of the G.723
Jitter Buffer.

16 G.723 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0~270 ms 120

Set the maximum value of the G.723
Jitter Buffer.

17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = static 3

Set the mode of the Jitter Buffer. 2 = adaptive during
1 = Size set to the fixed amount for silence
the codec. 3 = adaptive
2 = The minimum/maximum range
immediately
for the codec is used.
3 = The minimum/maximum range
for the codec is used and adjust
at any time, regardless of
silence.

Programming Manual 2 - 679

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

18 Silence Compression (VAD) 0-30 20

Threshold
(self-adjustment and
Set the voice level judged to be -19db ~ +10db)
silence. 0 = self-adjustment
Change value based .30
1:-19db (-49dbm)
This entry is ignored if silence
compression is disabled in 84-01-03 :
with G.711, or 84-01-06 with G.729. 20 = 0db (-30dbm)
:
29 = 9dbm (-21dbm)
30:10dbm (-20dbm)

19 Idle Noise Level 5000-7000 7000

Set the noise level which is generated (-5000 ~ -7000dbm)
when silent. 5000 = -5000dbm
:
7000 = -7000dbm

20 Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1

Determine whether or not to use Echo 1 = Enable
canceller.

21 Signal Limiter 1 = Mode0 6

Set the Singnal Limiter Mode. 2 = Mode1
3 = Mode2
4 = Mode3
5 = Mode4
6 = Mode5

22 Echo Canceller NLP Mode 0 = 2 wire & 4 wire 1

Non-linear processing mode. 1 = 2 wire only
Enable this option to decrease the low
level echo. When NLP is enabled, the
voice with low level is replacecd with
NLP noise. As a result, a low echo of
the level is usually removed
compared with the conversation level.

23 --- Not Used ---

24 Echo Canceller NLP Noise Setting 0 = adaptive 0

Becomes invalid item if 84-12-22 is 1 = fixed
set to Disabled.
Set the noise level adjusting method
added with NLP.
When “0” is set, the level is self-
adjusted - when “1” is set, Program
84-19-23 is used.

25 --- Not Used ---

2 - 680 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

26 TX (Transmit) Gain 0-40 (-20 ~ +20) 20 (0dbm)

Define the setting to amplify and to 0 = -20 dbm
attenuate the size of the transmission 1 = -19 dbm
voice. The gain given when the voice :
packet is sent from the VOIPDB is 20 = 0 dbm
set.
:
39 = 19 dbm
40 = 20 dbm

27 RX (Receive) Gain 0-40 (-20~+20) 20 (0dbm)

Define the setting to amplify and to 0 = -20 dbm
attenuate the size of the received 1 = -19 dbm
voice. The gain given when the voice :
packet is received from the VOIPDB 20 = 0 dbm
is set.
:
39 = 19 dbm
40 = 20 dbm

28 Priority Codec Setting 0 = G711 PT 0

The option selected here determines 1 = G723 PT
what other codec options are applied 2 = G729 PT
by priority. 3 = G.722
4 = G.726
5 = iLBC

29 --- Not Used ---

30 EchoAuto Gain Control 0-5 0

Define the Auto Gain Control.

31 DTMF Payload Number 96-127 96

Define the DTMF Payload Number.

32 DTMF Relay Mode 0 = Disable 0

Determine the DTMF setup used 1 = RFC2833
between the SIP extensions.
It is effective when a terminal call is
made through the VOIPDB.

33 G.722 Audio Frame 1 = 10ms 3

Maximum number of G.722 Audio 2 = 20ms
Frames. G.722 assumes the audio 3 = 30ms
signal made by a specimen by 16kHz 4 = 40ms
and the frame of 10ms is assumed to
be a unit to 64kbps by the encoding
compressed method.

34 G.722 Silence Compression Mode 0 = Disable 0

Select whether to compress silence 1 = Enable
with G.722. When there is silence, the
RTP packet is not sent.

Programming Manual 2 - 681

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

35 G.722 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0-160 ms 30

Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of G.722 is set. Jitter is the
variation in the time between packets
arriving and the buffer allows this
variation to be absorbed.

36 G.722 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0-160 ms 60

Set the average G.722 Jitter Buffer.

37 G.722 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0-160 ms 120

Set the maximum G.722 Jitter Buffer.

38 G.726 Audio Frame 1 = 10 ms 3

Maximum number of G.726 Audio 2 = 20 ms
Frames. G.726 assumes the audio 3 = 30 ms
signal made by a specimen by 16kHz 4 = 40 ms
and the frame of 10ms is assumed to
be a unit to 32kbps by the encoding
compressed method.

39 G.726 Silence Compression (VAD) 0 = Disable 0

Mode
1 = Enable
Select whether to compress silence
with G.726. When there is silence, the
RTP packet is not sent.

40 G.726 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0-160 ms 30

Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of G.726 is set. Jitter is the
variation in the time between packets
arriving and the buffer allows this
variation to be absorbed.

41 G.726 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0-160 ms 60

Set the average G.726 Jitter Buffer.

42 G.726 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0-160 ms 120

Set the maximum G.726 Jitter Buffer.

43 iLBC Audio Frame 2 = 20 ms 3

Maximum number of iLBC Audio 3 = 30 ms
Frames. iLBC assumes the frame of 4 = 40 ms
10ms is a unit.

44 iLBC Silence Compression Mode 0 = Disable 0

Select whether to compress silence 1 = Enable
with iLBC. When there is silence, the
RTP packet is not sent.

2 - 682 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

45 iLBC Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0-160 ms 30

Set the minimum value of the Jitter
Buffer of iLBC is set. Jitter is the
variation in the time between packets
arriving and the buffer allows this
variation to be absorbed.

46 iLBC Jitter Buffer - Standard 0-160 ms 60

Set the average iLBC Jitter Buffer.

47 iLBC Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0-160 ms 120

Set the maximum iLBC Jitter Buffer.

48 ILBC payload number 96-127 98

The payload number of iLBC is set.
However, the same number as Item31
cannot be set.

Conditions

These commands are for SIP analog extensions.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 683

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-20 : SIP Extension Basic Information Setup to set up proxy
information, session timers, called party information and expire value of invite.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Registrar/Proxy Port 1~65535 5070

02 Session Timer Value 0~65535 180s

03 Minimum Session Timer 0~65535 180s

Value

04 Called Party Info 0 = Request URI 0

1 = To Header

05 Expire Value of Invite 0~256 (seconds) 180s

Arrival of a message is
ended when this time
expires and there is no cut
from the caller.

06 Expire Value of Invite 1~3600 (seconds) 180s

(send)
The expiration time is set
for the Invite message.

Conditions

These commands are for SIP analog extensions.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 684 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-21 : CCIS over IP CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-21 : CCIS over IP CODEC Information Basic Setup to set the
codec parameters of the PZ-32IPLA, PZ-64IPLA, and PZ-128IPLA.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of G.711 Audio Frames 1~4 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

02 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 0

1 = u-law

03 G.711 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

04 G.711 Jitter Buffer Min 0~160ms 30

05 G711 Jitter Buffer Average 0~160ms 60

06 G.711 Jitter Buffer Max 0~160ms 120

07 G.729 Audio Frame Number 1~6 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms
6 = 60ms

08 G.729 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

09 G729 Jitter Buffer Min 0~270ms 30

10 G729 Jitter Buffer Average 0~270ms 60

11 G729 Jitter Buffer Max 0~270ms 120

Programming Manual 2 - 685

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

12 G.723 Audio Frame Number 1 = 30ms 1

2 = 60ms

13 G.723 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

14 G723 Jitter Buffer Min 0~270ms 30

15 G723 Jitter Buffer Average 0~270ms 60

16 G.723 Jitter Buffer Max 0~270ms 120

17 TX Gain 0~40 (-20dbm ~ +20dbm) 20

0 = -20 dbm
1 = -19 dbm
:
20 = 0 dbm
:
39 = +19 dbm
40 = +20 dbm

18 RX Gain 0~40 (-20dbm ~ +20dbm) 20

0 = -20 dbm
1 = -19 dbm
:
20 = 0 dbm
:
39 = +19 dbm
40 = +20 dbm

19 1st Priority of Audio Capability 0 = G.711 PT 0

1 = G.723 PT
2 = G.729 PT
3 = G.722
4 = G.726
5 = Not Used

20 2nd Priority of Audio Capability 0 = G.711 PT 1

1 = G.723 PT
2 = G.729 PT
3 = G.722 PT
4 = G.726 PT
5 = Not Used

21 DTMF Relay Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Inbound (RFC2833)
2 = Outbound (H.245)

22 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 3

2 = Silence
3 = Immediate

2 - 686 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

23 Voice Activity Detection Threshold 0 = Self adjustment 20

1 = -19dbm (-49dbm)
:
20 = 0dbm (-30dbm)
:
29 = +9dbm (-21dbm)
30 = +10dbm (-20dbm)

24 Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

25 NLP Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

26 UDP Checksum Mode 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

27 G.722 Audio Frame Number 1~4 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

28 G.722 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disabled 0

1 = Enabled

29 G.722 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 30

30 G.722 Jitter Buffer (Average) 0~160ms 60

31 G.722 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 120

32 G.726 Audio Frame Number 1~4 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

33 G.726 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disabled 0

1 = Enabled

34 G.726 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 30

35 G.726 Jitter Buffer (Average) 0~160ms 60

36 G.726 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 120

37 --- Not Used ---

38 --- Not Used ---

39 --- Not Used ---

Programming Manual 2 - 687

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

40 --- Not Used ---

41 --- Not Used ---

42 FAX Relay Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable
2 = Each Port Mode (each
extension)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2 - 688 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-22 : DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-22 : DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup to set the DT700
Multiline logon information.

Input Data

Personal ID Index 1~512

Input Data

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 User ID Up to 32 characters No Setting

Input the User ID when using manual or auto
registration (10-46-01).

02 Password Up to 16 characters No Setting

Input the Password when using manual or
auto registration (10-46-01).

03 User ID Omission 0 = Off 0

Input the Personal ID from terminal 1 = On
automatically when log on again.

04 Log Off 0 = Off 1

Input the Personal ID from terminal 1 = On
automatically when log on again.

05 Nick Name Up to 32 characters No Setting

Input the Personal ID from terminal
automatically when log on again.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

Programming Manual 2 - 689

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-23 : DT700 Multiline Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-23 : DT700 Multiline Basic Information Setup to set the basic
information for the DT700 Multiline Terminal.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Registration Expire Timer 60~65535 (sec) 180

The Expires value of the REGISTER
message which received from DT700
terminal is out of range or when the Expire
value is not set up, in case it assigns the
effective time to the DT700 terminal. The
timer for supervising whether DT700 terminal
is connected or not.

02 Subscribe Expire Timer 60~65535 (sec) 3600

The subscribe Expire timer to transmit and
receive the terminal operation instructions
between the Main Device and DT700
terminal.

03 Session Expire Timer 60~65535 (sec) 180

Set effective time for supervising the Voice
Path.

04 Minimum Session Expire Timer 60~65535 (sec) 180

Set minimum value of effective time for
supervising the Voice Path.

05 Invite Expire Timer 0~65535 (sec) 180

Set effective time for Incoming/Outgoing call
when the Expire value is not set in the
INVITE message received from DT700
terminal.

06 Signal Type of Service 0x00~0xFF 00

Set Type of Service value which applied to (0~9, A~F)
send SIP Message Packet from DT700
terminal to Main Device.

07 Error Display Timer 0~65535 (sec) 0

2 - 690 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

08 Digest Authorization Registration Expire 0~4294967295 (sec) 0

Timer

10 Number of Password Retries 0~255 0

Input the number of times an incorrect
password can be entered when the security
key is pressed.

11 Password Lock Time 0~120 0

12 Reference Number Up to 32 digits No Setting

(0~9, , #, P, R, @)

13 Media Type of Service 0x00~0xFF 00

(0~9, A~F)

14 Refer Expire Timer 0~65535 (sec) 60

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

Programming Manual 2 - 691

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-24 : DT700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-24 : DT700 Multiline CODEC Basic Information Setup to set the
codec of each type of DT700 Multiline Telephone.

Input Data

Type 1 = Type 1
2 = Type 2
3 = Type 3
4 = Type 4
5 = Type 5

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Number of G.711 Audio Frame 1 = 10 ms 2

Maximum number of G711 Audio Frames. 2 = 20 ms
When the voice is encoded using the PCM 3 = 30 ms
(Pulse Code Modulation) method, a unit is a 4 = 40 ms
frame of 10ms.

02 G.711 Silence Detection (VAD) Mode 0 = Disable 0

Select whether to compress silence with 1 = Enable
G.711. When there is silence, the RTP packet
is not sent.

03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 0

Set the type of G.711. 1 = µ-law

04 G.711 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0~160 ms 20

Set the minimum value of the G.711 Jitter
Buffer.

05 G.711 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0~160 ms 40

Set the average value of the G.711 Jitter
Buffer.

06 G.711 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0~160 ms 80

Set the maximum value of the G.711 Jitter
Buffer.

2 - 692 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

07 G.729 Audio Frame 1-4 2

Maximum number of G729 Audio Frames. (1 = 10ms,
G.729 assumes the audio signal made by a 2 = 20ms, etc.)
specimen by 8kHz and the frame of 10ms is
assumed to be a unit to 8kbps by the
encoding compressed method.

08 G.729 Silence Compression (VAD) Mode 0 = Disable 0

Select whether to compress silence with 1 = Enable
G.729. When there is silence, the RTP packet
is not sent.

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0-270 ms 20

Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of
G.729 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time
between packets arriving and the buffer
allows this variation to be absorbed.

10 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0-270 ms 40

Set the average G.729 Jitter Buffer.

11 G.729 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0-270 ms 80

Set the maximum G.729 Jitter Buffer.

12 --- Not Used ---

13 --- Not Used ---

14 --- Not Used ---

15 --- Not Used ---

16 --- Not Used ---

17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = static 3

Set the mode of the Jitter Buffer. 2 = adaptive during
silence
1 = Size set to the fixed amount for the
codec. 3 = adaptive
immediately
2 = The minimum/maximum range for the
codec is used.
3 = The minimum/maximum range for the
codec is used and adjust at any time,
regardless of silence.

Programming Manual 2 - 693

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

18 Silence Compression (VAD) Threshold 0-30 20

Set the voice level judged to be silence. (self-adjustment and
Change value based .30 -19db ~ +10db)
This entry is ignored if silence compression is 0 = self-adjustment
disabled in 84-01-03 with G.711, or 84-01-06 1:-19db (-49dbm)
with G.729.
:
20 = 0db (-30dbm)
:
29 = 9dbm (-21dbm)
30:10dbm (-20dbm)

19 Idle Noise Level 5000-7000 7000

Set the noise level which is generated when (-5000 ~ -7000dbm)
silent. 5000 = -5000dbm
:
7000 = -7000dbm

20 Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1

Determine whether or not to use Echo 1 = Enable
canceller.

21 Signal Limiter 1 = Mode0 6

Set the Sugnal Limiter Mode. 2 = Mode1
3 = Mode2
4 = Mode3
5 = Mode4
6 = Mode5

22 Echo Canceller NLP Mode 0 = 2 wire & 4 wire 1

Non-linear processing mode. 1 = 2 wire only
Enable this option to decrease the low level
echo. When NLP is enabled, the voice with
low level is replacecd with NLP noise. As a
result, a low echo of the level is usually
removed compared with the conversation
level.

23 --- Not Used ---

24 Echo Canceller NLP Noise Setting 0 = adaptive 0

Becomes invalid item if 84-24-22 is set to 1 = fixed
Disabled.
Set the noise level adjusting method added
with NLP.
When “0” is set, the level is self-adjusted -
when “1” is set, Program 84-24-22 is used.

25 --- Not Used ---

2 - 694 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

26 TX (Transmit) Gain 0-40 (-20 ~ +20) 20 (0dbm)

Define the setting to amplify and to attenuate 0 = -20 dbm
the size of the transmission voice. The gain 1 = -19 dbm
given when the voice packet is sent from the :
VOIPDB is set. 20 = 0 dbm
:
39 = 19 dbm
40 = 20 dbm

27 RX (Receive) Gain 0-40 (-20 ~ +20) 20 (0dbm)

Define the setting to amplify and to attenuate 0 = -20 dbm
the size of the received voice. The gain given 1 = -19 dbm
when the voice packet is received from the :
VOIPDB is set. 20 = 0 dbm
:
39 = 19 dbm
40 = 20 dbm

28 Priority Codec Setting 0 = G711 PT 0

The option selected here determines what 1 = Not Used
other codec options are applied by priority. 2 = G729 PT
3 = G.722 PT

30 EchoAuto Gain Control 0-5 0

Define the Auto Gain Control.

31 --- Not Used ---

32 G.722 Audio Frame 1 = 10 ms 3

Maximum number of G.722 Audio Frames. 2 = 20 ms
G.722 assumes the audio signal made by a 3 = 30 ms
specimen by 16kHz and the frame of 10ms is 4 = 40 ms
assumed to be a unit to 64kbps by the
encoding compressed method.

33 G.722 Silence Compression Mode 0 = Disable 0

Select whether to compress silence with 1 = Enable
G.722. When there is silence, the RTP packet
is not sent.

34 G.722 Jitter Buffer - Minimum 0-160 ms 30

Set the minimum value of the Jitter Buffer of
G.722 is set. Jitter is the variation in the time
between packets arriving and the buffer
allows this variation to be absorbed.

35 G.722 Jitter Buffer - Standard 0-160 ms 60

Set the average G.722 Jitter Buffer.

36 G.722 Jitter Buffer - Maximum 0-160 ms 120

Set the maximum G.722 Jitter Buffer.

Programming Manual 2 - 695

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2 - 696 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-25 : NetLink CODEC Information Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-25 : NetLink CODEC Information Basic Setup to set the CODEC
with NetLink.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Number of G.711 Audio Frames 1~4 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

02 G.711 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

03 G.711 Type 0 = A-law 0

1 = u-law

04 G.711 Jitter Buffer Min 0~160ms 30

05 G.711 Jitter Buffer Average 0~160ms 60

06 G.711 Jitter Buffer Max 0~160ms 120

07 Number of G.729 Audio Frames 1~6 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms
6 = 60ms

08 G.729 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

09 G729 Jitter Buffer Min 0~270ms 30

10 G729 Jitter Buffer Average 0~270ms 60

11 G729 Jitter Buffer Max 0~270ms 120

Programming Manual 2 - 697

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

12 Number of G.723 Audio Frames 1~2 1

1 = 30ms
2 = 60ms

13 G.723 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

14 G.723 Jitter Buffer Min 0~270ms 30

15 G.723 Jitter Buffer Average 0~270ms 60

16 G.723 Jitter Buffer Max 0~270ms 120

17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = Static 3

2 = Adaptive during
silence
3 = Adaptive immediate

18 Voice Activity Detection Threshold 0~30 (-19db~ +10db) 20

0 = Self adjustment
1 = -19db (-49dbm)
:
20 = 0db (-30dbm)
:
29 = 9db (-21dbm)
30 = 10db (-20dbm)

19 Idle Noise Level 5000~7000 7000

(-5000dbm~ -7000dbm)

20 Echo Canceller Mode 0 = Disable 1

1 = Enable

21 Signal Limiter 1 = Mode0 6

2 = Mode1
3 = Mode2
4 = Mode3
5 = Mode4
6 = Mode5

22 Echo Canceller NLP Mode 0 = 2 wire & 4 wire 1

1 = 2 wire only

24 Echo Canceller CNG Configuration 0 = Adaptive 0

1 = Fixed

2 - 698 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

26 TX Gain 0~40 (-14dbm~+14dbm) 20

0 = -20dbm
1 = -19dbm
:
20 = 0dbm
:
39 = 19dbm
40 = 20dbm

27 RX Gain 0~40 (-14dbm~+14dbm) 20

0 = -20dbm
1 = -19dbm
:
20 = 0dbm
:
39 = 19dbm
40 = 20dbm

28 Audio Capability Priority 0~3 0

0 = G.711_PT
1 = G.723_PT
2 = G.729_PT
3 = G.722_PT
4 = G.726
5 = iLBC

29 --- Not Used ---

30 Auto Gain Control 0~5 0

31 DTMF Relay Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = RFC2833

32 Fax Relay Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable
2 = Each port mode

33 Number of G.722 Audio Frames 1~4 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

34 G.722 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disabled 0

1 = Enabled

35 G.722 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 30

36 G.722 Jitter Buffer (Average) 0~160ms 60

37 G.722 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 120

Programming Manual 2 - 699

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

38 Number of G.726 Audio Frames 1~4 3

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms

39 G.726 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 = Disabled 0

1 = Enabled

40 G.726 Jitter Buffer (min) 0~160ms 30

41 G.726 Jitter Buffer (Average) 0~160ms 60

42 G.726 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~160ms 120

43 --- Not Used ---

44 --- Not Used ---

45 --- Not Used ---

46 --- Not Used ---

47 --- Not Used ---

48 --- Not Used ---

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2 - 700 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-26 : IPL Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-26 : IPL Basic Setup to set the IP address of IPL and the port.

Index 1

Slot Number 1

VoIP GW Number 01~08

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Slot 1 = 172.16.0.20

:
Slot 4 = 172.16.0.44
VoIP GW Number 1~8:
172.16.0.20~172.16.16.0.27

02 RTP Port Number 0~65534 VoIP GW1 = 10020

VoIP GW2 = 10052
VoIP GW3 = 10084
VoIP GW4 = 10116
VoIP GW5 = 10148
VoIP GW6 = 10180
VoIP GW7 = 10212
VoIP GW8 = 10244

03 RTCP Port Number 0~65534 VoIP GW1 = 10021

(RTP Port Number +1) VoIP GW2 = 10053
VoIP GW3 = 10085
VoIP GW4 = 10117
VoIP GW5 = 10149
VoIP GW6 = 10181
VoIP GW7 = 10213
VoIP GW8 = 10245

Programming Manual 2 - 701

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2 - 702 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-27 : IPL Basic Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-27 : IPL Basic Setup to set the DTMF Relay and the SRTP mode
of the IPL.

Index 1

Slot Number 1

Input Data

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 DTMF Relay Setup 0 = DTMF Relay disabled 2

1 = In-Band DTMF Relay – Do
not report to host processor
2 = Out of Band Relay – Do not
pass tones as voice

02 Setup CODEC Mode 0 = Default 0

Default means the system uses another 1 = Mode 1 (G.723)
CODEC except G.723.
Mode 1 means the system uses all
CODECs, but the limitation of the total
number of available DSP will be applied.

03 SRTP Mode Setup 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

04 SRTP Mode Select 0 = Mode1 0

06 H.245 Port Number 0~65535 10100

07 Preparation Completion Response 0~65535 4000

Port Number

Programming Manual 2 - 703

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

2 - 704 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-28 : DT700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-28 : DT700 Multiline Firmware Name Setup to set the firmware
name to download for the IP Phone.

Index 1

Terminal Type 1 = ITL-**E-1D/IP-*E-1

2 = ITL-**D-1D/ITL-12BT-1D/ITL-12PA-1D
3 = ITL-320C-1

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Firmware Directory Maximum 64 characters No Setting

02 Firmware File Name Maximum 30 characters No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

Programming Manual 2 - 705

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 84-29 : SIP-MLT CODEC Information Fixed Mode Setup to set the
CODEC data of the SIP-MLT when it uses Multicast.

Index 1

Type 1 = Type 1 (Multicast)

2 = Type 2 (reserved)
3 = Type 3 (reserved)
4 = Type 4 (reserved)
5 = Type 5 (reserved)

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Audio Capability 1 = G.711 A-law 1

2 = G.711 u-law
3 = G.729
4 = G.723
5 = G.722

02 Number of Audio Frames 1~6 2

1 = 10ms
2 = 20ms
3 = 30ms
4 = 40ms
5 = 50ms
6 = 60ms

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 706 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-01 : Installation Date
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-01 : Installation Date to define the installation date of the
system.
Program
Input Data

90
Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Year 00~99 00 (No Setting)

02 Month 01~12 00 (No Setting)

03 Day 01~31 00 (No Setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 707

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-02 : Programming Password Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-02 : Programming Password Setup to set the system passwords. For
password entry, the system allows eight users to be defined. Each user can have a:

Unique alphanumeric name (up to 10 alphanumeric characters)

Password entry of up to eight digits (using 0~9, # and )
Password level
The IN level password is used by the System Installer for system programming. The
SA or SB level password cannot access the IN level programs. The reverse type
(white on black) just beneath the Description heading is the program access level.
You can only use the program if your access level meets or exceeds the level the
program requires. (SA level password can access to SA or SB programs, and SB
level password can access to SB programs only.)

CAUTION
Before changing your numbering plan, use the PC Programming or WebPro Programming to
make a backup copy of your system data.

Input Data

User Number 1~8

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 User Name Maximum 10 characters

02 Password Up to eight digits

03 User Level 0 = Prohibited User

2 = IN (Installer Level)
3 = SA (System Administrator Level 1)
4 = SB (System Administrator Level 2)
5 = UA (User Programming Level 1)

2 - 708 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Default

User
User Name Password Level Level Description
No.

2 tech 12345678 2 (IN) Installer Level – Access to all IN

level programs.

3 ADMIN1 0000 3 (SA) System Administrator Level 1 –

Restricted Access

4 ADMIN2 9999 4 (SB) System Administrator Level 2 –

More Restricted Access

5 USER1 1111 5 (UA) User Programming Level 1

Conditions

More than one extension can be in the programming mode.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 709

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-03 : Save Data
Level:
SA

Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).

Use Program 90-03 : Save Data to save the programmed data on the USB Flash Drive.
This program should be used after changing the programmed data.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Save Data Dial 1 + press Transfer (Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions

When reloading a customer database, the system must be reset (either using
Program 90-08 or power down/power up) before all uploaded programming takes
affect.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 710 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-04 : Load Data
Level:
SA

Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).

Use Program 90-04 : Load Data to load the system data from the inserted USB Flash
Drive to the SRAM and Flash ROM in the system.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Load Data Dial 1+ press Transfer (Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions

After uploading the programming, reset the system and wait a few minutes for the
system to reset completely before accessing any line or special system feature.
Otherwise, some unusual LED indications may be experienced.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 711

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-05 : Slot Control
Level:
IN

Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).

Use Program 90-05 : Slot Control to reset or delete (uninstall) blades (slots 1~24).

Delete allows you to completely uninstall the blade. You should do this if you want to
remove a blade and plug it into a different slot and still retain the port assignments. If
a different type of interface blade is being installed in a slot previously used (e.g.,
changing from a LCA to an DLCA blade), the slot should be deleted (option 1) first
before installing the new interface blade.

Reset allows you to send a reset code.

Input Data

Menu Number 1 = Delete

2 = Reset
3 = Set Busy Out
4 = Reset Busy Out

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Slot Control Slot Number (1~24)

Conditions

When you delete or reset a blade, you must first remove it from its slot then run
Program 90-05. When reusing the slot for another blade, you must plug the blade
in or reset the system before the system can use the slot again.

When you delete or reset a blade, all related programming in Program 10-03-01 is
set back to default.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 712 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-06 : Trunk Control
Level:
SA

Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).

Use Program 90-06 : Trunk Control for trunk maintenance. Busy Out lets you block
a blade from placing outgoing calls (just like placing the blade switch down). Once
busied out, none of the ports on the blade can be used for new calls. Existing calls,
however, are not torn down.

Input Data

Menu Number 0 = Set Busy Out

1 = Reset Busy Out (idle)

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Trunk Control Trunk Port Number: 001~200

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 713

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-07 : Station Control
Level:
SA

Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).

Use Program 90-07 : Station Control for extension maintenance.

Input Data

Menu Number 1 = Hardware Reset

2 = Software Reset

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Extension Control Extension Number (up to eight digits)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 714 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-08 : System Reset
Level:
IN

Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).

Use Program 90-08 : System Reset to perform a system reset.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 System Reset Dial 1 + press Transfer (Press Transfer key to cancel)

Conditions

After restoring a customer database, the system must be reset using Program
90-08 or by powering down/powering up before all the restored programming
takes affect.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 715

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time Setup to define the time for
the system to automatically reset.

Input Data

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Month 00~12 (Note 1) 00

02 Day 00~31 (Note 2) 00

03 Hour 00~23 00

04 Minute 00~59 00

Note 1 If the Month is set to 00 and Day is set, the system

is automatically reset every month on the
predefined day.
Note 2 If the Day is set to 00 and the Time (Hour and
Minute) is set, the system automatically resets
every day at the predefined time.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 716 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-10 : System Alarm Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup to assign a status to system alarms. You
can designate an alarm as Major or Minor. This program also assigns whether or not
the alarm is displayed to a multiline terminal and whether or not the alarm information
is reported to the pre-defined destination.

Input Data

Alarm Number 001~100

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Alarm Type 0 = Not Set

1 = Major Alarm
2 = Minor Alarm

02 Report 0 = Not Report (No autodial)

1 = Report (autodial)

Table 2-18 Description of Alarm

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

1 2 0 PKG Initialize 1. The PKG failed to 1. PKG not inserted 1. Insert PKG firmly. Upon ERR
Error. initialize. firmly. 2. Insert PKG firmly. initialization, REC
2. The PKG did not start 2. PKG was 3. Delete slot the PKG is
normally. removed, but not information in recognized.
reinserted firmly. PRG 90-05 and reinsert
3. Old PKG data the PKG.
still reported due to
no initialization.

2 2 0 PKG Mount- The unit did not step on a 1.The package is 1.Please insert the When the unit ERR
ing Error regular procedure and it half. package firmly. is REC
was pulled out. Or, it is not 2.The package is 2.Please try again after reconfirmed,
normally inserted. out of order. initializing the system the error is
data once when LED recovered.
doesn't blink normally.
3.Exchange of
packages.

Programming Manual 2 - 717

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Table 2-18 Description of Alarm (Continued)

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

3 2 0 Communicati The error occurred when 1.The unit is half. 1.Please insert the unit When the unit ERR
on fault communicating with the 2.The power- firmly. is REC
between package. When the supply voltage of 2.The power-supply reconfirmed,
CD-CP00 and package is broken, it the system is voltage must use the error is
other PKGs. recognizes it as a outside ratings. another power supply recovered.
communication fault. 3.The equipment when is in the range of
that generates the ratings or measuring
noise in the same with the voltmeter, and
power supply deviating from the rated
system as the range.
power supply origin 3.Please use the power
of the system is supply besides the
connected, and it equipment with the
malfunctions possibility of the noise
because of the source.
power supply 4.Please separate as
noise. much as possible and
4.The equipment to use a main device from
which it is adjacent the equipment by which
to of a main device, you seem may
and has put out the generate the radiation
radiation noise noise.
exists, and it 5.Please ground the
malfunctions chassis correctly.
because of the
radiation noise.
5.The chassis is
not properly
grounded.

4 2 0 PKG S/W The unit program was not The package Delete slot information Please ERR
Download able to be downloaded software is not that corresponds by exchange REC
Error normally. stored in the PRG90-05-01 to delete units, though it
The unit was not able to be downloaded USB package information is likely to
started normally. memory. that had been installed restore by
The stored before. mounting the
package software There is a possibility unit again.
is illegal. that the unit program is When the unit
Package broken though an program is
information that external factor of the normally
had been installed noise etc. is thought. downloaded,
before remains. Please load into the the error is
USB memory and try recovered.
again when you back
up the unit program.
Please inquire of the
manufacturer when not
restoring it.

5 1 0 Cooling fan The cooling fan does not The cooling fan has Confirm that the cooling Replace the
error work normally. stopped working. fan is turning. cooling fan if it
is defective.
The cooling fan has Verify the mounting of
come off. the cooling fan.

2 - 718 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Table 2-18 Description of Alarm (Continued)

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

6 0 0 Blocking The link of terminals • Breakdown of Confirm the terminal The error is ERR
connected with the ESI terminal. connected with same recovered REC
package came off. • Faulty wiring and ESI. If they work when
wiring normally, confirm the reconnecting
determination. breakdown or the wiring or exchanging
• External noise. for the terminal. it.
• Breakdown of ESI Exchange the terminal
package. that doesn't work and
the working terminal,
and confirm it’s
working. An external
factor of the noise etc.
is thought.
Please reconfirm wiring
and the installation,etc.
Please inquire of the
manufacturer when the
problem occurs after it
confirms it.

7 1 0 Power failure The supply of the • The power cable Confirm the power When the ERR
commercial power came off. supply outlet when the commercial REC
stopped. • Power failure commercial power has power is
• The power supply not stopped. restored, the
unit broke down. Please inquire of the error is
manufacturer when the recovered.
problem occurs.

8 1 0 RAM Backup RAM backup battery on the Check the battery The error is ERR
Battery Error CD-CP00 blade is connector. If it is recovered REC
unplugged or defective. connected correctly, once the
replace the battery. battery is
replaced.

9 --- Reserved ---

10 0 0 ISDN Link Layer1 link of ISDN lines • Connected Confirm the data of When the ERR
Error came off. determination of PRG10-03. connection REC
main device and Reconfirm wiring and returns
ISDN line the installation of DSU. normally, the
• Breakdown of Please inquire of the error is
DSU manufacturer when the recover.
• The setting of problem occurs after it
PRG10-03 is not confirms it.
corresponding to
an actual line.

11 0 0 CTI Link Error The link with the CTI server • LAN cable Please reconfirm the When the ERR
came off. defective. CTI server, wiring, and connection REC
• Connected HUB the connection. returns
broken. Please inquire of the normally, the
• The CTI server manufacturer when the error is
doesn't start problem occurs after it recover.
normally. confirms it.

12 0 0 ACD MIS Link The link with ACD MIS • LAN cable Please confirm ACD When the ERR
Error client PC came off. defective. MIS client PC and connection REC
• Connected HUB connected part. returns
broken. Please inquire of the normally, the
• The CTI server manufacturer when the error is
doesn't start problem occurs after it recover.
normally. confirms it.

Programming Manual 2 - 719

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Table 2-18 Description of Alarm (Continued)

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

13 0 0 Charge The link with the charge 1. Problem of 1. It is confirmed that When the ERR
Management management device came wiring to connect there is no problem in connection REC
Link Error off. main device with wiring to connect a returns
charge main device with the normally, the
management charge management error is
device. device. (Whether ping recover.
2. Problem of PC. passes for LAN
connection is
confirmed.)
2. Restart the charge
management software.
3. Reboot PC, and start
the charge
management software.

14 0 0 LAN Link The link with LAN on • LAN cable Confirm the operation When the ERR
Error CD-CP00 came off. defective. of LAN connector, LAN connection REC
• Connected HUB cable, and HUB again. returns
broken. normally, the
• Defect of error is
CD-CP00 recover.

15 0 0 Network Keep 1. The network connection • LAN cable is Confirm whether the When the ERR
Alive has been cut. defective. defect is on the Network connection REC
2. Network Keep Alive • Net side trouble. side. returns WAR
restoration. • Packet block by Confirm the settings of normally, the
3. Response notification on firewall. HUB and the router, etc. error is
network Keep Alive. • Repetition of IP recovered.
address.

16 0 0 SMDR Link

17~28 --- Reserved ---

29 0 0 Charge The temporary buffer for 1. The charge data 1. Please print and When the ERR
Management the charge management in is printed and not delete the charge data output is REC
Buffer full main device was deleted at the at the simple charge restarted, the
overflowed, and a part of simple charge management. error is
unoutput charge data management. 2. Please connect the recovered.
disappeared because it 2. The charge data charge management However, the
was not able to output the is not output to PC software for the charge charge
charge management data. for the charge management software management
management and output the charge data after the
software. data. error occurs is
not recorded.

30 2 0 SMDR Buffer The temporary buffer for 1. Problem of 1. Please confirm When the ERR
full SMDR in main device was wiring to connect whether there is output is REC
overflowed, and a part of main device with problem in wiring to restarted, the
unoutput SMDR data PC. connect a main device error is
disappeared because it 2. Problem of PC. with PC. recovered.
was not able to output 2. Please execute the However, the
SMDR data. reactivation of PC. SMDR data
after the error
occurs is not
recorded.

31~34 --- Reserved ---

2 - 720 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Table 2-18 Description of Alarm (Continued)

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

35 0 0 CS Blocking The link of the CSIU and 1. Outgoing noise. Please confirm the The error is ERR
CS came off. 2. Method of setting following matter when recovered REC
up CS. happening frequently when
3. Wiring to when operating it. reconnecting
connect CSIU unit 1. Please confirm CS is or exchanging
with CS. normally connected. it.
4. Hard defect of 2. Please confirm the
CS. wiring between
5. Hard defect of CSIU-CS is normal.
CSIU. 3. Please exchange
CS.
4. Please exchange
CSIU.

36 0 0 CS error CS detected the problem 1. Outgoing noise. Please confirm the This error has ERR
notification 1 occurring in the air 2. Method of setting following matter when been REC
synchronous signal up CS. happening frequently recovered
between CS-CSIU, BBIC 3. Wiring to when operating it. when it is
reset was executed, and it connect CSIU unit 1. Please confirm CS is notified.
was restored automatically. with CS. normally connected.
4. Hard defect of 2. Please confirm the
CS. wiring between
5. Hard defect of CSIU-CS is normal.
CSIU. 3. Please exchange
CS.
4. Please exchange
CSIU.

37 0 0 CS Because CS had not 1. Outgoing noise. Please confirm the This error has ERR
transmission returned the response to 2. Method of setting following matter when been REC
error. the control signal from a up CS. happening frequently recovered
main device longer than 3. Wiring to when operating it. when it is
the fixed time, it was connect CSIU unit 1. Please confirm CS is notified.
restored automatically with CS. normally connected.
specifying reset to 4. Hard defect of 2. Please confirm the
concerned CS with a main CS. wiring between
device. 5. Hard defect of CSIU-CS is normal.
CSIU. 3. Please exchange
CS.
4. Please exchange
CSIU.

38 0 0 CSIU Dch It was restored 1. Outgoing noise. Please confirm the This error has ERR
Error× automatically specifying 2. Method of setting following matter when been REC
reset to concerned CS with up CS. happening frequently recovered
a main device because a 3. Wiring to when operating it. when it is
main device had detected connect CSIU unit 1. Please confirm CS is notified.
the control signal from a with CS. normally connected.
main device not normally 4. Hard defect of 2. Please confirm the
reaching CS. CS. wiring between
5. Hard defect of CSIU-CS is normal.
CSIU. 3. Please exchange
CS.
4. Please exchange
CSIU.

39 0 0 CSIU trans- This alarm is integrated

mission error. into "Communication fault
between the CD-CP00 and
other PKG", and it is not
used in SV8100.

Programming Manual 2 - 721

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Table 2-18 Description of Alarm (Continued)

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

40 0 0 CS error noti- CS detected the factor that 1. Outgoing noise. Please confirm the This error has ERR
fication 2. the noise is generated 2. Method of setting following matter when been REC
between CS-PS, BBIC up CS. happening frequently recovered
reset was executed, and it 3. Wiring to when operating it. when it is
was restored automatically. connect CSIU unit 1. Please confirm CS is notified.
with CS. normally connected.
4. Hard defect of 2. Please confirm the
CS. wiring between
5. Hard defect of CSIU-CS is normal.
CSIU. 3. Please exchange
CS.
4. Please exchange
CSIU.

41~49 --- Reserved ---

50 1 0 System Start The system started. The system was No action needed.
Notification started.

51 0 0 System Data CD-CP00 Upgrade is No action needed.

change performed or Programming
change is made.

52 0 0 --- Reserved ---

53 0 0 --- Reserved ---

54 2 0 License A new TCP/IP terminal and Maximum 512 Please delete license WAR
Management the DSP board were not license information information on an
Table Full able to be added to the on the TCP/IP unnecessary TCP/IP
application license terminal is terminal with PRG
management table. registered, and a 90-44.
• The license management new terminal
table is registering full. cannot be
registered.

55 2 0 Regular The regular maintenance • The regular Please do the The excess ERR
maintenance exchange day has passed. maintenance maintenance on the regular REC
exchange exchange day that exchanges of pertinent maintenance
notification. had been set with parts, and set the next exchange day
PRG 90-51 regular maintenance is canceled by
exceeded it. exchange day with changing
PRG 90-51. PRG 90-51 or
when the
function is
invalidated,
the error is
recovered.

56~59 --- Reserved ---

60 2 0 SIP 1.The registration of the • The setting of the 1.Reconfirm the The error is ERR
Registration SIP trunk to the SIP server system data is following system data recovered REC
Error failed. wrong. setting -- PRG 10-12, when normally
Notification. 10-28, 10-29, 10-30, connecting it.
2.The registration of the • The setting of the and 10-36.
SIP trunk to the SIP server router is wrong. 2.Confirm the setting of
failed in the authentication. routers.
• It is an error to the 3.Confirm whether
3.There is no response link of LAN. abnormality occurs on
from the SIP server to the the net side.
SIP registration request. • Net side trouble. 4.Reconfirm the
authentication system
data setting.
5.Reconfirm wiring and
the system data setting.
Please inquire an
uncertain point of the
maker.

2 - 722 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Table 2-18 Description of Alarm (Continued)

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

61 0 0 SIP extension It failed in the registration • The registered Reconfirm wiring and ERR
trouble of the SIP extension port is used by the system data setting. REC
information. terminal. other extension.
The SIP extension terminal • The license is Confirm whether each
was not able to acquire insufficient. equipment such as
DSP. • DSP of VoIPDB access points works
• At Regist to SV8100 of was not able to be normally.
the SIP extension terminal. acquired.
• When you cannot acquire
the DSP resource when it
sends it.

62 0 0 DtermIP The error occurred by the • The packet loss Confirm whether each ERR
trouble DtermIP relation. occurred on the equipment such as REC
information. • When the error occurs network or the wirings and HUB is
while communicating with wiring cutting normal.
VoIPU or DtermIP. occurred.
• When it becomes
impossible to do the • DSP of VoIP was
communication between not able to be
SV8100 and DtermIP acquired.
• When failing in the
acquisition of DSP.

63 0 0 SIP-MLT The trouble occurred by • The packet loss Confirm whether each WAR
trouble the SIP-MLT relation. occurred on the equipment such as
information. network or the wirings and HUB is
• The DSP resource was wiring cutting normal.
not able to be acquired at occurred.
incoming/outgoing.
• DSP of VoIP was
• The negotiation with not able to be
VoIPDB failed. acquired.

64 1 0 VoIPDB LAN The link of LAN of VoIPDB • LAN cable is Confirm LAN connector When the ERR
Link Error. came off. defective. and wiring. connection REC
returns
• Connected HUB Please inquire an normally, the
broke. uncertain point of the error is
maker. recovered.
• Defect in
CD-CP00.

65 0 0 VoIPDB When DSP of VoIPDB • Defect of There is a defective WAR

trouble notifies Error. PZ-32IPLA. possibility of hardware.
information.
Please inquire an
uncertain point of the
maker.

66 2 0 SIP extension More than the number of • Lack of number of Confirm the number of When the WAR
License Error. licenses to which the SIP licenses. licenses of SIP number of
extension terminal was extension terminals. registration of
turned on at REGISTER. SIP extension
Please inquire an terminals falls
uncertain point of the below the
maker. number of
licenses.

67~79 --- Reserved ---

80 1 0 NetLink start The error occurred when •Defect on There is a defective ERR
error. NetLink started. CD-CP00. possibility of hardware.
Please inquire of the
maker.

Programming Manual 2 - 723

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Table 2-18 Description of Alarm (Continued)

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

81 2 0 NetLink call The trouble occurred by • DSP of Reconfirm wiring and WAR
trouble the NetLink relation. PZ-32IPLA was not the system data setting.
information. able to be acquired.
• The DSP resource was Please inquire an
not able to be acquired at uncertain point of the
incoming/outgoing. maker.

82 2 0 NetLink The trouble occurred by • It exceeds it to the Confirm whether to WAR

Virtual Slot virtual Slot relation. number of slot exceed the slot number
accommod. • It exceeded it to the slot accommodation in upper bound.
error. accommodation upper the entire system of
bound. NetLink. Please inquire an
• It failed in making a virtual uncertain point of the
slot. maker.

83 2 0 NetLink The communication error • The setting of the Reconfirm LAN WAR
Communicati occurred by NetLink. router is wrong. connector and wiring.
on Error.
• The checksum error • It is an error to the Please inquire an
occurred. link of LAN. uncertain point of the
maker.
• The index error occurred. • Net side trouble.

84 2 0 NetLink The error related to the • The expiration Confirm license WAR
License Error license occurred by date of a temporary information.
NetLink. license
approaches. Please inquire an
• The expiration date of the • A temporary uncertain point of the
license approaches. license was maker.
nullified.
• The license was nullified.

85 2 0 NetLink node The connection of • Repetition setting Confirm the setting and WAR
connection Secondary was refused in of SystemID. license information on
refusal. NetLink. • SystemID is SystemID.
• SystemID overlaps. illegal.
• SystemID is illegal. • The number of Please inquire an
• The license is insufficient. licenses is lack. uncertain point of the
• It is memory shortage. • The system maker.
memory is
insufficient.

86 2 0 Data base Because the versions of • The versions of Confirm the versions of WAR
replication DB is different, replication data bases data bases of Primary
fail. cannot be executed between Primary and Secondary by PC
between Primary and and Secondary is PRO.
Secondary. different.
Please inquire an
uncertain point of the
maker.

87 2 0 Data base Because the error occurred The link of LAN Confirm the link of LAN WAR
replication in the communication between Primary between Primary and
fail. between Primary and and Secondary was Secondary.
Secondary, replication disconnected.
cannot be executed.

88 2 0 NetLink Operation began as • Operation began No action is necessary. INF

phase shift. Primary. as Primary.

89 2 0 NetLink Operation began as • Operation began No action is necessary. INF

phase shift. Secondary. as Secondary.

90 2 0 NetLink It shifted to the node • It shifted to the No action is necessary. INF

phase shift. search mode. node search mode.

91 2 0 Primary auto- Primary auto-integration • Primary auto- No action is necessary. INF

integration. function operated. integration function
operated.

2 - 724 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Table 2-18 Description of Alarm (Continued)

Alarm Alarm
Type Report Name Content of Alarm Cause Action Recovery
No. Status

92 2 0 Primary The Primary compulsion • The Primary No action is necessary. INF

compulsion specification function was compulsion
specification. executed. specification
function was
executed.

93 2 0 NetLink node The connection of the node • The connection of No action is necessary. INF
connection was detected with Primary the node was
detection. of NetLink. detected with
Primary of NetLink.

94 2 0 NetLink node The secession of the node • The secession of No action is necessary. INF
secession was detected with Primary the node was
detection. of NetLink. detected with
Primary of NetLink.

95 2 0 Data Base Because Secondary is in • It is possible to be Log out from the WAR
replication programming mode, the logging it in with programming mode
fail. replication of DB cannot be Secondary in the with Secondary.
executed. Web Pro or the PC
Pro as the cause.

96 1 0 Data base Error happened when Lack of resource Delete unnecessary file WAR
recovery fail. DataBase recovery Memory, protected and keep open area to
operation. area, recovery data restore, then operation
file corruption again.
Backup/Restore maybe reason of
this.

97 2 0 DB recovery Start Data base recovery Start Data base No action is necessary. INF
operation operation. recovery operation.
start.
Backup/Restore/Delete

98 2 0 DB recovery Finish DataBase recovery Finish Data base No action is necessary. INF
operation operation. recovery operation.
finish. Backup/Restore/Delete

99 --- Reserved ---

100 --- Reserved ---

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 725

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-11 : System Alarm Report
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-11 : System Alarm Report to define the details of the system alarm
report.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

02 Report Method 0 = No Report 0

When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, set this 1 = E-mail Address
option to 1. E-mail address set in 90-11-08.

04 --- Not Used ---

06 SMTP Host Name Up to 255 Characters No

When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, set the Setting
SMTP name (ex: smtp.yourisp.com). Contact your
ISP (internet service provider) for the correct entry
if needed.

07 SMTP Host Port Number 0~65535 25

When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, set the
SMTP host port number. Contact your ISP
(internet service provider) for the correct entry if
needed.

08 To E-mail Address Up to 255 Characters No

When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, set this Setting
e-mail address to which the report should be sent.

09 Reply Address Up to 255 Characters No

When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, set the Setting
e-mail address where replies should be e-mailed.

10 From Address Up to 255 Characters No

When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, set this Setting
e-mail address for the station sending the report.

11 DNS Primary Address 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0

When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, set the
DNS primary address.

2 - 726 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

12 DNS Secondary Address 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0

When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, set the
DNS secondary address.

13 Customer Name Up to 255 Characters No

When alarm reports are to be e-mailed, enter a Setting
name to identify the particular system.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 727

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-12 : System Alarm Output
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-12 : System Alarm Output to set the options for the alarm report.
This program has six separate menu options. Define the output port to be used as the
output for system alarm report and set the system alarm options. The system can
have up to 50 reports.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Output Port Type 0 = No Setting 0

Indicate the type of connection used for the System 1~3 = -- Reserved --
Alarms. The baud rate for the COM port should be 4 = CTA/CTU
set in Program 10-21-02. 5 = USB Memory

02 CTA Output Destination Extension Number Up to eight digits No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 728 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-13 : System Information Output
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-13 : System Information Output to define the output port to be
used as the system information output. The baud rate for the COM port should be set
in Program 10-21-02.

Input Data

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Output Port Type 0 = No Setting 0

Indicate the type of connection used to print the 4 = CTA/CTU
system information. 5 = USB

02 CTA Output Destination Extension Number Up to eight digits No Setting

04 Output Destination System ID 0~50 0

05 Output Command Dial 1+ press Transfer –

(Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 729

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-16 : Main Software Information
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-16 : Main Software Information to display the main software
information on the CD-CP00. Main software information can also be viewed outside
of system programming by pressing Feature and the 3 key on any multiline terminal.

Input Data

Item
No. Item Input Data Component

01 Version Number 01.00~99.99 ASCII Code

(5 Bytes)

02 Software Release Date May 22 2002 17:53:46 ASCII Code

(20 Bytes)

Conditions

This Program is “Read Only.”

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 730 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-17 : Firmware Information
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-17 : Firmware Information to display the firmware versions of the
various system blades.

Input Data

Item
Item Display Data Data Format
No.

01 DSP Firmware Version No. 00.00.00.00~15.15.15.15 BCD Code (2 Byte)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 731

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-19 : Dial Block Release
Level:
SA

Description
When the extension number is entered in Program 90-19 : Dial Block Release, the
extension is released from the Dial Block restriction.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Dial Block Release [Release?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer

(Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Code Restriction

2 - 732 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup to define the details of the traffic
report.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Call Traffic Output 0 = Not Measured 0

1 = Measure

02 --- Not Used ---

03 All Line Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 0

1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)

04 DTMF Receiver Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 0

1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)

05 Dial Tone Detector Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 0

1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)

06 Caller ID Receiver Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 0

1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)

07 Voice Mail Channel All Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 0

1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)

08 ACD Operator All Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 0

1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)

Programming Manual 2 - 733

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

09 Attendant Channel All Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 0

1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)

10 Base Station All Busy Output 0 = Not Detected 0

1~256
(Report when the data reaches the
defined value)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Traffic Reports

2 - 734 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-21 : Traffic Report Output
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-21 : Traffic Report Output to define the output port to be used as
the traffic report output.

Input Data

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Output Port Type 0 = No Setting 0

3 = LAN

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Traffic Reports

Programming Manual 2 - 735

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-22 : Terminal Version information
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-22 : Terminal Version Information to determine the hardware and
firmware versions. These are read-only commands and cannot be changed.

Input Data

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Hardware Version 00~FF 00

02 Firmware Version 00.00~FF.FF 00.00

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 736 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones
Level:
IN

Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).

Use Program 90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones to delete the

registered IP telephone from the system.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Delete IP Telephone [Delete?] : Dial 1 + press Transfer

This assignment removes the station number (Press Transfer to cancel.)
association with the MAC address of the IP station.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP)

Programming Manual 2 - 737

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup to set the
date and time for the alarm report to print.

Input Data

Notification Number 1~12

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Month 00~12 00

02 Day 00~31 00

03 Hour 00~23 00

04 Minute 00~59 00

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 738 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup to define the mail
address to receive the system alarm report CC Mail setup.

Input Data

CC Number 1~5

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 CC Mail Address Up to 255 Characters No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 739

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-26 : Program Access Level Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-26 : Program Access Level Setup to define the password access
level required to change a system program.

Input Data

Program Numbers 1001~9201

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Maintenance Level 2 = IN Level Refer to the Level indication for

3 = SA Level each individual program (located in
4 = SB Level the upper left corner at the
beginning of each program).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 740 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-28 : User Programming Password Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-28 : User Programming Password Setup to set the password
used to enter the user programming mode.

Input Data

Extension Numbers Up to eight digits

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Password Fixed four digits 1111

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 741

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-31 : DIM Access over Ethernet to enable DIM (Diagnostic
Information Maintenance) access over the LAN, and to define the user name and
password. DIM is a maintenance tool used by engineering to extract trace level
information.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Access Enabling 0 = Disable 0 (Disable)

1 = Enable

02 Username 20 characters SV8100

(alphanumeric)

03 Password 20 characters 12345678

(alphanumeric)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 742 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-34 : Firmware Information
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-34 : Firmware Information to list the package type and firmware
blades installed in the system.

Input Data

Slot No. 1~24

Item
Item Display Data
No.

01 Pkg Name PKG Name

02 Firmware Version Number 00.00~0F.FF

Conditions

These Programs are ‘Read Only.’

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 743

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup
Level:
IN

Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).

Use Program 90-35 : Wizard Programming Level Setup to set the maintenance
level for Wizard Programming.

Input Data

Wizard Number 1~250

Item
Item Display Data Default
No.

01 Maintenance Level 0 = All 0

3 = SB (System Administrator B)
4 = SA (System Administrator A)
5 = IN

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 744 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting
Level:
IN

Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).

Use Program 90-36 : Firmware Update Time Setting to define the data for the
firmware update feature. This data is available to set for the WebPro/PC
Programming FW update feature. A compact flash card must be inserted in the
CD-CP00 for this feature.

The following firmware is available to update with this feature:

main.bin
Dspdbu.bin
dsp.bin

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

Year: 0~99 0 This Program sets the time to

update the firmware using a
Month: 0~12 0 compact flash card.
01 Firmware Update
Day: 00~31 0 Time registration fails if an
Schedule Time expired time is registered.
Hour: 00~23 0

Minute: 00~59 0

02 Update mode 0 = Non Active 0 This Program activates the

1 = Activated Firmware Update feature. If
this setting is 1, new firmware
on the compact flash card
updates according to the setting
at 90-36-01.

Programming Manual 2 - 745

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Item
Item Input Data Default Description
No.

03 Update Report 256 characters max. No This Program outputs a report

Setting when the update is executed
and saves one copy on the
system.
If a new update occurs, the new
report overwrites the old report.
Refer to the Sample Report
shown.

Sample Report

Result Report Display

Update Success Update is successful with the Update Time.

Update Fail Update failed. Drive A (Compact Flash) was not available.

Update Fail Update failed. The file, main.up, does not exist on drive A.

Update Fail Update failed. The scheduled time has expired.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 746 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-38 : UserPro Data Level Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-38 : UserPro Data Level Setup to enable or disable the following
items which are available for the UserPro feature when logging on with the UA and
UB modes. This option will allow (1) or deny (0) a user's access to the program. An
extension's Class of Service settings will override program access to these options.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Virtual Loop Back [Reset?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer

Reset
(Press Transfer to cancel.)

Program
Item Data
Item (Reference Input Data Default
No. Level
Only)

Time setting 10-01 UA 0 = Turn Off

1 1 = Turn On
(11-10-03) 1 = Turn On
Change of music on hold tone 10-04 UA
2 1 = Turn On
(11-10-02)

3 Automatic Night Service Pattern 12-02 UA 1 = Turn On

4 Weekly Night Service Switching 12-03 UA 1 = Turn On

5 Text Data for Night Mode 12-07 UA 1 = Turn On

6 Holiday Night Service Switching 12-04 UA 1 = Turn On

7 DISA User ID Setup 25-08 UA 1 = Turn On

8 Mail Box Setup 40-02 UA 1 = Turn On

9 Text Messages Setup 20-16 UA 1 = Turn On

10 Incoming Ring Group Setup 22-04 UA 1 = Turn On

Abbreviated Dial Number and Name 11-10-04 UA
11 1 = Turn On
13-04

12 Night-mode switching Other Group 11-10-12 UA 1 = Turn On

Programming Manual 2 - 747

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program
Item Data
Item (Reference Input Data Default
No. Level
Only)

13 DSS Key Assignment 30-03 UA 0 = Turn Off 1 = Turn On

1 = Turn On
14 Doorphone Ringing Assignment 32-02 UA 1 = Turn On

15 Extension Numbering 11-02 UA 1 = Turn On

16 Extension Name 15-01-01 UA/UB 1 = Turn On

17 Night-mode switching Own Group 11-10-01 UA/UB 1 = Turn On

Call Forward-Immediate/No Answer 11-11-01 UA/UB
/Both Ring
18 11-11-03 1 = Turn On
11-11-05

19 Call Forward-Busy 11-11-02 UA/UB 1 = Turn On

Trunk Incoming Ring Tone 11-11-20 UA/UB
20 1 = Turn On
15-02-02
Internal Incoming Ring Tone 11-11-20 UA/UB
21 1 = Turn On
15-02-03

22 Display Language Selection 15-02-01 UA/UB 1 = Turn On

23 Toll Restriction Override Password 21-07 UA/UB 1 = Turn On

24 User Programming Password 90-28 UA/UB 1 = Turn On

25 Programmable Function Key 15-07 UA/UB 1 = Turn On

26 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment 15-09 UA/UB 1 = Turn On

27 One Touch Key Assignment 15-14 UA/UB 1 = Turn On

28 Trunk Name 14-01-01 UA 1 = Turn On

Automatic Transfer per Trunk 11-10-06 UA
29 1 = Turn On
11-10-07
SPD Area No. 11-10-08 UA
30 1 = Turn On
24-04

31 Telephone Data Copy 92-01 UA 1 = Turn On

32 Dial in Name 22-11-03 UA 1 = Turn On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Maintenance UserPro

2 - 748 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-39 : Virtual Loop Back Port Reset to reset to initial status.

(Not supported in V1000)

Input Data

Item
No. Item Input Data

01 Virtual Loop Back [Reset?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer

Reset (Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 749

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-41 : Server Setting to Update Terminal Local Data to define the
Primary DNS Server address, the Secondary DNS Server address and the Data
Roaming Server address.

Input Data

Server Information 1~13

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 0 = IPv4
Server Address Type 0
1 = IPv6

02 IPv4 form (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)

Server Address –
IPv6 form (xxxx : xxxx : xxxx: xxxx: xxxx)

03 Port Number 0~65535 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 750 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-42 : DT700 Multiline Terminal Version Information
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-42 : DT700 Multiline Terminal Version Information to set the
hardware version and firmware version of the DT700 MLT Terminal.

Input Data

Terminal Type 1 = ITL-**E-1D/IP-*E-1

2 = ITL-**D-1D/ITL-24BT-1D/ITL-24PA-1D
3 = ITL-320C-1

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Software Version 00.00.00.00~FF.FF.FF.FF 00.00.00.00

02 Hardware Version 00.00.00.00~FF.FF.FF.FF 00.00.00.00

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 751

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DT700
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of DT700 to delete the terminal
license information delivered to the DT700 terminal.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Delete Terminal [Delete?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer

License
(Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 752 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-44 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-43 : Deleting Terminal License of TCP Interface to delete the
terminal license information delivered to the terminal with a TCP interface.

Input Data

License Delete Code 000~000~000

–
999~999~999

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Delete Terminal [Delete?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer

License (Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 753

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-45 : Temporary Password Change for Multiline Telephone to
change the Temporary Password that is set in the Encryption function.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Temporary Password 00.00.00.00~FF.FF.FF.FF

Change Request 00.00.00.00
Change? (Yes :1)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 754 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-48 : Button Kit Information of Multiline Telephone
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-48 : Button Kit Information of Multiline Telephone to set the
button kit information on a new telephone on the SV8100 system.

Input Data

Extension Number Eight digits (except virtual extension)

Item
Item Input Data
No.

0 = No Setting
1 = Not Used
Button Kit Information of 2 = Type A with Cursor Key
01 Multiline Telephone 3~9 = Not Used
10 = Type A without Cursor Key (Retrofit)
11~12 = Not Used

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 755

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-49 : Protection Mode Setup for Multiline Telephone
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-49 : Protection Mode Setup for Multiline Telephone to set the
protection mode of each multiline (IP) telephone.

Input Data

Extension Number Up to eight digits

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Release Protection Mode Release? (Yes : 1) None

02 Initialize Protection Password Initialize? (Yes : 1) None

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 756 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-50 : System Alarm Display Setup to set the system alarm report
display.

Input Data

Index Number 01~50

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 System Alarm Display Telephone Up to eight digits No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 757

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-51 : Alarm Setup for Maintenance Exchange to set the day for
the maintenance exchange of parts that need regular maintenance.

Input Data

System ID 0~50

Index 1~10

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Display Name Up to 16 characters Refer to table

02 Year 00~99 00

03 Month 01~12 00

04 Day 01~31 00

Index Default

01 Power battery

02 Backup battery

03 Cooling fan

04~10 --- No setting ---

2 - 758 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 759

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-52 : System Alarm Save
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-52 : System Alarm Save for the system alarm output operation.

Input Data

System ID of Source System 0~50

System ID of Destination System 0~50

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Save All Alarm Reports Print All? (1 = Yes)

02 Save New Alarm Reports Print All? (1 = Yes)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 760 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-53 : System Alarm Clear
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-53 : System Alarm Clear to clear the system alarm.

Input Data

System ID 0~50

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Clear All Alarm Reports All Clear? ( 1 = Yes)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 761

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-55 : Free License Select
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-55 : Free License Select to validate the Free License.

(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Start Free License 0 = Stop

1 = Start

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 762 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-56 : NTP Setup
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-56 : NTP Setup to set the NTP.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 NTP Synchronize 0 = No 0
1 = Yes

02 Server Address IPv4 form: No setting

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
IPv6 form:
xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.xxxx

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 763

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-57 : Backup Recovery Data
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-57 : Backup Recovery Data to backup the system data in the flash
memory on the CD-CP00 and to make the recovery data.

Input Data

Data ID 1~5

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Backup Recovery Data [Backup?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer

(Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 764 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-58 : Restore Recovery Data
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-58 : Restore Recovery Data to select the recovery data stored in
the flash memory of the CD-CP00. After this command is executed, the system
restarts automatically.

Input Data

Data ID 1~5

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Restore Recovery Data [Restore & Reset?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer

(Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 765

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-59 : Delete Recovery Data
Level:
SA

Description
Use Program 90-59 : Delete Recovery Data to select and delete the recovery data
stored in the flash memory of the CD-CP00.

Input Data

Data ID 1~5

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Delete Recovery Data [Delete?] : Dial 1+ press Transfer

(Press Transfer to cancel.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 766 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-60 : T1/ISDN Layer Status Information to display layer status
information for T1/PRI/BRI/CD-CCTA packages.

Input Data

System ID 1~50

Slot No. 1~24

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Link Status – = No link N/A

0 = Link
N/A = No card seen in slot

Conditions

This Program is Read-Only.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 767

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-61 : Manual Slot Install
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-61 : Manual Slot Install to manually install any package. If another
package is already assigned, the new package cannot be assigned.

Input Data

System ID 1~50

Slot No. 1~24

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Install 0 = None 0
1 = Router

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 768 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 90 : Maintenance Program

90-63 : DT700 Control
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 90-63 : DT700 Control to adjust settings of the DT700.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Priority Timer 0~255 80

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 769

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

2 - 770 Program 90 : Maintenance Program

 Program 92 : Copy Program
92-01 : Copy Program
Level:
IN

Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through
PC Programming).
Program
Use Program 92-01 : Copy Program to copy the data for one program to
another multiline terminal, port, group, or other number. Refer to the following
charts to see which programs can be copied.

Input Data
92
Program Number XX-XX

Item
Item Input Data
No.

Source Number In case of Trunk Base :

Trunk Port Number 1~200
Enter the extension, trunk, group or other
number from which the data is to be In case of Trunk Group Base :
copied. Trunk Group Number 1~100

In case of Extension Base :

Extension Number (up to eight digits)

In case of Department Group Base :

Department Group Number 1~64

In case of DSS :
DSS Console Number 1~32

01 Destination Number (From)

Enter the first extension, trunk, group or
other number to which the information is
to be copied.

Destination Number (To)

Enter the last extension, trunk, group or
other number to which the information is
to be copied. If the information is being
copied only to one extension, trunk, group
or other number, enter the information
entered in the Destination Number (From)
entry.

Programming Manual 2 - 771

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

The Copy Program is applicable only for the following programs:

Trunk Port Base

Program
Program Name Note
No.

14-01 Trunk Basic Data Setup Copy all data except Trunk Name
(Item 01).

14-02 Analog Trunk Data Setup

14-04 Behind PBX Setup

14-08 Music on Hold Source for Trunks

14-09 Conversation Recording Destination for Trunk

21-03 Trunk Group Routing for Trunks

21-12 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk

21-21 Toll Restriction for Trunks

21-22 CO Message Waiting Indication

22-02 Incoming Service Type Setup

22-03 Trunk Ring Tone Setup

22-05 IRG Assignment for Normal Ring Trunk

22-08 Second IRG Setup for Unanswered DIL / IRG

31-05 Incoming Ring Tone Audible on External Speaker

Trunk Group Base

Program
No. Program Name Note

35-03 SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group

Extension Base

Program
Program Name Note
No.

15-01 Extension Basic Data Setup (include Virtual Copy all data except extension
Extension) name (item 01).

15-02 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup

15-03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup

2 - 772 Program 92 : Copy Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program
Program Name Note
No.

15-06 Trunk Access Map for Extension

15-07 Programmable Function Key

15-08 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup

15-09 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment

15-10 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order

Setup

15-11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment

15-12 Conversation Recording Destination for

Extension

15-17 CO Message Waiting Indication

15-18 Virtual Extension Key Enhancement Options

15-20 LCD Line Key Name Assignment

20-06 Class of Service for Extension

20-29 Timer Class for Extension

21-02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions

21-04 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions

21-11 Hotline Assignment

23-02 Call Pickup Groups

23-03 Ringing Line Preference

23-04 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions

24-03 Park Group Assignment

31-02 Internal Paging Group Assignment

82-14 Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi-Line

Telephone

Department Group Base

Program
Program Name Note
No.

16-01 Department (Extension) Group Basic Data Setup Copy all data except Group Name
(Item 01).

35-04 SMDR Port Assignment for Department Group

Programming Manual 2 - 773

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

DSS Console Base

Program
Program Name Note
No.

30-01 DSS Console Operation Mode

30-03 DSS Key Assignment

Door Box Base

Program
Program Name Note
No.

32-02 Door Box Ring Assignment

Conditions

Using this program to copy a multiline terminal Programmable Function Keys,

copies all keys whether or not they exist on the terminal to which the programming
is being copied. This may cause confusion when trying to define a key which is
already defined but which does not exist on the terminal (displays as DUPLICATE
DATA). It is recommend to either clear these non-existent keys or copy only from
an extension which has the same or fewer number of keys than the extension to
which the programming is being copied.

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 774 Program 92 : Copy Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers
Level:
IN

Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).

Use Program 92-02 : Delete All Extension Numbers to delete all extension
numbers. However, the extension number of the first port is not deleted.

Input Data

Extension No. Delete Yes: 1 [Dial 1] + Transfer key (Only press Transfer
key is canceled)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 775

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number
Level:
IN

Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).

Use Program 92-03 : Copy Program by Port Number to copy extension and the
data of each outside line.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Source Number Enter the port number from which the

data is to be copied.

02 Destination Number (From) Enter the first port number to which the
information is to be copied.

03 Destination Number (To) Enter the last port number to which the
information is to be copied. If the
information is only to be copied to one
port, enter the information entered in
the Destination Number (From) entry.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 776 Program 92 : Copy Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-04 : Extension Data Swap
Level:
IN

Description
(This program is available only via telephone programming and not through PC
Programming).

Use Program 92-04 : Extension Data Swap to swap data between two extensions.

Input Data

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 1st Extension Number

Up to eight characters.
02 2nd Extension Number

The following table lists Programs that use the Extension Data Swap function.

Program Number Program Name

11-02 Extension Numbering

12-05 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions

13-03 Abbreviated Dial Group Assignment for Extensions

13-06 Station Abbreviated Dial Number and Name

15-01 Extension Basic Data Setup

15-02 Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup

15-03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup

15-06 Trunk Access Map for Extension

15-07 Programmable Function Key

15-08 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup

15-09 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment

15-10 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup

15-11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment

Programming Manual 2 - 777

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program Number Program Name

15-12 Conversation Recording Destination for Extension

15-13 Loop Key Data

15-14 Programming One-Touch Keys

15-17 CO-Message Waiting Indication

15-18 Virtual Extension Key Enhance Options

15-19 System Telephone book Setup for Extension

15-20 LCD Line Key Name Assignment

16-02 Department Group Assignment for Extensions

20-06 Class of Service for Extension

20-29 Timer Class for Extensions

21-02 Trunk Group Routing for Extension

21-04 Toll Restriction Class for Extension

21-07 Toll Restriction Override Password Setup

21-10 Dial Block Restriction Class per Extensions

21-11 Hotline Assignment

21-13 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extension

21-15 Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions

21-18 IP Trunk (H.323) Calling Party Number Setup for

Extension

21-19 IP Trunk (SIP) Calling Party Number Setup for Extension

21-20 SIP Trunk Call Discernment Setup for Extension

21-23 Out Going Key Sized Virtual Extension Priority Setup

22-04 Incoming Ring Group Setup

22-06 Normal Incoming Ring Mode

23-02 Call Pickup Group

23-03 Ringing Line Preference

23-04 Ringing Line Preference of Virtual Extension

24-03 Park Hold Group Assignment

24-06 Fixed Call Forward

24-07 Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise

24-08 Call Forward for Centrex

2 - 778 Program 92 : Copy Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program Number Program Name

24-09 Call Forward Split Settings

26-04 ARS Class of Service

26-07 LCR Cost Center Code Table

31-02 Internal Paging Group Assignment

41-02 ACD Agent Extension Assignment for ACD Group

41-17 ACD Login Mode Setup

42-02 Hotel Extension Basic Data Setup

43-33 Print Table for Extension

43-37 Fixed Call Restrict Table Setup

82-14 Handset/Headset Gain Setup for Multi-Line Telephone

90-28 User Programming Programming Password Setup

92-05 Data Swap Password of each Extension Setup

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Programming Manual 2 - 779

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 92-05 : Extension Data Swap Password to define the 4-digit
password for each extension to allow Extension Data Swap.

Input Data

Item Related
Item Input Data
No. Programming

01 Password Fixed four digits 11-15-12

Password required on a per station basis (No setting at
when utilizing the station swap feature. default)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 780 Program 92 : Copy Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-06 : Fill Command
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 92-06 : Fill Command to allocate the data of each extension number
of each extension group or each table.

Input Data

Program Number XX-XX

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Source Number Each extension port = 1~512 (PGM 11-02)

Each virtual extension port = 1~256 (PGM 11-04)
02 Destination Number (From)
Each ACI port number = 1~96 (PGM 11-06)
03 Destination Number (To) Each extension group = 1~64 (PGM 11-07)
Each ACI group = 1~64 (PGM 11-08)
Each ACD group = 1~64 (PGM 11-17)

The following table lists Programs that use the Fill Command function.

Program Number Program Name

11-02 Extension Numbering

11-04 Virtual Extension Numbering

11-06 ACI Extension Numbering

11-07 Extension (Department) Group Pilot Number

11-08 ACI Group Pilot Number

11-17 ACD Group Pilot Number

Programming Manual 2 - 781

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 782 Program 92 : Copy Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

Program 92 : Copy Program

92-07 : Delete Command
Level:
IN

Description
Use Program 92-07 : Delete Command to delete the data of each extension number
of each extension group or each table.

Input Data

Program Number XX-XX

Item
Item Input Data
No.

01 Destination Number (From) Each extension port = 1~512 (PGM 11-02)

Each virtual extension port = 1~256 (PGM 11-04)
02 Destination Number (To)
Each ACI port number = 1~96 (PGM 11-06)
Each extension group = 1~64 (PGM 11-07)
Each ACI group = 1~64 (PGM 11-08)
Each ACD group = 1~64 (PGM 11-17)

The following table lists Programs that use the Delete Command function.

Program Number Program Name

11-02 Extension Numbering

11-04 Virtual Extension Numbering

11-06 ACI Extension Numbering

11-07 Extension (Department) Group Pilot Number

11-08 ACI Group Pilot Number

11-17 ACD Group Pilot Number

Programming Manual 2 - 783

Issue 1.0 UNIVERGE SV8100

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

2 - 784 Program 92 : Copy Program

UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 1.0

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Programming Manual 2 - 785

PROGRAMMING MANUAL

NEC Infrontia Corporation

Issue 1.0